advertisement
owner's Manual
Audi A3
I 53
Audi A3
I
S3
Audi A3 Sportback
I
A3 Sportback g-tron
I
S3 Sportback
Audi A3 Saloon
I
S3 Saloon
Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi.
Your new Audi is a combination of superb craftsmanship and state-of-the-art technology. We recommend that you read this Owner's Manual carefully so that you qu i ckly become familiar with your vehicle and can take full advantage of all its functions in everyday use.
In addition to information on how to use the controls and equipment, this Manual also contains important information on looking after your vehicle. This is relevant for your safety and will help preserve your car's value. The Manual also offers useful driving tips and advice, together with some suggestions on how to drive your car with minimum impact on the environment.
In addition to this Owner's Manual, the Service Wallet also includes the Quick
Reference Guide, the Operating Manual for your infotainment system and the
Service Schedule .
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring with your Audi .
AUDI AG
.&.
WARNING
Please read the important safety information about the front passenger's airbag ~ page 172.
!
1 11 11 111 lll l lll l ll l ll Hll l l l425618V020
2 Table of Contents
Notes on this Owner 's Manual 5
Control s ...................... .
Control s and display s . . . . . . . . .
Overview .
.
.
............
.
...
.
... .
In s truments and warning / i ndicator lamps ........
.
.
.... .
Instruments ..............
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Warning and indicator lamps .
.
.
.
.. .
9
9
14
6
6
6
Driver information system .
. .
Overview .
.
.
.
................... .
Controls on windscreen wiper lever
Controls on multi-funct i on steering wheel .
.
.
.
.
.
................... .
Boost display .
...........
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Efficiency programme .........
.
.
. .
Camera-based traffic sign recognition
Rest recommendation .......
.
.
.
.
. .
Lap timer and engine oil temperature display .
.
.
.
.
..............
.
.
.
.
. .
Controls on windscreen wiper lever
Controls on multi-function steering wheel .
...
.
.
.
.
............
.
.
.
.
. .
27
27
28
29
31
31
33
35
36
37
39
Doors and window s ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Central locking system ........... .
Boot lid .
.
.
.
.
.
.
..........
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Child-proof catches .......
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Electric windows .......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Panorama s un roof ..
.....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
41
41
49 so
51
52
Lights and vision .......
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Exterior lights ..
..
.......
• .......
Interior lights ..........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
54
54
60
Clear vis i on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 61
Windscreen wipers ........
.
...
.
.
. . 62
Seat s and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
General notes ......
.......
.....
. .
Front seats .
.............
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Head restraints ........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Ashtray .
.
.
.
..
.
....
.
.....
..
.
.
.
.
. .
66
66
68
69
Cigarette lighter ...
......
.
...
.
.
.
. .
Electrical socket .........
.
.
...... .
69
70
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Luggage compartment . . . . • . . . . . . . 73
Heat i ng and cooling ......... .
Heating system I air conditioner .... .
Auxiliary heating/ventilation ....... .
77
77
82
Driving .
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
......
.
.... .
Steering ....................... .
Ignit ion lock .
.
.
.
.
............... .
Vehicles with igni tion lock .......
.
. .
Vehicles with convenience key ...... .
Driver messages .
.
.
.............. .
Kick-down feature ............... .
E l ectro-mechan ic a l parking brake .
.
.
. .
Hold assist .
.
.
.
.
.
.
....
.
.
..
....
.
. .
Hill ho l d assist ......
.....
...
.
... .
Speed warning function ........... .
Cruise control system ..........
.
. .
Start/stop system ............... .
86
86
86
86
88
91
92
92
95
95
96
97
98 g-tron .
.............
......
..... .
Natural gas engine ............... .
Filling the gas tank ..
.
........... .
102
102
104
Automatic gearbox .......... .
S tronic gearbox .
.
.
............
.
. .
106
106
Audi adaptive cruise control ..
Introduction .
.
.
.
.
.
............
.
. .
General notes .
.
.
.
.
............
.
. .
Adaptive cruise control
116
116
116
117
Audi pre sense
Introduction .
.
.
....
.....
.
........... .
........... .
1 2 5
125
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Audi pre sense basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Audi pre sense front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Audi active lane ass i st . . . . . . . .
Lane departure warn i ng feature
128
128
Audi side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Lane change assist feature . . . . . . . . . 132
Audi drive se l ect: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Adjusting the veh icl e set-up . . . . . . . . 136
Park i ng aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Park assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adjusting graphic display and warn in g beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fault warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 151
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
S af e t y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety f i rst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
152
General not es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Correct sitting positions . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fitting child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Stowing luggage safely . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Pedestrian protection system . . . . . . . 163
Seat b e lt s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why is it so important to use seat
165 belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Forces acting i n a collision . . . . . . . . . . 1 66
How to wear seat belts properly . . . . . 167
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Airbag system .
.
........
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 171
Description of airbag system........ 171
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Kn eeairbag ............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 175
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Head-protection a irb ags . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Deactivating the front passenger's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Dri v ing t i p s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inte l lige n t tec h no l ogy . . . . . . . .
182
182
Electronic stabilisation control (ESC) . 182
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Electro-mechanical power steering . . 185
Four-wheel drive (quattro) . . . . . . . . . . 186
Power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Information saved i n the control units 188
T a bl e of C o nt: e nt s
Your vehicle and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 90
Driving through water on roads . . . . . 190
Emission control system s . . . . . . . . . . 190
Taking the vehicle out of service . . . . . 191
How to improve economy and minimise pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
E nvironmental compatibility . . . . . . . . 192
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dri ving the vehicle with a trailer or
194 caravan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Removabl e towing bracket . . . . . . . . . 198
Gener a l m a int e n a nc e . . . . . . . . .
Care of vehicle and cleaning . .
204
204
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Wa sh in g the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Notes on cleaning and care . . . . . . . . . 205
Checking and topping up fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fuel......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
...
...
.
.
.
.... 209
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 12
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Cooling system.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
...
.
.
..
. 216
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Wheels and tyr e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Wh eels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Run fl at tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tyre pressure loss indicator......... 231
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, replacement parts and
233 repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Radio transmitters and business equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Component protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
3
4 Table of Contents
Self-help ..
.
... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235
235
Gener a l notes . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 235
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 35
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 237
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 242
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tow-starting I towing away . . . . . . . . . 246
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fuses..
.
.....
.
. . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 250
Bulbs .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing bulbs in headlight unit . . . . 256
Changing bulb for front fog light . . . . 262
A3/A3 Sportback : Changing bulb s for r e a r light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
A 3 S a loon : Changing bulb s for rear light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 7 2
272
Vehicle ident i ficat i on data . . . . . . . . . . 272
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Capacit i es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
E xplanation of tec t hnical data . . . . . . . 273
Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
This Owner's Manual contains impor t ant information, tips, suggestions and warnings.
Please ensure that th i s Owner's Manual is always kept in the vehicle . It should always be available to anyone else driving the vehicle, i.e
. anyone renting , borrowing or buying the vehicle from you.
This manual describes the equipment availa· ble for the vehicle at the time of going to print . Some of the equipment described here will not be available until a later date, or may only be available in certain markets.
Some sections of th i s Owner's M anual do not apply to a l l vehicles. If this is the case, a text at the start of t h e section i ndicates which vehicles it applies to, e .
g. "Applies to veh i cles: with auxiliary heater" . Th i s optional or vehicle-specific equipment is also marked with an asterisk"•" .
Illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle.
At the beginning of this Owner's Manual, you will find a tab l e of contents showing all the items described in this manual in the order in which they appear . An alphabetical index is included at the end of the Owner's Manual.
All references to positions such as "left".
"right", "front" or "rear" are given as seen facing in the direction of travel.
"
Opt i ona l or vehicle specific equipment
IJ)I>
The section is continued on t h e fo llowing page.
¢
.&. Refers to a "WARNING" within the s ame section. If the WARNING symbo l is followed by a page number the warning text referred to is included in a different section.
A
WARNING
Texts with this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Notes on this Owner's Manual
CD
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to your vehicle.
@
For the sake of the environment
Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environment.
(D
Note
T ex t s with this symbol contain additio n a l i nform ation of a more general nature.
5
6 Controls and displays
Controls and displays
Overview
Fig . l F r ont cab in : Left side
Fig. 2 Front cab i n: Right s id e
@
@
Electric windows
Door handle
®
@
Audi side a s sist .
...
.
....
.
.
. .
Central locking switch ....... .
® Electric adjuster for exterior mirrors
®
Light switch .......
.
....... .
(j) Air outlets
® Control lever for :
Turn signals and main beam headlights ......
.
..
.
.
.
.
. .
- Audi active lane assist ..... .
Main beam assist ......... .
®
Steer i ng wheel w i th horn and
Driver's airbag .......
.
.
.
. .
Controls for on-board computer .
.
...
.....
• .
..
...
.
.
.
.
..
- Controls for sound system, telephone, navigation system and speech dialogue system
- Paddle levers for tiptronic gearshift (automatic gearbox)
@ Reset button for trip recorder
@ Instrument cluster ..
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
@ Control lever for:
Windscreen wipers and washer .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
....
.
.
.
. .
On-board computer .
.
.
.
... .
@ Steering column with:
Manual operation function for ignition (on vehicles with convenience key) ............ .
- Ignition lock (on vehicles with mechanical ignition lock) ... .
@ Adjustable steering column .
. .
@ Depending on equipment fitted:
Lever for cruise control
Adaptive cruise control .... .
@ Headlight range control ..... .
@ Knee airbag ..
..
.
.
...
.
..
.
.
. .
@ Instrument light i ng ........ .
@) Bonnet lock release .......
.. .
@ Child safety switch, depending on equipment fitted:
Electric child safety switch .
.
Sl
132
47
61
54
77
SS
128
S6
172
29
111
10
9
62
27
97
116
S4
17S
60
213
9 1
86
86
Control s a nd displays
Sl Safety switch ............ .
@ Depending on equipment fitted:
Sound system or MMI display
(navigation system, radio, TV/ video)
@ Glove box with CD changer ... .
@) Front passenger's airbag .... .
8
Loudspeaker (treble)
@ Depending on equipment fitted, buttons for:
- Drive select .............. .
Start/stop system .......
. .
Park assist ....
.
......... .
Parking system p l us (with optional revers i ng camera) ... .
H azard warning lights ..... .
- Electronic stabilisation control
(ESC) ................... .
MMI display
Airbag off display .
.
.
.
..... .
@ Console for the following (asapplicable):
Heating/ventilation system or manual air conditioner ..... .
- Automatic air conditioner .. .
@ Depending on equipment fitted :
Cigarette lighter .
.
....
.
.
.. .
- Electrical socket .
......... .
@ Depending on gearbox fitted, gear lever or selector lever for:
Manual gearbox
S tronic
@ Cup ho l der ................ .
@ O N /OFF button for sound system/MM I
@ MM! control console
@ Hold assist ....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..... .
@ Parking brake ............. .
@ I
START ENGINE STOP I button
@ Centre console with optional equipment:
Ashtray .
.
.
.
....
.
.
.
...
.
.. .
Carrier for car key and mobile phone .................. .
71
172
77
79
69
70
106
70
9S
92
88
69
136
98
146
140
S9
182
180 so
7
8 Controls and displays
(D
Note
- Some of the items of equipment Listed in this sect i on are only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.
Please refer to the separate operating manual for instructions on using the sound system or Multi Media Interface
(MM!), where you will also find information on Audi connect .
The arrangement of switches and controls on right-hand drive mode l s* may be slightly different from the layout shown on ~ page 6. However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.
Instruments and warning/indicator lamp s
Instruments and warning/indicator lamps
Instrument:s
Instrument cluster overview
The instrument cluster is the driver's information centre.
9
Fig. 3 Overview of i nst r ument cluster
The instrument cluster i s d i fferent on models with natural gas engine*
Q page 103 .
CD
Rev counter with warning lamps
@ Coolant temperature gauge* or boost press ur e display* . . . . . . 11, 31
®
Indicator lamps (turn signals)
©
Disp l ay
Warning/indicator lamps and
Driver i nformation system* .
.
Date• and time .........
.
. .
Mileage recorder ....
.
.
.
.
. .
14
27
9
10
Service interval display .... .
®
Speedometer w ith warning lamp s
®
Fuel gauge . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
0
Display for: Central warning/in· dicator lamp or system displays
13
11
14
@ Reset button for trip recorder
I a.a
I .
...
..............
. .
10
(D
Note
The needles on the dials in the instrument cluster are illumina ted when the ignition is switched on. The main instrument lighting
(for the dials and needles) comes on when the vehicle's lights are switched on. The i n stnument lighting is dimmed automatically as the daylight starts to fade. This function is intended to remind the driver to switch on the dipped-beam headlights in good t ime when light conditions become poor .
Setting the time/date
Fig. 4 Inst r ument cluste r : Time and date d i sp l ay (ex· amp l e)
The date, time and display format can be changed using the sound system or MMI* contro l console. Please refer to the MMI Operating Manual for further details. II>-
10 In s trument s and warning/indicator lamps
Depending on the equipment fitted, you can select a quartz clock or a GPS-controlled clock* l!j on the MMI*. Please refer to the sound system or MMI Operating Manual for more details .
1 Note
The date and time will be displayed for about 30 seconds after you switch off the ignition or open the driver's door.
- You can also call up the display when the ignition is switched off by pressing the
lo.ol
button Q page 9, Fig. 3.
@
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise engine noise.
Mileage recorder
Rev counter
The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions per minute .
It's a good idea to keep an eye on the rev counter and gear change indicator because you can minimise engine wear by driving at moderate engine speeds.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed which may be used briefly in all gears when the engine is warm and after it ha s been run in properly.
However, it is advisable to change up a gear
(on vehicles with manual gearbox) or move the selector lever to "D" (on vehicles with automatic gearbox) or lift your foot off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.
In genera l it is best to avoid high engine speeds and to follow the recommendations g i ven by the gear-change indicator. For further information please refer to ~
Gear-change indicator or
Q page 31, Advanced gear-change indicator.
CD
CAUTION
The rev counter needle (!)
Q page 9, Fig. 3 must only ever briefly go into the red zone on the scale; otherwise there is a risk of engine damage .
F ig. s Instrument cluster : Mileage recorder and reset button
The m i leage is stated in kilometres ("km") or miles ("mi"). You can switch the display from kilometres ("km") to miles ("mi") and vice versa on the sound system/MM!* . Please refer to the sound system or MMI* Operating Manual for more details.
Odometer / trip recorder
@ The odometer records the vehicle's total mileage .
®
-
The trip recorder shows the distance that has been travelled since it was last reset. It is used to measure individual journeys . The last digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of
100 metres or tenths of a mile .
The trip recorder can be reset to zero by pressing the button I o .
o I
Q page 9, Fig. 3.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instruments, the letters DEF appear in the trip recorder display.
Have the fault rectified as soon as possible. l Note
- The recorded mileage will be displayed for about 30 seconds after you swi t ch off the ignition or open the driver's door.
You can also call up the display when the ignition is switched off by pressing the l o.o I button
Q page 9, Fig. 3.
Instruments and warning / indicator lamps 11
Outside temperature display
The outside temperature is shown on the instrument cluster display. At temperatures below approx. +5°C a snowflake symbol appears next to the temperature display.
When the veh i cle is stationary or trave ll ing at ve r y low speeds, the temperature displayed may be slightly higher than the actua l outside temperature as a result of the heat radiated from the e n gine.
.&_ WARNING
Do not rely on the outside temperature display as an ice warning. Bear in mind that there may be patches of i ce on the roads even at outside temperatures around +5
·
c
-
risk of accident!
(D
Note
The measurement units for temperature or speed, etc. can be changed via the sound system or MMI*.
1
Fuel gauge (petrol/diesel)
The gauge ® ¢ page 9, Fig . 3 only works when the i gnition is switched on . When the gauge reaches the reserve zone, the LED at the bottom of the dial will light up in red and the indicator lamp ~ appear
¢ page 24. The LED alt the bottom of the dial will flash in red if the fuel level is very low.
The i nstrument cluster display @ ¢ page 9,
Fig. 3 shows how far you can travel on the fuel left in the tank .
The t an k ca p a city of your veh i cle is given i n the Techni c al data sec t ion
9 page 273 .
CD
CAUTION
Never run the tank completely dry . If there is an i rregular fuel supply, misfiring can occu r . Unburnt fuel can then enter the exhaust system. This can lead to overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.
Coolant temperature gauge
On vehicles which do not have a coolant temperature gauge, a warning lamp .
~ page 20 will be the sole indication If the coolant temperature is too high. Please refer to Q (i) .
T he coo l a nt tempe r atu r e ga u ge @ Q page 9,
Fig. 3 only works when t he ignition is switch ed on . In order to avoid possib l e damage to the engine, please r ead the fo ll owing notes for t h e d i fferent temperature ranges .
Engine cold
If the LEDs are still i n the lower range o f the display, th i s indicates that the engine has not yet reached operat i ng temperature. Avo i d high eng i ne speeds, full acce l eration and heavy engine loads.
Normal temperatu r e
In normal operation the LEDs will settle somew h ere i n the centre of the disp l ay once the engine has r eached operating tem p erature .
. T he LEDs may also rise further up the display when the engine is working hard at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern, provided the warning lamp . does not li ght up in the instrument cluster.
Hot zone
If the LEDs reach the top part of the display and t he warning lamp . appears in the i nstrument cluster d i splay, the coolant temperatu r e i s too high Q page 20 .
CD
CAUTION
- Some vehicles h ave a boost pressure display in p l ace of the temperature display.
Vehicles with a natural gas eng i ne have a separate gas fuel gauge in place of t h e temperature d i splay. To ensu r e that your engine enjoys a long serv i ce life, you should avoid high engine speeds, full acceleration and heavy engine loads for the fi rst 1 5 minutes or so after starting a co l d eng i ne. The amount of time the engine takes to warm up depends on the ..,.
12 Instruments and warning /i ndicator lamps outside temperature. On vehicles with a boost pressure display, you can use the engine oil temperature ¢ page 36 as a guide if you are not sure whether the engine is warm .
-Additional lights and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the rad i ator. At high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating.
- The front spoiler also ensures proper distribution of the cooling air when the vehicle is moving. If this can reduce the cooling effect, which could ca u se the engine to ove rh eat. You s hould obtain professional ass i stance.
(!)
Note
Diesel engines are so efficient that they may not reach their full operating temperature in very cold weather. This is quite norma l and no cause for concern.
Service interval display
M ileage and trip recorder
¢
¢ page 13 page 10
Start/stop system ¢ page 98
Seat belt warning system for ¢ page26 rear seats
Gear change indicator
Outside temperature
¢ page 12
Selector lever positions for ¢ page 106 automatic gearbox
¢ page 11
Fuel gauge ¢ page 11
Gear change indicator
Applies to vehicles: wit h gear-change Indicator
This additional indicator function can help to save fuel .
Display
Applies to vehicles : without driver information system
Fig. 7 Instrument cluster : Gear -c hange in d i cator ( for manual gea r box)
Fig . 6 (nstr um ent cluster: Display wit h out driv er Information system
The instrument cluster display shows the foll owing :
Rad i o stat i on or CD
Time/date (after ignition is ¢ page9 switched off)
Estimated range of fuel in tank
Cruise control system ¢ page 97
Driver messages and warn ¢ page 14 ing/indicator lamps
Fig. 8 Instrument cluster : Gear-change indicator in tiptronic mode (for automat i c gearbox)
To familiarise yourself with the gear-change indicator, drive in the normal way to start with . A gear change will be recommended if the gear you are in is not the most economical choice .
I f no gear change is recommended, you are already in the most economical gear . Ill"
Instruments and warning/indicator lamps 13
Vehicles with manual gearbox
Meaning of the symbo ls in the display
QFig. 7:
~Shifting up a gear : The suggested gear appears to the right of the current gear when a high e r ge a r is recommended.
~S h ifting down a gea r : The suggested gear appears to the left of the current gear when a lower ge a r is recommended.
Gears may occasionally be skipped when a gear change is recommended (2 ... 4).
Vehicles with automatic gearbox
The display is only v i sible in tiptronic mode
Q page 111.
Meaning of the symbo l on the display <::) Fig . 8:
f
Shift up
CD
CAUTION
The gear-change indicator is intended to help save fuel. It is not intended to recommend the right gear for all driving situations. In certain situations, only the driver can choose the correct gear (for instance when overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or towing a trailer) . i Note
The gear-change ind i cator in the instrument cluster ~ goes out when you press the clutch pe d al.
Service interval display
The service interval display detects when the next service is due for your vehicle.
Fig. 9 Instrument cluster: Service in terval disp l ay (examp l e)
Fig. 1 0 MM!" system display on dashboard: Service interval display (e xamp le)
There are two service interval display levels:
Inspection or o i l change reminder : After a certain mileage, a service reminder will appear in the instrument cluster display each time the ignition is switched on/off <::) Fig. 9.
The distance or time remaining will be show n briefly.
Inspection or oil change due: W hen yo u r v eh i cle is d u e for an inspectio n , oil cha n ge or b oth, the correspond i ng rem i nder Inspection due!
, Oil change due ! or Oil change and inspection duel wi l l appear briefly after you switch the ignition on/off.
The following description distinguishes between vehicles with sound system* or M MI* .
Checking the service intervals*
In the MMI* , you can look up the distance and time remaining until the next oil change or next service inspection . To do so, select ~
14 Instruments and warning / indicator lamps
I
MENU
I button > S y s t e m s I Car s ystems >
Servicing & c hecks :> Serv ice intervals .
You cannot check the service interval for the first 500 km or so after resetting the display or when your vehicle is new.
Resetting the display ( sound system* )
Your qualified workshop resets the service interval display after each service.
If you change the oil yourself, you can reset the oil change display. In this case , the next oil change will be due after a fixed service i nterval of 15,000 km or one year.
To reset the display, select the fo ll owing on the sound system: I
E TUP
I button >control button ~ interval > Reset oil c hang e int e rv . After you reset the display, it will show the fixed service intervals
(15,000 km or one year)ll.
Resetting the display ( MMI* )
Your qualified workshop resets the service interval display after each service.
If you change the oil yourself, you can reset the oil change display. In this case, the next oil change will be due after a fixed service interval of 15,000
1 l km or one year.
To reset the display, select I
MENU
I
button>
S ystems I C ar sy s t e m s > Serv i cing & c heck s>
Serv i c e int e rvals > Re s et oil change interval.
After you reset the display, it will show the fixed service intervals (15,000 km or one year) 1 l .
CD
CAUTION
- Do not reset the oil change inte r val display unless you have changed the oil.
- Keeping to the correct service intervals is most important for the service life and residual value of the vehicle (and especially for the life of the engine). Services must always be carried out promptly, even if the mileage is low.
The time until the next oil change is not counted down If the battery is disconnected. If your vehicle is out of service for an extended period, please refer to the
Service Schedule for details of the n ext service date.
Warning and indicator
lamps
Description
Fi g . 11 Instrument cluster : Display layout on vehicles with monochrome display (example)
@ Warning/indicator lamp
@ Driver message
©
-
·
0
I
Central warning/indicator lamp or additional display of activate d system
-
such as:
rlJ 8
Electronic parking brake
. .
•
I .
Active lane assist*
The central w a rning / indicator lamp © . or
II addition to some of the warning and ind i cator lamps @ .
If the central warning/indicator lamp © lights up, observe the additional information
@ and ® in the instrument cluster display.
There are two versions of the instrument cluster: one with a monochrome display, and one with a multi-coloured display . On the monochrome display, the warning and indicator lamps @ appear only in white c:)
Fig . 11 . ..,.
1
> May vary in diff e r e nt countr i es
Instruments and warning / indicator lamps 15
In addition to those on the display, add i tiona l warn i ng and indicator lamps are located w i thin the rev counter an d speedometer. These lamps light up or flash to indicate functions or fa ul ts. Some of the warning and indicator lamps may be accompanied briefly by a mes sage @ and, in some cases, a warning tone.
If several malfunctions occur, each of the indicator/warning lamps w ill be shown in succession for a sho r t time on the display .
The warning/indicator lamps and driver mes sages on the d i splay can be masked by further d i splays. If the warning/indicator lamp @ is h i dden by another display, the centra l warning/indicator lamp © remains li t until the malfunct i on is correc t ed .
You can h ave the messages disp l ayed again on the dr i ver information system. Depending on the equipment i n you r vehicle, you can use the following to operate the dr i ver information sys t em:
Vehicles with controls on w i ndscreen w i per lever c:::> page 28
Vehicles with controls on mu l ti-function steering wheel ¢ page 30
11 @
Priority 1 (h i gh p r iority)
See red warning l amps
• @ m 0
Priority 2 (med i um priority)
See yellow i ndicator lamps
II
©
@l @
Prior i ty 3 (lower prior i ty)
These ind i cator lamps are for info r mationa l purposes -©
Red warning lamps
~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Central warning/in di cator lamp
(observe add i tiona l information on t h e instrument cluster d i splay) © ¢ page 14, Fig. 11 or
Dr i ver message for Audi pre sense• c:::> page 126
Brake system ./ c::> page 19
Electro-mechanical parking brake c:::>poge 19
Cooling system
¢ page20 or
Overview
When you sw i tch on the ign i tion, some of the warning and indicator lamps light up briefly to show that the associated systems are working properly. These systems are marked with a
./ in the fo ll ow i ng tables. If one of these warn i ng/indicator l amps does not light up, there is a fault in the associated system .
On ve h i cl es w i th a monochrome disp l ay, if a w h ite warning/indica t or lamp @ c:::> page 14,
F ig. 1 1 appears, the centra l warning/indicator l amp @ • I
II the pr i ority l eve l of the warn i ng. P l ease read the corresponding explanation of the red and ye l low symbols.
The follow i ng are examples of warning and ind i cator lamps on the d i sp l ay: or
Eng i ne oil pressure c:::>page21
16 Instruments and warning/indicator lamps
Alternator
¢ page 21 or or or
Front seat belt c?page 21
Steering./ c?page 185
Steering lock c?
page 21
Engine stopped while vehicle is moving
¢ page 22
Gearbox malfunction c?page 113
I
~
"O:\
.,
I or
·~
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ./
¢ page22
Safety system s ./
¢ page 21
Brake pads
~ page23
Electro-mechanical parking brake
¢page 19
Hill hold assist*
¢page23
~
U)
TPMS
; or
Tyre pressure loss indicator./
~ page231
Tyre pressure loss indicator
~page231
Suspension control*
¢page26
Adaptive cruise control*
¢ page 118
Yellow indicator lamp s
~~~~~~~~~~~~
Central indicator lamp (observe additional information on the instrument cluster display)
E l ectronic stabilisation contro l
(ESC) ./ c?
page 22
Electronic stabilisation control
(ESC) ./
¢ page22
E l ectronic stab ili sation contro l
(ESC)
¢ page 182 or
Engine management system
(petrol engines) ./
¢ page23
Engine management system
(diesel engines) ./
~page23
Emission control system./ r=>page23
Diesel particulate filter*
¢ page23
or
Engine speed governing o page24
Instruments and warning / indicator lamps 17
W in dscreen wipers
¢ page25 or or
Engine oil leve l (min .
) o page 24 or
Engine start system
¢page2 5 or
Engine oil sensor
¢ page 24 or
Engine temperature
¢ page20 or
Battery charge o page 21 or
Steering ./ /steer i ng l ock
¢ page 185
Steer i ng l ock
¢page 21
Remote control key
¢ page 91 or
Remote control key
¢ page 91
Battery in remote control key
¢ page43
Bulb monitor
¢page25 or
18 Instruments and warning /i ndicator lamps
Headlight range control*
¢ page 25 or or
I I
8
J;\
Adapt i ve cru i se control*
¢ page 118
Adapt i ve cru i s e con t rol*
¢ page 118
Adapt i ve cru i se control*
¢ page 118
Active l ane assist*
¢ page 129
Aud i hold assist*
¢page95
Sta r t/stop system *
¢ page 98 or
{i.
D
&
/l\
0 or
0
&
~
,
.
,
..
•
.. • I I -
,
..
..
Km/
.....
I .... I
,
.
,
..
•
Further indicator lamps
Turn signals c:> poge 26
Trai l er t urn s i gnal s *
¢ page 26
Crui s e control system*
¢ page 97
y»)
/l\
Vehicle i n natura l gas mode
¢ page 103
Ma i n beam head li ghts
¢ page 56
Ma i n beam assist *
¢page 56 or
Adapt i ve h eadlight r ange con· trol ¢page 57
R emo t e control k ey
¢ page 91
P ar k assist*
¢ page 146
Park assi s t*
¢ page 146
Electro mechanical parking brake
¢ page 19
Adapt i ve cr ui se control*
¢page 118
Active l ane assist *
¢page 129
~
0
(@}
'
I I • •
... , ,
...
.
• I I
... ,
..
..
Aud i hold as s i s t*
¢ page 95
Electro-mechanical parking brake
Q poge 19
Camera-based traffic sign recognition•
Q poge33
Rest recommendation•
Q poge35
Child-proof catches (electric) *
Q pageSO
Auxiliary heating/ventilation*
Q page82
Rear seat belt./
Q poge26
Rear seat belt./
Q poge26
< > Brake system
If the warning lamp l ights up, there is a fault in the brake system.
• Stop vehicle and check brake fluid level
Stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level. Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
• Warning! Brake servo inoperative!
You need to apply much more force to operate the brakes if the brake servo fails . You should obtain professional assistance.
• Warning! Fault in brake sys tem. Contact workshop
If the ABS in dica t or l amp
[I] and ESC ind icator lamp
DJ light up together with the brake warn in g l amp . and l this driver message appears, the ABS, ESC and brake force d i stribu tion systems have failed
Q
.&
.
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault corrected q
.&
.
• Parking brake system fault! See owner's manual
If the warning lamp and the message appear after you switch on the ignition when the vehicle Is stationary , please check whether you can release the parking brake.
Instruments and warning/indicator lamps 19
If the park in g brake cannot be released you should obtain professional assistance. If the parking brake can be released but the warning lamp/message still appears, drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified .
If the warning lamp and the message appear while driv ing, there may be a ma [function in the parking brake auto release or the emergency brake functions. You may not be able to apply or release the parking brake.
Do not park the car on a gradient. Obtain professional assistance.
.&.
WARNING
- B .
efore opening the bonnet and checking the brake f lui d l eve l, observe the warning information on
Q page 212, W orking on components in the engine compartment.
I f the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservo i r is too low - this may cause an increased accident risk. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. You should obtain professional assistance .
If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS indicator lamp and the ESC indicator lamp, this can mean that the control function of the ESC/ABS is not working. Input from the functions that stabilise the vehicle is no longer availab l e. This could cause the tail of t he vehicle to skid s i deways. Drive caref ully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault rectified.
C®J/'!ll1 Electro-mechan i cal parking brake
The warning lamp . lights up when the parking brake is applied . The warning lamp will light up for about 20 seconds if the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched off.
• Caution : Vehicle parked too steep
20 Instruments and warning/indicator lamps
I f the warn i ng lamp flashes and the message appears, the brake may not be strong enough to ho l d the vehicle. The brakes have overheated. The vehicle can roll away, even on a gentle s l ope.
• Press brake pedal to release parking brake
To release the parking brake, press the brake pedal and simultaneous l y press the switch ~
(alternatively, u se the auto release function
<::> page 94, Driving away from a standstill) . l!I
Parking brake!
There is a malfunct i on in the parking brake.
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified . lit
Parking brake!
There is a malfunction in the parking brake.
Drive to a qualified works h op soon and have the fault rectified .
[I]
Audi hold assist: only available when door is closed, seat belt is fastened and engine is running
If th i s message appears, make s ur e that the door is closed, the seat belt i s buckled and the engine is running.
[iJ
Audi hold assist: unavailable
If this message appears, the system requirements have not been met.
Parking brake: not applied !
If this message appears, it may be necessary to apply the parking brake.
[ii]
Please release parking brake
If t hi s message appears, release the park ing
brake
.
[ii]
Parking brake auto re lease: system fault
If this message appears, press the brake pedal and then re l ease the park i ng brake.
[ii]
Parking brake system fault: anti-towing alarm blocked
[ii]
Parking brake: not applied automatically
(~))Caution :
Vehicle parked too steep
¢a1j
Parking brake is applied
If this message appears, press the brake pedal and then release the parking brake as n ecessary .
Note
For further information on the parking brake refer to r:::.>p age 92.
-L I f
Cooling system
• Switch off engine and check coolant level
T he coo l ant level is too low or the cool.ant temperature is too high.
Switch off the engine and do not drive on.
Check the coolant level r:::.> page 216.
- If the coo l ant level is too low, add more coo l a n t <=:> page 217. Do not drive on until the warning lamp has gone out.
If the coo lan t level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction of the rad i ator fan. Do not drive on. You should obtain professional ass i stance.
• Coolant temperature too high! Please let engine run with vehicle stationary
Let the engine cool down by running it at idling speed for a few minutes.
0
Please warm up engine
Applies to certain types of engine only and in dicates that the engine has not yet reached its proper working temperature .
.&.
WARNING
- N ever open the bonnet if you can see or
hear steam
or
coolant escaping from the
engine compartment; th e re is a risk of being scalded. Wait until you can no lo n ger see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous place . Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and ~
allow it to cool down. Please observe the important safety warnings ~
Working on components in the engine comportment .
CD
CAUTION
Do not drive on if the warning lamp • lights up; otherwise there is a risk of engine damage.
Instruments and warning / indicator lamps 21
If t his message disappears after a while, the battery will have been sufficiently charged while driving.
If the message does not disappear again, drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified.
'l:::r: Engine oil pressure
• S witch off engine ! OH pre ss ure too low
Switch off the engine and do not drive on.
Check the engine oil leve l ~
If the engine oil l eve l is too l ow, add more oil ~ page 214. Do not drive on until the warning lamp has gone out.
If the engine oil level is OK but the warning lamp still lights up, switch off the engine and do not drive on . You should obtain professional assistance . i Note
The oil pressure warning Lamp is not an in dicator for the oil level. The oil level should therefore be checked regularly.
D Alternator I battery
• Alternator fault: Battery is not be i ng charged
There is an a l ternator fault or a fault in t h e veh i cle's e l ectrica l system.
Drive to a q u alified workshop without delay.
Avoid using e l ectrica l equipment that is not absolutely necessary (such as the radio) because this wil l drain t h e battery. If the battery charge is insufficient, obtain professional assistance. li1
Low battery charge : Battery will be charged while driv i ng
Starting reliability may be impaired.
!#.' Safety systems
The indicator Lamp fll monitors the safety systems and the pedestrian protection system .
Safety system
I f t he indicator Lamp fll lig h ts up or flashes, there i s a ma l function in one of the safety systems.
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified.
Pedestrian protection system
If the indicator Lamp
El lights up or flashes and t he bonnet is in a raised position, the pedest r ian protection system has been triggered. Please refer to ~ 163 , Pedestria n protection system.
A
WARNING
Have the safety systems examined without delay; o t herwise they may fail to trigger in an accident this could result in serious or possib l y fatal injury.
,(t. Front seat belt
The warning Lamp . Lights up and does not go out until the driver's and passenger's seat belts have been fastened. When the vehicle has gathered speed you will also hear a warning chime.
1 Note
For further information on the seat belts
~ page 165.
@ -
Steering lock
• Do not drive vehicle : steering defective ""
22 Instruments and warning /i ndicator lamps
There is a malfunct i on in the electronic steeri ng lock. The ign i tio n can no longer be switched on.
Do no t have the vehicle
towed
away, because you won't be
able
to
steer
it. You
should
obtain professiona l assistance.
II
S t e ering lock : m a lfun c tion. Plea s e c on· tact workshop
There is a malfunct i on i n the electron i c steering l ock.
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified.
.&_
WARNING
Your vehicle must not be towed if there is a fault in the electronic
steering
lock
-
risk of accident!
~ Engine
• Engine s topped: brake s ervo and power steer i ng not p o ssib [ e
There is a malfunction in t he engine or fue l supp l y sys t em.
Greater strength is required to
steer
and brake the vehicle i f the eng i ne stops while the vehicle is
coasting.
Carefu ll y try to bring the coasting vehicle safely to a standstill out of the way of moving traffic. You
should
obtain professional assistance.
.&.
WARNING
Greater strength is required to brake the vehicle if the engine stops w h ile the vehicle is moving - risk of accident! Greater strength will be re
·
quired to steer the vehicle un l ess the power steering is still providing assistance. The power steer i ng may st i ll be available if the vehicle is still coasting w i th the ignition switched on (and the battery charge i s
sufficient).
· 1 f"!.I
[/; Electronic stabilisation control
(ESC) and C > system
(ABS)
If the i ndicato r lamp
DJ flashes while the vehicle i s in motion, the ESC or tract i on control system (ASR) is i nte r vening.
Ifthe indicator lamp
DJ lights up, the ESC system has been switched off for system reasons. In this case, the ESC can be reactivated by switc hi ng the i gnit i on off and then o n again. If the ind i cator lamp goes out , this means the system i s fully funct i onal.
Stabilisation control ( ESC ) : sport. Warning!
Restricted stability
If the indicator lamp
II lights up, the ESC
sport
mode has been act i vated v i a the I~
OFFI button ~ page 183. You can switch the ESC system bac k on by press i ng the
I E OFF I button again.
Stabilisation control ( ESC ) : off . Warning! Restricted stability
If the indicato r lamp . lights u p, the ESC system h as been partially o r complete l l y switched off via the I ;,
OF F I button
~ page 183. In addition, ESC OFF wi l l appear. You can switch the ESC system back on by
pressing
the I E
OFF I button aga i n.
The
system
is activated when you
switch
on the i gnit i o n . If the indicator lamp
II out, t h is means the system is fully functional.
Stabilisation control (ESC ) : fault! See owner ' s manual
Stabilisation control (ESC / ABS): fault! See owner ' s manual
ABS : fault! See owner's manual
If the i ndicator lamp
I] lamp mJ light up and the message appears, t h ere i s a ma l function in the ant i -lock
brake system
or e l ectronic differential l ock. Th i s w ill also cause an ESC malfunction. The vehicle can still be bra k ed in the norma l way (however the ABS control function w ill be out of action) .
.,..
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified.
_& WARNING
If the brake warning lamp . lights up together with the ABS indicator lamp and the ESC indicator lamp, this can mean that the control function of the ESC/ABS is not working . Input from the functions that stabilise the vehicle is no longer available.
This could cause the vehicle to skid sideways. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault rectified.
(j)
Note
For more information about the ESC and
ABS systems, refer to
Q page 182.
<O> Brake pads lll
Brake pads!
The brake pads are worn .
Instruments and warning/indicator lamps 23
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the brake pads checked .
If t he i ndicator lamp
Gi lights up when starti ng the engine, there is a malfunction in the automatic start function. To start the engine, follow the steps described : Vehicles with mechanical ignition lock r::::> page 87, vehicles with convenience key r::::> page 89 .
W Engine management (diesel engine)
Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine
If th e indicator lamp
&I lights up when the ignition is switched on, the glow plugs are preheat i ng.
If the indicator lamp flashes w hi le the vehicle is mov i ng, there i s a fault in the engine management system.
Drive slowly to a qua li fied workshop without delay a n d h ave the fault rectified .
If the indicator lamp
II lights up when starting the engine, there is a malfunction in the automatic start function. To start the engine, follow the steps described : Vehicles with mechanical ignition lock r::::> page 87, vehicles with convenience key r::::> page 89.
· Hill hold assist
Hill hold assi s t : unavailable
If the indicator lamp . lights up and the message appears, the hill hold assist function is unavailable .
• Manual c ontrol!
I f this message appears, press the brake pe d a l.
Use the parking brake for the hi ll start r::::> page 92.
0 Emission control system
If the indicator lamp
II lights up or flashes, a fault has occurred which can reduce the quality of the exhaust gas and damage the catalytic co n verter.
Drive slowly to a qua li fied workshop w i thout delay and have the fau l t rectif i ed.
EPC Engine management (petrol engine)
Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine
If the indicator lamp
[3i lights up, there is a fault in the engine management system.
Drive slowly to a qualified workshop without delay and have the engine checked .
Applies to vehicles: with diesel eng in e and diese l particu· late filter
• Particulate filter : system fault . See owner's manual
The diesel particulate filter requires regeneration. You can assist the self-cleaning function of the filter by driving as follows :
Drive at a speed of at least 60 km/h for about
15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear, or with theselector lever in position Son vehicles with automa t ic gearbox . Keep the engine speed at Ill>
24 Instruments and warning/indicator lamps about 2000 rpm. As a result of the increase in temperature, the soot in the filter will be burned off. The indicator lamp will go out once the cleaning process has been completed successfully .
If the indicator lamp does not go out, drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified.
&.
WARNING
It is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the weather, road, terrain and traffic conditions . The recommended driving speed must never lead to the driver disregarding the traffic regulations.
(!)
Note
For more information about the diesel particulate filter, refer to c> page 190.
!
/\ Engine speed governing
Applies to vehicles: with engine speed governing
II!
Max . engine speed XXXX rpm
The engine speed will automatically be governed to the speed displayed in the driver information system. This protects the engine from overheating.
The rev limiter is deactivated as soon as the engine temperature is no longer within the critical range and you have taken your foot off the accelerator.
If the rev Limiter has been activated because of a fault in the engine management system, the ind i cator lamp
[Si will also Light up. Make sure that the engine speed does not exceed the speed displayed in the dr i ver information system, for example when shifting down a gear. Drive to a qualified workshop withou t delay and have the fault rectified.
'!::• Engine oil leve l (min .
)
• Please c h eck oil le ve l !
You can continue driving for the time being but you should check the engine oil level as soon as possible c> page 214.
If the engine oil level is too low, add more oil ~ page 216.
- I f the engine oil level is normal but the indi-
cator lamp stays on, drive to a qualified
workshop without delay and avoid high engine speeds.
... Engine oil sensor
• Oil level! Sensor defective
The sensor for checking the engine oil l eve l has failed. Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified.
CD
CAUTION
Please observe the procedure described in the Owner's Manual Q page 215 and
¢ page 216, Topping up the engine oil
~.
Bl
Fuel tank system (petrol/diesel) fiD
Please refuel
When the indicator lamp lights up for the first time and the message appears, the following amount of fuel is left in the tank :
Front-wheel drive vehicles : approx. 7 litres
- Four-wheel drive vehicles: approx. 8 . 5 litres fiD
Tank system m a lfun ctio n! Contact workshop
If the indicator lamp Lights up and the message appears:
- there is a malfunction in the tank system, or
on vehicles with a diesel engine, water may have collected in the fuel filter .
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified.
CD
CAUTION
Applies to vehicles with diesel engine: If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be .,..
Never pour fuel down drains or into the ground. i Note
For more information about filling the tank, referto c::> page210.
Instruments and warning / indicator lamps 25 necessary to have the water separator 1
> on the fuel filter drained more frequently than is specified in the Service Schedu l e.
This helps to prevent potential engine faults.
C
Plea s e r e fill wa s her fluid
With the ignition switched off, top up the fluid for the windscreen washer and headlight washer system* c::> page 221.
~ Bulb monitor
Applies t o vehicles: with driver 1nforma t1 on system
If the indicator lamp
II failed. The message indicates the location of the bulb.
You should have the bulb replaced without delay.
Vehicle l ights : malfun c tion !
There is a fault with the headlights or light switch. Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified.
A
WARNING
Bulbs are sens i t i ve to pressure. T h e g l ass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.
Incorrect handling of the high-voltage elemen t of xenon gas-discharge bulbs• can have potentially fatal consequences.
•Windscreen wipers
=W i ndscreen wiper defect i ve
There is a malfunction in the windscreen wipers.
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified.
~(]) Dynamic headlight range control
Applies to vehicles: with xenon headlight bulbs
II
Headlight rang e contr o l : s y s tem fault!
There is a malfunction in the dynamic headlight range control which may cause other road users to be dazzled .
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified .
<il -
I =e Engine start system
lm/l!J
Eng i ne start s ystem : s ystem fault .
Please contact work s hop
D o not switch off the i gnition; otherw i se you may not be able to switch it on again.
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified.
Engine start system: malfunction . Please contact workshop .
There is a malfunction in the engine start system.
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified . go
Audi adaptive light
App li es to v ehi cl es: w i th Audi adap tiv e ll g hl rlJ
Audi adaptive light: sy s tem fault!
There is a malfunction in the adaptive light.
The dipped beam headlights will still be working normally.
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified .
1l Th i s function is not a vail a bl e o n a ll e xport v e rsions .
26 Instruments and warning /i ndicator lamps
~ o Light sensor I rain sensor
App l ies to vehicles: with light sensor/ rain sensor t'il
Automatic h ea d lights: sys tem fault!
!I wiper s: system fault !
The light sensor/rain sensor is out of action.
For safety reasons, the dipped beam headlights will then be switched on permanently when the light switch is set to the AUTO position. You can still switch the lights on and off in the normal way with the light switch. You can also continue to use all the other wiper functions that do not use the rain sensor .
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified. g
Suspension control
App l ies to vehicles: with Audi drive select
R
Suspension: system fault!
There is a malfunct i on in the suspension control system.
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fau l t rect ified .
¢
1
¢
Trailer turn signals
Applies to vehicles: with towing bracket
If the indicator lamp . f l ashes, the turn signals are on in towing mode. The trailer must be properly connected ~
If a turn signal bulb on the trailer or vehicle fails in towing mode , the indicator lamp does not flash twice as fast to indicate the bu lb failure.
(:l ! ~ Rear seat belt
Applies to vehicles: with seat belt warning system (rear)
The warning lamp
IJ;f!1 lights up briefly when the ignition is switched on.
If a rear seat belt is buckled/unbuckled, the corresponding indicator l amp lights up briefly. f!I
-
If the indicator lamp lights up briefly, the corresponding rear seat is not occupied or the seat belt is not buckled. If the seat belt is unbuck l ed while the vehicle is moving, you will also hear a warning tone.
11 -
If the indicator la mp lights up briefly, the seat be lt has been fastened.
© Note
For further information on the seat belts c:> page 165.
¢ ¢ Turn signal s a nd hazard warning lights
If the indic ator l amp
B or
B flashes, the turn signals are on . If both i ndicator lamp s flash, the hazard warn i ng lights are on .
If one of the indicator lamps flashes twice as fast as usual. a turn signal bulb has failed.
Drive carefully to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified . While you are towing a tra il er, the indicator lamp does not indicate turn signa l bulb failures on the vehicle or on the trailer.
(D
Note
For more information about the turn signals and hazard warning lights, refer to
~ pageSS.
Driver information system
Overview
The driver i nformation system automatically collects, processes and displays data. The Sys tems I Car systems menu allows you to con trol the sett i ngs for many items of equipment on the vehicle.
Display
You can see the following in the driver informat i on system:
Radio station or CD
Time and date display
Mileage and trip recorder
Q page9
Q page 10
Outside temperature
Service interval display
Q
Q page 11 page 13
Warning/ind i cator lamps and Q page 14 dr i ver messages
Digital speedometer
Lap timer *
Cru i se cont r o l system
Speed warning
Start/stop system
Gear-change indicator
Q page36
Qpage 97
Q page96
Q page98
Q page 12
Advanced gear-change indi Q page 31 cator for manual gearbox
Se l ector lever positions for Q page 106 automatic gearbox
Ma i n beam ass i st * Q page56
Seat be l t warning system for ~ page 26 rear seats
On-board computer d i splay ~page
Camera-based traffic sign recognition
~ page 33
On-board computer di s play
The on-board comp u ter has different journey memor i es:
Short-term memory (on-board computer 1)
- Long-term memory (on-board computer 2)
E fficiency programme
Driver information system 2 7
T he following info r mation can be d i sp l ayed i n sequence i n on-board comp u ters 1 and 2:
Date
Est i mated range of fuel i n tank
- Dr i v i ng t i me
- Average fue l consumption
- Average speed
Distance covered
Cur r ent fue l cons u mption
Engi n e oil temperature d i sp l ay*
On-board computer
D
(short-term memory)
T he short-term memory p r ocesses the i nfo r mation o n a journey from the time the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey i s resumed within two hours after the i gnit i on is switched off, the new figures are automat i ca ll y included in the calculation.
If the vehicle i s left standing for over 2 hours, the short-term memory i s automatically erased when you set off again.
On-board computer fJ
(long-term memory)
U n li ke the short-term memory, the l ong-term memory is not erased automatically. In t hi s way, you can determine the per i od for which you w i sh the on-board computer to supply driv i ng i nformat i on.
Efficiency programme iii
The efficiency programme can help to save fuel ~ page 31.
Operating logic
You can u se the following to operate the d r iver information system, depending on the optiona l equipment in your vehicle:
Con tr o l s on windscreen wiper lever
~ page 28, o r
- Contro l buttons on multi-fun c tion s teering wheel* ~ page
28 Driver information s y st em
Controls on windscreen wiper Lever
Introduction
Applies to vehicles. with driver information system, without multi-function steering wheel
Controls
Applies to vehicles : with driver information system. without multi-function steering wheel
The driver information system con be operated using the windscreen wiper lever .
The driver information system is operated usin g the contro l s on the windscreen wiper lever • r::> page 28, Fig . 13 .
The driver information system r::> Fig. 12 provides the following information :
@ Car information
@ Status line (selector lever position/current gear, gear-change indicator, main beam assist " , start/stop system, outside temperature r::> page 11)
© On-board computer
@ C ar informat ion
On-board computer
Eff i ciency prog r amme
Digital speedometer
Lap timer*
Driver messages and warning/ind i cator lamps r::> page28 r::> page 31
<:) page 36
<:) page 14
Driver messages for warning/indicator lamps are on l y displayed if a t least one warning has occurred.
F i g . 1 3 Windscreen wiper lever : Driver information syste m co n trols
As well as th e figures from the on board computer (memories 1 and 2 and efficiency programme), the display can a l so show information from other systems .
The number
0
or fJ or the filling nozz l e symbol i1 in the top corner of the on-board computer display shows which of the memories is currently active (i.e
. on-board computer 1 or 2 or t he efficiency programme) .
How to u s e the controls
"" Switch on the ignition. The function t ha t was last selected will be disp l ayed.
"" Press the I RESET I button @ to switch between on-board computers
0
and fJ or the efficiency programme i1 or any act ive warnings or driver messages.
"" To show more information further up or down the disp l ay, press the top or bottom part of the button @ .
Calling up warning / ind i cat o r lamp s and driver messages aga i n
"" Pre ss t he IRESET I button @ (several times if necessary) until the driver message appea r s.
Resetting figures t o zero
"" Select a figure in the desired on-board computer or the efficiency programme.
"" Press and hold the I RESET I button @ for a t least one second . All figures of the selec ted
Iii>
on-board computer or the efficiency programme will be reset to zero.
(!)
Note
- The measurement units may be different on vehicles for some markets.
- The information in the memory is cancelled if the battery is disconnected.
Controls on multifunction steering wheel
Introduction
Applies to vehicle s: with driver Information s ystem and multi-funct i on stee r ing wheel
F ig. 14 Instrument cl uste r: Dr i ver information system
(example)
The driver information system is operated using the controls on the multi-function steering wheel*
Q page 30, Fig. 15.
The data ® stored in the driver information system is presented in different display tabs @
Q
Fig. 14.
The driver i nformatio n system ~ pro vides the following information:
@ Disp l ay tab
@ Car information
© Status line (selector lever position, gearchange indicator, main beam assist*, start/ stop system, outside temperature
~ page 11)
@ On-board computer
The following functions are available, depending on the equipment installed in your vehicle:
Driver information s ystem 29
@
® lsttab ~V e h i cl e fu nc t i ons :
On-board computer, time, date
Q page30
Efficiency programme
¢ page 31
Digital speedometer
Assist systems
Audi adaptive cruise control*
Q page 116
Audi active lane assist*
~ page 128
Camera-based traffic sign recognition* q page 33
L ap timer• q page 36
2nd tab
Reduced display
-tfl
& Driver messages and warning/indicator lamps
3rd tab
,,,...c Service interval display q page 13 f.l
l l
Audio/ 1 »l radio
4th tab " Telephone*
5th tab
@/ ~
The second tab is only visible if one or more warning/indicator lamps or driver messages are displayed or if the relevant system is switched on .
(D
Note
The on-board computer is operated us· ing the buttons on the left side of the mu l ti-funct i on steering wheel.
For information on how to use the other buttons and how to operate the audio, telephone* and navigation• functions, please refer to the separate MMI Operat· ing Manual.
30 Dr i ver information system
Controls
Applies to vehicles: with driver Information system and mulli·funct i on steering wheel
The driver information system can be operat e d via the multi-function steering wheel.
F i g . 15 Multi function steering wheel: Driver informa tion system controls
Fi g. 1 6 Dr i ver i n formation system: Calling up the Ve hi cle func t ions menu
As well as the figures from the on-board computer (memories 1 and 2 and efficiency programme), the display can also show information from other systems.
The number D or
II or the filling nozzle symbol ii1 in the top corner of the on board computer d i splay shows wh i ch of the memories is currently active (i.e. on-boa r d computer 1 or 2 or the efficiency p rogr a mme).
The display tabs ® q page 29, Fig. 14 will appear as soon as you press the button
CD c::> Fig. 15 on the mu l ti · function stee r ing wheel.
How to use the controls
.. Switch on the ignition. The function that was Last selected will be disp l ayed.
.. To switch between the tabs, press the left or rig ht side of the button
CD c::> Fig . 15.
.. To show more information f u rthe r u p or down the display, sc r oll the thumbwheel @ up or down .
.. To confirm a select i on, press the thumb wheel @ .
.. To ca ll up a function assigned to the steering wheel button, press the button @ . For further info r mation please refe r to r::!:> page 30.
Calling up Vehicle functions
... Use button
CD to se l ect the fi r st d i sp l ay tab .
.. Press the button @ . The Vehicle functions menu will be d i sp l ayed c::> Fig . 16 .
... To select a menu item, scroll and press the thumbwhee l @ .
Resetting figures to zero
.. Select On-board computer or Efficien c y
P ' rogramm e from the Vehicle function s menu .
... Select a figu r e in the desired on-board c ompu t er or t he efficie n cy programme .
... T o re s e t t h e fig u res i n t he selec t ed memory to zero, pr ess the t humbwhee l @ fo r one second .
Calling up warning/indicator lamps and driver mes s ages again
.. Keep pressing the button
CD until the tab marked d appears.
The tab marked d i s only visible if a ma l func t i o n has occurred .
Assigning a function to the steering wheel button
.. Select:
I ME N UI b utt on> con t rol bu tt o n Sys · terns I Car systems > Vehicle settings >
Steering wheel button .
T he tab marked
II i s only v i s i ble i f one or more warning/ind i cator lamps or driver messages are displayed .
©
Note
The measurement units may be different on vehicles for some markets.
IJllo.
The information in the memory is cancell ed if the battery ls disconnected.
For information on the efficienc:y programme, refer to ~ page 31.
Please refer to the MM!* Operating Manual for more information on the multifunction steering whee l.
Boost display
A p pl i es to vehicles: with boost pressure display
Driver information s ystem 31 bu tt on ® r:> page 30, Fig. 15 and select Ef· ficiency programme c::> page 30 from the menu.
The efficiency programme can help to save fuel. It evaluates fue l efficiency data, shows a l i st of auxiliary equipment affecting fue l consumption c> page
32,
and suggests gear changes r:>page 31. It a l so provides eco1110my tips r:> page 32 for saving fue l.
The efficiency programme uses the trip an d f uel consumpt i on data from on-board computer 1. When yo u clear the data from tlhe efficiency programme on vehicles without mult i -function steering wheel ( r:> page 28) or vehicles with multi-function steering wheel
( c::> poge 30), the values i n on-board computer 1 are reset to zero.
F i g . 17 Inst r ument cluster: Boost display
Boost pressure display
The current boost level of the engine (that is the current charge pressu r e) i s i n dicated by a ba r which moves from left to r i ght.
Advanced gear-change indicator
Applies to veh i cles : w i t h manual gea r bo x and driver i n formation system
Efficiency programme
De
s
cription
Applies to vehicles : with dr i ver information system
!
F ig. 1 9 Instrument cluster: Advanced gear-change ino
>
~ d i cator on vehicles with monochrome display
F i g . 18 Instrument cl u ster: Efficlency prog r amme
Calling up the efficiency
programme~
.,. Using the windscreen wiper lever*: Keep pressing the I
RESET
I button @ c::> page 28,
Fig. 13 until the efficiency programme appears on the display .
... Using the mu l ti-function steering wheel*:
Call up the vehicle frunctions by pressing
F i g . 2 0 Instrument cluster: Advanced gear-change ind i cator on vehicles with co l our display
Important: The eff i ciency programme a. must have been called up c::> page 31.
... Us i ng the windscreen wiper lever * : Keep pressing the
I
RESET
I button @ <=:> page 28, .,.
32 Dr ive r information system
Fig. 13 until the instrument cluster display shows the advanced gear-change indicator.
... U s ing the mult ifun c tion s teering wheel* :
Scroll the thumbwheel @
Q page 30,
F ig . 15 until the d i splay s how s the advanced gear change indicator .
The advanced gear change indicator is based on the same logic as the "regular " gearchange indicator ¢ page 12 .
CD
CAUTION
The advanced gear-change indicator is intended to help save fuel. It is not Intended to recommend the right gear for all driving situations. In certain situations, only the driver can choose the correct gear (for instance when overtaking , driving up a steep gradient or towing a trailer).
@ Note
The "regular" gear-change indicator' disappears from the display when the advanced gear-change indicator appears.
Auxiliaries
Applies to vehicles: with <:I river information system and automatic air conditioner
The efficiency programme shows a list of auxiliary equipment currently affect i ng the veh i cle's fuel con s umpt i on. The display show s up to three auxiliaries @ . The auxiliary load drawing the most power appears at the top of the list. If more than three auxiliaries are switched on, the ones currently using the most power are displayed .
In addition, a scale @ i ndicates the overall current fuel consumption of all auxiliary equipment .
Economy tips
Applies to vehicles: with driver informat i on system
Fig. 22 Instrument cluster: Economy tip (Air cond i tioner sw i t c hed on : c l ose windows and s un roof)
Economy tips are displayed ifthe fuel consumption increases in certain situations . By fol l owing these economy tips, you can save fuel. The tip s are displayed automatically and only appear in the eff i ciency programme. The economy tips automatically di s appear again after a while .
... To clear an economy tip from the display immediately, press any of the controls on the windscreen wiper lever* /multi-funct i on steering wheel*.
Fig. 21 Instrument cluste r : Auxil i aries
... Using the windscreen wiper lever* : Keep pressing the
I
RESET l button @ ¢ page
28
,
Fig. 13 in the efficiency programme until the instrument cluster display shows the auxiliaries.
... Us i ng the multi-function s teering wheel" :
Scroll the thumbwheel @
Q page 30 ,
Fig. 15 in the efficiency programme until the auxiliaries appear on the display.
- Once you have cleared an economy tip from the display, it will not appear again until the next time you switch on the ignition .
- The economy tips are not always displayed in every conceivable situation, but are deliberately spaced out over time.
Active Cylinder Management
Applies to vehicles: with Act i ve Cy li nder Management
(1.4 TrSJ 103 kW engine)
Driver information sy stem 33
Camera-based traffic sign recognition
Description
Applies to vehicles: with camera· based traffic sign recog· nition
Fig . 23 Instrument cluster; 2-cylinder mode display
The engine shuts down two cylinders to save fuel under Light-load cond i tions and automat· lcally re-activates them when they are needed, the whole process being imperceptible to the occupants.
Di s playing the cylinder mode
Important: The on-board computer must be displayed .
.. Using the w i ndscreen wiper lever*: Keep pressing the function selector switch @
¢page 28, Fig. 13 until the instrument cluster display shows the current or average fuel consumption .
.. Using the mu l ti-function steering wheel*:
Scroll the th um bwh ee l @ ~ 30,
Fig. 15 until the instrument cluster display shows the current fuel consumption .
You are driving in 2-cylinder mode when the driver message 2-cylinder mode is d i splayed.
Basic conditions for 2-cylinder mode
The engine automatically runs on two cy li nders when certain basic conditions are met.
These include:
Power demand is low.
-Vehicle is in a forward gear.
Engine speed is between 1,300 and
3900 rpm.
The selected int erior temperature has been reached.
- Engine is warm .
Fig. 24 Instrument cluster : Traffic sign recognition
(example}
Fig . 25 Windscreen: Camera window for traffic sign recognition
T raffic signs detected by the camera appear in the i nstrument cluster display to keep you informed of current speed restrictions and no overtaking zones . In cases where the system is able to detect temporary speed limits applicable at certain times of day Ci] , in wet
weather
~
er
~ l ay these traffic restrictions¢ Fig . 24.
General notes
The traffic sign recognition system can detect standardised speed Limit signs within the camera's range of vision. It makes use of the navigation data to evaluate the detected speed limits and show them on the display.
Under certain conditions, the system will a lso display the applicable speed limits on roads without speed limit signs.
IJJ>
34 Driver information syste m
Traffic sign recognition I s not available in all countries . For a curr e nt list , s ee the Internet
(e.g. www.audi.
c om ) . The system i s also subject to certain inherent restrict i ons and may be partially or completely unavailable in the following s i tuation s:
If vis i b i lity i s i mpaired by snow, ra i n, fog or heavy road spray.
In dazz li ng light, e.g. from the sun or oncoming traffic.
At high speeds .
- If the camera's range of vision r:::> Fig. 25 is
Impaired, e.g. by dirt or stickers . Notes on cleaning r:::> page 204.
If the traffic signs are partially or completely obscured, e.g. by trees, snow, mud or other vehicles.
- If traffic sign s deviate from the standard appearance (round with red border).
If traffic signs are damaged or bent.
If matrix traffic signs are mounted on overhead gantries.
- If traffic signs or routes have changed (navigation data out of date) .
Some types of slow moving vehicles (such as heavy goods vehicle s ) carry speed stickers which , if detected by the system, may affect the display .
.&_ WARNING
Always direct your fu ll attention to the road and surroundings, even when you are
using traffic sign recogn i tion. The actua l traffic signs on yo u r route a lw ays take precedence over the information on the display. It is a lw ays the driver's responsibility to assess the traffic situation and take appropriate care .
- Under adverse conditions, the traffic sign recognition system may misinterpret or fail to detect traffic signs. It is therefore possible that the speed limit display may occasionally be unavailable or even incorrect.
- The traffic sign recognition system does not warn you if you exceed the speed limit and does not alter the speed of your vehicle to obey the speed limit .
- The speed limit displayed in the instrument cluster (e.g
. SO ) may apply in mph or km/h, depending on the units applicable in a particular country .
Controls
Applies to vehicles· with camera-based traffic sign recogniti o n
F i g. 26 Instrument clus t e r : Se c ondary di s play
Calling up the traff i c sign recognition
• Press the §1 button on the multi-function steering wheel.
• Scroll and press the thumbwheel to select
Traffic signs from the Vehicle functions menu .
Activating the secondary display
You can also activate traffic sign recognition in other display tabs, e .
g . in the navigation display r:::> Fig. 26.
• Select the fol l owing on the MMI*: I
MENU ! button > control button Systems I Car sys· tems > Driver assist > Traffic sig n s > Di splay In instrument cluster > on .
Displaying signs for trailers
You can also display speed limits which apply specially to vehicles towing a trailer
1 >. ~
1 ) A pplies to fa c t o ry ·fl tt e d tow i n g bra c ket s onl y
.. Select the following on the MMI*:
!
MENU
I button > control button S ys tems I Car sys · tem s > Driver a s sist > Traffi c sign s>
Automatic trailer recognition > o n .
Secondary display
If the instrument cluster is currently showing a function other than traffic sign recognition, the speed lim i t will be displayed in the top right-hand corner ~ If the system is ab l e to detect a temporary speed restrict i on in a given situation, i t will update the d i sp l ay accordi n gly.
Temporary speed restrictions a r e displayed i n the following situat i ons:
- A temporary speed r estriction for wet weather i s detected wh il e the windscreen wipers are operat i ng.
The veh i cle is tow i ng a trailer and the Auto · matic trailer recognition option in the MM!* is on . In this case, restrictions applying to trailers are displayedll.
A speed restriction applying at certain times of day has been detected and corresponds to the time displayed i n the instrument cluster .
Q)
Note
I f you activate the Signs for trailers opt i on, the system will show the maximum national speed limit for vehicles towing a trailer. Different speed limits are not dis played for different types of towed transport veh i cle .
Driver messages
A pp lies t o vehicles: with camera based traffic sign recog · nitio n
No traff ic sign recognised
A speed lim i t was not detected (e.g
. on a motorway with no speed restriction) .
Traffic sign re c ognition: outside operational area
Driver information system 35
T he veh i cle is in a co u nt r y or reg i on out of the system ' s range (i.e. the navigation system has no corresponding data) .
Traffic sign recognit i on : currently restri c ted
This message appears, for instance, in the event of a navigation system fault. The Limited functionality may ca u se fewer spee d Li mits t o be displayed (wh i c h increases t he poss i bility of an erro r ).
Traffic sign recognit i on: currently unavaila· ble
The system is currently unable to funct i on properly and w ill be deactivated . This can hap pen, fo r instance, i f the camera is dirty and a navigation system malfunction occurs s i mul taneo u s l y.
Traffic sign recognition : system fault
The function of the system i s impaired; t he system will be deactivated. Drive to a qualified works h op soon .
Traffic sign recognition: currently restricted.
No camera view
T his message w i ll appear if the ca m era view is obstr u cted ~ page 33.
Rest recommendation
General notes
App li es to vehicles: wit h rest recommendat i on f un ct i on
Under certain conditions, the system can detect that the driver needs to take a break.
At t h e beginn i ng of a t r ip, the system moni tors the dr i ve r 's general stee r ing sty l e . Using th i s as a r eference, the system continuously compares the current steering input at speeds of between 65 km/h and 200 k m/ h. If t h e evaluat i on of the stee r ing input imp li es a
L i n the dr i ver's concentration, the system will then recommend a break
Q page 36, Instrument cluster display. l ) App lies t o factory fi tt ed tow i ng bracket s only
36 Dr i ver information system
The rest recommendation
II is designed for journeys o n motorways and major roads.
Sy s tem limitations
The rest recommendation function may misin terpret the steer i ng i nput in certa i n driv i ng situations, such as the following:
On twisty roads .
- On rough roads.
In poor weather .
During performance driving.
When the dr i ve r 's attention is distracted.
Resetting the system
The system is automatically reset if you ...
switch off the ignition.
release the driver's seat be l t and open the driver's door .
drive slower than 65 km/h for a wh il e . If you subsequently i ncrease your speed again, the system will reeval u ate the dr i v i ng sty l e.
A
WARNING
- N ever d r ive when you are tired . As a driv er you are a l ways r esponsible for ens u ring t hat you are ifit to d r ive.
On long journeys, make sure to take adequate breaks at regu l ar i nterva l s.
T he system cannot a l ways tell if you need a break.
- In certain situations, the system may misinterpret driv i ng manoeuvres and inappro p riately recomme n d a break.
- N o acu t e wa rn ing is g i ven i f the driver falls in to a micros l eep.
@
Note
T h e system is not availab l e w i th all eq u ipment ve r sions.
Instrument cluster display
Applies to vehicles : with rest recommendation funct i on
If the warning lamp lights up and the mes sage appears, the eva l uation of the steering inpu t h as resu l ted In a rest recommenda t ion.
T his is a l so i ndicated by a warn i ng tone . T a k e a break as soon as possible.
The message may be d i splayed again once if necessary.
Switching on/off
Applies to vehicles : wit h rest recommendat i on function
To sw i tch the rest recommendation on/off * :
Vehicles wi t h sou nd sys t em*
.. Select: I
SETUP
I button> contro l butto n~
Driver assi s t > Rest recommendation .
Vehicles with MM !* :
.. Select: I MENUI button> control button System s I Car systems > Driver assist > Re s t recommendation .
If yo u sw i tch off the system, it w i ll remain swi t c h ed off the n ext time you sw i tch o n the ig ni t i o n .
Lap timer and engine oil temperature display
Introduction
Applies to vehicles : with lap timer (S models)
The engine oi l temperature is only shown in t h e l ap timer display. lap timer
You can u se the lap t i mer in the display
¢ page 37, Fig . 28 to reco r d and eval u ate la p times. T h e times are r ecorded in mi n utes, sec o nds and t e nths of a s e cond . The hour will appea r i n the disp l ay a n d the ten t hs of a sec-
ond
will
d
i
sappear
if
the sess
i
on las
t
s for over
60 m i n u tes.
Ind i vidual l ap times stop automatically after
99 hours 59 m i nutes and 59 seconds. A new lap will then start automatically .
The lap t i mer stops after a maximum of
30 laps. You can then eva l uate the lap times o r start a new session. II>
Engine oil temperature di s play
Engine oil temperatures below 60 °C are indicated by the symbol~. three dashes"- -"and the unit ( ° C).
The engine has reached its operating temperature in normal driving conditions when the oil temperature is between 80 'C and 120 'C .
If the engine is running under increased load at high ambient temperatures, the oil temperature may increase above this value. This is no cause for concern, provided that the indicator/ warning lamps .
Q page21 or l l
Q page 24 in the display do not start flashing.
Operating logic
You can use the fo ll owing to operate the lap timer, depend i ng on the opt i onal equ i pment i n your vehicle:
Controls on wind s creen wiper lever
Q page 37, or
- Control buttons on multi-function s teering wheel*
Q page 39
A
WARNING
Please direct your full attention at all times to the road! As the driver, you have full responsibility for the safety of the ve hicle and other road users. For this reason, you should only use the lap timer functions in a manner that allows you to maintain control of the vehicle In all situations accident risk!
@
Note
You can call up information from the onboard computer while the stopwatch of the lap timer is running.
Driver information s ystem 37
Controls on windscreen wiper lever
Calling up the lap timer and recording lap times
A pplies to vehicles: with lap timer IS models)
------®
Fig . 2 7 Windscreen wiper lever : Controls
F ig. 28 Instrument clu s ter : Lap t i mer
Calling up the lap timer
,,. Keep pressing the I
RES E T
I button @
Q
Fig . 27 until the lap timer
Q
Fig. 28 appears on the display .
Recording lap times
,,. To star t recording a lap time, press the top part of t h e rocker sw i tch @ . The lap t i me is disp l ayed i n line @
Q
Fig. 28 .
,,. To finish measuring the current lap time, press the top part of the rocker sw i tch @ again. The next lap time starts running immediately. The previous lap time moves t o the top of the display @ . The current Lap is shown in line @ .
The . symbol will stay green if the cur r ent lap time is the best time so far. The . symbol will turn red if the lap time is not as good @ . IJI-
38 Dr ive r information system
Displaying split times and interrupting the lap timer for a break
• Press the bottom part of the roc k er switch
® to display a spli t time ~ .
The split time appears in line @ for approximately 10 seconds. The current lap time continues running in the meantime.
•T o int e r rupt the lap timer, e.g. to take a break (pause m ), press and hold the bottom part of the rocker switch @ .
•T o res um e recording of the lap time , press the top part of the rocker switch @ .
If you interrupt the l ap timer to take a break, you can resume recording later on, even if you switched off the ignit i on i n the meantime.
Legend for centre d i sp l ay~
CD Last recorded lap time
@ Symbols:
[i] :
Start ti me
- · :W or st l ap time
.
: B est la p time
-
~
:Split
time
-m:
Pause
®
Curre nt lap time
@ Menu :
Lap 1 (start l ap)
N ew lap (start another l ap)
- Split time (lap sector time)
Pause (interrupt lap timer)
- Reset (zero al l lap times)
Evaluating lap times and resetting the lap timer
Applies to vehicles: with lap t i mer CS models)
You can use the lap timer to evaluate the fastest, slowest and average lap times.
Fig. 29 Instrume n t cluster : Ev.a
l uat i n g lap t i mes
After you have evaluated the lap times .
, the lap timer starts a new sess ion (i.e. continues with l ap 1).
• To evaluate the session, press and hold the
I RESETlbutton @ ~ page37,
Fig . 27. The fastest l ap" + ", the slowest lap" " a n d t h e average time "0" will appear in the disp lay.
• To reset the lap timer and clear the lap t i mes, press the I RESET I button again for a bout 2 seconds.
• To restart the lap timer and record new laps, press the top part of the rocker switch @ r::;> page 3 7, Fig. 2 7.
• To exit the lap time r , briefly press the
I RESETI button .
Explanation of eva l uation in ~ Fig. 29:
@ Total number of l aps
®
II :
B est lap time
©
.
: Worst lap t i me
® t'§.1
:
Average lap time
©
1::2
I ! !
: Page down/up
® D e l ete entr i es and return to lap time r ecor ding
Recorded lap times cannot be deleted individually from the overall resu l ts. ..,.
The data recorded in the l ap timer remain stored after the ignition is switched off.
Controls on multifunction st
,
eering wheel
Calling up the lap timer and recording lap times
Applies to vehicles: with lap timer (S mode l s) and multifu n ction steering w h eel
Fig . 30 Multi funct i on steering wheel: Controls
Fig. 31 Instrument clu s t:er : Lap t i me r
Calling
up the lap timer
• Press button @ on the multi function steer ing wheel and scroll the th u mbwheel @
~ Fig. 30 until Lap timer
Q
Fig. 31 is selected in the menu .
• Press the thumbwhee l @ to confirm your selection.
Recording lap times
• To start the timer, press the thumbwheel @ on the menu item Lap 1 - select OK. The Lap ti me is dis played in Line @
Q
Fig . 31.
• To f ini sh measuring the current lap time, press the thumbwheel @ on the menu item
New lap - select OK . The next Lap time sta rt s running immediately. The previous
M
"'
<D
Driver information sy stem 39
Lap time moves to the top of the display (!) .
The current l ap is shown in Line @ .
The . symbol will stay green if the cur rent
Lap time is the best time so far . The . symbol will turn red if the l ap time is not as good!
@ .
Displaying split times and
interrupting
the lap timer for a break
• To display a split time ~ . scroll the thumbwheel @ until Split time appears in line @ .
Press the thumbwheel @ to confirm your selection. The split time appears in Line @ for approximately 10 seconds. The current
Lap time continues running in the meantime.
If you want to take a break (pause m > diately after displaying the split times, first press the thumbwheel @ to confirm the menu item Back select OK .
• To pause the timer, scroll the thumbwheel @ until Pause appears in Line @ .
Press the thumbwheel @ to confirm your select i on. The pause symbol m i n
Line @ .
• Press the thumbwheel @ to resume the Lap time.
If you interrupt the Lap timer to take a break, you can resume recording later on, even if you switched off the ignition in the meantime.
Legend for centre display ~
CD Last recorded Lap time
@ Symbols:
-
[i]
:
Start time
-
.
: Worst Lap time
ril
Best lap time
~ :
Split time
-m :
40 Dr i ver information system
®
Current lap time
@ Menu :
Lap 1 (start lap)
New lap (start another lap)
- Split time (lap sector time)
Pause (interrupt lap timer)
- Statistics (evaluate lap times)
- Reset (zero all lap times)
Evaluating lap times and resetting the lap timer
Applies to vehicles: with lap timer (S models) and multif u nction steering wheel
You con use the lop timer to evaluate the fastest, slowest and overage lop times.
... To restart the l ap timer and record new laps, press the thumbwheel @ .
• To exit the l ap timer, press button ® on the multi-function steering wheel and scroll the thumbwhee l @ 9 page 39, Fig. 30 until a new menu item is selected . Press the thumbwheel @ to confirm your selection .
Explanation of evaluation in ¢Fig. 32:
@ Total number of laps
®
II :
Best lap time
©
.
: Worst l ap time
@ r!J
:
Average lap time
®
C I !!!
:
Page down/up
®
Delete entries and return to lap time recording
{O
Note
- Recorded l ap times cannot be deleted i ndividually from the overall resu l ts.
The data recorded in the Lap timer r ema i n stored after the ig n it i on is switched off.
Fi g , 32 Instrument du:ster: Evaluating lap ti111es
Afte r you have evaluated the l ap times, you can resume the ex i sting session or start a new session (i.e. start again with lap 1) .
... To eva l uate the lap times, scroll the thumbwheel @ 9 page 39, Fig. 30 unti l S tatistics appears in line @ 9 poge 39, Fig . 31. Press the thumbwheel @ to confirm your selec tion . The fastest lap ..
.. ", the s l owest lap" " and the average time "0" will appear in the display. To display the individual lap times, scroll the thumbw h eel @ down
C or up !!!
... Press the thumbwhee l @ to resume the cu r rent sess i on .
... To reset the lap timer and clear the l ap times, first press the t h umbwheel @ . Then scroll the thumbwheel @ 9 poge 39,
Fig. 30 until Re s e t appears in line @
9 page 39, Fig. 31. Press the thumbwheel
@ to confirm your selection.
Doors and windows
Central locking system
Description
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked via the central locking system . You can use the following (depending on the equipmen t on your vehicle):
Remote control key c:::> page 44
Lock on driver's door c:::> page 45
Sensor in front door handles on vehicles with convenience key* c:::> page 45
Interior central lock ing switch c:::> page 47
Unlocking one side of the vehicle only
Wh en you lock the ve h icle, the centra l lo cking system will lock the doors and the boot lid.
When you unlock the vehicle, the central lockin g system will unlock either the driver's door
only,
or all the locks on the vehicle, depending on the setting you have selected in the MMI* i::> page46.
Automatic locking function ( Auto Lock)
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and the boot lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h .
The vehicle is unlocked again when the ignition key is removed . Alternatively, the vehicle can also be unlocked via the central locking sw i tch or by pulling one of the in side door handles. The Auto Lock function can be switched on and off on the sound system or
MMI * c:::> page46.
In the event of an acc id ent in which the air bags inflate, the doors will be automatica lly unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
Safelock mechanism
When you switch off the ignition, the message Be aware of door safelock. See owner ' s manual appears in the instrument cluster dis play as a reminder that the safelock mechanism is automatically activated when you lock the vehicle from the outside . The doors can then no longer be opened from t he inside.
Doors and windows 41
T his makes it more difficult to break into th e vehicle c:::> & .
It is possible t o deactivate the safelock mechanism manually any time you lock the vehicle :
Turn the key in the door lock to the lock position a second time within 2 seconds . Or :
Press the i'.D button on the remote control key a second time within 2 seconds . Or:
Touch the sensor* on one of the front door handles a second time within 2 seconds (applies to vehicles with convenience key) . Or:
Before locking th e vehicle, press the ~ ton for the inter i or monitor and tow-away protect i on* c:::> page 48.
The LED on the top of the dr iv er's door trim acknowledges this procedure as follows : f i rst it flashes rapidly for a short time, then it goes out for about 30 seconds, and finally it s t arts flashing again slowly.
If you switch off the safelock mechanism*, the interior monitor and tow-away protection* are automatically disabled.
Anti-theft alarm system*
If th e anti-theft alarm system senses in t erference with the vehicle it triggers an audible and visible alarm .
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when the vehicle is locked . It switches off automatically if you unlock the vehicle using the remote control or t h e sensor on the door handle (conven i ence key).
If you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key in the driver' s door, you shou ld switch on the ignition within 15 seconds to prevent the alarm from being triggered . On some export versions, the alarm is triggered immed i ately when you open a door.
To deactivate the alarm, press the ffi button on the remote control key/convenience key or switch on the ignition . The alarm also stops automatically after a certain period.
Swit c h off the interior monitor and tow-away protection if you wish to prevent the ala rm ~
42 Doors and windows from being triggered acc i dentally c::>page48 .
Turn signals
The turn signals will flash twice when the veh i cle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is locked.
If the turn signals do not flash, one of the doors, the bonnet or the boot lid is still open.
On vehicles w i th the convenience key, the ignition may still be switched on.
Accidental lock-out
The central lock i ng system prevents you from being locked out of the vehicle in the following situations:
When the driver's door is open, the vehicle will not be locked if you press the central locking switch and then close the door
Q page47.
On vehicles with convenience key*, the boot lid will be re l eased again automat i cally if the key that was last in use is left inside the boot when the boot lid is closed.
To prevent yourself from being locked out, do not lock the vehicle with the remote control key/convenience key* until all of the doors and the boot lid are closed.
&_ WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the car if it is locked from the outside and the safelock mechanism* is activated: the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance i n an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk .
Q)
Note
Never leave any valuable items in the vehicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe.
If the LED on the driver's window sill ligh ts up for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked, the central locking system or anti-theft alarm* is not working properly. You should have the malfunction repaired by a qualified workshop.
The interior monitor of the anti-theft alarm* system will only function as intended ifthe windows and the sun roof• are closed.
Set of keys
Fig. 33 Keys s uppli ed wi t h the vehicle
Remote control key or convenience key
The convenience key is a remote control key with special functions Q page 45, Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the convenience key and c::> page 88, Vehicles with convenience key. The remote control key will lock and unlock the car via the central l ocking system and start the engine . Press the release button ¢ Fig. 33 -arrow- to make the key spring out of the handle and to fold it back in .
Number of keys
You can check how many keys are initialised for your vehicle using the MMI*. Thi s feature enables used car buyers to make sure they have received all of the keys. Select: control button Systems or Car systems > Servicing & checks > Initialised keys .
Replacing a key
If you shou l d Los@ a k@y, pl@ase contact an
Audi dealer. Have the remote control coding for that key deactivated . For this purpose you shou ld bring all available keys with you . It is also important to notify your in surance company if a key has been lost . .,.
Door s and window s 43
LED and battery in remote control key
Immobiliser
The immob i liser is designed to prevent unauthorised persons from driving the vehicle . It may not be possible to start the engine if there is another radio transm i tter (e.g. an ign i tion key for another vehicle or a transponder) on the same key r i ng.
Data s tored on remote control k e y or convenience key
Data related to the service and maintenance of the vehicle are stored continuously on your remote control key or conven i ence key*. Your
Aud i dealer can read out the data and will the n be able to tell you what service work is required.
A
WARNING
-Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle - even if you only i ntend to be gone for a short time. This is especially impo r tant if children are left i n the car. They might otherwise be able to start the engine o r use power-ope r ated equipment such as the electric windows this could l ead to injuries.
Wait for the vehicle to come to a standst i ll before remov i ng the ignition key from the Lock. Otherwise the steering lock could engage suddenly, causing an accident.
@
Note
The funct i on of the remote control key may be impaired by interference from other nearby rad i o signa l s (for example from a mobile telephone or TV transmit t er) if t hese are in the same freque n cy range.
Fi g. 3 4 Remote contro l key: LED
Fi g . 35 Remote contro l key: Opening the cover
LED on remote control key
T he LED~ t h e buttons . lights up w h en you press
.... The L E D should flash once when you p ress one of the but t ons briefly.
.... The L ED should flash repeated l y when you press and hold one of the b u ttons (convenien i ce open/close*).
.... If the LED does not flash, the battery in the remote cont r o l key is flat. In addition, the ind i cator lamp
Ill may light up and the message Please change key battery may appear on the instrument cluster display. Repl a ce t h e battery.
Rep n acing the battery for the remote control key
..
Use a coin to lever off the cover ¢
Fig. 35 .
.... Insert the new battery with the "+" symbol faci n g up .
.... Press the cover back onto the key until it clic k s into p l ace.
We recommend having the battery changed by a qua li fied workshop if required. ..,..
44 Doors and wind o w s
@
For the sake of the environment
Used batteries must be disposed of appropriately and must not be discarded with ordinary household waste .
(D
Note
The new battery must be of the same type as the original one.
Synchronising the remote control key
If the remote control fails to lock or unlock the vehicle, it will be necessary to re-synchronise the system .
• Press the ~
• Unlock the driver's door within 30 seconds by turning the key in the Lock .
• Press button ~ l©J .
Locking and unlocking the vehicle by remote control
boot lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the car. T his function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked ifthe un l ock button is pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you press and hold the
G!I button for one second o r ~onger .
On vehicles with the security central locking feature (for unlocking one side of the vehicle only) ¢ page 46, you can unlock just the driver's door and the tank flap by pressing the
~ button once, o r the whole vehicle by pressing the button twice .
.&_
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) i n the car if it is locked from the outside and the safe lock mechanism* is activated: the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Fig. 36 Remote control key/convenience key: Buttons
• To unlock the vehicle, press the ~
Q Fig . 36.
•T o lock the vehicle, move the selector Lever to position P (automatic gearbox) and press t h e button
¢
&,
.
•To unlock the boot lid, press the ~ briefly .
• To lock the vehicle without activating the safelock mechanism*, press the ~ second time w i thin 2 s ec o nd s.
• To open the boot lid, press the
G!I button for at least one second .
The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of the doors or the
Applies to vehicles with start/stop system arnd I START ENGINE STOP I* button: The i gnition remains on when the start/stop system stops the engine . Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the ignit i on is switched off
Q page
89.
Otherwise it will not be possible to lock the vehicle .
© Note
Do not use the remote control key/convenience key when the vehicle is out of sight .
For further fu n ctions of the remote control key/convenience key, p l ease refer to
Q page 51, Convenience open I close funcVon.
locking and unlocking the vehicle with the key
If the central locking system should fail to operate, the driver's door can still be locked and unlocked by turn;ng the key in the lock.
Fig . 37 Drive r's door l ock
... To unlock the driver's door, turn the key to the unlock position @ .
... To lock the driver's door, move the se l ector lever to position P (automatic gearbox) and turn the key to the Lock position ® once
9 _& .
... To lock t he vehicle withou t activating the safelo c k mechanism*, t urn the key to the l ock position ® a second time within 2 s e c · ond s.
In o r der to sw i tch off the anti-theft alarm*, you must switch on the i gnition within 15 seconds afte r opening the driver's door. Other wise the alarm will be triggered.
The system will unlock either the whole vehicle or one door only, depending on the settings you have chosen on the driver informa tion system * CMMI") ~ page 46.
&.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially child r en) in the car if it is locked from the outside and the safelock mechanism * is activated: the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance i n an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Door s and window s 45
CD
CAUTION
Ap p lies to vehicles with start/stop system and I START ENGINE STOPI* button : lhe Ignit i on remains on when the start/stop s ystem stops the eng i ne. Before Leaving the vehicle, ensure that the ignit i on is switched off~ page 89 . Otherwise it w i ll not be possib l e to loc , k the vehicle .
(D
Note
For further functions of the remote control key/conven i ence key, please refer to q page 51
,
Convenience open I close function . locking and unlocking the vehicle with the convenience key
Applies to vehicles : with convenience key
The front doors and the boot lid can be locked and unlocked without handling the remote control key.
Fi g. 38 D river's door: Locking vehicle wi th convenience key
... To u nlock the door automatically, take · ho l d o f the driver's/front passenger's door !handle !=?
Fig. 38 .
... Then p ull the door hand l e to open the door .
... To unlock/open the boot, p r ess the release catch on the boot lid ¢ page 49 , Fig. 42.
... To lock the vehicle, move the selector lever to position P (automat i c gearbox), close the door and touch the sensor on the dr i ver's door handle once q
_& . Do not take hold of the door handle while doing so .
... To lock the vehicle without activating the safelock mechanism*, touch the sensor on
IJJ>
46 Doors and window s the driver's door handle a second time w i th · i n 2 se cond s.
The vehicle can be locked/unlocked from the front doors and boot lid only. The remote con· trol key has to be within a range of about
1.5 metres of the relevant door or the boot lid . It does not matter where you carry the key, for instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or in a handbag or briefcase.
The locking function may be affected if you grasp the door handle while the vehicle is be ing locked.
Once the doors have been locked, they cannot be opened again immediately. This will enab l e you to check that the driver's door is properly closed.
The system will unlock either the whole vehi· cle or one door only, depending on the settings you have chosen on the driver information system* (MMI*) ¢ page 46.
A
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the car if it is locked from the outside and the safelock mechanism* is activated: the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
CD
CAUTION
Applies to vehicles with start/stop system and
I
ENGINE STOPI* button: T he ignition remains on when the start/stop system stops the eng i ne. Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the ignition is switched off ¢ page 89. Otherwise it wi l l not be possible to lock the vehicle. i Note
Please note the following points if the vehicle ls left parked for long periods:
To save electrical power, the proximity sensors are switched off after a few days.
You will then need to pull the door handle once to unlock the vehicle, and a second time to open it.
To prevent the battery from becoming discharged and thus maintain the vehicle's starting ability for as long as possible, the power management system will gradually switch off convenience functions that are not required. In this case you may not be able to unlock the vehicle with this convenience function.
Security central locking
Applies to vehicles: with security central l ocking
The security central locking feature allows you to unlock only the driver's door and the tank f lap. All other doors and the boot lid rema i n locked.
Unlocking driver's door and tank flap
• Press the ~ key/convenience key
once
or turn the key to the unlock position
once
.
Unlocking all the door s , the boot Lid and the tank flap s i multaneously
• Press the ~ key/convenience key
twice
within 5 seconds or turn the key to the unlock position
twice
within 5 seconds.
The safelock mechanism* and the anti-theft alarm* are deactivated immediately even if you unlock only the driver's door, without unlocking the other doors.
You can change the settings for t he se c urity central locking system d i rectly on vehicles with MMI* ¢ page 46.
Adjusting the settings for the central locking system
Applies to vehicles: with driver information syst e m
You can pre-select particular settings in the
MMI* or sound system .
On the sound system or MMI*, you can select whether the vehicle is automatically locked at speeds above 15 km/h ("Auto Lock"). In additio n , you can control whether or not the ..,..
exterior mirrors fold i n when you l ock the ve hicle.
Settings for unlocking doors ( on vehicles with MMI )
You can specify which doors you w ish to have unlocked when you unlock the vehicle.
.,. Select: Control button Systems or Car sys tem s > Vehicle se tting s > Central locking >
Unlock doors .
If you select off / all , the whole vehicle will be unlocked when you press the!m b ut ton on the remote control key.
I f you select on / driver , only the driver's door will be unlocked when you press the~ on the remote contro l key o n ce. On vehicles with convenience key, on l y one front door will be un l ocked (whichever door you grip by the handle). If you press the lliJ button twice, the who l e vehicle will be unlocked. The whole vehicle is always locked when you press the ~ button.
Auto Lock setting (o n vehicles with sound system)
.,. Select: I
SETUP
I button> control button !
Central locking > Lock when driving .
If you have selected this function, the whole vehicle is locked automatically when it reaches a speed of lS km/h .
Auto Lock setting (on vehicles with MMI)
... Se l ect: Cont r ol button Systems o r Car systems > Vehicle settings > Lock when driving.
If you select on , the who l e vehicle is lock e d automatically when it reaches a speed of
15 km/h.
Folding in exterior mirrors ( on vehicles with MMI)
.,. Select: Control button Systems or Car systems > Vehicle se ttings > Central locking >
Doors and windows 47
Fold mirrors . For more information, refer to
Q page 61, Adjusting the exterior mirrors.
If you select on the exterior mirrors will be folded in automatically when you press the lru button on the remote control key
Q page 61.
Unlock doors - You can select whether all doors o r only t he driver 's door are unlocked by the central locking system. The boot lid will also be unlocked if you select all. If you select driver on vehicles with convenience key•, only one door will be unlocked (whichever door you gr ip by the handle).
Wh en th e driver setting Is activated, you can s till unl ock a ll th e doors and the boot lid by pressing the [@] button on the remote control key twice.
You can still unlock the whole vehicle. To do so, press the ~ the remote control key/convenience key twice . Alternatively, if your vehicle has a key
Q page 42 , Fig. 33, turn the key in the door lock to the unlock position twice within 2 seconds.
If you press the ~ will be locked. At the same time you wil l hear an acoustic signal 1 ) .
Central locking switch
... To lock the vehicle, press the 1§1 button
Q
_&
,
.,. To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button
<:) Fig. 39 .
1l This function is not available on all export versions.
48 Doors and wind o w s
Please note the following when you use the centra l locking sw i tch to lock your vehicle:
The doors and the boot lid cannot be opened from the
outside
(for safety reasons, when stopped at traffic lights, etc.).
The LED in the central locking switch lights up when all of the doors are closed and locked.
- You can open the doors ind i vidually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
- In the event of an accident in which the airbags inflate, doors locked from the inside wi l l be automatica l ly unlocked to facilitate access and assista nee.
&
WARNING
The central locking switch is still operat i ve when the ignition is sw i tched off and will automat i cally lock the entire vehicle when the[@] button is pressed .
- The central locking switch inside the vehicle is not operative when the safelock mechanism is activated if the vehicle has been locked frorm the outside .
- Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potent i ally putting lives at risk. Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle.
Deactivating the interior monitor and tow-away protection
App l ies to vehfcles: with .anti·t h eft alar m system can prevent the alarm from being tr i ggered accidentally by switching off the interior mon· itor and/or tow-away protection.
... Switch off the i gnition and press the button c::>
Fig. 40
to deactivate the inter i or monitor and tow-away protection. The LED in the button will light up.
... If you now lock the vehicle, the interior monitor and tow-away protection wi ll remain deactivated until the next time a door is opened.
If you switch off the interior monitor and towaway protection, the safelock mechanism* is automatically disabled.
.&
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the car if it is locked from the outside and the safelock mechanism* is activated : the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially p u tting lives at risk.
locking the passenger's door and rear doors* manually
If the central Locking system should foil to work at any time, each door will have to be locked separately.
Fig. 40 Side trim in open driver' s door : Butto n for interior mon i to r /tow away protect i on
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be triggered if movements are detected in the interior (e .
g. by animals) or if the vehicle's inclination is changed (e.g
. during transport). You
Fig . 41 Locking . t h e door manually
The driver's door can be locked manually by turning the key in the door lock r::>
page 45.
The mechanical locking device for the other doors is located on the end face of the front passenger's door and the rear doors*. It is only visible when the door is open. ..,..
• Pull the cap out of the opening.
• Insert the key in the slot inside and turn it as far as the stop to the right (if the door is on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side).
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside. Pull the inte· rior door handle once to unlock and open the door.
Boot lid
Opening and closing the boot lid
Door s and window s 49
A_
WARNING
After closing the boot lid, a lw ays check t h at the catch has engaged properly. The boot lid could otherwise open suddenly when the vehicle is moving this could result in an accident.
- T he boot lid must always be completely closed when the vehicle is moving; otherwise toxic exhaust fumes can be drawn into the interior.
(D
Note
When the vehicle is locked, you can unlo ck the boot lid separate ly by pressing the~ button on the remote contro l key. Th e boot li d will lock automatically wh e n you close it aga in.
Manual release of the boot l
i
d
The boot Lid con be released manually f r om the inside.
Fig. 4 2 Boot lid : Opening {release catch }
-
Fig . 44 (A3/A3 Sportback) Detail of inside of boot lid:
Access to man u al release
F ig. 4 3 Boot lid/handle on Inside (example) : Closing
Opening boot
lid
• Press the ~ on the remote cont rol key for at least one second, or
• Press the release catch on the boot lid r:::>Fig . 4 2.
Clos
i
ng
boot
lid
• Pull down the boot lid by the handle on the inside and let it drop into the latch
Q
Fig . 43 r:::> £ .
F i g . 4 5 (A3/A3 Saloon) Detail of inside of boot lid : Access to manual release
To access the manual release mechanism, fold down the rear seat backrest
Q page 73. .,..
50 Doors and windows
The steps for manually releasing the boot lid vary according to the vehicle model.
Manual release (A3/A3 Sportback
)
• Use the blade of the ignition key to prise off the cover
<D
Q
Fig . 44 .
• Insert the key in the opening behind the cover @ and pull the key in the direction of the arrow until the boot is unlocked.
Manual release
(
A3 Saloon)
• Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool kit
Q page 236 . Use the flat-blade side of the reversible insert.
• U se the screwdriver to prise off the cover @
~ Fig. 45.
• In sert the key in the opening behind th e cover © and pu l l the key in the direction of the arrow until the boot is unlocked.
Child-proof catches
Mechanical child-proof catches
Applies to vehicles: with mechanical child·proof catches
The child-proof catches t prevent the rear doors being opened from the inside.
Fig. 46 Rear doors : Child proof catches
• To engage the child-proof catch turn the ignition key in the d i rection of the arrow.
• To disengage the child-proof catch turn the ignition key in the opposite direction of the arrow .
When the child proof catch is engaged, the inside door handle will not function, and the door can only be opened from the outside.
The child-proof catches only function for the door on which they were engaged .
Electric child safety switches
Applies to vehicles. with electric child safety switches (A3
Sportback/A3 Saloon)
The child safety switches disable the rear windows and prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside.
Fig . 47 Detail of dr i ver's doo r : child safety sw i tc h es
• To act iv ate the child safety sw it ches on the rear doors, press the l eft/right button m on the driver's door
Q
Fig . 47 . The LED in the button will light up.
• To deactivate the child safety switches on the rear doors, press the left/right button m on the driver's door . The LED in the button will go out.
The following functions are disabled by the child safety switches :
D oor handle on the inside of the corres p onding rear door,
- Electr i c window in the corresponding rear door,
To activate the child safety switches on both sides, you need to press them buttons on e after the other.
Driver message
IGl
Child-proof catch: system fault!
If this message appears, the child safety switches cannot be switched on . Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified . To prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside, engage the mechanical child-proof catches
Q page 50 . ~
.&..
WARNING
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle even if you only intend to be gone for a short time . This is e s pecially important if children a re left in the car. They might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment such as the electric windows - this cou l d lead to injuries .
Electric windows
Controls
The driver can operotf! all the electric windows .
Fi g. 4 8 Detai l of the driver's door : Co n tro l s (examp l e for A3 Sportback / A3 Sa l oon)
All electric windows have two stage s w itches :
Opening a window
"" Press the sw i tch as far as the first stop and hold it until the window has moved to the desired position .
"" Press the sw i tch br i efly to the second s top : t h e window will automatically open all the way .
Closing a window
"" Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the window has moved to the desired position .
"" Pull the switch briefly to the second s top : the window will automatically close all the way.
Switches for ele c tric windows
@ Sw i tch <::> Fig . 48 fo r window in driver's door
Door s and window s 51
@ Switch for window in front passenger's doo r
©
Switch * for window in rear left door (A3
Sportback/A3 Saloon)
@ Switch* for window in rear right door (A3
Sportback/A3 Saloon)
®
Safety switch* (A3 Sportback I A3 Saloon)
Child s afety switch
When the safety switch ® <::> Fig . 48 is activated, the symbol ~ windiow switches in the rear doors are deactivated.
.&..
WARNING
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle- even if you only intend to be gone for a short time . This is especially important if children are left in the car. They might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equ i pment such as the electric wihdows this could lead to injuries . The window switches are only deactivated when the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened.
- Always be careful when closing the win dows. Careless use of the electr i c wind ows can cause severe injuries .
When locking the vehicle from the outside, ma k e s u re that nobody is ins i de the vehicle, as the windows cannot be opened from the ins i de in an emergency.
(!)
Note
The windows can be operated for about ten m i nutes after the i gnition has been sw i tched off . The window sw i tches are only deactivated when the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened.
Convenience open I close function
The convenience open/close function allows you to open and close the w i ndows and panor ama sun roof* conveniently from outside the vehicle v i a the central locking system. .,..
52 Doors and windows
Convenience open function
• Press and ho l d the
Im button on the remote control key until aU the windows and the panorama sun roof* have reached the desired position, or:
• First unlock the vehicle using the
Im button on the remote cont r ol key, then insert the key in the driver's door lock, turn i t to the
" un l ock" position and ho l d it there u ntil all the windows and the panorama s u n roof* h ave r eached the desired posi t io n .
Convenience close function
• Press and hold the
Im button on the remote control key until aU the windows and the panorama sun roof* are closed c::>
.&, , or
• Turn the key in the dr i ver's door lock to the lock pos i t i on and hold it there until a ll the windows and the panorama sun roof* are closed.
Convenience close function with convenience key*
•To u c h a nd k eep your hand in contact with t h e sensor * on one o f t he fro n t door h a n d les u nt i l a l l the w i ndows and the p anorama su n roof* are closed . Do not rest your hand on the door handle while this is happening.
Adjusting settings for convenienc e op e n function via MMI*
• Select : IM
ENU
I button > control button Sys tems or Car system s > Vehicle s ettings >
Central locking > Long press to open windows and/or Front windows on / off and/or
Roof on / off * .
A
WARNING
Take care when closing the windows and
the panorama sun roof*
,
Careless or un-
controlled use ca n cause injur i es.
- For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close functions w i th i n about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the w i ndows and the panorama sun roof* when pressing the button to close them. The windows and s u n roof stop mov i ng as soon as the button is released .
What to do after a malfunction
The one-touch open and close function must be reactivated if the battery has been disconnected
.
• Pull and ho l d t he electric window switch unt i l the window is fu ll y closed .
• Release the sw i tch and then pull it again for at l east one second.
Panorama sun roof
Description
Applies to vehicles~ wit h pano r a m a sun roof
Fi g. 4 9 Detail of headli n er : Button for panorama sun roof
The sw i tch operates i n two stages. Whenever the switch is pressed or pulled to the second stage, the sun roof automatically opens or closes all the way. The sun roof stops moving immediately ifthe sw i tch is pressed in any direct i on.
@ Tilting open and closed
• To ti l t the sun roof fu ll y open, brie f ly press the switch to the second posit i o n.
• To close the sun roof completely, briefly pull the switch downwards to t h e second posit i on or brief l y slide t h e switch forwards to the second position c::>
.&.
.
• To set an intermediate position, press/pu ll the switch to the first position unt i l the sun roof has reached the des i red posit i on. IJI.
@ Opening and closing
... To slide the sun roof fully open, briefly slide the switch backwards to the second position .
... To close the sun roof completely, briefly s li de the switch forwards to the second posi t i on or briefly pull t h e switch downwards to the second position c::>
,&.
.
... To set an i ntermediate pos i tion, press the switch forwards/backwards to the first pos i tio n until t h e sun roof h as reac h ed t h e des i red pos i t i on.
A w i nd deflector i ncorporated in the panorama sun roof adapts automat i cally to suit the position of the sun roof. This feature minimi ses wind noise in all roof positions .
The panorama sun roof can be operated for about ten minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The switch is deactivated immed i ately when one of the front doors is opened.
Sun blind
The s u n blind can be opened and closed by h and when the panorama su n roof is open in a n y position. Th e sun blind can be adjusted to any intermed i ate pos i tion.
A
WARNING
Take care when closing the panorama sun roof. Careless or uncontrolled use can cause i njuries . For this reason, always take the ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle.
CD
CAUTION
You should always cl ose yo u r panorama sun roof when leaving the ca r. Sudden rain could seriously damage your car's in te r ior equipment, especially the on-board elec tronic systems.
(D
Note
Detai l s on the convenience open/close function ~ page 51.
The panorama sun roof can be opened on l y at temperatu r es above -20
·
c.
Doors and windows 53
Closing the panorama sun roof manually
Applies to vehicles: with panorama sun roof
If the panorama sun roof detects a resistance whi l e it is closing (e.g. caused by an object trapped in the mechanism), a safety cut-out will be tr i ggered and the roof will open again automat i ca ll y. If the roof will still not dose automat i ca ll y after you remove the object and operate the sw i tch agai n , you ca n use the safety cut-out override to close i t.
... After the sun r oof opens automatically, p ull and hold the switc h wit hi n 5 seconds unti l the s u n roof is closed.
If you r elease the sw i tch before t he panorama sun roof is fu ll y closed, it will open again automat i ca ll y.
54 Lights and vision
Lights and vision
Exterior Lights
Switching lights on and off
Fig. SO Dashboard : Li g ht s wi t c h w i th head li ght rang e c o n t r ol
Light s witch -'t;.·
Turn the switch c:> Fig. SO to the appropriate position . The corresponding symbol lights up when the lights are on .
0 Lights off . On vehicles for some ma r kets , the daytime running lights• are sw i tched on and off together with the ignition.
AUTO* - The automatic headlights switch on
(and off again) automatically according to the ambient light conditions (for instance at dusk, in the rain or in a tunnel) . On vehicles with integrated daytime running lights*, the daytime running lights or the dipped headlights (different versions for different countrie s ) are switched on autom a tically, depending on the ambient light level.
: o o: Side lights
~D Dipped head l ights
When you lock the vehicle, the lights are controlled as follows, depending on the position of the light switch:
~D Dipped headl i ghts: The exterior lights are switched off completely.
AUTO * : The coming home* function is switched on c:> page 59.
Front and rear fog lights
Press the corresponding switch c:> Fig . SO: iD -
Front fog lights
0$ Rear fog light(s)
AU weather lights*
Applies to vehicles with LED headlights
Press the button c:> Fig . 50 :
~C>
-
All-weather lights (in place of the front fog light switch
~D.)
On vehicles with all-weather lights, the front lights are adjusted automatically so that the head l ights on your own vehicle do not blind you, for instance when driving on a wet road.
Headlight range control
~D
Your vehicle is equipped with a headlight range control to prevent oncoming traffic from being dazzl e d when the vehicle is heavily laden.
On vehicles with xenon headlights* or LED headlights*, the headlight beam settings are adjusted automatically (even during braking and acceleration).
On vehicles with halogen headlights, the knob c:> Fig. 50 must be used to adjust the headlight beam settings:
- Briefly press the knob to release it.
Turn the knob towards 3 or 0 to reduce or increase the range of the headlights.
Briefly press the knob again to engage it .
0 One or two front occupants, luggage com partment empty
1 - All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty
2 - All seats occupied, l uggage compartment loaded
3 Driver only, luggage compartment loaded
Audi adaptive light*
The adaptive light is activated only wh i en the light switch is set to AUTO. You can deactivate the adaptive light on the MMI* c:> page 58.
When the lights are on, they are automatically adapted to bends in the road, dependiing on the speed of the vehicle and the steering ._
wheel angle. This feature prov i des better i llumination when you drive through a corner.
The system is active at speeds from approx i mately 10 km/h to 110 km/h.
Static co rne ri ng light (turnin g light )* (on vehicles with adaptive light) the turning light is automatically activated when the steer ing wheel angle · exceeds a specified value
(up to about 70 km/h) or when the turn signals are switched on Cup to about 40 km/h).
This feature provides better illumination at the side of the vehicle when you turn off at a junction .
Speed-dependent light d istri bution* The speed-dependent light distribution adjusts the vehicle lighting as required in towns, on motorways and on other main roads. Intersections can a l so be illuminated if your vehicle is equ ipp ed with a navigation system * .
Motorway light function
*
(On vehicles with adaptive light or LED headlights) - this function adjusts the vehicle lighting on motorways according to your speed.
_& WARNING
The automatic headlights* are only intended to assist the driver. The driver must a lway s ens u re that the headlights are used when required, and may have to switch them on manually when the light conditions or visibility are poor. For example, the light sensors are not able to detect fog. Therefore, you should always switch on the dipped headlights ~Di n these conditions and when driving after dark.
~ 1
Observe all relevant statutory requirements when using the lighting systems described here.
CD
CAUTION
To avoid dazzling the traffic behind you, the rear fog light shou ld only be used in accordance with statutory regulations.
Lights and vision 55
(D
Note
The light sensor for the automatic headlights* is located in the mounting for the interior mirror. Do not affix any stickers on this sect ion of the windscreen.
Some of the settings for the exterior lighting can be adjusted ~page
A buzzer will sound if you switch off the ignition and open the door when the exterior lighting is on.
On vehicles for some markets, the rear lights remain off when the daytime running lights are switched on.
In cool or damp weather, the inside of the headlights, turn signals or rear li'ghts can sometimes mist up, due to the temperature difference between the interi or and exterior of the car. They sho uld clear again partially or comp l ete ly soon after you switch on the headlights. This phenomenon has no influence on the life expectancy of the vehicle Ug hts.
If you are towing a trailer or caravan equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a factory-fitted towing braclket , only the rear fog light on the trailer or caravan will light up.
Turn signal and main beam lever
The turn signal lever also operates the main beam headlights, parking lights and headlight flasher.
Fig. 51 T urn signal and ma .
i n beam headlight lever
56 Lights and vision
Turn signals¢
c:>
and parking lights
pE-
The turn signals wil l flash if you move the lev er while the ignition is switched on . The park in g light will come on if you move the turn signal lever while the igni tion is s witched off.
@ -Turn signals/pa r king lights (right side)
@ -Turn signals/parking lights ( l eft side)
If you just tap the lever, the turn signals w i ll flash three times (one-touch signalling).
Main beam and headlight flasher
~D
Move the lever to the appropriate position:
@ -Ma in beam headlights on (ve hicles with main beam assist*~
page 56,
vehicles with adapt iv e headlight range control*
~pag e 57)
© -Main beam headlights off or headlight flasher
The indicator lamp
II up i n the instrument cluster.
8,.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers.
Risk of accident! Never use the main beam
1 headlights or the headlight flasher If they could dazzle other drivers.
@ Note
A buzzer will sound if you open the door when the parking light is on .
Main beam assist
Applies to vehicles: wit h main beam assist
The main beam assist automatically switches the main beam headlights on or off depending on the surrounding light conditions.
Fig. 52 Turn s ignal and main b ea m lever: Switching ma i n beam assist on/off
Fig. 53 Instrument cluster : Indicator lamp fo r main beam assist
Activating the main beam assist
Important : The light sw i tch must be set to
AUTO, the dipped beam headlights must be on and the main beam assist must be activated on the MM!*
page
58 .
• Push the lever to position @ to activate the main beam assist. The indicator lamp
El will Light up in the instrument cluster display ¢ Fig.
53
and the main beams will be switched on/off automatically. An indicator lamp
II up when the main beams are switched on .
Switching the main beams on/off manually
If the main beams are not switched on or if the headlights are not dipped as expected, you can control the dip function manually: ..,.
•T o switch on the main beams manually, push the lever to position (!) . The indicato r lamp . will light up. To dip the headlights again, pull the lever to position @ .
• To dip the headlights manually after the main beams have been switched on automatically, pull the lever to position @ .
Flashing the headlights
• Pull the lever to position @ to flash the headlights when the main beam assist is ac tivated. The main beam assist wi ll remain activated.
Driver messages in the instrument cluster display llJ
Main beam assist : system fault!
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified. You can still switch the main beam headlights on and off manually . llJ
Main be a m a ssi s t : currently unavailable.
No camera view
The camera vision is impaired, e.g. by stickers or dirt.
The sensor is located between the interior mirror and the windscreen . Do not affix any stickers on this section of the windscreen.
&_ WARNING
The main beam assist is only intended to assist the driver. The driver must always ensure that the headlights are used when required, and may have to switch them on or off manually, e.g. when the light conditions or visibility are poor. In the fo ll owing s it ua t ions manual intervention may be necessary:
Hazardous weather conditions such as fog, heavy rain and snow or water splashes.
Roads on which oncoming traffic is partially concealed (e .
g . on motorways).
I ndiscernible road users (e.g. cyclists with poor lighting)
Tight corners, steep hill crests or valleys
- Poorly lit towns
Lights and vision 57
H ighly reflective objects, such as road s i gns
Windscreen misted up, dirty, frosted or covered by stickers in front of the sensor
Adaptive headlight range control
Applies to vehicles: w ith adaptive headlight range control
The adaptive headlight range control automatfrally regulates the cone of light emitted by the main beam headlights depending on the ambient surroundings.
0
.., q
::c
~
F i g . S4 Turn signal and main beam lever : Sw i tching adaptive headlight range control on / off
A camera (located in the mounting for t h e interior mirror) detects light sources from other road users. The vertical and horizontal range of the headlights is varied smoothly and virtually steplessly between dipped and main beams. The system controls the activation/deactivation of the main beams depending on how far away the traffic is on either side of the road.
Activating the adaptive headlight range control
I mportant: The light sw i tch must be set to
AUTO and the main beam assist function must be activated on the MMI*
Q
page 58
.
• Push the lever to position (!) to activate the adap t ive headlight range control. The indicator lamp llJ will light up in the instrument cluster display and the main beams will be switched on/off automatically. The in d icator lamp . is lit when the main beams are partially or fully on. ~
58 Lights and vision
Switching the main beams on/off manually
I f the main beams are not switched on or if the headlights are not dipped as expected, you can control the dip function manua ll y:
... To switch on the main beams manually, push the lever to pos i tion (D . The indicator lamp ml will light up. To dip the headlights again, pull the lever to position @ .
... To d i p the headlights manually, pu ll the l ever to position @ .
Flashing the headlights
... Pull the lever to position @ to flash the headlights when the adaptive headlight range cont r ol is activated. The adaptive headlight range control remains activated.
Do not affix any stickers to the windscreen in the vicinity of the camera.
Driver message in the instrument cluster display ml
Main beam assist: system fault!
D rive to a qu alified wor k sho p soon and h ave the faul t rec t ified . You can s t i ll swi t ch the main beam headlights on and off manually. ml
Main beam as s ist : currently unavailable.
No c a mera view
The camera vision is impaired, e.g. by stickers or di r t .
The senso r i s located between t he i nte r ior mirror a n d the w i ndscreen. Do not affix a n y stickers on this section of the winds c reen .
A
WARNING
Th e a dap ti ve h eadlig h t range con tro l is o n ly i nte n ded to assist the dr i ver. T he driver m u s t always ensure that the headlights are used when r equired, and may have t o sw i tch t h em on or off manually, e.g
. w h en the light conditions or visibility are poor .
In the following situat i ons manual intervention may be necessary:
Hazardous weather cond i tions such as fog, heavy rain and snow or water splashes.
Roads on which oncom i ng traffic is partially concea l ed (e.g
. on motorways).
Indiscernible road users (e .
g. cyclists with poor lighting)
T i ght corners, steep hill crests o r valleys
- Poorly lit towns
- H ighly reflective obje ct s, such as ro ad signs
- Wi ndscreen misted up, dir t y, frosted or covered by stickers in front of the sensor
@ Note
The range of the headlight beams w i ll be adjusted automatica l ly when traffic in front is detected on either side of the r oad.
This prevents yo u from dazzling other road use r s .
Adjusting the settings for the exterior lighting
You con change the settings for these functions on the sound system/
M
M!*.
Vehicles with soun d system *
... Press the l sETUP I button.
... Select lights using the contro l button ~ .
Vehicles with MM!*
... Select:
I
MENU
I button > control button Sys · tern s I Car system s > Vehicle settings > Ex· terior lighting .
Automatic headlights
The following sett i ngs are ava il able in the Automatic headlights menu:
Activation time - You can determine how soon t h e lig h ts are switched on by using the settings early , medium or late to adjust the sens i tiv i ty of the light sensor .
Main beam a s sist * You can switch the main beam assist* or adaptive headlight ra n ge control * on and off . .,._
Audi adapt i ve light * - You can sw i tch the adaptive light on and off .
Coming home , leaving home*
The coming home fu n ction lights up the area round the vehicle after dark when the ignition has been switched off and the driver's door opened. To activate this function, select
Lights when getting out > on .
The leaving home function lights up the area round the vehicle after dark when the vehicle is unlocked. To ac t ivate this function, select
Lights when unlocking > on .
The coming home and leaving home functions are operationa l after dar k w h en the light switch is set to AUTO .
Daytime running lights*
In countr i es which allow the daytime running lights to be switched off/on, this can be done via the MMI*. In other countries, the daytime running lights stay on permanently.
Headlamp converter for driving abroad*
The asymmetric low beams of the headlights are designed to light up the near side of the road more intensely. On vehicles with LED headlights* or xenon headlight s * with turning light* , the headlight dip settings must be modified if you drive a right-hand drive vehicle i n a left-hand drive country, or vice versa. 0th· erwise you will dazz l e oncoming traffic. On vehicles w i th regular h alogen or xenon head· lig h ts, i t is not necessary to cha n ge t h e di p set ti ngs.
To avoid dazzling oncoming traffic:
On vehicles with LED headlights * or xenon headlights* with turning light*, the head l
amp converter must be activated. Press the
I MENUI button. Select> control button Systems I Car systems > Vehicle settings > Exterior lighting > e.g. Lights for driving on left .
Lights and vision 59
A message appears when the headlight settings have been changed:
Applies to left-hand drive vehicles:
Iii
Headlamp converter active for driv i ng on left. Range reduced!
Applies to right-hand drive vehicles:
Iii
Headlamp converter active for driving on right . Range reduced!
(D
Note
If th e head l a m p converter is activated, t hi s is displayed In the driver informatio n sys t em e v e r y t ime the ignition is sw i tched o n .
Hazard warning lights
F i g . SS Dashboard: Switch for hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to make ot h er road users aware of your vehicle in hazardous s i tuations.
.. Press t h e switch~ t o sw i tch the haza r d warning li g h ts on/off.
Wh e n y ou b r a k e ha r d, the brake li ghts flas h t o al e r t o t h e r road use r s to the haza r d. T h e h azard w arning lights a r e switched on automa t i ca l ly after an emergency stopl>. The haza r d wa rn ing lights are switched off automatica ll y when you drive off again.
You can use the turn signals to indicate a change of direction (or lane) even when the hazard lights are on. The hazard lights will be interrupted tempera rily. .,..
1l This function is not available on all export versions.
60 Lights and vision
The hazard warning lights also work when t he ignition is switched off.
Interior lights
Front / rear interior light s
Fig . S 6 Front headliner: Switches for Inter i or li ghts
(example) o r when the vehicle is tocked or the ignition i s switched on. T he lighting goes out automatical l ly after a few minutes if a door is le ft open.
Interior lights
Various optional lighting functions are available for the vehicle interior. The settings for certain functions can be adjusted on the
MMI * . Select: I MENU I button> control button
Systems I Car systems > Vehicle settings >
Background lighting .
Instrument lighting
The brightness of the lighting in the i
n
strument cluster and the centre console can be adjusted as required.
F i g . S 7 Rear headliner : LEO read i ng lights • (example)
Your interior lights may differ from the illustration, depending on the equipment in your vehicle.
~ Reading lights*
Press the ~ sw i tch the appropria t e reading light on/off.
~ Interior lights (manual)
Press the ~ switch the inter i or lights on/off.
§] Interior lights (automatic)
Press the ~ to control the interior lights automatically.
When the switch is on (in this case an LED in the §] button will be lit), the interior lighting comes on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is opened or the key is pulled out of the ignition. T he interior lighting goes out a few seconds after the doors are closed,
F i g . SS Instrument l i ghting
Important: The lights must be switched on.
• Briefly press the knob to release it .
• Turn the knob towards" " or"+" to reduce or increase the brightness of the lighting.
• Briefly press the knob again to engage it .
T he nee dl es and the dials i n t h e instrum e n t cluster are illum i nated when th e i gnition is on and the dipped headlights are off. The ill umination is automatically redu c ed as it becomes dark outside and is eventually switched off altogether. This function is intended to remind the driver to switch time. on the dipped headlights in good
Clear vision
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
F i g. 59 Driver's door: Adjuster knob for exterior mir rors (example)
Turn the kn ob to the appropriate posit i on:
Q/P I n these positions you can adjust the exterior m i rrors (left or right) by moving the knob in the desired direction.
£@-The mirrors are heated* (depending on the outside temperat u re and road speed) .
8 The exterior mirrors are retracted * .
Tilt function for front passenger 's exterior mirror*
The mirror can be slightly tilted automatically to provide a better view of the kerb when parking backwards. This feature is operational when the knob is in position P.
You can adjust the tilted mirror surface by moving the knob in the desired direction. This new position is automatically stored and assigned to the remote control key when you take the car out of reverse.
The mirror returns to its original position as soon as you drive forwards at over 15 km/h or switch off the ignition.
Folding mirrors in/out
To fold in the mirrors using the knob, turn i t to the position marked 8.
To fold the mirrors out, turn the knob to position Q, P or 0.
Applies to vehicles with MMI*: You can use the settings in the MMI to have the mirrors fold in when you lock the vehicle ~ 47. The mir-
Light s and vision 61 rors will then fold in when you lock the vehicle, and will fold out again when you switch on the ignition .
.&_
WARNING
Convex or wide-angle * exterior mirrors give a larger field of vision. However, they make objects look smaller and further away than they really are. If you use these mirrors t o estimate the distance to veh i cles behind you when changing lane, you could misjudge the distance. Risk of accident!
CD
CAUTION
Appli es to vehicles with elect ri cal l y ret r actable exterior mirrors•: If one of the m ir ror housings is knocked out of posit i on (e.g. when parking), the mirrors must be fully retracted with the electric control. You will hear a loud noise when t h e mirrors snap back into place. Do not r e adjust the mirror housing by hand, as t h is will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
- Applies to vehicles without electrically retractable exterior mirrors: If one of the mirror housings is knocked out of posit i on (e.g. when parking), it must be returned to its proper position by hand.
- Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, please make sure to ret r act the exter i or mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. Electric ally retractable exterior mirro r s must NOT be folded in or out by hand. Always u se the electrical power control.
Q)
Note
If
the electrical adjustment should fai
l to operate , both of the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
62 Lights and vision
Anti-dazzle setting
Your vehicle is equipped with a manual or automatic* anti-dazzle interior m ir ror.
The automatic an ti -dazzle mirrors do not darken if the interior lighting is on or the car i s in reverse gear.
Sun visors
(.._
____
)
Fig . 60 Au t oma t ic anti ·dazzle in te r ior mirror*
Manual anti-dazzl
1
interior mirror
• Pull the lever at the bottom of the mirror to ward s you .
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors*
• Press button @ . The indicator lamp @ will light up . The interior mirror and driver's exterior m i rror* will darken automatica l ly when bright light ( e.g
. from the headlights of a following vehicle) shines on the surface of the mirror.
A
WARNING
Electrolyte fluid can leak from a broken au tomatic anti-dazzle mirror. This fluid can cause irritation to the skin, eyes, a nd respi ratory organ s. Wash thoroughly with clean water should you come into contact with this flu i d . Seek medical assistance i f needed.
CD
CAUTION
Electrolyte fluid can leak from a broken automatic anti-dazzle mirror. This fluid can
damage plastic surfaces. Use a wet sponge
or sim il ar to remove the fluid as soon as possible .
@ Note
The automatic anti-dazzle mirror s may not function as intended if the light falling on the surface of the i nterior mirror is obstructed .
F ig. 61 Left s id e : Sun vi sor
The s un vi s or can be pulled out of its mounting and turned towards th e door @ .
The light* for the make-up mirror comes on automatica ll y when you slide open the mirror cover @ .
Windscreen wipers
Switching on the windscreen wipers
Fig. 62 Wi n dsc reen wiper le v er: Operating the w ind scree n w ip e rs (exa mple sho w s vehicle w i t h out re ar w in · doww iper l
..,
"'
0
~
Fig. 63 W indscreen wiper lever with rear w i n dow wip· er: Operating t he rear w ip er II>
Important: The ignition must be switched on.
Move the windscreen wiper lever to the appro priate position:
@ Front wipers off
CD -
Intermittent wipe. Move switch @ to the left or to the right to i ncrease or reduce the wiper delay interval. While a vehicle with light/ra i n sensor* is stationary, the windscreen wipers can be activated by pulling the lever briefly to position ® (the wipers are activated automatically when the speed exceeds about 4 km/h). The higher the sensitivity level for the rain sensor (i.e. the further switch @ is moved to the right), the sooner the windscreen wipers react to moisture on the wind screen.
@ Slow wipe
@ -Fast wipe
© -Single wipe. If you hold the lever i n th i s position, the wipers will switch from slow continuous wiping to fast cont i nuous wiping after a while.
® -Wash/wipe . The screen is given an extra wipe a few seconds later to remove any dribbles of water (if the vehicle is moving and the temperature is above approx . 4 °(). You can deactivate this function by moving the lever to position ® again within 10 seconds after the extra wipe. The extra wipe function is acti vated again the next time you switch on the ignition.
Headlight washers*. The headlight washer system* on l y operates when the dipped headlights are switched on. The headlights are also automatically washed! intermittently when you move the lever to position ® ·
Applies to vehicles with rear window wiper:
If the windscreen w i pers are on and in operation, the rear window wiper will also be switched on automatically when you engage reverse gear .
®
-
Rear wipe*. The rear window is wiped approximately every 6 seconds .
Li g ht s and v i s ion 6 3
0 -
Rear wash/wipe*. The number of wiper cycles depends on how long you hold the lever in position Q) .
@ Rear wiper* off.
A
WARNING
- The rain sensor is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still obliged to manually operate the windscreen wipers as required depending on visibility.
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such as Light rain, low sun or when driving at night these coatings can cause increased dazzle, which is a serious safety hazard. Such coatings can also caUJse the wiper blades to judder .
Poor visibility can cause accidents. Always ensure that the wiper blades are in good condition <:!> page 64, Changing the windscreen wiper blades.
CD
CAUTION
In icy conditions, check that the w i per blades are not frozen to the windscreen.
If i per blades are frozen to the windsc r een when you switch on the windscreen wipers, this could damage the wiper blades.
Make sure you switch off the windscreen wiper system (lever in position 0) before you use an automatic car wash. This will avoid Inadvertent triggering of the wi pers and possible damage to the wiper system.
@
Note
The windscreen wipers are deactivated when the ignition is switched off. You can activate the windscreen wipers after switching the ignition on again by moving the windscreen wiper lever to any position.
Worn or dirty wiper blades can cause smearing on the g l ass. This can also im pair the effectiveness of the rain sensor.
Please check the wiper blades regularly. ..,.
64 Light s and vision
The windscreen washer jets are heated* when the ignition is switched on if the outside temperature is low.
If you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights, the wiper speed setting will automaticall y be reduced by one level.
You can switch t h e rain sensor on or off in the Driver assist menu on vehicles with MM!*.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean the wiper blades if the wipers leave smearing on the glass . Use a soft cloth and glass cleaning solution.
Windscreen wipers
... Set the wiper arms to the service position
Q poge 64 .
... Lift the wiper arms away from the glass.
Rear window w i per*
... Lift the rear wiper arm away from the glass.
_& WARNING
Dirty w i per blades can impair the driver ' s view - risk of accident.
CD
CAUTION
If the wipers still leave smearing on the glass after they have been cleaned, the wiper blades should be replaced i::> poge 64.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 6 4 Removing the wiper blades
Serv ic e po s ition I wiper change position
.,. To move the windscreen wipers to the service position, switch off the ignition and move the windscreen wiper lever briefly to position © i::> poge 62, Fig. 62.
.,. To move the windscreen w i pers back to their original position, switch on the ignition and move the windscreen wiper lever to position
@ c) page 62, Fig . 62.
Taking off the wiper blade
... Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
... Press the release button
CD on the wiper blade i::>
Fig . 64. Keep hold of the wiper blade while doing so .
... Take off the wiper blade i n the direction of the arrow .
Fitting the wiper blade
... Fit the new wiper blade into the mounting on the wiper arm @ . You should hear it engage in the wiper arm .
.,. Fold the wiper arm back down onto the windscreen .
.,. Switch off the serv i ce position again .
_& WARNING
For safety, the wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
-
CD
CAUTION
- The wipers must be in the service position before lifting them off the windscreen! Otherwise the wiper motor or the paintwork on the bonnet may be damaged.
Never drive your vehicle or operate the windscreen wiper lever while the wiper arms are off the glass in a raised position. The wipers will otherwise automatically return to their park position and may damage the bonnet and windscreen.
(D
Note
- You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to fix a cover over ..,.
the windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice.
You cannot activate the service position when the bonnet i s open.
Changing the rear wiper blade
Applies to vehicles: with r ear window wiper (A3/
A3 Sportback)
Fig. 65 Rear window w i per: Removing the w ipe r blade
Taking off the wipe r blade
• Lift the rear wiper airm away from the glass.
• Take hold of the wiper blade below the centre and pull the blade out of the retainer in the d i rection of the -arrow~ Fig. 65 . Keep hold of the wiper arm while doing so .
Fitting the wiper blade
• Press the mounting on the wiper blade into the retainer . While doing so, keep holding the plastic top end of the wiper arm.
• Fold the w i per arm back down onto the rear window .
A
WARNING
For safety, the wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
1
Lights and vision 65
66 Seat s a nd s t ora g e
Seats and storage
General notes
.&.
WARNING
The Safe driving chapter c::> page 152,
Safety first contains i mportant informa-
tion, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and observe for your own safety and the safety of your passengers.
1
Front seats
Manual adjustment of seats
the seat belt and airbag could fail to restrain the wearer properly in an accident, possibly leading to injury .
Electric adjustment of seats
Applies to vehicles: wit h electric seat adjustme n t
Fig. 66 Front seat: Manual adjustment
@ Seat forwards/backwards: L i ft the lever and move the seat.
@ -Thigh support*: Lift the handle and move the thigh support in or out.
® -Angle* of seat cushion: Pull/press the Lever.
© -Lumbar support*: Press the appropriate side of the button .
® -Seat height: Pull/press the lever.
@ -Backrest angle: Turn the knob.
_&.
WARNING
- Never adjust the front seats when the vehicle is moving this could l ead to an accident.
Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Careless or uncontrolled use of the seat adjustment can cause injuries.
Do not drive with the backrests of the front seats reclined too far as otherwise
Fig. 67 Front seat: Electr ic ad ju stment
@ Lumbar support: Press the appropriate side of the button.
®
-
Seat height: Press the button up/down.
To adjust the front of the seat cushion , press the front of the button up/down. To adjust the rear of the seat cushion, press the rear of the button up/down.
@ Seat forwa r ds/backwards: Press the button forwards/backwards.
©
-
Backrest angle : Press the button forwards/backwards.
@ -Thigh support*: Lift the handle and move the thigh support in or out.
A
WARNING
- Never adjust the front seats when the vehicle is moving t his could lead to an accident.
The electric seat adjustment also works when the ignition is off and when tihe key is not in the ignition . To avoid accidental i n juries, never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
- Be careful when adjusti n g the seat height. Careless or uncontrolled use of the height adjustment can cause injuries.
Do not drive with the backrests of the front seats reclined too far as othe r wise the seat belt and airbag could fail to ~
restrain the wearer properly in an accident, possibly leading to injury.
Easy entry function
Applies to vehicles. with eilsy entry function (A3)
The easy entry function facilitates access to the rear seats.
;:;
0
0
>
~
Fi g . 68 Driver ' s seat: Easy entry controls
Seats and storage 67
When using the easy entry function, always slide the seat all the way back to ensure that it locks in position. Do not drive the vehicle unless the seat is properly locked in position . i Note
If the seat does not lock properly in position after using the easy entry function, slide the seat all the way back as far as the stop. Then adjust the seat position as desired .
Front centre armrest
A pp li es to vehicles: wi th fr on l cen t re armrest
The centre armrest can be adjusted to several positions.
Fig . 69 Tips for using the easy entry feature, seat adjustment with memory function
Tipping the front backrests forward
.. Pull the lever @ c:> Fig. 68 forwards .
.. Fold the backrest down until it locks . Then take hold of the seat by the backrest and push it all the way forwards @ .
Returning front backrests to an upright position
.. T ake hold of the seat by the backrest and push it all the way back @ ~ 69 .
.. Move the backrest back into i ts upright posi tion until it engages @ .
The seat will then return to the position it was in before using the easy entry function.
&.
WARNING
For safety reasons the front seat backrests must be tocked while driving.
Fig. 70 Armrest between driver's seat and front passenger's seat
.. To adjust the angle, lift the armrest
Q
Fig . 70 until it engages in the desired position .
.. To l ower the armrest aga i n, lift the armrest slightly from the top click stop and then fold it back down. Then raise the armres t to the desired position if necessary.
You can move the armrest backwards or forwards .
There is a storage compartment underneath the armrest .
68 Seats and storage
Rear centre armrest
Applies to vehicles: with rear centre armrest
A storage compartment and cup holder are integrated in the armrest. head restraint as near as possib l e to this position .
... To raise or lower the head restraint, adjust the position of the head restraint until you fee l it click into place c:> Fig. 72.
Rear head restraints
Fig. 71 Rear armrest
Folding down armrest
... Fold the armrest all the way down .
Opening storage compartment
... Release the catch .at the top and lift the lid .
For information on how to operate the cup holders please refer to¢ page 70.
Head restraints
Front head restraints
App l ies to vehicles. with .a
dju stable head restraints
Fig. 72 Front seat: Adjust i ng standard head restraint
Applies to vehicles with super sports seats
(not illustrated): The head restra i nt is i ntegrated in the backrest and cannot be adjusted.
Adjusting standard head restraint
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is level with the top of your head. If this is not possible, t ry to adjust the
Fig. 73 Rear outer head restr~int : Release po i nt
Before carrying passengers on the rear seats, pull the head restraints on the occupied seats up at least one notch c:> ,&.
.
Adjusting head restraints
... To raise the head restraint, take hold of it on both s i des and move i t all the way up until you feel it click into place.
... To l ower the head restraint, press button @ r::::> Fig. 73 and slide the head restra i nt downwards.
Removing head re s traints
The backrest on the appropriate side has to be tipped forwards slightly in order to remove the head restraint .
... Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool kit c:> page 236 .
... Release the backrest c:> page 73.
... Press button @ c:> Fig. 73 and slide tihe head restraint upwards as far as the stop<=:?
,&.
.
... I nsert the screwdriver in the opening @ , press button @ and at the same time pull the head restraint out of the backrest c:> ,&.
.
.,. Push the backrest up until it engages securely ~ in Extending the luggage compartment on page 73. ..,.
Installing h e ad re strai nts
The backrest on the appropriate side has to be tipped forwards slightly in order to install the outer head restraints .
.. Release the backrest c)
page
73.
.. Push the posts of the head restraint into the guides until you feel them click into place. It should no longer be possible to pull the head restraint out of the backrest .
.. Push the backrest up until it engages securely c)
,&
in Extending the luggage compartment on page 73
.
A
WARNING
-
Please observe the important safety warnings ~page 156,
Correct adjustment of head restraints.
Remove the rear head restraints only if this is necessary in order to attach a child seat c)
page 158.
I nstall the head restraint again immediately after removing the child seat. Travelling with the head restraints removed or not raised increases the risk of severe injuries.
Ashtray
Applies to vehicles. with ashtray
Fig. 74 Front centre console: Ashtray
The ashtray is inserted in the centre console and can be placed on either the driver's or front passenger's side. Lift the lid to open the ashtray . Always put the ashtray safely back in· to the holder after removing it (e.g. after emptying it).
Seats and storage 69
A
WARNING
Never put waste paper in the ashtray, as this could cause a fire .
-
Cigarette lighter
A pplies to vehicles: with cigarette lighter
Fig . 75 Ce ntre console : Cigarette lighter
.. Press in the cigarette lighter.
.. When the cigarette lighter spr ing s out, pull it out completely.
The cigarette lighter should only be used as a power source in exceptional circumstances, e.g. for the compressor of the tyre repair kit.
A
WARNING
The cigarette lighter only works when the ignition is on. Improper use can cause serious injury or start a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle with the key.
CD
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the soc kets.
The cigarette lighter socket shou ld only be used for a short period of time as a power source for electrical equipment.
Please use the electrical sockets * in the vehicle when connecting equipment for longer periods.
1 Note
Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off will drain the battery.
7 0 Seat s and storage
Electrical socket
App l ies to vehicles: with e l ectrical socket
Electrical equipment can
be
connected to the
12
Volt
socket.
: ,.
--- ---
'
I I
-
(D
Note
Using electrica l appliances with the engine swi tched off will drain the battery.
Storage
Cup holders
Fig. 76 Centre console: 12 Volt soc ket (front/rear)
Fig. 78 Centre co n so l e: Front cup h olde r s
Fig. 77 Side trim in luggage compartment: 12 Volt socket• (example)
... Pull the dummy p l ug out of th e socket on the centre console¢ Fig . 76, or
... Open the cover of the socket in the l u ggage compartment* ¢ Fig. 77.
• Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the socket.
Electrical equipment can be connected to the
12 Volt socket . The appliances connected to the socket must not exceed a power rating of
120W .
A
WARNING
The socket will only work when the ignition is switched on. Improper use can cause serious injury or start a fi re . To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle with the key.
CD
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damagihg the sockets.
Fig. 79 Detail of the rear seat ben c h: Rear cup holde r *
Front c up holder
• Plac e your drinks in the holder ¢ Fig. 78.
Two drinks can be placed in this cup hold er.
You can also stow larger plastic bottles or similar in the compartments in the d oor trim .
Rear cup holder*
... To open t h e cup holder, lightly press the front of the cup holder ® ¢ Fig. 79 .
... To place a cup in the cup holder, swivel either of the arms @ outwards.
• Then press the arm t i ght against the cup.
• To close the cup holder, slide i t all the way back i nto the s l ot. ..,.
Se a t s and s torage 7 1
.&..
WARNING
-
Do not put any hot drinks in the cup holders while the vehicle i s moving . You could be scalded ifthe hot liquid is spilt .
- Do not use hard china cups or glasses.
These could cause injury in the event of
an acc
i
dent.
0
CAUTION
You should avoid putting open drinks containers in the cup holders. The drinks could otherwise spill over and cause damage to e.g. the electrical equipment or the seat covers .
@ Note
Further cup holders are located on either s ide of the r ear seats .
Carrier for car key and mobile phone
Applies to vehicles: with carrier
Fig. 80 F r on t ce n t r e c o ns ol e: C a rri e r
The carrier is suitable for stowing the follow ing items:
Car key while you are driving (on vehicles with convenience key*)
Mobile phone
The carr i er is in serted in the centre console and can be placed on e i ther the driver ' s or front passenger's side. Always put the carrier safely back into the holder after removing it .
Glove box
Fig . 81 Glove bo x
Opening/closing
"" To open the g l ove box , pull the handle in the direction of the arrow.
"" To close the glove box, s wivel the lid upw a rd s unti l it engage s .
.&..
WARNING
To avoid t h e risk of injur i es, always keep the glove bo x lid closed when driv i ng.
-
Further storage compartments
You wi ll find further storage compartments and retainers at various points in the vehicle:
In the top section of the glove box.
In t he centre console below the centre arm rest*.
At the front end of the right front s eat. This c ompartment c an hold o bject s weigh i n g up to 1 kg .
Coat hooks on the B-pillars .&.
.
A
WARNING
- Make sure that any items of clothing hanging from the coat hooks do not ob-
struct your view to the rea r.
Only
use the coat hooks for
li
ght items
of clothing and make sure that there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets.
Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as thi s could i nterfere with the function of th e head-protection air bags .
7 2 Seat s and storage
Roof carrier
Fig . 82 1) A3 , 2) A3 Sa l oon and A3 Sportback (w i thout roof railings) : Attachment points for roo f carrier
Fig. 83 A 3 Sportback wit h r oof railings : A ttachment points for roof ca rri e r
Note the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
- Only use roof carrier cross bars designed for your vehicle. T he cross bars form the basic elements of a complete roof carrier system.
Additional elements/ca r r i er systems are needed in order to transport luggage and sports equipment . We recommend using roof carriers and additional elements from the range of Audi Genuine Accessories.
The feet of the roof carrier cross bars must b e attached at the points provided on the roof ~ Fig. 82 I ~ Fig . 83 .
Applies to A3: The front attachment points
@ are only visible when the doors are open; the rear attachment points ® are marked by arrows on the top edge of the side window @ Fig. 82.
Applie s to A3 Sportback and A3 Saloon
(without roof railings): The front andl rear attachment points @ and © are on ly visible when the doors are open @ ~ Fig . 82.
Applies to A3 Sportback (with roof railings):
The attachment points are visible on the in side face of the roof railings
Q
Fig. 83.
The maximum permissib l e roof load for your vehicle is 75 kg. The load limit applies to the combined weight of the roof carr ier , the additional elements and the load itself. Please do not exceed the maximum carry ing load of the carrier s y st em you are using. For det ails of the maximum ax l e load s and m a ximum gross vehicle weight, refer to ~ 273.
_& WARNING
Note the fitting instructions provided by the manufacturer of the roof carrier system . If you do not secure the roof carrier system and roof load correctly, they can become separated from the vehicle and cause an accident.
The use of a roof carrier system affects the vehicle's handling by sh i fting the centre of gravity and incre asing suscept i bility to cross w i nds - ri s k of accident!
Take extra care when driving and adjust your speed accordingly.
CD
CAUTION
Please take care that the boot lid and panorama sun roof" do not come into contact with the roof load when opened.
@
For the sake of the environment
The increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel. For this reason you should always take off the roof carrier when it i s not in use .
Seats and storage 73
Luggage compartment
General notes
&.
WARNING
The Safe driving chapter c:>
page 152,
Safety first
contains important informa -
- ·
tion, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read an d observe for your own safety and the safety of your passengers.
Extending the luggage compartment
The backrests con be folded down separately or together.
Luggage compartment cover
Applies to vehicles: with luggage compartment cover
The luggage compartment cover blocks the view into the luggage comportment.
Fig. 84 Open boot lid with luggage compartment cov · er
Removing
• Detach th e cords © and pull the cove r ® out of the retainers @ in the direction of the arrows .
Install ing
• Pu s h the cover @ horizontally in to the retainers @ on the s i de trim until it engages.
• Attach the cords to the boot lid (!) ~
.
&.
WARNING
- The luggage compartment cover must always be fixed properly (risk of accident).
- The luggage compartment cover should not be used as a storage shelf. Items placed on this cover could cause injury in an accident or if the brakes are applied suddenly.
-
Fig. 85 Backrest : Release l ever (example of l eft s ide)
Folding down backrest
• Slide the head restraint(s) downwards
~ page
68.
• Press the release l ever @ in the direction indicated (arrow) .
• Fold down the backrest.
Returning backrest to an upright position
• Push the backrest up until it engages securely ~ ,&.
.
The red marking on the tab ® should no longer be visible when the backrest is properly secured.
&_ WARNING
Make sure that the rear backrest is securely locked in position so that the seat belt can provide proper protection on the centre rear seat .
The rear backrest must always be securely latched so that objects stored In the luggage compartment will not fly forward during sudden braking.
CD
CAUTION
If you need to adjust the front seats when either of the rear backrests is folded forwards, please take care to avoid damaging the rear head restraints. If necessary, remove the appropriate head restraints before you slide back the front seats.
-When returning the backrest to an upr i ght position, make sure that the seat
7 4 Seats and s torag e belts for the outer rear seats are no t caught up and damaged in t h e catches for the backrest.
Lowering the floor panel
Applies to vehicles: with lower able floor panel
You can lower the floor panel to increase the loading height in the luggage compartment.
.. P lease r e f er to the safety notes c::> page 163.
Stretch net
I
storage net
Applies to vehicles: with stretch net/storage net
The stretch net can be used to secure and ho l d light items in the luggage compartment.
F i g . 87 Luggage compartment: Location of fastening rings (example)
.. Use the fastening rings to secure the load
-arrows-.
Fig . 88 Luggage compartment : Stretch net attac h ed
(e>eample)
Fig . 86 Luggage compartment: Floor panel lowered
Depending on the equipment fit t ed on your vehicle, it may be possible to inser t the floo r panel lower down .
.. To lower the floor panel, first lift it .
.. Then pull the floo r panel back slightly and re-insert it lower down at position @ .
When you no longer need the extra height, you should return the floor panel to posi tion @ ; this will make it easier to l oad and un l oad normal i tems of luggage.
Fastening rings
App l ies L o vehicles: with fastening ri n gs
F i g . 89 Luggage compartment : Storage net hooked in place (A3/A3 Sportbaclc)
Stret
c
h net
.. T o sec ur e t h e stre t ch net, insert first the fro n t hooks and then t h e r ear hooks , of t h e st r etc h n et into t h e fasteni n g r i n gs -a r ro w s-
¢
F i g. 88 .
Storage net
App lies t o A3/A3 Sportback
.. To secure the storage net, insert t he t wo hoo k s into the fastening rings @ and attach the loops @ to the retaining hooks * © ·
_8
WARNING
T h e storage net will hold a ma x imum w eight of S k g. H eavier objects cannot be safely secured - risk of inju r y.
Retaining hook
Applies to vehicles: with retaining hooks
Seats and storage 75 load through hatch with bag
Applies to vehicles : with load·through hatch and remova· ble bag
The bag con be used to transport long items
(such as skis or snowboards) .
•
Fig. 90 Luggage compartme n t: Retaining hook (exam· ple of right side)
You can use the hooks to secure light items of luggage, such as shopping bags, etc .
..&.
WARNING
The retaining hooks must only be used for light items. Heavier objects cannot be safely secured (injury risk).
Reversible floor covering
Applies to vehicles : with reversible floor covering
The reversible floor covering protects the luggage compartment and the bumper against dirt and scratches .
Fig. 91 luggage compartme n t: Reversible floor cover· ing with backrest folded down (example)
You can use either the dirt-resistant or the decorative side of the reversible floor covering. When you are finished loading or unloading, fold the end of the reversible floor covering back in and close the boot lid. Fold away the reversible floor cover ing on ly when it is dry.
Fig. 92 Backrest: Cover of load · through h atch
Loading
.. Fold down the centre armrest in the rear seat.
.. Fold down the cove r of the load-through hatch ¢ Fig. 92 .
.. Push the bag (with the zip pointing towards the rear of the vehicle) through the hatch from the luggage compartment into t h e passenger compartment
Q
,&.
.
Securing the bag
.. Insert the fastening belt @ of the bag into the centre seat belt buckle @
Q
Fig. 93 .
.. T i ghten the fastening belt @ .
&
WARNING
~
- The bag must be secured in place with the fastening belt after it has been loa ded.
I
~
76 Seats and storage
M ake sure that all objects transported in the load-through hatch are secured. T hey can be catapu l ted through the passenger compartment in case of a sudden brak ing manoeuvre risk of i njury!
(j)
Note
- Fo l d up the bag only when it is dry .
If you are transpo r ting skis or snowboards, pull the fastening belt tight between the bindings.
Place skis i n the bag with their tips fac i ng forwards, snowboards and ski poles with their tips facing backwards.
Heating and cooling
Heating system
I
air conditioner
Description
One of the following sy s tems may be f i tted in your vehicle:
Heating and venti l ation system or
Manua l air conditioner* or
Automatic air conditioner•
The heating and ventilat i on s ystem heats and ventilates the vehicle interior . The manual or a utomatic ai r conditione r* coo l s and dehumidifies the a ir in s ide the vehicle . It oper a te s mo s t effect i vely with the window s and th e panorama s un roof* clo s ed. If the vehicl e has been standing in the sun, it may cool down faster If you op e n the windows briefly to Let the hot air escape.
The po ll ution filter removes impu r ities , such as dus t an d pollen, from the air.
@
For the sake of the environment
Switch off the cooling mode on the a ir conditioner* by pressing the
IAICI
button if
Controls for heating
/
ventilation system or manual air conditioner
A p plies to vehicles: with h eating/ventilatio n system or manual ai r co ndi tio n er
Heating and c ooling 7 7 you w i sh t o save fue l. This will a l so re d uce e m issions . The LED in the button will go out when the air conditioner is s witched off . The efficiency programme (on veh i cles with driver information system) show s how your fuel consumpt i on is being affec ted by aux ili ary equ i pment. In addition, it provides tips for improving fuel economy
~ page 31.
@ Note
Keep the air i n take s l ots in front of t h e w i ndsc r een clear of snow, i ce and leaves to ensure unimpaired heat i ng and cooling, and to prevent the windows misting over.
- Condensation can drip off the air cooling sy s tem* and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indi cate a leak.
If you notice, for instance, that the seat* or rear window heating is not wo r king, it may have been temporarily switched off by the power management f u nction.
These systems will be available again as soo n as suff i cient electrical power is available .
Fig. 9 4 H ea t l n g /v en t llat l on s y ste m o r m a n ual a ir condi t io n er * : Contr ol s
T he rotary controls a nd s witches are u s ed to control the functions. The LED in the corres pending button lights up when the function is sw i tched on. ..,..
78 Heating and cooling
The rear window heating ~ page 81 and seat heating Q] c) page 81 are described i n separate sections of this manual.
Manual air conditioner*
For a comfortable clima te inside the vehicle:
-
In the summer, a
d
just the temperature to
just a few degrees below the outside temperature
- Do not turn the blower up too high
Do not point the air outlets directly at the occupants
Use the "indirect" setting on the air outlets c> page 78
Key-coded settings
Certain settings will be automatically stored and assigned to the remote control key in use.
Heating and venti lat ion system : Seat heating (driver's side)
Manual air conditioner: Seat heating (driv er's side), I A1cl bu tt on.
I A!c
l
Switching air cooling* on / off
The air cooling system only works when the blower is switched on . When the air cooling is switched off, the air is neither cooled nor dehumidified. The windows may mist up as a result. The air cooling ls s w itched off automatically at low outside temperatures (below zero).
~ Adjusting the blower speed
You shou l d leave the b l ower on at a low setting to prevent the w i ndows from misting up.
To demist the windows, we recommend that you increase the blower speed and set the control to ~-
I
•
t e l
Selecting
the
temperature
The rotary control can be used to adjust the temperature in sma LL steps.
Adjusting air distribution and air outlets
The rotary control with symbols ~.~], [;!I and
~ i s used to adjust the a ir distribution . A sett ing between ~ usually provides a comfortable environment.
At the ~ the windscreen and side windows are defrosted or demisted as quickly as p ossible. The air recirculation is switched off, but can be switched on again manually by pressing the ~
.
The round air outlets in the dashboard can be adjusted ¢ page 81.
To prevent the front s i de windows from misting u p i n wet weather, we recommend opening t h e side a i r outlets, pointing them to the s i de and selecting the "spot" setting
¢ page 81.
Foot-level air outlets are provided underneath the front seats to heat the rear cabin.
~ Switching air recirculation on / off
In air recirculation mode, the air from the interior of the vehicle is filtered and reci r culate d . This setting prevents fumes etc . from entering the interior . We recommend switching on the air recirculation mode when driving through a tunnel or in traffic queues c:>
.&
.
The air recirculation mode is switched off when the control is in the defrost posi t ion ~ -
&
WARNING
For reasons of safety you should not leave t h e air recirculat i on sw i tched on for too l ong. This mode prevents fresh air from entering the vehicle, so the windows can mist over ifthe air cooling* is switched off.
Bad visib i lity can cause an accident.
Controls for automatic air conditioner
Applies to vehicles: with a u tomatic air conditioner
Heating and c ooling 79
Fig . 95 Au to m at i c a ir c o n d iti on er : Co n tr o ls
The rot a ry c ontrol s a re u s ed t o a dju s t the t emperature and blower s peed . The function s can be switched on and off by pressing the buttons. The LED in the corresponding button lights up when the function is switched on .
T he rear w i ndow heating ~¢ 81 and seat heating ~¢
81 are described i n separate sections of this manual.
Automatic air conditioner
We recommend pressing the IAU T O I button and setting th e t e mp e rature t o 22 °( ( 72 ° F ).
The a ir c onditioner i s fully a utomati c, a nd will maintain the de s ired t emperatu r e at a constant l evel. The temperature o f the air s upplied to the interior , the blower speed and the air distribution are regulated a u tomat i ca ll y .
When the heate r is on, the b l ower normally only switches to a higher speed o n ce the coola n t has warmed up suffic i en t ly (this d oes not apply to the defrost setting). Key coded set · tings : T h e automatic air conditioner sett i ngs are automatically stored and assigned to the remote control key which i s being used .
I A / C l Switching air cooling on / off
The air c ooling mode i s switched on/off when the I A!
C I button i s pre ss ed . When the a ir cool -
Ing I s s wit c hed off, the air is nei t he r c oo l ed nor dehumidified. The w i ndows may mist up as a result. The air cooling is switched off automat i cally at low o u tside temperatures (below zero) .
IAU T ol Switching automatic mode on / off
T he automatic mode is sw i tched on when the
IAU T OI b u tton is pressed . The AUTO mode is switc h ed off immediately when you operate any of the manual air controls. The automatic mod , e m a i ntains a con s tant temperature in s i de t he veh i cle. Air temperature , output and di s tribution ar e r e gulat e d a utomatically. The
" eco " mode•l l i s activated if you pre s s the
IAU TOI button br i efly whil e automat i c mode is active . Fuel is saved in "eco" mode * because the settings respond more passive l y . The
"eco" mode* is on when eco appears in the console display. The "eco" mode * is deact i vated when you press the I AU T O I button agai n . fi7*l
Selecting the temperature
T he tem p era tu re set t ing can be controlled i ndividually via the contro l s for the driver ' s and front: pa s senger's s i de. The temperature can be adju s ted between +16 ° C (+60 °F ) and
+28 °C (+84 ° F) . Out s ide thi s range, LO or HI will appear on the a i r condit i oner display . In ..,. l l T h i s fun ct i o n I s not a va ilable o n al l e xpo rt v e r s i o ns.
80 Heating and cooling the two extreme settings the air conditioner operates continuously with maximum cooling or heating output , and the temperature is not regulated automatically .
S yn c hr o ni sa t ion: By press i ng the I AUTO I button for 2 second s , the temperature of the passenger ' s side can be set to the temperature of the driver's side. The sett i ngs remain synchronised until the temperature is changed on the passenger's side.
~ Ad j u s ting the blower s peed
You should leave the blower on at a low set ting to prevent the windows from misting up.
You can adjust the blower speed manually.
Press the IAUTOI bu t ton for automatic contro l of the blower speed.
Adjusting the air distribution
Buttons ffil . [ill and ~ to adjust the air distribution . Press the I AUTO I button for automatic air distribution.
The round air outlets in the dashboard can be adjusted page 81.
To prevent the front side windows from misting up in wet weather, we recommend opening the side air outlets, pointing them to the side and selecting the "spot" setting
~ page 81.
Foot-level air outlets underneath the front seats and adjustable air outlets at the end of the centre console are provided to heat the rear cabin.
I @ MAXI Switching the defroster on/off
The windscreen and side windows are defrosted or demisted as quickly as possible . The air output is increased to maximum and most of the air comes out of the outlets below the windscreen. The air recirculation mode is deactivated. The temperature is regulated automatically. At setting ~ I A!
cl cooling mode is automatically activated depending on the ambient temperatu r e .
The defroster is switched off when the I AUTO I button is pressed.
[:;;] Swit c hing air recirculation on / off
The air recirculation mode can be switched on manually or automatically* .
To switch the manual air recirculation mode on/off, press the ~
. The LED is lit when the function is on .
- The automat i c* a i r recirculation function must be activated on the MMI. Select:
I MENU I button> control button S ys tems I
Ca r s ys tem s > A / C > Auto recir c ulation . The air quality sensor, which is designed for the detection of diesel and petrol exhaust fumes, automatically sw i tches the air recirculation mode on or off depending on the level of pollution in the outside a i r.
In air recirculat i on mode, the air from the interior of the vehicle is filtered and reci r culated. This setting prevents fumes etc. from entering the interior. We recommend switching on the air recirculation mode when driving through a tunnel or in traffic queues ~ .&.
.
The air recirculation mode is switched off when the ~
I AUTO I or button is pressed.
I f the engine is cold, the air conditioner will automatically switch to air recirculation mode when the vehicle is reversing.
.&.
WARNING
For reasons of safety you should not leave the air recirculation sw i tched on for too l ong. This mode prevents fresh air from entering the vehicle, so the windows can mist over if the air cooling is switched off .
Bad visibility can cause an accident.
Adjusting air outlets
Fig . 97 Air outlet : Adjusting a i r f l ow character . A) Diffuse . B) Spot
The following settings are possible c:> Fig. 96:
CD
Air flow i ntens i ty
@ Air flow direction
@ Air flow character (comfortab l e or vigo ro u s)
To adjust the air fl o w inten s ity , turn the ribbed outer adjustment ring
CD c:> Fig. 96. To shut off the air flow, turn the adjustment ring all the way to the right.
To adjust the air flow dire c tion , move the inside grille @ in the air outlet.
To adjust the air flow chara c ter , pull/push the centre a djustmen t ring @ c:> Fig. 96:
Diffuse air flow se t ting (indirect/comfortable @ ): Press the centre adjustment r i ng s li ghtly inwards c:> Fig. 97.
Spot a i r flow setting (d i rect/vigorous @ ):
Pull the centre adjustment ring slightly outwards c:> Fig . 97 .
Heating and c ooling 81
Rear window heating
The LED in the ~
(manua l air conditioner c:> page 77, Fig . 94, automatic air conditioner c:> page 79, Fig. 95) Is lit If the function is switched on. If rear window heating is activated w i th the ignition switched on, the
battery management dete
r
mines whether or
not the battery charge level is sufficient for the rear window heating to be switched on.
Otherwise the rear window heating operates when the eng i ne i s running, and switches off automat i cally after about 10 - 20 minutes, depending on the outside temperature.
To sw i tch on the rear window heating permanently, press and hold the ~ the in s cription REAR*) for at least two seconds.
This setting will be stored for approximately
15 minutes after the ignit i on is switched off .
Seat heating
App li es to vehicles: wit h s e at heat i n g
T he seat h eating has three l eve l s. T he heat level is indicated by an LED in each of the but tons (heating system/man u al ai r cond i t i one r c:> page 77, Fig . 94), (automatic air conditioner r:') page 79, Fig. 95) .
.. To switc h on the seat heating, press the
Q] button once.
.. To reduce the leve l , press the Q] button again.
.. To switch off the seat heating, press the
Q] button repeatedly unti l all the LEDs have gone out.
The seat heat i ng automatically switches from level 3 to level 2 after about 10 minutes .
When not to switch on the s eat heating
Do not sw i tch on the seat heating in the fo llowing situations:
- Seat is unused
A protective cover is fitted on the seat
A child seat is fitted on the seat
The seat is damp or wet
82 He ating and cooling
.&.
WARNING
People with limited capacity to feel pain or sense temperature could burn themselves when using the seat heating. These people must not use the seat heating risk of injury!
CD
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heating, please do not kneel on the seat or apply s.harp pressure at a single point.
@ Note
- The setting for the driver's seat heating is assigned to the key i n use.
- If the front passenger's seat heating was on when you las t switched off the ignition, it will be switched on automatically on ly if the ignition is switched on again within 10 minutes.
Supplementary h , eater
Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine
On cold days, the in t erior of the vehicle warms up more quickly with the supplementary electric heater. The supplementary heater is switched on automatically as required, depending on the sett i ng on the veh i cle heating system.
Applies to vehicles with MMI*: The "supplementary heater" function can be switched on/ off. Select: IMENU I button> control button
Systems I Car systems > A/C > Supplementary he ater .
Auxiliary heating/ ventilation
Description
Applies to vehicles : with auxiliary heat in g/ve ntil at i on
The auxiliary heating/ventilation system heats and ventilates the interior of the vehicle and can be used either when the engine is off or when dr i ving (for instance while the engine is warming up).
There are two ways to control the system:
Switching on/off manually - You can switch the auxiliary heating/ventilation on and off immediately either :
- via the MMI*
Q page 83, or
using the remote control c:) page 84, or
using the steering wheel button @
¢ page 30, Fig. 15 c:) page 30, Assigning a function to the steering wheel button on vehicles with multi-function steer i ng whee l
- The auxiliary heating/ventilation is switched off when the blower ~ sw i tched off via the A/C controls
Q page 79, Fig. 95 .
E i t h er the auxiliary heating or the auxiliary ventilation will be switched on, depending on the ambient temperature and the tern peratu re you have se l ected .
Switching on/off a utomaticall y (setting the timer) - You can use the timer to specify the t im e of day at which the temperature inside the vehicle is to reach the desired level. Your temperature setting and the ambient t emperature will then determine when the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation is switched on .
You can set three different timers
Q page 83 using the MMI* or one timer using the remote control
Q page 84.
Driver messages on the display ill
Auxiliary heating/ventilation : currently unavailable . Battery voltage too low.
If this message appears, the battery is not sufficient l y charged. In this case, the engine must be switched on in order to use the auxiliary heating. l!! Auxiliary heating/ventilation: currently unavailable. Not enough fuel.
To conserve fuel, the auxiliary heating cannot be switched on if the fuel level is low . ill
Auxiliary heating/ventilation: system fault! Currently unavailable
If this message appears, a system malfunction has occurred . Drive to a qualified work shop soon and have the fault rectified . II>
A
WARNING
- The au x i li ary heating must no t be allowed to run when the vehicle is i n a confined space because it can give off to x ic fumes.
To avoid any possi b le fire risk, never have t he auxiliary heating switched on when refuelling the vehicle.
Because of the high temperatures which occur when t he auxiliary heating is running, make sure when parking t he car that the exhaust ou tl et under the car is not obstructed in any way and that the exhaust gases do not come in to contact w ith flammable mate ri als (f i re r isk).
(0
Note
The auxiliary heat i ng/ventilat i on system heats/cools the interior to the temperature you last selected on the ai r cond itioner c:> page 79.
- A t low outside temperatures some visible water vapour may form in the engine compartment. This is a normal phenomenon, and no cause for concern.
The auxiliary heat i ng/ventilation will not switch on or w i ll switch itself off earlie r than intended if the battery charge or fuel l eve l is low.
Switching on/off immediately via MMI*
Applies to vehicles ; with auxlhary heating/vent i lat i on
F i g . 98 MM!
: Sw i tch i ng auxil i ary heating on/off immed i ately
.. To switch on the auxiliary heating/ventilation, select: I MENU I button> Systems I Car system s > Auxiliary heating > Switch on
Heating and cooling 83 auxiliary heating and turn the rotary pushbutton to select the desired running time.
.. To switch off the auxiliary heating/ventilation, select : I MENU I button > Systems I Car systems > Auxiliary heating > Switch off auxiliary heating . Or:
.. Switch off the blower ~ tioner or heater control console c:> page 77 ,
Fig. 94 or c:> page 79, Fig. 95.
T he HI symbol flashes on the air condit i oner console when the auxiliary heat i ng i s switched on. The air conditioner console i s illuminated when the auxiliary ventilation is switched on.
Th e aux ili a r y heat in g/ v en t ilat i on can be sw i tched on/off immediately even if a t i mer has been programmed.
Setting a timer via MMI*
Applies to vehicles with auxiliary heating/ventilation
Hdndbcd: I
Aux ili ary h eat in g
Switch on auxiliary hea ting
Timer 1: Mo 01.01. 9:10 ~
Timer 2· Mo 21.10 9: 11
Timer 3: Mo 20.06 10: 12
Program timers
•
Car syste'lls
Status not active
F i g. 9 9 MMI : Sett i ng a timer
Set the departure time i n the timer. The vehicl e will be h ea t ed (in cold weather) or ven ti late d (i n hot weather) so that the des i red interior temperature is reached by t h e time specified i n this sett i ng.
Setting the heating effect
.. If you want the auxiliary heating to defrost the windows, select: I MENU J button> Systems I Car systems > Auxiliary heating >
Program timers > Heating effect > defrost.
.. If you want the auxiliary heating to defrost the windows and heat the vehicle, select :
I MENU I button > Sy s tem s I Car s ystems >
~
84 Heating and cooling
Auxili a ry heating > Program timers
Heating eff ec t > warm .
Setting the timers
• Select:
I
MENU
I button> Systems I Car systems > Auxiliary heating > Program timers
>e.g. Timer 1: departure .
• Set the time and d ate.
• To activate the timer, press the I BACK I button to go back one level.
• Use the rotary pushbutton to confirm the setting and activa t e the timer. A./ will appear in the box on the right <::) Fig . 99.
The departure time specifies when the vehicle interior is to reach the desired temperature.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation sw it ches off automatically about 10 minutes later.
After the departure time expires, the next calendar date is automatically entered on the
MMI. To activate the auxiliary heating/ventilation for the following day, you then only have to confirm the setting (by setting a ./on the
MMI <::) Fig. 99) . i Note
To ensure that the timer operates correctly, check that the correct time and date are entered in the MMI settings.
Please refer to the operating manual for your MM! system for details of how to set the date and time.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be switched on/off ummediately even if a timer has been programmed. This has no effect on the programmed timer setting as long as the a uxiliary heating/ventilation is not switched off manually during the programmed period.
Using the remote control to set the auxiliary heating
Applies to vehicles: with auxiliary heat1ng/vent1lat1on
F ig. 100 Remote contro l for aux il iary h eating: © switch in g on lmmedlately @ settlng the t i mer
Selecting a menu
• Press the ~ on the remote con trol.
• You will see the symbols Ill and~ the left side of the display. The arrow po i nts to the selected menu. To change menus, press the ~
Switching on immediately
• Select the Ill menu (!)
Q
Fig. 100.
• To increase/reduce the running time, press t h e
0 or
8J button.
• To confirm the running time, press the l
oK
I button. The
T symbol will flash while the data are being transmitted to the vehicle .
• When the data have been successful l y transmitted and the aux ili ary heating/ventilation h as been switched on, the time setti n g and the ill symbo l will appear. The remote control sw itch es off automatically after a few seconds.
Setting the timer
• Select the© menu @ .
• Enter the hour, minutes and date, one after the other . Confirm each entry with the !
OKI
button. When you confirm the la st en t ry, the
T symbol will flash and the data will be transmitted to the vehicle.
• When the data have been successfully transmitted, the time setting and the
0 symbol will appear . The remote control switches off automatically after a few seconds. ~
Checking I clearing the settings
"' To check the settings, press the ~
"' To clear the sett in gs, confirm the query Ill
OFF? or~ with the l oKI button.
The timer sett ing s entered on the remote control are displayed as Timer 1 on the MMI.
The range of the remote control transmitter i s about 600 metres; however this can be greatly reduced by obstacles (buildings, etc.) between the remote control transmitter and the vehicle.
Fault warnings
If any of the following symbols appear when you switch on the remote control, the remote control cannot be used to switch on the auxiliary heating:
,....c There is a system fault in the auxiliary heating.
BU The auxiliary heating cannot be sw itched on because there is not enough fuel i n the tank. ea -
The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on because the vehicle battery charge is too low.
)( The vehicle could not receive the transmitted data.
Changing the remote control battery
App l ies to vehicles: with auxil i ary heating/vent il ation
Heating and c ooling 85
"' Press the release button ® on the battery carrier and pul l out the battery carrier in the direction of the arrow.
"' Insert the new battery with the
G symbol facing downwards . The new battery must be of the same type as the original one
(CR 2430).
"' Slide the battery carrier carefully i nto the remote control and refit the cover.
@
For the sake of the environment
Used batteries must be disposed of appropriately and must not be discarded with ordinary household waste.
Fig. 101 Remote control: Changing bat tery
"' Press the release button @ and pull the cover in the direction of the arrow.
86 Driving
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steer i ng wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel con be adjusted as required to suit the driver
.
Vehicles with ignition
Lock
Starting the engine with the key
Applies to vehicles. with mechanical 1gnit1on lock
Insert the key in the ignition lock to switch on the ignition and start the engine.
Fi g . 102 Steering column : Lever for steering column adjustment
... Push the lever
Fig. 102
down
¢
,&.
.
... Move the steering wheel to the desired position .
... Then push the lever towards the steering column until the catch engages .
A
WARNING
- Never adjust the position of the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving this could cause an accident.
- Press the lever upwards so it is secure and so that the position of the steering wheel cannot shift unexpectedly while the vehicle is moving • risk of accident!
Ignition Lock
Depending on the model, your vehicle i s equipped with the following:
- Mechanical ignition lock
¢ page 86
or
- Convenience key
Q page
88
F ig . 1 03 Ignition key positions
Steering lock
If the steering wheel cannot be turned, the steering lock has engaged.
Important: The selector lever (automatic gearbox * ) must be in position Pin order to lock the steering.
... To lock the steering, turn the steering wheel with the ignition key removed until the steering lock engages.
... To release the steering lock, insert the ignition key in the lock and turn the key in the direction of the -arrow· while simultaneously turning the steering wheel.
Switching the ignition on/off and preheating the glow plugs
• To switch on the ignition, turn the ignit i on key to position @ .
• To switch off the i gnition, turn the ignition key to position @ .
Diesel engines are preheated when the ignition is switched on ll .
Starting the engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic start function . As soon as you turn the igni· tio n key briefly to position @ , the engine starts automatically. ..,.
~ Manual gearbox: Press the clu t ch pedal all the way down and move the gear lever into neutral.
~ gearbox: Press the brake pedal and move the selector lever to position P or
N .
~ Turn the ignition key briefly to position @ .
The ignition key automatically returns to po sition @ . Do not press the accelerator.
Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily while you start the engine .
Diesel eng in es can take a few seconds longer than usual to start on co ld days. Please keep your foot on the c lu tch pedal (manual gearbox) or brake pedal (automatic gearbox) until the eng in e starts . The in dicator L
II lights up while the glow plugs are preheating .
The preheating time depends on the outside temperature and the temperature of the coolant. When the engine is warm, or at outside temperatures above +8°C, the glow plug ind icator lamp
II one second. This means that the engine can be started immediately.
If the engine fails to start immediately, swi tch off the starter and try again after about
30 seconds. To start the engine again, turn the ignition key to position @ .
St
a
rt
/s
top
sys
t
e
m*
P l ease note the information on ~ 98,
Start/stop system.
Automatic
s
ta
r
t function fault
If the indicator Lamp
Im
(petrol engine) or
II
(d ie sel engine) lights up in conjunction with a fault when starting the engine, there is a fault in the automatic start function.
To start the engine, turn the ignition key to position @ and hold it in this position until the engine is running.
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified .
Driving 8 7
A
WARNING
N ever r un the engine in confined spaces.
The exhaust gases are toxic .
N ever remove the key from the ignition while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock would engage, and you would not be able to steef the car - risk of acciden t !
Always take the key with you when you lea ve the vehicle. This is especially im porta nt if children are left in the car.
T hey might otherwise be able to sta rt the engine or use powe r -operated e quip ment such as the elec tr ic windows t his could l ead to in juries.
N ever leav e children or disab l ed people a lone in the car. The doors cou ld be
Locked with the remote control k ey and t h e occupants cou ld become trapped in th e vehicle. The vehicle occupants cou ld be exposed to extreme ly high or low temperatures, depending on the time of y ear .
CD
CAUTION
Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and extreme load conditions until t he engine has reached its normal operating temperature, otherwise this can damage the engine.
@
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the eng in e by running it with the car s t a tion a ry . You should drive off immediately whenev er possible. T hi i s will help avoid unnecessary exha u st emissions .
(!)
Note
If it is difficult to turn the ignition ke y to position @ , move the steering wheel (to take the load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key turns freely.
When starting from cold the engine may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic tappets. This is quite normal and no cause for concern.
88 Driving
If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected it will be necessary to leave the key in position
<D for about 5 seconds before starting the engine.
- Vehicles with automatic gearbox: After switching off the ignition, you can only withdraw the ignition key if the selector lever is in position "P" (parking lock). The selector lever cannot be moved after the ignition key has been taken out.
Switching off the engine with the key
Applies to vehicles: with mechanical ignition lock
Switching off the engine
• Stop the vehicle.
• Turn the ignit i on key to position @ .
Engaging the steering lock
Important : The selector lever must be in position P (automatic gearbox").
• Remove the ignition key while it is in posit ion @ q
page 88, Fig.104
q
&, .
... Turn the steering wheel until you hear the steering lock engage.
The steering lock acts as a theft deterrent.
A
WARNING
Never switch off the engine until the ve hicle ls stationary. Otherwise you may not have the full benefit of the brake servo and power steering. You may need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle than you normally would. T his would mean a greater risk of accidents and ser i ous injury, because you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner.
Never remove the key from the ignition while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be able to steer the car.
Always take the k ey with you when leaving the vehicle - even if you only intend to be gone for a short time . This is especially important if children are left in the car. They might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment such as the electric windows this could lead to injuries.
CD
CAUTION
If the engine has been working hard for a long time, there is a risk of heat building
up in the engine compartment after the
engine has been switched off; this could cause engine damage. For this reason, you s h ould leave the engine idling for about
2 minutes before switching it off. l
© Note
After the engine is stopped the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 m i nutes, even if the i gnition i s sw i tched off. The fan may also start running aga i n after some time if the coolant temperature rises due to a build-up of heat, or if the engine is hot and the engine compartment is heated up further by direct sun light.
Vehicles with convenience key
~iththe
~ button
Applies to vehicles· with convenience key
You con use the
I I
button to switch on the ignition and start the engine.
F i g . 10 4 Centre console : START ENGINE STOP button
(vehicles with convenience key)
You can s tart your vehicle without handling the convenience key. You only need to have the key on your person.
While you are driving, you can stow the convenience key in a special carrier* ~ page
71.
Switching the igniti
i
on on/off and preheating the glow plugs
If the indicator lamp i
"t-D
flashes when you switch on the ignitio n , the s teering wheel i s locked. In this case, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left/rig ht.
... Manual gearbox: To switch the ignition on/ off, press the I S T ART ENGINE STOP ! button without pressing the clutch pedal.
... Automatic gearbox : To switch the ignition on/off , press the I START ENGINE STOPI button without pressing the brake pedal.
Diesel eng i nes are preheated when the ignition i s s witched on m .
Starting the engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic start function. When you press the
I START ENGINE STOP ! briefly, the engine starts automatically.
... Manual gearbox: Press the clutch pedal all the way down and move the gear lever into neutral.
... Automatic gearbox : Press the brake pedal and move the selector lever to position P or
N .
... Pre ss the l S TART E NGIN E S TOPI button briefly to start the engine.
Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily while you start the eng i ne .
Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer than usual to start on r co l d days. Please keep your foot on the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or brake pedal (automatic gearbox) until the eng in e starts . The i ndicator lamp
IJ lights up while the glow plugs are preheating.
The preheating t ime depends on the outside temperature a nd the temperature of the cool ant . When the engin e is warm, or at outside temperatures above +8°C, the glow plug indicator lamp m
Driving 89 one second. This means that the engine can be started
immediately.
If the engine fails to start immediately, switch off the s tarter and try again after about
30 seconds.
On vehicles with a start/stop system*, the ignition will be sw i tched off if you press the
I START ENGINE STOP!* button during a stop phase .
Start/stop system*
Please note the i nformation on ~ page
98,
Start/stop system.
Automatic start function fault
If the indicator lamp
[3i
(petrol engine) or
IJ
(diesel engine) lights up in conjunction with a fault when starting the engine, there is a fault in the automatic start function.
Press and hold the I START ENGINE STOPI button to start the engine.
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified .
&_ WARNING
Never run the engine in confined spaces .
The exhaust gases are toxic .
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle - even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is especially important if children are left in the car. They might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment such as the electric windows this could lead to injuries .
- Never leave children or disabled people a lone in the car. The doors could be locked with the remote control key and the occupants could become trapped in the vehicle . The vehicle occupants could be exposed to extremely high or low temperatures, depending on the time of year.
90 Driving
CD
CAUTION
Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and extreme load conditions until the engine has reached its normal operating temperature, otherwise this can damage the engine .
@
For
the
sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine by running it with the car stationary. You should drive off immediately whenever possible. This will help avoid unnecessary exhaust emissions.
@
Note
When starting from cold the eng i ne may be a little noisy for the first few seconds unt il oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic tappets. This is quite norma l and no cause for concern .
- If the warning lamp .
was flashing in the instrument cluster before the ignition was switched off, it will not be possible to switch on the ignition again
Q page 185.
- If you leave your vehicle with the ignition switched on, it will be switched off automatically after a while. Please note that electrical equipment such as the exterior lighting will also be switched off.
~inewiththe
~ button
App l ies L o vehicles : with >Co n ve ni ence k ey
.,. Stop the vehicle.
"" Vehicles with automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to position P.
... Press the I
START ENGINE STOP I button
Q page 88 , Fig. 104.
If you can't switch off the engine in the usual way, please refer to
Q
page 91, Starting
the
engine
a~er
Steering Lock l)
The steering will be locked if you switch off the engine with the I START E NGINE STOP I * button, move the selector lever to position P
(on vehicles with automatic gearbox•) and open the driver's door.
The steering lock acts as a theft deterrent.
Emergency Off function
If necessary in an emergency, the engine can be switched off while the vehicle is still moving. Press the l sTART ENGINE STOPI• button twice in quick success ion or hold it in for longer than two seconds.
&
WARNING
Never switch off the eng ine until the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise you may not have the full benefit of the brake servo and power steering. You may need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle than you normally would. This would mean a greater risk of accidents and serious injury, because you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner.
Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. Otherwise the engine can be started or power-operated equipment such as the e l ectric windows can be used. This could result in serious injury.
CD
CAUTION
If the engine has been working hard for a l ong time, there is a risk of heat building up ln the engine compartment after the engine has been switched off; this cou l d cause eng i ne damage. For this reason, you s h ould leave the engine idling for about
2 minutes before switching it off. i
Note
After the engine is stopped the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. The fan may also start running again after ll This function ls not available on all export versions .
some time If the coolant temperature rises due to a build-up of heat, or if the engine is hot and t he engine compartment is heated up further by direct sunlight.
Starting the engine after a malfunction
Applies to vehicles. with convenience key
If
the remote control key battery is exhausted or if radio interference or a system malfunction occurs
,
extra steps may be necessary in order to start the engine
.
Fig. 1 05 Stee ri ng colum n /remote control key : Starting the eng i ne after a malfunct i on
Starting the engine manually
If the message f >))
Key
not re cogn ised . See owner ' s manua l is displayed, you can still start the engine manually .
... Manual gearbox : Press the clutch pedal.
... Automatic gearbox : Press the brake pedal
Q
&
in Starting the engine with the
START ENGINE STOP
button on page
89.
... Press the
I
TART ENGINE STOPI button.
... Hold the remote control key against the symbol y ») ~ Fig. 105, as shown in the illustration. The engine should start .
... If the engine does not start automatically, press the I START ENGINE STOP ! button again.
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified . i Note
You can call up the driver message again by pressing the I
START ENGINE STOP !
• button.
Driving 91
Driver messages
Switch off ignition before leaving ca r . B a t tery is be ing discharged
This message appears and the buzzer sounds if you open the driver' s door while the ignition is switched on. Switch off the ignition to prevent the battery from being discharged.
Pressing start/s top button again will switch off engine!
Press the
I
START ENGINE STOPI* button again so that the engine can be switched off.
Engine start sys tem : system fault! Plea se contact workshop
A fa ul t has occurred when starting the eng i ne automatically (automatic start function) .
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified. Press and hold the
I
START ENGINE STOPI button to start the engine. nJ
Key not re co gni se d . See owner ' s manual
This message appears if there is no convenience key inside the vehicle or if the system cannot detect or identify the key . This can happen, for example, if the radio signal from the key is
obstructed
by a metal briefcase or similar, or if the key battery is weak . Electronic equipment, such as mobile phones, can also interfere with the radio signal from the key .
If you encounter any problems starting or stopp i ng the engine, please refer to "What to do if the "START ENGINE STOP" button is inoper.ational" ~ page 91.
Ill
Key not in vehicle?
Jfthe indicator lamp
Ill lights up and the message appears, the convenience key was removed from the vehicle while the engine was running . If the convenience key is not in the vehicle you will not
be
able to switch on the ignition or restart the engine after it has been switched off . You will also not be able to lock the vehicle from the out s ide.
Pre ss brak e pedal
92 Driving
This message appears on vehicles with an automatic gearbox if you try to start the engine without first pressing the brake pedal.
Please press clutch pedal
This message appears on vehicles with a man ual gearbox if you try to start the engine with out first pressing the clutch pedal. The engine will only start if you press the clutch pedal.
Plea se engage N or P
This message will appear if you try to start or switch off the engine when the selector lever i s not in Nor P. The eng i ne can then not be started or switched off .
Shift to P , vehicle can roll away . Doors can only be locked in P
For safety reasons, this message will appear and a warning buzzer will sound if the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not in position P when you switch off the ignition with the l START EN G INE STOP I * button. Put the selector lever in position P; otherwise the vehicle can roll away . If the lever is not in position P you will not be able to lock the vehicle using the locking sensor on the door handle or the convenience key.
Kick-down feature
Applies lo vehicles. with manual gearbox and eff i ciency mode
The kick-down feature is designed to give maximum acceleration.
If you press the acce l e r ator right down past the point of resistance at fu ll throttle when the dr i ve se l ect* function is set to efficiency* mode r::!;> poge 137, the engine power is automatically controlled to give your vehicle maximum acceleration.
&_
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slippery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding .
Electro-mechanical parking brake
Operation
The electro-mechanical parking broke replaces the handbrake .
Fig. 106 Centre console: Parking brake
.. Pull switch @ r::!;>
Fig. 106 to app l y the parking brake. The warning lamps . in the switch and in the instrument cluster display will light up .
" To release the parking brake, press the brake or accelerator pedal with the ignition switched on and simultaneously press the switch @ . The warning lamps . in the switch and on the display will go out .
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-mechanical parking brake. The parking brake replaces the conventional handbrake, and is mainly intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling away accidental l y.
However, the electro mechan i ca l parking brake also offers a number of convenience and sa f ety features in add iti on to the functions of a normal handbrake.
When driving away
The parking brake auto release function releases the parking brake automatically when you wish to start moving r::!;> page 94, Driving away from a standstill.
- When driving away on a gradient, the parking brake auto release funct i on prevents the vehicle from rolling back un i ntentionally.
The braking force of the parking brake i s only released when there is enough power at
11>
the wheels to make the vehicle move in the desired direction .
Em er g e nc y b r aking fun c tion
An emergency braking function enables you to stop the vehicle even if the conventional foot brake should fail to work c:> page 94 , Emergency braking function.
Warning lamp s
The warning lamps . on the display and in the switch light up when the park in g brake is applied with the ignition s w i t che d on .
- The warning l amps . on the display and in the switch light up for approximately
20 seconds when the parking brake is applied with the i gnition s wit c h e d o ff .
A
WARNINCi
The accelerator pedal must on no account be pressed inadvertently when a gear is engaged and the engine is running with the vehicle stationary. The vehicle could otherwise start moving immediately and possibly cause an accident.
It is not possible to apply the parking brake if the electrical power supply fails.
In this case, park the vehicle on a level surface and select 1st gear (manual gearbox) or move the selector l ever to position P (automatic gea r box) to prevent it from rolling. You shou ld obtain professional assistance.
(!)
Note
The parking brake can be applied at any time - even when t he ignition is switched off. However, the ignition must be switched on and t h e brake pedal pressed before the parking brake can be released.
The parking brake is applied automati cally if the driver's door is opened while the ignition is on. This is to prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
- Any slight noise which may be heard when the parking brake is applied or re-
Dri v ing 93 leased is quite normal and no cause for concern.
- The parking brake runs an automatic test cycle at regular intervals when the vehicle is parked. This may cause a slight noise, which is normal.
If the warning lamp . appears, there may be a parking brake malfunction
¢page 19.
I f the electrical power supply fails, it is not possib l e to release the park i ng brake
(if it was applied) or to apply the parking bra k e (i f it was released) ¢ & . You should obtain profess i o n al assis t ance .
Parlking the car
... Press the brake pedal to bring the veh i cle to a stop .
... Pu ll switch @ c:> page 92, Fig . 106 to apply the parking brake.
... Vehicles with automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to position P.
... Switch off the engine ¢ ,& .
... Manual gearbox: Engage first gear.
... When parking on a hill or gradient, turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll into the kerb if it did start to move accidentally .
A
WARNINCi
Always take the key with you when leaving your vehicle - even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This i s especially important if c hild ren are left in t h e car. They might otherwise be able to start the engine, release the parking brake or use power-operated equip ment such as the electric windows this cou ld lead to injuries.
D o not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle when it is locked . Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
94 Dr iv ing
Driving away from a standstill
The parking brake auto release function releases the parking brake automatically when you wish to start moving.
Applying the parking brake when stopping
> Pull sw i tch @ q page 92 , Fig. 106 to apply the parking brake .
Releasing the parking brake when driving away
Important: The driver's door must be closed and the driver's seat belt must be buckled.
> Press the accelerator in the normal way: the parking brake will be released automatically and the vehicle wi ll start moving.
You can apply the parking brake when s topping at traffic lights, etc . You do not then have to hold the car with the brake pedal, as the parking brake will stop it creep in g forward while a gear is engaged in the automat i c transmission. When you drive off in the normal way, the parking brake will be re l eased automatically and the vehicle wil l start moving.
Driving away on a slope
When driving away on a gradient, the parking brake auto release function prevents the vehicle from rolling back unintentionally . The braking force of the parking brake is only re leased when there is enough power at the wheels to make the vehicle move in the desired direction.
@ Note
For safety reasons the parking brake will
only release automatically if the driver's
seat belt is engaged in its buckle and the driver's door is closed.
Driving away when towing a trailer
Ple · ase note the following points to prevent the vehicle from rolling back unintentionally on a gradient.
• Pull and hold the switch @ q page 92,
Fig . 106 and press the accelerator. T h e park ing brake wi l l remain engaged and prevent any tendency to roll back down the slope.
> You can release the switch @ as soon as the engine is delivering enough power to the wheels .
Depending on the weight of the vehicle and trailer and the steepness of the slope, there may be a tendency to roll back downhill when driving away from a standstill .
Emergency braking function
This feature enables you to stop the vehicle if the main brake system should fail or if the pedal is obstructed.
> To stop the vehicle with the parking brake in an emergency, pull and hold the parking brake switch @ q page 92, Fig. 106 .
> The brakes will be released immediately if you release the switch @ or press down the accelerator.
If you pull and hold the parking brake s witch
@ at a road speed above about 3 km/h, thi s will initiate an emergency brake application.
The brakes are then applied hydraulic ai lly at all four wheels . The effect i s sim i lar to heavy braking q
.&.
.
To prevent the emergency braking function from being used accidentally, a warning buz· zer sounds when the switch @ is pulled. The brakes are released i mmediately when you release the switch @ or press down the accelerator.
.&.
WARNING
1
You should only use the emergency brak· ing function In a real emergency, for examp l e if the brake system were to fail or if the brake pedal were to be obstructed. If you ~
use the emergency braking function by ac tivating the parking brake switch, this has the same effect as heavy braking. Please remember that the ESC (and the integrated ABS, EDL and traction control functions) is still subject to certain physical limits. In a corner o r in bad road or weather conditions an emergency stop can cause the vehicle to skid or lose steering control.
Hold assist
Applies to vehicles: with hold assist
F i g. 10 7 Section of centre console: Button for hold assist
The hold assist helps the driver if the vehicle is stationary for a long period or very often, for instance at traffic lights, on steep gradients or in stop-and-go traffic.
Switching on the hold assist
Important: The driver's door must be closed, the driver's seat belt buckled and the engine running.
"" Press button @ ~ in the centre console to switch on the hold assist function. The LED in the button will light up.
Stopping w
i
th the hold assist
... Once it detects that the vehicle has stopped,
the hold assist keeps the vehicle stationary.
You can now take your foot off the brake pedal.
... Drive off in the normal way : the brake will be released automatically and the vehicle will start moving.
Driving 95
Switching off the hold as
sis
t
... Press button @ to switch off the hold assist function . The LED in the button will go out.
In certain situations, the hold assist transfers the job of holding the vehicle to the parking brake. As soon as the parking brake is holding the vehicle still, the warning lamp . appears in the instrument cluster.
A
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the hold assis t function cannot defy the laws of physi cs. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the hold assist function tempt you into taking any risks when dr i v i ng th i s can cause accidents.
The hold assist cannot keep the vehicle stat i onary in all conditions on a gradient
(e.g. if the road is slippery or icy).
- Always ensure that the vehicle is stopped properly and safely· risk of accident!
·1
CD
CAUTION
Switch off the hold assist function before driving the vehicle into a car wash. i
Note
The last setting of the hold assist (on/ off) is restored when the ignition is switched on . The LED in button @ is lit when the hold assist is on.
Automatic gearbox: When the hold assist function is switched on, it stops the v
1 ehicle from creeping forwards when you t ake your foot off the brake pedal.
In certain situations, the hold assist cannot hold the vehicle. The LED in the button will go out.
Hill hold assist
Applies to vehicles: with hill hold assist
The hill hold assist function makes it easier to drive away on a slope.
Important : The driver's door must be closed, the seat belt buckled and the engine running. ~
96 Driving
The system is activated when you press and hold the brake pedal for a f e w s econd s.
When you release the brake pedal the braking force will be maintained for a moment in order to hold the vehicle and make it easier for you to drive away.
A
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the hill hold assist function cannot defy the laws of physics. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the hill hold assist function tempt you into taking any risks when driving this can cause accidents.
The hi ll hold ass i st function cannot keep the vehicle stationary in all cond i t i ons on a gradient (e.g. If the road is slippery or icy).
If you do not drive away immediately after releasing the brake pedal the vehicle could start to roll back. You should therefore immediately press the brake pedal or apply the parking brake.
- If the engine should stall you must im mediately press the brake pedal or apply the parking brake.
If you are driving away on a slope in stopand-go traffic press and hold the brake pedal for a few seconds before driving off. This will prevent the vehicle from rolling back unintentionally.
@
Note
To find out whether your vehicle is equipped with the hill ho l d assist function please contact an Audi dealership or qua li fied workshop.
Speed warning function
Introduction
Applies to vehicles: with speed warning function
The speed warning function con help you keep below a pre-set maximum speed.
The speed warning function will warn you if t he vehicle exceeds the pre-set maximum speed. The system gives an audible warning signal ifthe set speed is exceeded by about
3 km/h. At the same time, an indicator lamp
lei
wi ll light up in the instrument cluster display and the driver message Speed limit exceeded! will appear. The ind i cator lamp
[t]
will go out when the speed drops below the set speed lim i t again.
You are recommended to store this s peed limit warning if you wish to be reminded of a particular speed limit. This could be when driving in countries with general speed limits, or if you need to keep below a particular speed when winter tyres are fitted, etc .
© Note
Please bear in mind that, even with the speed warning function, it is still important to keep a check on the car's speed with the speedometer and to observe the statutory speed limits .
On veh i cles for some markets, the speed warning function warns you when you reach a speed of 120 km/h . This speed limit warning is prese t at the factory.
Setting speed limit warning
Ap p li e s to vehicles· with speed wa rnin g fu n ctio n
You con use the sound system or MMI* to set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.
Vehicles with sound sy s tem
.. Select: I SETUPI button > control button
~
Dr i ver a ss ist > Speed warn i ng .
Vehicle s w i th MMI
"' Select: control button Syste m s or Ca r syst e m s > Driver assist > Speed warning .
The speed limit warning can be adjusted in increments of 10 km/h between 30 and
240 km/h.
Cruise control system
Description
Applies to vehicles ; with cruise control system
The cruise control system allows you to drive at a constant speed of 20 km/h or higher.
A constant speed is maintained by adjusting the eng i ne power or braking the vehicle ac cordingly.
.&.
WARNING
Always direct your full attention to the road, even when you are using the cruise
control system. It is always the driver who is responsible for determining the speed and for keeping a safe distance to the other vehicles on the road.
For safety reasons, the cruise control system must not be used in city traffic, stop-and-go traffic, on roads with a lot of bends or in difficult or slippery driving conditions (such as Ice, fog, loose grit or gravel, heavy rain, etc.) - risk of accident!
When you take a turn-off, drive along a motorway exit lane or pass through roadwork sections, please temporarily sw it ch off the cruise control system.
M ake sure you do n ot unintentionally res t your foot on the accelerator - this will override the cruise control system which, as a result, will not brake the vehicle. i Note
- The cruise control system is suitable for driving in speed-restricted zones. As a driver you are always responsible for maintaining the correct speed.
Driving 97
On vehicles with a manual gearbox, the set speed cannot be reached ifthe currently selected gear is too high or too low. Make sure to change up or down a gear in good time.
- The cruise control system remains active while you change gears (applies to both manual and automatic gearboxes).
- The brake lights come on when the syst e m brakes the vehicle.
Switching on
Applies to vehicles· with cruise control system e f
~
8
F i g . 108 Control lever for cruise control system
• Pu ll the lever to position
CD
Q
Fig. 108 to switch on the cruise control system.
• Drive at the speed you wish to set the system to.
• Press the button marked @ to store the speed. The indicator lamp . in the instrument cluster will light up .
Adjusting the speed
Applies to vehicles: with cruise co n trol system
"'Briefly pu s h the l ever towards
GYG
Qpoge 97, Fig. 108 to increase or reduce the cruising speed in sma ll steps.
• To increase or reduce the speed quickly, hold the lever towards
GYO until you reach the desired cruising speed.
You can still use the accelerator pedal to increase speed in the normal way, for example to overtake another vehicle. Once you release the accelerator, the system will revert to the speed you stored initially . ~
98 Dr iv ing
However, if the vehicle exceeds the programmed speed by more than 10 km/h for more than 5 minutes, the cruise control system will be deactivated temporarily . The indicator lamp
Ill in the instrument cluster will go out, but the programmed speed will remain stor ed.
Pre
-se
lecting a speed
App l ies to vehicles: with cr ui se contro l syste m
You con pre-select a desired speed while the vehicle is stationary.
• Switch on the ignition .
• Pull the lever to position
CD
Q page 97,
Fig . 108 .
• Push the lever up towards
G or down towards
0 in order to increase or reduce the cruising speed setting .
•Release the lever to store the ind i cated cruising speed.
This function allows you to ente r the desired cruise control sett in g speed ahead of ti me, for example before joining a motorway. Once you are on the motorway, you can activate the cruise control system by pulling the lever to position (D .
Switching off
Applies to vehicles: with cruise contro l system
Switching off temporarily
• Press the brake pedal, or
• Push the lever to position @ (click stop not engaged)
Q page 97, Fig. 108, or
Switching off completely
• Push the lever to position @ (click stop en gaged), or
• Switch off the ignition.
The speed setting will remain stored after the system is temporarily deactivated. To resume the programmed cruising speed, release the brake pedal and pul l the control lever to posi tion @ .
The programmed cruising speed is deleted if you sw i tch off the cruise control system completely or switch off the ignition.
.&.
WARNING
Do not resume the programmed cruising speed if this is too high for the traffic conditions - this can cause accidents.
· 1
The cruise control system will be deactivated if you keep your foot on the clutch pedal.
- The cruise control system is deactivated if the brakes become too hot while driving. If this happens on a s l ope, you can reduce the load on the brakes by select ing a lower gear.
- The ESC sport mode cannot be switched on when the cruise control system is activated.
Start/stop system
Description
Applies to vehicles : wit h s t a r t/s t op sys t em
The start/stop system can help to save fue l and reduce C02 emissions.
In start/stop mode, the engine Is sw i tched off automat i cally when the veh i cle stops, e .
g. at traffic lights. The ignition remains on during this stop phase . The engine is automatically started on demand.
The start/stop system is automatically activated each time you switch on the ignition.
Basic conditions for start/stop mode
The driver's door must be closed .
- The driver's seat belt must be buckled.
- The bonnet must be closed.
The vehicle must have been moving at over
4 km/h since the last stop.
A trailer must not be hitched up to the vehicle. ..,.
A
WARNING
Never switch off the engine until the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise you may not have the full benefit of the brake servo and power steering. You may need more strength to steer and brake the veh icle than you normally would. This would mean a greater risk of accidents and serious injury, because you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner.
- Never remove the key from the ignition while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be able to steer the car.
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle - even If you only Intend to be gone for a short time. This is especially important If children are left in the car. They might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment such as the electric windows this could lead to i njuries.
- To avoid injury, make sure that the start/ stop system is switched off before work ing in the engine compartment
~page 101.
' - - -
CD
CAUTION
Alway s sw itch off the s tart/ stop system
~ page 101 before driving through water.
Switching off
I
starting the engine
A pp lies t o vehicles : with st.art/stop system
Fig. 1 09 I nstrument cluster : Engine switched off
(stop phase)
Driving 99
Vehicles with manu
a
l ge
a
rbo
x
"' When the vehicle stops, put the gear l-ever in neutral and take your foot off the clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. An i nd icator lamp . will light up in the instrument cluster display.
"' The engine will start again automatic a lly when you press the clutch pedal. The indicator lamp will go out .
Veh
i
cles with autom
a
ti
c g
earbox
"' Stop the vehicle and keep your foot on the brake pedal. The engine will switch off. The indicator lamp . will appear on the display.
"' The engine w i ll sta rt again automatically when you tak e your foot off the brake pedal.
If the hold assist* is s wit ched on, the engine will not start until the accelerator is pressed. The indicator lamp . will go out.
Further informat
i
on for autom
a
tic gearbo
x
e
s
The engine is switched off when the selector lever is in position P, 0, N or Sor in man ual mode. If the selector lever is in position P, the engine will remain off even if you take your foot off the brake . The engine will not start again until you press t he accelerator or select another gear and take your foot off the brake.
The engine will start again if you move theselector lever to R during a stop phase .
If you do not want the engine to sta rt, move the selector lever quickly from D through R to
P.
(D
Note
You can control whether or not the engine is switched off by varying the amount of pressure on the brake pedal.
For instance, if you brake gently in stopa nd-go traffic or before turning off at a junction, the engine will remain on while t h e vehicle is at a standstill. As soon as you press the brake pedal harder, the engine will be switched off.
100 Dr iv ing
On vehicles wi t h manual gearbox, you should keep you r foot on the brake during a stop phase to prevent th e vehicle from moving.
If you press the
I
START ENGINE STOPI button" during a stop phase, the ignition will be switched off .
If the engine stalls on a vehicle w i th manual gearbox, you can start it again directly by pressing the clutch pedal im mediately .
Applies to vehicles with
I S TART ENGINE STOPI* button : The ignition remains on when you bring the vehicle to a halt and the start/stop system stops the engine. Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the ignition is switched off; otherwise t h e battery will be drained.
The display differs slightly on some models .
General notes
A ppl ies t o vehicles: with star t /sto p system
The on-board control system can override the start/stop function for various reasons.
Fig. 110 I n strume n t cluster w i th dr i ver i nformati on system: Eng i ne stop temporar i ly un ava ilable
Engine does not switch off
Before each stop phase, the system checks that certain conditions have been met. The engine will not switch off in the following situations, for example .
The eng in e has not yet reached the mini mum temperature required for start/stop mode.
The i nterior temperature se l ected on the air conditioner* has not yet been reached.
The exterior temperature is very high/low.
The windscreen i s being defrosted c::> page 78,
Q page 80 .
The parking aid* or park assist* i s switched on .
The battery charg e is too l ow.
The steering wheel is close to full Lock or the vehicle is being steered .
- Reverse gear has just been selected.
The vehicle is on a steep grad i ent.
@ w ill appear in the instrument cluster display, and . will simultaneous l y appear in the driver information system* .
Engine cuts in again automatically
The stop phase i s interrupted In the following s itu ations , for example. The engine cuts in au tomatically without intervention from the driver.
The vehicle starts to roll (e .
g. on a hill).
The interior temperature deviates from the air conditioner setting.
The windscreen is being defrosted c::> page 78,
Q page 80 .
The brake pedal is pressed severa l times in succession.
The battery charge drops to an insufficient
Level.
The power consumption is high .
Ignition is switched off automatically
To prevent the battery from being discharged, the ignition will be switched off automatically if certain conditions are met. For instance:
The vehicle has already been driven .
- The start/stop system has switched off the engine.
- The driver's door is opened.
- The driver's seat belt is unbuckled .
The brake pedal is not pressed.
The vehicle is stationary.
If the dipped beam headlights are switched on in this case, the s ide light s will be tl\Jrned on instead. After approx . 30 minutes, or when ..,..
you lock the vehicle, the s i de l ights w ill be switched off.
If the start/stop system has not stopped the engine or if you have switched off the s tart/ stop system manually, the engine will contin ue running and the ignition will not be switched off automatically 9
.&.
.
&..
WARNING
Never run the engine in confined spaces.
The exhaust gases aire toxic.
I
@
Note
If you select D, N or S (on vehicles with automatic gearbox) after selecting reverse gear, the car must have been moving at over 10 km/h before the s ystem can switch off the engine again.
Switching the start/stop system off and on manually
Appl ies to vehicles: with start/stop system
You can switch the system off manually if you don't want to use it.
Driving 101
Driver messages in the instrument cluster display
Applies to vehicles: with start/stop system
Automatic start/stop deactivated: Please restart engine manually
This message appears if certain conditions have not been met during the stop phase and the start/stop system cannot start the engine again automatically. In th i s case, the engine must be started manually .
Automatic start/stop: system fault!
Function unavailable
There is a malfunction In the start/stop system . Drive to a workshop soon and have the fault rectified.
Fig . 111 Cen tr e c onsole: Sw i t c h for start/stop s ystem
• To switch the start/stop system off or on manua ll y, press the ~
LED in the button will light up when the system is switched off .
(0
Note
If you switch off the system during a stop phase, the engine will start again automat i ca l ly.
102
g-tron g-tron
Natural gas engine
Introduction
Applies to vehicles with na t ural gas engine
Your vehicle will run on CNG ( C ompressed
N
atural
G
as) and petrol. The fuel mode is changed over automatically.
Using compressed natural gas
(
CNG)
In addi t ion to petro
l
, vehicles with a natural gas engine will run on either CNG , e·gas or
biomethane
.
The tank must NOT b e filled with any other ava il ab le types of fu : e l, such as L
N
G (
L
iquefied
N
atural
G
as), LPG (
Li
quefied
P
etroleum
G
as)
<=!>
&
or hythane (a mixture of hydrogen and methane) <=!> Cl).
Natural gas quality and fuel consumption
Natural gas is subdivided into two quality cat· egories: Group H and Group L.
H-gas has a higher methane content and thus a higher calorific value than L-gas. The higher the calorific value o f the natural gas, the lower the fuel consumption .
However, the methane content and the calorific value can vary within the same quality group. Consequently, the vehicle's fuel consumption can vary even if the gas tank is always f il led with fuel of the same quality.
The quality of the natural gas is detected au· tomatically . The engine management system adapts the vehicle set· up to variations in natural gas quality. It i s therefore possible to m
i
x both quality groups in the gas fuel tan
k
. It is not necessary to run the gas tank dry before filling up with natural gas of a different quality group.
Safe operation
of
natural gas powered
vehicles
If you notice a gas odour or suspect that the natural gas fuel system may be leaking, please follow the instructions below
Q
&
.
Stop the vehicle Immediately.
- Extinguish any cigarettes immediately .
Switch off the ignition .
Open all the doors and the boot lid to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air .
Switch off or remove from the vehicle all items which could cause sparks or fire.
Do NOT drive on if the gas odour persists.
Obtain professional assistance and have the fault rectified .
A
WARNING
- Serious personal injury can result if you ignore a gas odour
i
nside the vehicle or when filling the tank.
Follow the instructions above
~ page 102, Safe operation of natural gas powered vehicles if you notice a gas odour.
Leave the danger area .
If necessary, notify the rescue services .
Natural gas is highly explosive and highly inflamm able . Improper use of natural gas can cause accidents, serious burns and other injuries.
-
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of liquefied natural gas (LNG) or liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and must never be fuelled or driven with LNG or LPG . Lique· fied gas can cause the natural gas tank to explode and can cause serious injuries.
CD
CAUTION
The vehicle is not su
i
tab
l
e for the use of hythan e and must never be fuelled with hythane . Otherwise, serious damage to the engine and fuel system could result.
(D
Note
Have the natural gas fuel system checked at regular intervals by a qualified work· s
h
op.
g-tron 103
Instrument cluster overview
Applies to vehicles: with natura l gas engine
The instrument cluster is the driver's information centre. It provides status information while the vehicle is being driven in natural gas mode and indicates how much fuel is in the gas tank.
Fig. 112 Overview of ins t rument cluster for g·tron
(!) Rev counter with warning/indicator lamps ...
.
........... .
@ Fuel gauge for natural gas .
.. .
@ Ind i cator lamps (turn s i gnals)
@ Display
Warning/indicator lamps and
Driver information system* .
.
Date* and time ........... .
- Mileage recorder ...
.....
. .
Service interval display ..
.
. .
®
Speedometer with warning l amps
@ Fuel gauge for petrol ...
...
. .
0
R eset button for trip recorder
I a.a
I .
.
.
.
...
........
.
.
.
. .
10
104
11
10
14
27
9
10
13
@ Note
The needles on the dials in the instrument cluster are il l uminated when the ignition is switched on. The main instrument lighting
(for the dials and needles) comes on when the vehicle's lights a re switched on. The instrument lighting is dimmed automatically as the daylight starts to fade . This function i s intended to remind the driver to switch on the dipped-beam headlights in good time when light conditions become poor.
Driving in natural gas mode
Applies to vehicles: with natural gas engine
If you have just refuelled the gas tank or if the coolant temperature is too l ow, the engine will initially start running in petrol mode. The engi n e will switch to natural gas mode as sooni as possib l e.
The indicator lamp . in the instrument cluster will light up as soon as the eng i ne is running in natural gas mode ¢
page 103,
Fig
.
112.
The indicator lamp will go out if there is no more natural gas left in the tank.
The engine will switch automatically to petrol mode.
104 g-tron
Gas fuel gauge
Applies to vehicles: with natura l gas engine
Fig. 114 D i sp l ay: Comb i ned fuel warning for petrol and natural gas
The gauge ~Fig. 113 only works whe n the ign i t i on is swi t ched o n . The L ED at the bottom of the dial f l ashes for a few seconds after the
Ignit i on is switched on. When t he gauge reaches the r eserve zone, the LED at the bottom of the dial will light up in red. T he L ED at the bottom of the dial will flash if the gas level is very low .
When the gas fuel level is down to the reserve zo n e, the message Ple a se add CNG will appear in the instrument cluster.
When both types of f u el (natu r al gas and petrol) are down to the reserve zone, a combined d i splay~ Fig. 114 will appear in the i nstrument cluster with the message Please refuel and the indicator lamp l:D q page
24.
The fuel range will also be displayed.
The tank capacities on your vehicle are given in the Technical data section
Q page 2 73.
CD
CAUTION
Never run t h e petrol tank comp l etely dry.
I f there is an irregular fue l supply, misfir i ng can occ u r. U n b u rnt fuel can then e n ter the exhaust system. T his can lead to overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.
@
Note
If the vehicle is refuelled and parked i mmediately afterwards for a long period, the fuel level shown on the gas fuel gauge may be different when you r esta r t the vehicle than it was i mmediately after refue l -
Ii ng. This does not mean that there is a fuel leak, but is a side-effect caused by a drop i n p r essure in the gas fuel ta nk s when the system cools down after refuelling.
Filling the gas tank
App li es to vehicles: with natural gas engine
Vehicles with a natural gas engine have two fuel tanks: one for natural gos and one for petrol.
F i g. 115 Vehicle as seen from the rear r i ght : Open i ng t he fuel tank flap
F ig. 11 6 Tank flap open : Gas fil l er neck © a n d filler neck sea l @
When refue l ling with petro l , please note the additional i nformation and warnings
Q page 210.
Switch off the engine, ignition, mobile phone(s) and auxiliary heating before refuelling c>
&.
.
Read and follow the instructions at the natural gas filling s tation. Before refuelling with natural gas, make sure that the correct type of fuel is used c> page l 02, Using compressed natural gas (CNG).
The flap that covers t h e tank cap is unlocked and locked automatically by the central locking.
Unscrewing the tank cap
The gas fil l er neck is behind the tank flap next to the petrol filler neck c:> Fig. 116.
.. Press the left side of the flap to open it
-arrowQ fig . 115.
Filling the tank
.. Pull the cap off the gas filler neck <!) .
.. Make sure that the seal @ is securely seated in the gas filler neck.
.. Fit the coupling of the fuelling line onto the gas filler neck.
.. Lock the filler nozzle.
.. Start the refuelling procedure.
.. If you need to interrupt the fuelling procedure, press the stop button on the filler unit.
The compressor on the filler unit will be switched off automatically when the gas tank is full.
Closing the tank cap
.. Unlock the filler nozzle.
.. Check that the seal on the gas filler neck @ has not become stuck on the fi ll er coupling.
.. If necessary, fit the seal back onto the gas filler neck .
.. Press the cap onto the gas filler neck .
.. Close the tank flap . Make sure you hear it click into place .
.&.
WARNING
Natural gas is highly explosive and highly inflammable. Improper use of natural g tron 105 gas can cause accidents, serious burns and other injuries .
Make sure that the filler nozzle is correctly coupled with the gas filler nec k before adding fuel. Stop fuelling immediately if you notice a gas odour.
- The vehicle is not suitable for the use of liquefied natural gas (LNG) or liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and must never be fuelled or driven with LNG or LPG . Liquefied gas can cause the natural gas tank t o explode and can cause serious injuries.
CD
CAUTION
The vehicle is not su i tab l e for the use of hythane and must never be fuelled with hythane . Otherwise, serious damage to the engine and fuel system could resu l t.
(!)
Note
The procedure for operating the filler coupling can vary on different gas filler units. If you are unsure, ask a trained member of staff at the filling station to demonstrate the filling procedure .
I n very hot weather, the overheating protection system on the gas filler unit may automatically deactivate the fuelling system.
- You may hear noises while refuelling.
This is normal and does not mean that t h e system is damaged.
The natura l gas fuel system on the vehicle Is suitable for refuelling both at domestic-type appliances using small compressors (time-fill) and at CNG fi l ling stations using large compressors (fastfill) .
106 Automatic gearbox
Automat
i
c gearbox
S tronic gearbox
Introduction
App l ies L o vehicles: with S tron i c gearbox
The vehicle i s equipped with an electron i ca l ly contro ll e d du al clutch gearbox (S t ronic). To r q u e between t he engine and t he ge a rbo x is transmitte d via two inde p endent clutches .
They enable smoot h , uninterrupted acceleration of the vehicle.
Th e ge a rbox shi ft s u p or dow n autom a tically and co ntinuously a d apts the ti ming of the gear changes to your driving sty l e.
When you drive at moderate speeds the gearbox w i ll select the most economical shift programme . It will then change up early and del ay t h e downshifts to give better fue l economy.
If yo u drive a t higher s peeds with heavy accel erat i o n , if you ope n the thro t tle quic k ly, or if you u se t h e kick down or the ca r 's maxim u m speed, the gea r box will a u tomatic all y se l ect the more "sporty" s hi ft programmes.
If desired, y o u ca n also se l ec t the gea r s man-
ually ( tiptronic mode ) c:> page 111, Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode) .
Selector lever posit i ons
App l ies to vehicles: with S tro ni c gea r box
F ig . 11 7 Instr u ment cluster : Selector lever positions
The current selector lever position and the cur r ent gear are shown in the i nstrument cl u ster display.
P Parking lock
W hen the se l ector lever is in this position, the driven wheels are l ocked mechanically. The par k ing lock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary c:> .&.
.
The inter l ock b u tton (the button in the selector l ever h andle) must be pressed in and the br a ke pedal must be depressed before moving t h e se l ector l ever either in or out of posit i on P.
R - Reverse gear
R eve r se gear m u st only be e n g a ge d w h en the vehicle i s stationary an d the eng i ne i s id li ng
¢ ,& .
To move the selector l ever to pos i tion R, press in the interlock button and at the same time press the brake peda l. The revers i ng light comes on when the selector l ever is in the R pos i tion w i th the ignition on .
N Neutral
I n t his p os it ion, t he gear b ox is i n n eut r al.
DIS Drive/Sport ( standard position for driving forwards)
In selec t or l eve r pos i tion D/S, the gearbox can be ope r ated i n e i t h er t h e standard drive mode
(D) o r in s p ort mode (S). To select sport mode
(5), br i efly p ull the se l ector lever back . The gearbo x will sw i tch back to drive mode (D) if you pull the se l ector lever again. The selected driv i ng mode is shown i n the instrument cluster display .
In t he standard drive mode (0), t h e gearbox a u tomat i ca ll y selects t h e best gear r at i o. T hi s depends on the engine load, the road speed and the drivi n g style.
S e l ect sport mode ( S ) if you wish to t a k e full ad v a n tage of t h e car ' s performance. T h i s set ting makes use of the engine's maxim u m power output. Whe n accelerating the gear shifts may be noticeab l e.
Press the brake pedal when moving the se l ector lever from N to D/S if the vehicle i s s t ationa r y or at speeds below 2 km/h c:>
.&.
.
IJll-
E Efficienc y *
In efficiency mode
Q
page 136, Audi drive select,
the gearbox selects the next gear at lower engine speeds. Earlier upshifts give improved fuel economy because the full power reserves of the engine are not used .
In this mode, Eis shown on the display instead of D ~ Fig.
117.
.&_ WARNING
The car can roll away even if the ignition is switched off.
Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving, as this could cause an accident.
In all se l ector lever positions except P the vehicle must always be held with the foot brake when the engine is running.
This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tends to "creep" risk of accident!
The accelerator pedal must on no account be pressed inadvertently when a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary. The vehicle could otherwise start moving immediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) and possibly cause an accident.
Do not press the accelerator while selecting a gear with the vehicle stationary and the engine running, as this could cause an accident.
The driver should n ever get out of the vehicle when the engine is running and a gear is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine is running, you must apply the parking brake and engage the parking lock P.
- To avoid accidents, apply the parking brake and put the selector lever in position P before opening the bonnet and working on the vehicle with the engine running. Please observe the important safety warnings ¢
page 212, Working on components in the engine compartment.
(D
Note
Automatic gearbox 107
Drive select: You can select the sport program for gear changes by activating the d y namic mode. The instrument cluster display will show S instead of D.
If the lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, take your foot off the acc€lerator and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting Dor S again .
- It is not possible to move the selector lever out of position P if the electrical power supply fails. In this case, theselector l ever can be released manually.
Left-hand drive vehicles
Q
page 114,
r i ght-hand drive vehicles
Qpoge 115.
Selector lever lock
Applies to vehicles: with S tronic gearbox
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged inadvertently, so that the vehicle is not set in motion unintentionally.
F ig . 1 18 Selector lever lock
The selector l ever lock is released as follows:
... Switch on the ignition.
... Press the brake pedal
and
at the same time press in the interlock button.
Automatic s e lector lever lock
The selector lever is locked in the P and N positio n s when the ignition is on. To move the selector lever out of these positions the driver mus t press the brake pedal. To move out of position P, the interlock button must also be pressed. The following message appears in the display as a reminder for the driver when the selector lever is in position P or N : ~
108 Automatic gearbox
When stationary a pply footbrake while selecting gear
The selector lever lock only works if the vehicle is stationary or driving at speeds up to 2 km/h. At higher speeds the selector lever lock in the N position is disengaged automatically.
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly through posi tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to "rock" the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow or mud . The selector lever lo ck engages automatically if the brake pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about two seconds.
Interlock button
The interlock button on the selector lever handle prevents the driver from inadvertently engaging particular gears . The illustration shows the selector lever positions in which the button has to be pressed, highlighted in colour Q fig.
118.
Safety interlock for ignition key*
The key can only be withdrawn from the ignition lock with the ignition switched off and the selector lever in position P. When the ignition key is removed, the selector lever is locked in position P.
(1)
Note
If the se l ector lever does not lock automatically, a malfunction has occurred. In this case, the power transmission is in terrupted to prevent the vehicle from moving unintentionally. Proceed as follows to engage the selector lever lock again:
- Vehicles with 6-speed gearbox: briefly press the brake pedal.
- Vehicles with 7-speed gearbox: press the brake pedal. Move the selector lever to position P or N and then select a gear.
If the vehicle does not move forwards or backwards even though a gear is selected, proceed as follows:
If the vehicle does not move in the desired direction, the system may have failed to engage the gear correctly. In this case, press the brake pedal and select the gear again .
- If the vehicle still does not move in the desired direction, a system malfunction has occurred . Seek professional assistance and have the system checke d .
General notes on dr i ving an automatic
Applies to vehicles: with S tronic gearbox
The gearbox changes the forward gears up and dawn automatically.
Fig. 119 Detail of the centre console : Selecto r lever with i nterlock button
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in P or N . In the case of Low out side temperatures (below-10 °(), the engine can only be started when the selector L ever is in position P .
Driving away from a standstill
... Press and hold the brake pedal.
"" Press and hold the interlock button (the button in the selector l ever handle), set these· lector lever to the desired posit i on (e.g
. D) r::::>
page 106
and release the in terlock button .
...
Wait
for the gearbox to engage the gear (a
slight movement can be felt).
... Release the brake and press the accelerator
¢
A .
Stopping briefly
... Press the brake pedal to hold the vehicle when stationary (for instance at traffic lights).
.. Do not press the accelerator .
.. To prevent the veh i cle from rolling away, ap · ply the parking brake before moving off on steep gradients c>
,&.
.
.. As soon as you acce l erate as normal with you r seat belt fastened, the parking brake will automat i cally be released and the vehi· cle w ill start moving .
Stopp i ng / parking the car
If you open the driver's door while the selec· tor lever is not in posit i on P, the vehicle can roll away . The message Shift to P , otherwis e ve hicl e can roll a way . Doors to not lock if l e v· e r is not in P . appears on vehicles with con· venience key*. A buzzer will also sound.
.. Press and ho l d the brake pedal c>
,&.
.
.. Apply the parking b r ake .
.. Move the selector lever to P .
Stopping on a slope
.. Always keep your foot on the brake pedal to hold the vehicle and prevent it from rolli n g back down the slope c>
,&.
.
Do not try to stop the vehicle "rolling back" by i ncreasing the e n gine spee d when a gear is engaged
~ CD.
Driving away on a slope (vehicles without hill hold assist* I Audi hold assist*)
.. Apply the parking b r ake .
.. Once you have engaged a gear press the ac · celerator carefully. T he park i ng brake will be released automatically if you are wearing your seat be l t.
Driving away on a slope (vehicles with hill hold assist* )
.. Once you have enga g ed a gear, release the footb r ake and press the acce l erator
~ page 95, Hill hold assist.
Driving away on a s lope ( vehicles with hold assist* )
.. Once you have engaged a gear, release the footbrake and press the accelerator c> page 95 , Hold assist .
Aut o m a t ic gearbox 109
In some sit u at i o n s (such as on mountain road s or when towing a trailer or ca r avan) it can be advantageous to switch temporari l y to the manual s hift programme so that the gear ratios can be selected manually to suit the driv i ng cond i tions c> page 111 .
On level ground it is sufficient to move these· lector lever to P. On a gradient the park i n g brake should be applied first and the selector lever should be moved to P c:0 page 92. This reduces the load on the locking mechan i sm and makes i t easier to move the sel e ctor l ever out of position P .
A_
WARNING
The driver should never get out of the ve· hide when the engine is running an dl a gear is engaged . If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine i s running, you must apply the parking b r ake and engage the parking lock P .
If the engine is running and a gear is engaged (D/S or R) or the vehicle i s in "tiptronic" mode, you will need to hold the car with the footbrake. Otherw i se, the car will "creep" forwards as the power transmiss i on is not fully interrupted even when t h e engine is i dling .
The accelerator pedal must on no account be pressed inadvertently when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle could otherwise start moving immediate l y (in some cases even i f the park i ng brak e is engaged) and possibly cause an accident.
D o not press the accelerator while selecting a gear wi t h the vehicle stationary and the engine running, as this could ca u se an accident .
- N ever move the selector l ever to R or P when dr i v i ng at normal speeds, as t h is could cause an accident.
- Before you drive down a steep gradient, reduce the speed and use "tiptronic" to select a low gear .
N ever a ll ow the brake to drag when driving downhill and do not use the brake II>
110 Au to ma t ic g ear b ox pedal too often or for long periods. Constant braking will cause the brakes to overheat and will considerably reduce the effectiveness of the brakes. It will increase the braking distance and could cause the brake system to fail.
- To avoid rolling back on gradients always hold the vehicle with the footbrake or parking brake if you have to stop.
Never attempt to hold the vehicle with the clutch when stopping on a gradient.
The clutch is disengaged automatically if it is overloaded and becomes too hot accident risk! If the clutch is ove rloaded , the Indicator lamp [;] will light up and a message will appear c:> page 113.
CD
CAUTION
When you have stopped on a gradient, do not try to stop the vehicle rolling back by accelerating when a gear is engaged.
This could cause the automatic gearbox to overheat and become damaged. Apply the parking brake or press the brake pedal in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling back .
If you allow the car to roll with the selector lever in position N with the engine switched off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged as it will not be lubricated .
In certain driving and traffic conditions, for instance in stop-and-go traff i c, if you have to pull away frequently or if the vehicl e creeps fo rw ards over a long distance, the gearbox can overheat and become damaged. If the warning lamp . ligh ts up, s t op the vehicle at the first opportunity and let the gearbox coo l down c:> page 113.
In certain driving and traffic conditions, for instance in stop-and-go traffic, if you have to pull away frequently or if the ve hicle creeps forwards over a long distance, the gearbox can overheat and become damaged . If the warning lamp [;] lights up, stop the vehicle at the first opportunity and let the gearbox cool down c:> page 113.
If to roll with the engine switched off, the S tronic gearbox will be damaged as it will not be lu brica ted c:> page 246 , Tow starting I towing away . i Note
For safety reasons the parking brake will only release automatically if the driver's seat belt is engaged in its buckle.
Downhill speed control
Applies to vehicles. with S tronic gearbox
The downhill speed control function helps the dri v er wh en driving down steep gradients.
Downhill speed control is activated on a downh ill grad i ent when the se l ector lever is in
D/S and the driver presses the brake pedal.
The gearbox automatically selects a s u itable gear for the gradient . The downhill speed control function attempts to maintain the speed at which the vehicle was travelling when the foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of physics and technical limitations of the power train). It may be necessary to adjust the speed again using the foot brake. The downhill speed control can change down to 3rd gear but no further , so it may be necessary to change to tiptronic mode on very steep gradients . In this case, change down manually to
2nd or 1st gear in tiptronic mode to use the engine brak i ng effect and reduce the load on the brakes .
Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon as the road levels out again or you press the accelerator pedal.
On vehicles with cruise control system" c:> page 9 7 , downhill speed control is activated when you set a cruising speed .
..&.
WARNING
The downhill speed control function cannot defy the laws of physics and may therefore not be able to maintain a cons t ant speed in certain circumstances. Always be prepared to use the brakes!
Manual gear selection ( tiptronic mode )
Applies to vehicles: with S tronlc gea rb ox/paddle levers
The tiptronic feature allows the driver to also change gears manually
.
Fig. 120 Centre console: Manual gear se l ection u s in g se l ecto r l ever
Fig. 121 Steering wheel: · Manual gear selection with padd l e levers •
Gear selection with selector lever
The tiptronic mode can be selected either with the vehicle stationary or on the move.
" From position D/S, push the selector l eve r to the right into the tiptronic selector gate to activate tiptronic mode. As soon as the automatic gearbox has activated this mode, the l etter M will appear on the display
Q page 106
,
Fig.
117;
e.g. M4 means that the vehicle is in 4th gear .
" Briefly push the selector Lever forwards
G
¢
Fig. 120 to change up a gear .
• Briefly pull the selector lever back
8 to change down a gear.
Gear selection with paddle levers*
You ca n use th e paddle levers when the selec tor lever is in position D/S or M ( = t iptronic selector gate).
Automatic gearbox 111
" To shift up a gear, briefly pull the paddle l ever 0 q Fig.121.
" To shift down a gear, briefly pull the paddle
Lever 0 .
If you use the paddle Levers when the se le ctor lever is in positions D/S, the gearbox will re-
main in manual mode for a while. To switc
h back immed i ate l y to automatic mode after changing gears manually, pull the padd ~ e lever
0 c:>
Fig. 121
for approximately 1 second.
If use the paddle levers permanently, push the selector Lever from position
DIS to the right into the tiptronic selector gate .
The gearbox a utomatically shifts up or down into the next gear before a cr itical engine speed i s reached .
The gearbox only allows manual gear changes if the engine speed would remain within the permissible range.
Kick-down feature
Applies to vehicles: with 5 tronic gearbox
The kick-down feature is designed to give maximum acceleration.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed r i ght down past the point of resistance at full. throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a Lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed . The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until the engine reaches maximum rpm ..
&
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slippery or wet, the kick-down feature could
cause the driving wheels to spin, which
could result in skidding.
Coasting mode
Applies to vehicles: w i th S tronlc gearbox, Audi drive select, except for 1.2 TFSI
In coasting mode, you can use the vehicle's kinetic energy to drive without using the accelerato r on certain stretches of road. This saves .,.
112 Automatic gearbox fuel by allowing you to tak e your foot off the accelerator earlier and let the vehicle coast
( for i n s tance when approach i ng a speed restriction in a built up ar e a ).
Switch i ng on coa s ting mode
Important: Sel ec to r l ever must be i n D , gradient must be le ss tha n 12 % .
" Select e ff ici en cy mode in drive select•
Q page 136 (you only have to do this once).
" Take your foot off the accelerator.
If you have selected the "on-board computer" display, the message Coasting will then appear . The gearbox automatically d i sengages the clutch at speeds above 20 km/h and le t s the vehicle coast without the engine brak i ng effect. The engine tick s over at idling speed while the vehicle I s coa s ting.
Stopping coasting mode
... Press the brake pedal or accelerator.
To use the engine braking effect and overrun fuel cut-off again, a ll you need to do is tap the brake pedal br i efly .
You can improve your fuel economy and help to reduce emi ss ion s by using a combination of the c oasting mode (i .
e . coasting with low fuel consumption on a longer s tretch of road) and the over r un fuel cut·off (i .e. u s ing the engine braking effect with no fuel consumption on a shorter stretch of road).
A
WARNING
If you are approaching an obstruction when coast i ng mode is swi t ched on, please remember that the vehicle w i ll not slow down as quickly as usual when you take your foot off the accelerator risk of accident!
The vehicle can pick up speed if you are driving down a slope in coasting mode risk of accident!
If other people are using your car, you should draw their attention to the coasting mode .
(D
Note
Coas t ing mode is on l y available in effi· ciency mode (drive select*).
The message Coasting only appears when the current fuel consumption display is selec t ed . The gear is no longer displayed when you are in coasting mode
(e.g. E instead of E7) .
The coast i ng mode Is deact i vated temporarily on gradients of 15 % or greater.
Launch control programme
Applies to vehicles w1Lh launch control I 6-speed S lronrc gearbox I diesel engines 125 kW and higher I petrol engines 140 kW and higher
The Launch control programme enables maximum accelerat i on .
Important: The eng i ne mu s t be warm and the steering wheel mu s t be pointing stra i ghtahead .
... Deactivate the s tart/ s top s y s tem"
<=:> page 101 . The LED in the button will light up.
... Deactivate the hold assi s t•
Q page 95. The
LED in the button w ill go out.
... Press the l n OFF I button once briefly while the engine is runn i ng l > l.
... Briefly pu ll t h e se l ector lever back from pos i tion D/S to se l ect position S, or move the selector lever to the right into the tiptronic gate, or select dynami c mode in drive select• ~ page 136. 1J.
I)
On vehicles with driver informa t ion system, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and the message Stabilisa t ion con t rol (ESC) : sport . Warning! Restric te d sta· billty appears tempo r arily in the i nstrument clus t er t o i ndica t e the deac t ivation s t atus.
2
> V ehi cles wi th out driver in forma t ion system: Th e indicato r lamp flashes slowly .
• Press the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and hold it down for at least one second.
• At the same time, press the accelerator all the way down with your right foot until the engine revs are high and steady.
• Take your left foot off the brake .
_&.
WARNING
- Always adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
- Only use the launch control programme when road and traffic conditions permit, and make sure your manner of driving and acce l erating the vehicle does not inconvenience or endanger other road users.
- Please note that the driven whee l s may start to spin when the sport mode Is switched on, causing the vehicle to lose grip, in particular on slippery or wet roads - danger of skidding!
When acceleration has been completed, you should deactivate the sport mode again by briefly pressing the' " OFF[ button. i Note
- The gearbox may be hot after you have used the launch control programme. In this case, the programme may not be available for several minutes. The programme will be available again after a cool-down per i od.
- Acce l erating with the launch control programme places a heavy load on all parts of the vehicle. This can result in increased wear and tear.
Back-up programme
Applies to vehicles: wi t h S t ronic gearbox
A back-up system is in place should a fault occur in the control system.
If all selector lever positions are highlighted in the instrument cluster display, a system malfunction has occurred. In this case, the
Automatic gearbox 113
S tronic gearbox will switch to a backup programme. The vehicle can still be driven in the backup programme, however only at reduced speed and not in all gears . In certain cases, you may not be able to select re v er s e gear .
CD
CAUTION
If the gearbox switches to the back-up programme, drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified.
Gearbox malfunction
• Gearbox malfunction : pl e ase stop the ve hicle and s elect P .
There is a malfunction i n the gearbox . Park the vehicle safe l y and do not dr i ve on. Obtain professional ass i stance .
• Gearbox overhe a ting! Ple a se stop v ehicle!
The gearbox is overheating and could be damaged. Stop the vehicle and let the gearbox cool down with the engine idling and these lector lever in position P. If the indicator lamp and t he message disappear, drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified. Do not drive on if the warning lamp stays on and the message does not disappear. You should obtain professional assistance. fi'J
Gearbox malfun c tion : you c a n continu e driving
D r ive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rect i fied. fil
Gearbo x malfunction : no rever s e gear
( you can continue driving)
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified. fi'J
Gearb ox malfunction : yo u can c ontinu e driving in D until engine off
Park your vehicle well away from moving traffic. You should obtain professional assistance. fi'J
Gearbox overheating : plea s e adapt dri ving style ~
114 Automatic gearbox
You can continue driving at moderate speed.
You can resume normal driving if the i ndicator lamp goe s out. mJ
Gearbox: please press brake pedal and select gear again
If a gearbox ma l function has occurred due to overheating, this message wi l l appear once the gearbox has cooled down again.
Releasing the selector lever manually
(left-hand drive vehicles)
Applies to vehicles: with S tronlc gea rb ox
The selector lever can be released manually if the electrical power supply should foil.
Fig .12
2
Fig. 123 Ma n ually re l eas i ng the selector leve r from pos i t i o n P
This section describes how to manually rel ease the selector lever on left-hand drive vehicles.
The manual release mechanism is located on the right underneat h the selector gate . Releasing the selector lever requires a certain degree of pract i ca l s kill. We therefore advise you to obtain professional assistance.
To release the selector lever, you will need the screwdriver from the vehicle's tool kit, which is located in the luggage compartment c:> page 236. Use the f l at blade side of the re · versible screwdriver insert.
Removing the selector lever cover
" Apply the parking brake© c:>
&. to prevent your vehicle from moving.
" Insert the flat-blade side of the screwdriver into the opening at the side of the gear lever boot and lever off the boot c:> Fig. 122 .
" Take hold of the corners of the selector lever boot by ha nd and carefully turn it inside out over the gear knob c:> Fig . 123.
Releasing the selector lever manually
" Press the ye ll ow re l ease mechanism sideways w i th the s crewdriver and hold it in place c:> Fig. 123 .
" Now press the interlock button on the selector lever @ and move the selector lever to position N.
" After manually releasing the selector lever make sure you clip the gear lever boot back into the gearshift gate .
If the power supply should ever fai l (discharged battery, etc.) and the ve hicl e has to be pushed or towed, the selector l ever must first be moved to posit i on N . This is possible after operating the manual release mecha nism.
_& WARNIN G
The selector lever must not be moved out of position P if the parking brake is not applied . If this is not possible, use the brake pedal to hold the vehicle . On a slope the vehicle could otherwise start to move inadvertently after shifting the selector lever out of position P - accident risk!
Releasing the selector lever manually
(right·hand drive vehicles)
Applies to vehicles· wi t h S t ron i c gea r bo x
The selector lever can be released manually if the electrical power supply should fail.
F ig . 1 2 4 Selector lever : Removing the cover
F i g . 125 Manually releasing the selector lever fr om position P
This section describes how to manually r elease the selector lever on right-hand drive vehicles .
The manual re l ease mechanism is located on the right underneath the selector gate. Releasing the selector lever requires a certain degree of practical skill. We therefore advise you to obtain professional assistance .
To release the selector lever, you will need the screwdriver from the vehicle's tool kit, which is located in the luggage compartment
Automatic gearbox 115 c> page 236. Use the flat blade side of the revers i ble screwdriver insert.
Removing the selector lever cover
.. Apply the parking brake© c> &_ to prevent your vehicle from moving .
.. Insert the flat-blade side of the screwdriver into the opening at the side of the gear lever boot and lever off the boot c> Fig. 124 .
.. Take hold of the corners of the selector lever boot and carefully turn it inside out over the gear knob @ .:> Fig. 125 .
.. Take out the panel for the selector lever position indicator and let it hang down to one side, suspended by the cable @ c:) Fig. 125.
Releasing the selector lever manually
.. Press the yellow re l ease mechanism sideways with the screwdriver and hold it in place @ c> Fig. 125 .
.. Now press the interlock button on the selector lever @ and move the selector lever to position N .
.. After manually releasing the selector Lever, m a ke sure you fit the panel for the selector
Lever position indicator back in the selector gate and clip the gear lever boot back into place.
If the power supply should ever fail (discharged battery, etc.) and the vehicle has to be pushed or towed, the selector lever must first be moved to position N. This is possible after operating the manual release mechanis m .
&.
WARNING
The selector lever must not be moved out of p osi t ion P if the parking brake is not applied. If this is not possible, use the brake pedal to hold the vehicle. On a slope the vehicle could otherwise start to move inadvertently after shifting the selector lever out of position P accident risk!
- - - - - - - '
116 Aud i adaptive cruise control
Audi adaptive cruise control
Introduction
Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control
The adaptive cruise control is a combined speed and distance control system . It assists the dr i ver by controlling the road speed and the distance to the vehicle in front within certain limits imposed by the system. The adaptive cruise control system can accelerate and brake when it detects a vehicle in front. This provides maximum comfort both on long motorway journeys and, in conjunction with an automatic gearbox*, in congested traffic.
General notes
General notes
Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control and
Audi pre sense front
Fig. 126 Front of vehicle: Sensor
These general notes apply to the adapt i ve cru i se control• and pre sense front* cf;> page 125.
The area surrounding the radar sensor cf;>
Fig. 126 must be kept free of stickers, deposits and any other substances which could impair the function of the adaptive cruise control and pre sense front systems. Notes on cleaning c:> page 204. Please bear the above in mind if technical modifications are made to the front of the vehicle .
The fun ct ion ality of the adaptive cruise control and pre sense front systems is restricted in certain s itu ations:
- Objects cannot be detected until th ey are w i thin the range of the sensor cf;> page 117,
Fig. 129.
The ability of the system to detect objects in front is limited when they are too close, travelling out of line, or moving into your lane.
Vehicles that are not clearly discernible, e.g. a motorcycle or cyclist travelling in front of you and vehicles with high ground clearance or a protruding load, are often identified late or are not detected at all.
When driving through bends c:>page 117.
When vehicles are stationary cf;> page 117.
.&.
WARNING
Please always direct your full attention to the road, even when you are using the adaptive cruise control and pre sense front r::!> page 125 is activated. It is a l ways the driver who is responsible for pulling away safely and maintaining a safe speed and distance from other road users. The purpose of pre sense front is to assist the driver. The driver must always intervene manually to avoid an impending co l lision. As the driver you are always responsible for braking in good time.
For safety reasons, the adaptive cruise control must not be used on roads with a lot of bends or in poor weather or difficult or slippery driving conditions (such as ice, fog, loose grit or gravel, heavy rain, etc.) risk of accident!
When you take a turn-off, drive along a motorway exit lane or pass through roadwork sections, please temporarily switch off the adaptive cruise control system.
This is to ensure that the vehicle does not accelerate to the cruising speed in such situations.
- The adaptive cruise control system will not brake the vehicle automatically if you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal.
Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal overrides the speed and distance control function. .,..
- The adaptive control system does not react and the functionality of pre sense front is restricted when you approach stationary traffic, such as the end of a traffic jam.
- The adaptive c r uise control and pre sense front systems do not react to pedestrians, animals or crossing or oncoming traffic.
Reflecting objects, such as crash barriers, the entrance to a tunnel, heavy rain or ice can impair the function of the rada r sensor.
CD
CAUTION
Impacts or damage to the bumper, w hee l arches o r underbody can cause misalignment of the sensor. The adaptive cru i se control and pre sense front systems can be impaired as a result. Have the systems checked by a qualified workshop.
When driving through a corner
Applies to vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and
Audi pre sense front
Audi adaptive cruise control 117
Stationary vehicles
Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control and
Audi pre sense fronl
F i g. 128 Example: Vehicle changing lane and vehicle stationary
Adaptive cruise control
The adaptive cruise contro l system only reacts to moving objects or vehicles wh i ch have already been detected as mov i ng objects . For example, if a vehicle @ , which has already been detected by the adaptive cruise control, turns off or changes Lane and another stationary vehicle @ is located in front of that vehicle, the system will not react to the stationary vehicle. Press the brake pedal to slow down.
Pre sense front
Pre sense front only reacts to stat i onary objects at low speed.
Adaptive cruise control
Description
App li es to vehicles. with Audi adaptive cruise contro l
F ig. 127 Example : D r iving Into a bend
When driv i ng into a bend <:!) Fig. 127 and driv i ng out of a bend, the adaptive cruise contro l system may react to a vehicle travelling in the next lane and therefore brake the vehicle. You can prevent this from happening by accelera t ing briefly.
F ig. 129 Se nso r r a nge
What can the adaptive cruise control do?
The adaptive cruise control uses a radar and video camera . The radar is subject to certain system Limitations <:!) page 116. ~
118 Audi adaptive cruise control
When there i s no t r aff i c in front, the adaptive cruise control wo r ks just li ke a norma l cruise control system by maintaining a constant speed. When you draw closer to a vehicle in front w h ich is detected by the system, the adaptive cruise control matches your speed to that vehicle by automatically applying the brakes, and then maintains a constant distance (which you can adjust in the se tti ngs).
As soon as it detects n o more veh i cles in front, the adaptive cruise control acce l erates back up to the cr u is i ng speed .
Applies to vehicles w i th automatic gearbox• :
I n congested traffic, t h e adapt i ve cr ui se control can brake down to a standst ill (subject to general system limitat i ons) and accelerate again under certain conditions ~
Vehicles with automatic gearbox.
In addition, the start/stop system may oper ate in the usua l way wh i le the vehicle is at a standstill ¢ page 98 .
Which functions can the driver control?
W hen you sw i tch on the adaptive cruise control, yo u can set your current spee d as the
" cr uising speed" Q page 118, Switching on/ off .
While you are driv i ng, you can interrupt the cruise control c::> page 121 or change the speed setting
Q page 120 at any t i me.
You can a l so change t h e fo l lowing settings:
Distance c::> page 122
Driving program c:> page 122
D r iving mode Q page 122
Switching on/off
Applies to vehicles: with A u d i adaptive cru i se contro l
Fig . 1 3 0 Control l ever: Switching on/off
Fi g . 1 31 Instrume n t cluster display: adaptive cru i se control
Depend i ng on the equipment i n your ve h i cl e, di ff erent c r uising spee d s may app l y t o the adaptive cruise co n tro l :
ACC ( ass i st package ): You can set any speed
1 l between 30 and 200 km/h.
ACC: You can set any speed
1
> between 30 and
150 km/h.
Ind i cator lamps and messages in the i n strument cluster disp l ay w i ll provide you with informat i on about the current driving situation and settings.
Switching on the adaptive c r ui s e control
.. Pull the lever towards you to posit i on
CD c::> Fig . 130. ACC : standby w ill appear on the instrument cluster disp l ay.
1 ) The s peed li m i ts vary in d i fferent c ountr i es and de · p e n d on t h e uni ts of speed o n t h e speedometer .
Setting the speed and activating the cru
is
e control
... To set the current speed as the cruising speed, press the
lsETI
button c)
Fig. 130 .
The speed setting is indicated by the LEDs
@ in the speedometer and is also shown briefly in the system status i ndicator @ c) Fig. 131 .
.,. Vehicles with automatic gearbox: To activate the cruise control when the vehicle is stationary, the Audi hold assist* function must have been activated or you must press the brake pedal.
Switching off the adaptive cruise control
... Push the lever away from you to position @ until it engages . The message AC C: off w i ll appear .
The LEDs indicating the stored speed in the speedometer dial will go out.
@ Warning and indicato
r
lamps
· -The adaptive cruise control is switched on. No vehicle has been detected i n front. A constant cru i s i ng s p eed is being maintained.
• -A vehicle in front has been detected . The adaptive cru i se con t rol regulates the speed to maintain a constant distance to the vehicle in front, and brakes and accelerates the vehicle automatically. all -
Automatic gearbox: The adaptive cruise control is switched o n . A vehicle in front has been detected. Y our vehicle is stationary and will not be set in mot i on again automatically.
· The adaptive cruise control alone is not able to brake the vehicle sufficiently to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle in front. You must intervene c) page 123, Driver intervention prompt.
© Graphical display in instrument cluster
I f the adaptive cruise control ls not shown on the Instrument cluster display, you can call up the display using the controls on the multifunction steering wheel c) page 29.
Audi adaptive cruise control 119
The graphical display shows you when a vehicle in front is detected and indicates how far away you are from that vehicle:
No vehicl e No vehicle has been detected in front.
Vehicle In wh i te · A ve hi cle has been detected in front.
Vehicle in r e d - Driver intervention prompt c) page 123.
The two a rr o w s on the sca l e © indicate the distance to the vehicle in front. If there is no vehicle in front, no arrows will be shown. If a vehicle is detected in front, the arrows will be on the scale .
The green area of the sca l e represents the distance setting (for information on how to change the distance setting, refer to c) page 122). When the actual distance is shorter (or is likely to become shorter) than the distance selected, the arrows move i nto the red area of the scale.
.&.
WARNING
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: If you press the
ISET
I button at a speed of less than 30 km/h, the vehicle will automatically accelerate up to the minimum speed setting of 30 km/h.
l Note
- The speed setting is cleared for safety reasons when you switch off the ignition or the adaptive c r uise control system.
When the adaptive cruise control is activated, you cannot switch on the ESC sport mode.
120 Audi adapti v e cruise control
Setting a new speed
Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control e
•
G
F ig. 1 32 Control lever: Setting a new speed
... Briefly push the lever up or down to increase or reduce the speed in steps .
... To increase or reduce the speed quickly, press and hold the lever up or down unti l the red LED @ reaches the desired speed r::!> page 118, Fig . 131.
Following any changes, the new stored speed will be displayed briefly in the system status indicator r::!> page 118, Fig. 131 @ .
Vehicles with manual gearbox
Applies to vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
The adaptive cruise control is available in second gear or higher (when driven in the normal engine speed range) .
When the adaptive cruise control is switched on, you mu s t press the clutch pedal in the normal way In order to change gear. The adaptive cruise control will remain activated when you change gear or press the clutch peda l.
You do not need to press the accelerator aft er selecting a gear andl re l eas i ng the clutc h . T he adaptive cruise control will regulate the speed for you.
The adaptive cruise control will be switched off automatically if you keep the clutch pedal depressed for too long or if you change gears incorrectly or use the clutch pedal improperly.
(D
Note
You cannot switch on the adaptive cruise control during a gear change.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox
Applies to vehicles· with Audi adaptive cruise control
The adaptive cruise control assists you when driving in congested traffic. When the adaptive cruise control has detected a vehicle in front and that vehicle stops, it applies the b ra kes (subject to system limitations) and ho l ds the vehicle at a standstill. When the sta r t/stop system is active, the engine is sw it ched off under certain conditions. The engine can be switched on aga i n ...
... by the start/stop system r::!> page 98.
... ifthe vehicle i n front drives away.
... if you pull the lever to po sitio n @
<:!> page 121, Fig. 133 .
... if you tap the accelerator pedal.
To resume adaptive cruise control mode when the engine is running:
... Tap the accelerator pedal, or
... Pull the lever towards you to position @
<:!> page 121, Fig. 133.
Using the adaptive cruise c ontrol to set the vehicle in motion
1 l
The message ACC : automatic go appears briefly after the adaptive cruise control has detected an object in front and braked the vehicle to a standstill. In th i s mode, your ve hi cle ca n dr ive off automatically .
If the message ACC : automatic go is on the display and the vehicle in front drives off, your vehicle will automatically start moving <=>
&
.
You can reactivate the ACC : automati c go message briefly by pulling the lever to position @ ¢ page 121 , Fig .
133 .
The ACC : automatic go mode is deactivated if you press the brake pedal. .,..
1 )
Not availab l e on vehicles for some markets.
Conditions for deactivation of the system
For safety reasons, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated when the vehicle is stationary:
if the driver's door is opened.
i f the ve hi cle remains stationary for over
3 m i nutes .
if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled .
A_
WARNING
I = -
If the ACC: automatic go
1
1 message appea r s, your vehicle will sta r t mov i ng even if there is an obsta cl e between your car an d the vehicle in front - risk of accident!
I
(0
Note
If your vehicle does not start moving as expected with the adaptive cruise control, even though the ACC : automatic go l> message is displayed, you can set the vehicle In motion by tapping the acce l erator with your foot.
The star t /stop sys t em operates n o r mally while yo u are driving wit h the adaptive cruise control.
Interrupting the cruise control
Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise co n trol
Audi adaptive crui s e control 121 control i s sw i tched on, for instance i n order to over t ake a vehicle.
.,. To accelerate manually, pull the lever t owards you to position @ and hold it in this position. The message ACC : override will appear. O r :
...
Press the accelerator.
... To reactivate the cruise control, release the lever or take your foot off the accelerator.
Interrupting the cruise control while driving
... Move the l ever to posi t ion @ . The message
ACC : standby w il l appear. Or :
... Ap p l y the brakes .
... To reactivate the cruise control and accelerate back up to the target speed, move the lever to position @ .
Interrupting the cruise control while stationary
Applies to vehicles with a u tomat ic gearbox:
... Push the l ever away from you to position @ .
The message ACC: standby will appear.
... To react i vate the cruise co n t r o l , press the brake peda l and pull the leve r towards you to position @ .
A
WARNING
It is dangerous to activate the cru i se control and accelerate back up to a target speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions - risk of accident!
F i g. 1 3 3 Cont r ol lever
I mpor t ant: T he adaptive cr ui se con t rol m u st be on .
Overriding the cruise control
Occasionally you may want to exceed the stored cruis i ng speed whi l e the adaptive cruise l l Not available on vehicles for so m e ma rkets .
122 Aud i adaptive cruise control
Setting the distance
App l ies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 13 4 Control lever : Setting the distance
... To display the current distance setting, briefly press the rocker switch ~ Fig. 134.
• To increase or reduce the distance by one level, briefly press the rocker switch to the right or left again. The distance between the two vehicles will be shown on the instrument cluster display.
When you draw closer to a vehicle detected in front, the adaptive cruise control matches your speed to that vehicle by a p plying the b r akes, a n d t h en maintains a constant distance (which yo u can adjust in the set ti ngs) . If the vehicle in front accelerates, the adaptive cr ui se contro l wi ll also accelerate, u p to the target speed you have spec i fied .
The higher the speed, the higher the d i stance in metres ~ .& . We r ecommend you to use the setting : di s tance 3 . You will then be follow i ng the general recommendations of automobile clubs, traffic authorities, etc.
The actua l distance maintained by the adaptive cruise control can be longer or shorter, depending on the traff i c situation, your current speed, and the driving style of the driver in front. c:::::;, _ c:::::;, ___ distance 1 : T his setting is equivalent to a distance of 28 metres at a speed of
100 km/h (time-based distance of 1 second). c:::::;, __ c:::::;, __ di s tan c e 2: T his sett i ng is equival ent to a distance of 36 metres at a speed of
100 km/h (time-based distance of 1.3 sec onds) . di s tan c e 3: T his sett i ng i s equivalent to a distance of 50 metres at a speed of
100 k m/h (time-based distance of 1.8 seconds) . c:::::;, ____ d i st a n c e 4: This sett i ng is equiva lent to a distance of 67 metres at a speed of
100 km/h (time-based distance of 2.4 seconds).
A
WARNING
When setting the distance, the driver is r esponsible for adher i ng to the locally applicab l e laws and regulations .
(D
Note
Distance 3 is set automatically each time the ign i tion is switched on. If you wou l d p r efer to have a different distance as the default sett i ng, yo u can have the adaptive cruise control menu extended/act i v a ted b y a qualified workshop.
Setting the driving program
Applies to vehicles: wit h A u di ada p t i ve c r u i se con t ro l
You can select differe n t dr i v i ng p rograms for the a d ap t ive cruise control on veh i cles without Audi dr i ve select * .
... On the MMI*, select: I MENU I button >control button Sy s tem s I Car systems > Dr i v e r assist > Adapt i ve c rui s e control > Driving program > comfort /s tandard / dynamic.
Selecting the driving mode
Applies to vehicles: wit h Audi adaptive c r u i se control
On vehicles with drive select, the driving program for the adaptive cru i se contro l is selected via the driv i ng mode.
... Select t he desired driving mode w i th the ro tary pushbutton: efficien c y* , comfort , auto , dyn a mic or i ndividual * ~ 136.
Driver intervention prompt
App l ies to vehicles: wi t h Audi adaptive cruise con t rol
F i g . 135 Instrument cluster : Driver intervention prompt
In so me situations the adapt i ve cr ui se control system alone is not able to brake the vehicle sufficiently to mainta i n a safe distance to t h e vehicle in front. The driver Intervention prompt warns you to take action in these s i tuations.
The warning lamp . and ins tru ment cluster display draw your attention to t he dange r
C) Fig. 135. In addition, a tone will sound.
Press the brake pedal to slow down.
Driver messages
Applies to vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
II
ACC : not available
The system cannot detect objects reliably and will be deactivated. The sensor is out of alignmen t or defective. Dr iv e to a qua li fied workshop and have the fault rect ifi ed.
II unavailable no sensor vision llJ
ACC and Audi pre sense: currently unavailable . No se nsor vision
These messages appear if the radar sensor vis ion is impaired, e.g
. b y leaves, snow, heavy road spray or dirt. Clean the sensor
C) poge 116, Fig. 126 . llJ
ACC : currently unavailable . Gradient too s te ep
The maximum possible road gradient for sa f e operation of the adaptive cruise control has
Audi adaptive cruise control 123 been e x ceeded. The adapt iv e cruise con tro l cannot be sw i tched on . ii)
ACC : only avai lable i n D, Sor M
Move the selector lever to position D/S or M.
Ii)
ACC : parking brake applied
The adaptive cru i se control system is deactiva· ted if the parking brake is applied. The adap· tive cruise control will be available again when the parking brake is released. fl
: current ly unavailable . Stabilisation control input
This message appears if t h e e l ectronic stab ili sation contro l (ESC) intervenes. In t hi s case, th e adapt iv e c rui se control will automatically be s witch ed off. llJ
ACC off : manual control!
T his message appears if the vehicle rolls bac k wards when driving away on a slight gradient, even t hough the adaptive cruise control is active. Press the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling back or colliding with an object behind.
ID
ACC : currently unavailable . Speed too
Low
This message appears on vehicles with manual g earbox if the current speed is too Low for
ACC mode.
You cannot store speed settings below 30 km/ h. Th e cruise contro l system switches off if t h e s p eed falls be l ow 20 km/h .
II
: available from 2nd gear up
The adaptive cr ui se control only operates in
2nd gear or higher (on vehicles with manual gearbox). llJ
ACC : engine speed
This message appears if the driver does not change gear in time when the adaptive cruise control accelerates or brakes the vehicle. The adaptive cruise control is switched off if the engi n e speed is not maintained within t h e permiss ib le range. This is indicated by a warning tone. .,.
124 Aud i adaptive cruise control fl)
ACC : cl ut c h pe d al pre ss ed
Vehicles with manual gearbox: Cruise control mode is deactivated if the clutch pedal is pressed for a relatively long period .
•••
Three white dots aptPear if a setting made with the control lever cannot be implemented. This might happen after stopping, for example,
i
f the adapt
i
ve cru
i
se control cannot set the ve
h
icle in motion because the driver
h
as unbuckled the seat belt.
Door op e n
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: You cannot switch on the adapt
1
cruise control if the veh
i
cle is stationary and a door is open
.
Audi pre sense
Introduction
Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense basic or Audi pre sense fronl
Pre sense basic and pre sense front can take action to protect the occupants in certain hazardous conditions, subject to the limitations of the system .
Because the different on-board systems are networked , pre sense basic can detect cr itical situations and take action to prepare the occupants for a potential impending collision.
Pre sense front uses a radar sensor and video camera*. It remains active (subject to the limitations of the s y ste m)
even
when the adaptive cruise control* is s witched off.
General notes
General notes
Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense front or Audi adaptive cruise co n trol
1 --
_8.
WARNING
Please observe the general safety warnings on ~ page
116, General notes.
1
Audi pre sense basic
Description
Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense basic
Pre sense basic functions are activated at speeds above 30 km/h.
The system can activate the following functions in certain situat i ons:
Seat belt tensioning (e.g. during hard braking): The seat belts on the front seats have reversible tensioners . Provided an accident does not occur, the !belts are loosened again s lig ht ly and kept ready for activation.
Windows and sun roof* automatic close function (e.g. during understeer or oversteer) : The s un roof* is closed completely but a small gap is left when the windows are closed.
Audi pre sense 125
Drive select: the activation threshold is different i n dynamic mode.
_8.
WARNING
The protection provided by p r e sense basic is still subject to the prevailing physical limits. It is a driver assist function and cannot prevent a collision on its own . Do not let the extra safety provided tempt you into tak i ng any risks when driving th i s can cause accidents.
Due to inherent system limitations, false activation of the system is possible .
Certain pre sense basic functions are deactivated when the ESC sport mode is switched on and when reversing.
The functions of the pre sense basic system may also be unavailable if a fault develops i n the ESC system or airbag control unit.
For pre sense basic, please note that if the front passenger's airbag has been deactivated, the reversible belt tensioner on the passenger's side will be deactivated as well.
Audi pre sense front
Description
Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense front or Audi adaptive cruise contro l
Pre sense front informs you if you are too close to the vehicle in front for an extended period. In certain s ituations it can warn you if there i s a danger of collision, and can in i tiate the application of the brakes .
Given sufficient time to react, i t can assess a dangerous situat ion where a vehicle in front brakes suddenly or where you are driving fast and approach a much s l ower vehicle. The pre sense front will not react if it is not in a posi tion to detect the danger .
126 Audi pre s ense
Warnings
Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense front or Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 136 lnstrumentduster : Collis i on warning
The system draws the driver's attention to hazardous situations :
Vehicles with adaptive cruise contro l : A d is· ta n ce wa rn i n g is given if you are too close to the vehicle in front for more than just a mo· ment. I f the vehicle in front were to brake hard, a collision would no longer be avoida· ble. This is indicat e d by a warning lamp • .
A co lli s i o n w a rn i ng is given if the vehicle in front is much slower than you or if it brakes hard. If this warning is given, you may need to take evasive action or brake hard to avoid a collision. The driver message A u d i p re se n se fill
D is t a nc e! c;)
Fig . 136 and a warning tone draw you r attention to the danger.
On vehicles equipped with adaptive cruise control, the warning lamp . will also light up.
If you do not t ake appropriate action in time, the pre sense front will assist by applying the brakes .
In the event of an impending collision, an acu t e wa rn i n g will be given initially in the form of a b rake jol t . In addition, the instrument cluster display c;)
Fig. 136 draws your attention to the danger. On vehicles equipped with adaptive cruise control, the warni ng lamp . will also light up.
- If you do not re spond to the acute warning, the pre sense front can, subject to general system limit at ion s, apply the brakes with increasing brake forcen, in order to slow the veh i cle down and take the impact out of a potential collision. In addit i on, the message
Aud i pre se n se· Input will appear .
At low road speeds, pre sense front can lni· tiate a fu ll brake applicationll just before an impending collisio n.
If the pre sense front detects that you are not braking hard enough in the even t of an impending collision, it will increase the brake pressure .
A_
WARNING
-
- The protection provided by pre sense front is still subject to the prevailing physical limits. It is a driver assist func· tion and cannot prevent a collision on its own. The driver must al w ays in t ervene personally. As the driver you are always responsible for braking in good time. Do not let the extra safety provided tempt you into taking any risks when driving this can cause accidents.
Due to inheren t system limitations, false activation of the system is possible.
P l ease note that the sensor i s not always able to detect all objects which may represent a potential hazard (accident risk).
- Pre sense front does not react to people, animals, crossing traffic or objects that cannot be clearly recognised
~ page 116, General notes .
Reflecting objects, such as crash barriers, the entrance to a tunnel, h eavy r ain or ice can i mpair the function of the radar sensor a nd the ability of the system to detect a collis ion r isk.
CD
CAUTION
Impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel arches or underbody can cause misalignment of the sensor. Thi s can impair the function of the pre sense front system .
Have the systems checked by a qualified workshop.
11 N o t av a ila b le o n v eh icles for some mar k e t s.
(D
Note
- The automatic brake application with increasing brake force can be cancelled by applying the brakes yourself or by pressing the accelerator firmly or by taking evasive action.
- For driver messages relating to pre sense refer to c) page 12 7.
Please note that pre sense front can apply the brakes unexpectedly. Always secure your luggage to prevent damage and possible injury.
Certain pre sense front functions are deactivated when the ESC sport mode is switched on and when reversing.
The functions of pre sense front will be unavailable if a fa11.J
l t develops in the adaptive cruise control* c) page 123 I c) page 127.
Settings on the infotainment system
Applies to vehicles. with Audi pre sense front or Audi adaptive cruise control
~ Select the following on the MMI*: I MENU I button > control button Systems I Car syst ems > D r i ver ass i st> Audi pre sense .
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, two different operating concepts are used:
Concept 1: When the Audi pre sense is switched off via the Sys t em setting, it remains deactivated the next time you switch on the ignition.
Concept 2: When the Audi pre sense is switched off via the System setting, it is automat i cally activated aga in the next time you switch on the ignition.
Switching the system on /o ff
System Audi pre sense can be switched on / off . This allows you to deactivate the early warning and prevent Audi pre sense from applying the brakes automatically .
Earl y warning - The distance and collision warnings can be switched on/o ff permanently.
Audi pre sense 127
(0
Note
- The pre sense is deactivated if you re-strict or switch off the ESC c) page 183.
- Switch off pre sense while the vehicle is being loaded onto a car transporter, t r ain or ferry boat, etc. This prevents the pre sense system from activating a warning in an inappropriate situation.
Driver messages
Applies to vehicles. with Audi pre sense or Audi adaptive cruise control
Audi pre se nse : currently unavailable . No sensor vision
This message appears if the radar sensor vis i on is impaired, e.g. by leaves, snow, heavy road spray or dirt. Clean the sensor c) page 116, Fig. 126.
Audi pre sense: off
This message appears in certain situations, e.g
. when the ESC is switched to sport mode c> page 183 .
Audi pre sense : sys tem fault!
This message appears if the functions o f the pre sense system are impaired. An impairment can occur, for example, if a sensor fails .
If the message remains displayed permanently, drive to a qualified workshop and have the fault rectified.
128 Audi active l ane assist
Audi active lane assist
Lane departure warning feature
Description
Applies to vehicles. with Audi active lane assist
The active lane assist uses a camera in the windscreen to detect lane markings (subject to general system limitations). If you approach one of the detected lane markings, the system corrects the steering to warn you that the vehicle might be about to cross one of the markings . You can override this steering input at any time. The ste ering wheel vibrates slightly i f you cross a lane marking. The vibration warning must be activated beforehand in the MMI*. The active lane assist is functional when it detects a demarcation line on at least one side of the lane in which you are driving.
The system does not warn you if you operate the turn signal before crossing a lane mark ing. In this case, it assumes that you intend to change lanes.
As the system is designed for driving on motorways and other major roads, it is only active above a speed of about 65 km /h (may vary in different export markets).
_A
WARN I NG
- The system Ini tiates a corrective steering input to warn the driver that the vehicle is about to leave the lane. As the driver you a r e a lw ays respons ible for staying in your own lane .
- T h e system can assist you to keep the ve· hicle in the lane, however it is not capa· ble of driving on its own. Never take your hands off the steering wheel.
- In certain situations, e.g. during heavy braking, the system may not correct the steering.
In certain circumstances, not all of the lane markings may be detected by the camera. A corrective steering input can l )
This funct i on i s not ava il able on all export versions . only be initiated if the system dete , cts a lane marking on the side in question.
- Variations in the road surface or objects on the road may be misinterpreted as lane markings. In this case, the steering may be corrected unexpectedly or not at all.
The camera's view may occasionally be obstructed, for example by vehicles trav· elling in front, rain, snow, heavy road spray, adverse light or a dirty windscreen. If assist may not detect the lane mar k ings or may respond incorrectly.
In certain circumstances, for in stance if visibility is poor, the setting for the steering Input may be s witched from
"early" to " l ate" l).
In certain driving conditions, such as ruts in the road surface, adverse cambers or side winds, the assistance provided by the steering correction may be ins u fficient to keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane.
For safety reasons, the active lane assist must not be used in poor weather or in difficult or slippery road conditions (such as ice, fog, loose grit or gravel, heavy rain, snow, etc.) - risk of accident!
Audi active lane assist 129
Switching on/off
App l ies to vehicles : wi t h Audi active lane assist
Fig . 137 Turn s i gnal lever : Button for active lane assist
The bend is too tight.
- You have taken your hands off the steering wheel. i i i Note
Make sure that the camera window
<:;>Fig. 138 is not covered with sticke r s or similar objects. Notes on cleaning e>page 20 4.
- On vehicles for some export markets: once the system is activated, it is "ready " each time the ignit ion is switched o n .
Instrument cluster display
A pp li es to vehicles: wit h A u d i ac ti ve l a n e ass i st
Fig. 138 Windscreen : Camera window for active lane assist
.. Press the button
Q
Fig . 137 to switch the system on/off. The indicator lamp . or . in the instrument cluster will light up or go out.
Indicator lamps
• Ready: The i ndica t or lamp lights up when the system is fully functional. The system is ready to in tervene .
• Not ready: The ind i cator lamp lights up wh en the system is s wi tched on but not ready to int ervene. The causes for this can include the following:
The r e are no lane markings.
The system cannot detect the relevant lane markings (e.g. temporary markings for road works or markings obscured by snow, dirt, rain or adverse light).
- The vehicle's speed is below 65 km/h, the speed at which the lane assist system is activated (the threshold may vary in different export markets) .
- The lane is narrower than 2 .
5 m or wider than 5.5 m .
F i g . 139 Instrument clu s ter : Mono c hrome d i splay
Fig. 140 J n st rum e n t cluster: Mult i-co l ou r ed display
Different controls are used to operate the active Lane assist, depending on the equipmen t in your vehicle:
Controls on windscreen wiper lever c:> page 28, or
- Control buttons on multi -f unction steering wheel* c:> page 30
Monochrome display
Refer to c:) Fig. 139.
130 Audi active lane assi s t
@ Solid lines: The active lane assist is switched on and ready to give warnings on the side indicated.
@ Flashing line (left or right): The active lane assist warns you by vibrating the steering wheel before you cross the lane demarcation.
®
Unfilled line(s): The active lane assist is switched on but not ready to give warnin gs.
No lines: The active lane assist is switched off.
Multi-coloured display
Refer to ~ Fig.
140.
@ White solid lines: The active lane assist is switched on and ready to give warnings on the side indicated.
@ Red line (left or right): The active lane assist warns you by vibrating the steering wheel before you cross the lane demarcation.
®
Grey solid lines: The active lane assist is switched on but not ready for warning.
No lines: The active lane assist is switched off.
Driver messages in the in s trument cluster display
Should the active la n e assist experience a fault, the indicator Lamp B in the i nstrument cluster display will go out and one of the foll ow in g messages will appear:
B Audi active lane assist: currently unavailable . No camera view
This message is displayed when the camera is no longer functional after the system has continuously failed to detect the lane markings.
This can have the following causes:
- The outside of the camera window
~ page 129,
Fig. 138
is dirty or frosted. Remove dirt or ice from this area of the windscreen.
The inside of the camera window is misted up. In this case, wait for the camera window to demist before switching on the active lane assist system again.
Due to the road conditions, the system has not been able to detect the lane markings for a long period. Do not switch the active lane assist system on again before the lane markings are discernible.
Pit
Audi acti v e lane ass i st : c urrently unavailable
A t e mpora r y fault is preventing the ac t ive lane assist system from functioning. Try switching on the active l ane assist system again !
l ater.
Pit
Audi active lane as s ist : system fault!
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified .
Pit
Audi active lane ass i st : please c ontinue steering vehicle
This message will appear if you do not steer the vehicle yourself. In this case, the active lane assist will switch to "not ready for warning" but will not be deactivated completely.
The system can assist you to keep the vehicle in the lane. However it is your own responsibility to steer and control the vehicle .
Setting the steering input time and vibration warning
Appl i es to vehicles· with Audi active la n e assist
You con change the active lane assist settings on t
h
e
M M!
to suit your individual preferences
.
... Select: I MENUI button> contro l button Sys· tern s I Car s ystems > Driver a ss ist > Audi active lane assist .
Steering input l> early : If th is setting is selected, a continuous steering input assists the driver to keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane. ~ ll This function Is not available on all export versions .
late : I f this setting Is se l ected, the steering is not corrected until just befo r e a wheel touches a detected lane marking.
Vibration warning
You can switch the additional steering wheel vibration warning on/off .
_& WARNING
1 ~
W hen the vibration warning is switched off, no vis u al warni n gs a r e g i ven i n the in strument cluster display if you cross a l ane marking.
1
@ Note
Your personal sett i ngs are stored automatically and assigned to the remote control key which is be i ng used (only appl i es to some count r ies).
Audi active lane assist 131
132 Audi side assi s t
Audi side assist
Lane change assist feature
Description
App l ies to vehicles: with Audi side assist
F ig. 14 1 Ar ea co v ered by the r a d a r se n s o rs lamp on the relevant exterior mirror w il l li gh t up at low i ntensity .
The intensity of the warning lamp i n this in format i on mod e i s kept relatively low, s o that it d oe s not distract you whi l e you a re l ook i ng at t he road i n front .
Warning mode
If you opera t e the tu rn sign al , t he s i d e assist will w o rn you if i t re g i st e r s wh a t i t judges t o b e a cr i tic a l vehicle. In t h is case, th e w a rn i ng l amp on the relevant e x te r ior mirror wi ll f lash brig h t l y . Please c h eck the situation in t he ex terior m i rror and by looking back over yo u r sho ul der c:;, .& in General notes on page 133.
You can adjust the brightness of the warning lamp on the exterio r mirror
<=> page 1 34 .
Please refer to the notes on the use of a towing bracket c:;, page 133 .
The side ass i st function assists the driver in monitoring following traffic and the blind spot s on both s ide s of the car. Within certain limit s impo s ed by th e s y s t e m, it warns you if it detects v e hicle s approaching qu i ckly or trav e l ling at about the same sp e ed as your own vehicle in the area covered by the sensors © c:> Fig. 141 . If it judges a lane change to be critica l , the warning lamp @ on the exterior mirror lig h ts up c:;, f;g. 142.
The warning lamp on t h e l eft han d mirror as sists the driver when c h anging lane towards the left and the wanning lamp on the right hand mirror assists the driver when chang i ng lane towards the rig r ht.
Information mode
As long a s you do not operate the turn s igna l , the s ide a s s i s t wi ll merely inform you of the pre s ence of veh i de s that it has detected and judges to be crit i cal. In this case, the warning
General notes
Applies to vehicles: with Audi side assist
Fi g . 1 4 3 Driving si tuation s
Fig. 144 Rear of the vehicle : Location of the sensors
(example)
The s i de ass i st is active above a speed of a b out 30 km/h.
@ Vehicles approaching from behind
In certain cases, a vehicle i s judged to be critical i n the event of a Lane change even if it is s t ill some dis t ance away . The faster a vehicle approaches, the earlier the warning will appear on the exterior mirror .
@ Vehicles moving at a similar speed
The warning Lamp in the relevant exterior mirror will warn you of vehicles that are moving with the flow of traffic at about the same speed as you if they are judged to be critical in the event of a lane change. In all cases, the
Audi side assist 133 side assist will give a warning for the veh i cles it has detected at the latest when they enter the "blind spot".
© Other vehicles being overtaken
When you are overtaking another vehicle slowly, with a speed differential of less than
15 km/h, the warning lamp in the exterior mirror will light up as soon as the other vehicle enters your blind spot .
If you are overtaking another vehicle quickly, with a speed differential of more than 1 S km/ h, the warning l amp will not light up.
System limitations
The radar senso r s a r e des i gned for normal l ane widths and monitor the l anes immed i atel y to the left and right of your vehicle. In certain situations the warning lamp on one of the exte r ior mirrors may light up even if no vehicle is travelling in an area that could be critical in the event of a lane change. For example:
- When you are travelling in a narrow lane or when you are not travelling in the centre of the lane . In this case the system may monitor another lane and register a vehicle that is not in fact travelling in an adjacent Lane.
- When you are driving into a bend. The side assist may react to a vehicle two lanes away.
If the system detects other objects (such as crash barriers, etc).
In [poor weather conditions. The functionality of the s i de ass i st is then restr i cted.
T he rada r se n so r s ~ must not be o b structe d by stickers, bicycle racks, depos i ts o r any other substances w hi ch could i mpai r the function of the system. The s i de assist must not be used when towing a trailer. For notes
on cleaning, please refer to
c:) page 204 .
&_ WARNING
- Always watch the road and the area surrounding the vehicle. The side assist feature is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. The driver is always responsible for the safety of lane c h anges and other manoeuvres. .,.
134 Audi side assist
In certain situations, the system may not function properly, or the funct i onality of the system may be restricted. For example:
If other vehicles are approaching very quickly, or if you are overtaking other vehicles quickly. The warning lamp may not light up in time.
- In poor weather condi t ions, such as heavy rain, snow or road spray.
-If you are travelling in very wide l anes, in tight bends or over crests. T he system may not detect vehicles i n the ad jacent lane because they are ou t s i de the area covered by the sensors.
CD
CAUTION
Impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel arches or underbody can cause misalignment of the sensors. This can impair the functionality of the system. Have the sys tems checked by a qualified workshop. i
Note
The warning lamps on the exterior mirrors may not be properly visible if tinted foil is affixed to the side windows on the driver's or passenger's side.
Switching on and off
Apploes to vehicles· w i th Audi side assis t
The system can be switched on and off on the
MM I * .
• Se l ect: I MENUI button> contro l button Systems I Car s ystems > Driver assist > Audi side assist. Select off to switch off the sys tem.
The warning lamps in the exterior mirrors light up briefly each time the ignition is switched on to indicate that the system is activated .
Adjusting brightness of warning lamp
Applies to vehicles. wit h Aud i s i de ass i st
The brightness of the warning lamp can be adjusted on the MMI• .
• Select: I MENU I button> control button Systems I Car systems > Dr i ver ass i st > Audi side a ss ist .
The brightness of the warning lamp in both the information and warning modes is regulated automatically according to the ambient light level. If you are in very dark or very light surroundings when you adjust the brightness of the warning lamp, the automatic br i ghtness con t rol may already have reac h ed the lo w es t or t he br i ghtest setting. I n such a case it is poss i ble that you won't notice a difference whi l e you are adjusting the brightness or that you will on l y notice it once the light surroundings have changed.
Please adjust the brightness of the warning lamp for the information mode so tha t it does not distract you while you are looking at the road in front. When you change the br i ghtness, the warning lamp on the exterior mirror will light up briefly with the intensity set for the information mode . The intensity of the lamp in the warning mode is linked to the intensity in the information mode and is adjusted automatically .
(!)
Note
T he side assist is not active whi l e t he sett ings a r e being adjusted.
- Y o u r personal sett i ngs are stored automatically and assigned to the remote cont r o l key which is being used.
Driver messages
Applies to vehicles; with Audi side assist
Should the side assist be deactivated automatically, a driver message will appear in the instrument cluster display. .,..
$1
Audi side assist: currently unavailable.
No sensor vision
The radar sensors are blocked. The area in front of the sensors must not be obstructed by bicycle racks, stickers, deposits or any other substances. If necessary, clean the area in front of the sensors ¢ page 133, Fig. 144.
@!Audi side assist
:
currently unavailable
The side assist is tem p orarily inoperative and cannot be switched on (for instance if the battery is not sufficiently charged).
@I
Audi side assist
:
system fault!
The system cannot detect vehicles reliably and will be deactivated. The se n so r s are out of alignment or defective. Have the system checked by a qualified workshop soon.
$1
Audi side assist
:
not available when towing
The side assist function will be switched off automatically when the electrical connector for the trailer socket is plugged in on vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket. If the towing bracket is not factory-fitted the side assist function may not be switched off automatically. The side assist must not be used when towing a trailer.
Audi side assist 135
136 Audi drive select
Audi drive select
Adjusting the vehicle set-up
Introduction
Applies to vehicles: w i th Audi drive select
Drive se l ect allows you to use d i fferent setups on your vehicle . The four modes efficie ncy *, comfo rt , auto a nd dynamic allow the driver, for example, to change from a sporty mode to a more comfortable one via the :I~ button in the centre console or via the MMI*.
In add i tion, the individual * mode allows you to adapt the veh i cle set-up to suit your pe r sona l dr i v in g style. For example, you m i gh t choose to combine a more dynam i c eng i ne set-up w i th a lighter steering response.
Description
Applies to vehicles: with Audi drive select
The possible vehicle set-up in each mode depends on which equipment is installed on your vehicle. The eng i ne and steering are basic pa r ts of your ve hi cle w hi c h are a l ways included i n the set-up.
Engine and automatic gearbox*
The response of the engine and automatic gearbox • to accelerator pedal movements will be more spontaneous or balanced, depending on which mode you select. In efficiency* mode the automatic gearbox* selects the next gea r at lower eng i ne s p eeds and the coasting mode is act i vated ¢pag e 1 11. This helps to r educe fue l cons u mpti o n.
Sus pen sio n control ( Audi magnetic ride ) *
The suspension control uses sensors to collect information on steering movements, braking and acceleration input by the driver, road surface quality, road s p eed and veh i cle loading.
W i t h drive se l ect you can choose between dynamic and comfo r t-oriented s u spension setups (dynamic and comfort modes), or opt for a more balanced set-up (auto mode).
Steering
The degree of power assistance can be varied .
Various modes are possible c> page 13 7. The light, indirect steering response in comfort mode is particularly suitable on long motorway trips, for i nstance. The steering has a t i g h ter, more direct feel in dynamic mode.
The steering response is even more agile on vehicles with progressive steering * .
Corner ing lig ht *
The cornering light adapts itself to the contour of the corner at speeds from approximately 10 km/h to 110 k m/h. The swivel actio n and light distrib u tion are also adjusted according to the operating mode.
Air co ndit io ner*
The air conditioner runs in a particularly economical mode when the efficiency• setting is selected. When this function is selected, eco * is shown in the display of the automatic air conditioner .
Cruise control system*
The acceleration respo n se i s particu l arly economical in efficiency * mode.
Adaptive cru i se control*
The acceleration mode can be varied from comfort to sport by changing the setting in drive select. The setting also determines whether the response of the adaptive cruise control to the driving style of the driver In fron t is more balanced or spontaneous. The efficiency * mode chooses a set-up for maximum economy.
Note
On some models the vehicle's maximum speed can only be obtained in the auto and dynamic modes.
On vehicles with man u a l gearbox, an E appears In the gea r -cha n ge i ndicator when efficiency• mode is activated.
On ve h icles with automatic gearbo x , i f you select efficiency * mode when these lector lever is in position D, E will automatically appear in the instrument cluster display.
- Please note that t h e efficiency * mode is not available in towing mode.
Selecting the driving mode
Applies to vehicles: wi t h Audi drive select
You con choose between efficiency " , comfort, auto, dynamic and individual* .
F i g . 145 Centre console: Button for drive select
Audi drive select 13 7 mode appears in the instrument cluster displ a y. Or:
"" Select the following on the MM !* : I MENU I bu t ton > Systems I Car systems > efficiency •, comfort , auto , dynamic or individual* .
You can change the mode while the vehicle is
stationary or moving.
I
f traffic conditions per·
mit, take your foot off the accelerator briefly after you change the mode so that the new mode is also activated for the engine. effic i ency* t rims the vehicle to an especially fuel-saving set -u p and helps the driver adopt an economical driving style. comfort - a l ters the vehicle set-up for a mo r e com for tab l e r i de and is suitable fo r lo n g motorway trips, for i nstance. auto - g i ves an overall impressio n of a comfortable but dynamic ride and is a good choice of set-up for everyday use . dynamic - gives the vehicle a tighter set-up and i s idea l for performance driving. individual * ~ page 137 .
The last selected mode is still active when you restart the vehicle.
_.& WARNING
A lways keep an eye on the traffic when using the drive select cont r ols - Risk of accident!
Fi g. 146 MM!
: dr i ve select
""T o se l ec t the mode , p r ess the ~:l~.ll butto n
~ Fig. 1 4 5 repeatedlly until the des ir ed
Configuring individual mode
You can configure your own personal vehicle se t -up.
"" Select:
I
MENU I button > Systems I Car systems > control button Set indiv i dual. The individual * mode will be automatically activated when you select the menu.
The equipment installed on your vehicle determines which systems you can select . The following table provides an overview of the characteristics . .,..
The individual * driving mode will automatically be activated when you have finished configur i ng the settings.
138 Audi drive select
Systems
Engine and Gearbox
Steering
Cornering light * comfort
Comfortable
Comfortable
Comfortable
Audi adaptive cruise control* Comfortable
Suspension control* Comfortable
Engine sound* Subdued a) Subdued in pos i t i on D and dy n am i c i n pos iti on S.
(D
Note
Your settings in individual* mode are stored automatically and assigned to the remote control key current l y in use. auto
Balanced
Balanced
Balanced dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynam i c
Balanced
Balanced
Dynamic
Dynamic
Subdued/dynamical Dynamic
Parking aids
General notes
Applies to vehicles: with rear parking aid/parking system plus/reversing camera/park assist
Various systems are available to help you when parking or manoeuvring in tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehicle.
The rear parking aid gives an acoustic warning if t here are any obstacles behind the car
Wh en you are park i ng, the parking system plus warns you acoust i ca ll y and opt i ca lly about obstacles detected In front of and behind the veh i cle ~ On vehicles with park assist , the area detected at the side of the vehicle ® q page 140, Fig. 147 is a l so monitored.
The reversing came ra uses the MMI display to show a picture of the area behind the vehicle captured by the camera. This picture helps you to park the vehicle parallel or perpendicular to the roadside. In addition, you are assisted by the functions of the parking system plus q page 142.
The p a rk assist helps you to find suitab le parking spaces, to manoeuvre the vehicle in to spaces parallel or perpendicular to the roadside and to drive out of spaces paralle l to t he kerb q page 146.
.&.
WARNING
Always watch the road and the area s urrounding the vehicle . The e l ectronic systems cannot rep l ace the full concen tra tion of the driver. The driver is always responsible for safe t y during parking and all other manoeuvres.
Please note that certain surfaces, such as clothing fabrics, cannot be detected or displayed by the system - risk of accident!
- The sensors and cameras have blind spots in which neither people nor objects are registered. It is particularly impor-
Parking aids 139 tant to ensure that there are no small c hil dren or animals near the vehicle - r i sk of accident!
Always keep a close watch on the area around the vehicle and make full use of t h e rear view mirrors.
CD
CAUTION
The system may not always be able to detect objects such as the following:
Chains, tr ailer draw bars, posts or fenc e s
- Objects above the sensors, such as wa ll protr u s ion s, etc.
Objects with certa in surfaces or structures, such as wire fences or powder snow
As your car moves closer to low obstacles, they may disappear from the sensors' field of vision. Please note that you will no longer be warned about these obstacles.
Impacts or damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arches or underbody can cause misalignment of the sensors. This can impair the effectiveness of the parking aids. Have the systems checked by a qualified workshop.
(D
Note
In certain situations, a warning may be given by the system even i f there is no obstacle within range of the sensors .
This can be caused by the following , for instance:
C ertain road surfaces or long grass
- Ext ernal ultrasound sources, e.g. from street cleaning vehicles
Heavy rain or snow or dense exhaust fumes
- To familiarise yourself with the system, we recommend that you practise parking in a quiet location or a car park. The weather and light conditions should be good. ~
1 4 0 P a r k in g ai d s
You can change the display and adjus t the volume and pitch of the beeps
Q page 150.
On vehicles without MMI " , you can have these settings changed by an Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
Please refer to the notes on "Towing a trailer" Q page 151.
- There is a slight delay in the picture dis played on the M M I.
- To ensure that the acoustic par k ing aid works properly, the sensors must be kept clean and free of snow and ice.
Rear parking aid
Description
App l ies to vehicles: with rear parking aid
The rear parking aid is an acoustic parking system .
Descriptio n
Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle, you are alerted by acoustic signals (beeps).
Please ensure that the sensors are kept free of stickers, deposits and any other substances which could impair the function of the system. Notes on cleaning Q page 204.
The measuring range of the sensors starts at about :
I
Side
Ceotre 1.60 m
The acoustic signals sound w i th increasin g frequency as you approach the obstacle. A warning tone will sound continuously when the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away from the obstacle. Stop reversing immediately
Q
.&. in General notes on page 139, q (D in
General notes on page 139!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about four seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected obstacle (it will not be reduced if the obstacle is closer than 0 .
30 m) .
A c t iva ti ng
The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged. You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone.
Parking system plus
Description
Applies to vehicles : with parking system plus/p a rk assist
The parking system plus provides acoustic and visual assistance when parking .
F i g . 14 7 Display zone s
Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect an obstacle, you are alerted by acoustic signals (beeps) and a graphic display.
Please ensure that the sensors are kept free of stickers, deposits and any other substances which could impair the function of the system. Notes on cleaning <..:> page 204.
Approximate range for each display zone:
@
®
©
®
©
*
1.20 m
0.90m
1.60 m
0.90m
0.90 mal a ) App l i es to vehicle s w i th p ar k ass i s t
The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the obstacle . A warning tone will sound continuously when the vehicle is less than approx . 0 .
30 m away from the obstacle (or less than approx .
0.20 m away in zone @ •). Stop mov i ng immediately
Q
.&. in General notes on page 139,
Q © in General notes on page 139! Ill>
The volume of the warning beeps w i l l be gradually reduced after about four seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected obstacle (it will not be reduced if the obstacle is closer than 0.30 m) . i
Note
Zone © * is detected and analysed as the vehicle is moving past. When you switch on the ignition or after the vehicle has been stationary for a while or a door is opened, the ambie n t surroundings may have changed. Zone © * is displayed in b l ack on the MMI display for this reason.
Switching on/off
Applies lo vehicles : with parking s ystem plus/park assist
Parking aids 141
• Press the f>' '' .l switch, or
• Switch off the Ignition.
Segments in the graphic display
You can estimate the distance to an obstacle by referring to the segments in front of and behind the vehicle (vehicles with parking system plus*) or the segments surrounding the vehicle (vehicles with park assist*) <::> Fig. 149.
The red lines (on some equipment versions only ) indicate the anticipated path of the vehicle, depending on the steering wheel angle. A white segment indicates an obstacle that has been detected beyond the path of travel. Red segments represent objects detected within the path of travel. The closer t h e vehicle gets to the obstacle the closer the segments move towards the veh i cle in the graphic. At the l atest when the penu l timate segment is highlighted the vehicle has reached the danger
(coll i sion) zone. Obstacles within the danger
(coll i sion) zone are shown in red, even if they are beyond the path of travel. Stop mov i ng immediately <::> .&. in General notes on page 139, <::> © in General notes on page 139!
Fig. 14 8 Centre console: Switch for park i ng a i d
F ig. 149 MM!
: Prox i m i ty graph i c (vehicles wit h pa rk assist • )
Switching on
... Engage reverse gear, or
• Press the P...l switch in the centre console
<::> Fig . 148 . You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone and the LED in the switch will light up .
Switching off
• Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h, or
142 Parking aids
Reversing camera
Introduction
Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus with revers· ing camera
General notes
Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus with revers· ing camera
Fi g . 1 5 2 © : A r ea covered by t h e r e vers i ng c a mera; @ : area NO T covered by t h e reve r s in g c a m era ( exa m ple)
Fl g.
150 side
F i g . 15 1 D i agram : Pa r king parall'el to the roads i de
In this system , a reversing camera is prov i ded in addition to the parking system p l us c:::> page 140.
You can use the system to park perpendicular to the roadside, e .
g . in a parking bay or ga rage c::> Fig. 150 . Alternatively, you can park parallel to the road s ide, e.g
. next to the kerb c:::> Fig . 151 .
0
Fi g. 15 3 Boot l i d : Locat i o n of r evers in g camera ( exa m· p l e )
T he reve r sing c a me ra is loc a ted a bove the r ear number plate. Pl ease ensure t h at the lens o f the reversing came r a c:::>
Fig . 153 is k ep t free o f deposits and any other substances wh i ch could impair the function of the parking a i d.
Note s on cleaning c:::> page 204 .
<D r:!> Fig . 152 repres e nts the a rea cov e red by t h e reversing camera . Only th i s area is s hown in the picture on the M M ! display . Objects out of range of the camera i n area @ do not appear in the pictu r e.
The accuracy of the o r ientation li nes arnd the bll.lle a r ea markings dec r eases i f the dynamic mode is activated c::> page 136.
A
WARNING
Please observe the safety warnings r:!>
&
in General notes on page 139.
For safety reasons, you should not !Use the sy s tem if the position and i nsta ll ation angle of the reversing camera have liJI.
Parking aids 143 been changed, e.g. due to an accident.
Have it checked by a qualified workshop .
Only use the reversing camera to assist you if it is supplying you with a good and clear picture . The quality of the picture can be impaired by adverse light, dirt on the lens or a defect .
- Only use the reversing camera when the boot lid is completely closed . The orientation lines and blue markings are not shown when the boot lid is open. Please make sure that there are no objects mounted to the rear end of the vehicle which could b l ock the view of the reversing camera.
Th e camera lens en l arges and distorts the field of vision. Objects on the screen are modified and depicted inaccurately.
In certain situations, people or objects on the display may appear closer or further away than they really are:
- Objects which are not touching the ground, such as the bumper of a parked vehicle, a tow-bar or the rear end of a truck. In this case, do not use the orientation lines as a guide.
When you are reversing from a horizon tal surface up a gradient or down a hill.
When approaching protruding objects.
When the vehicle has been loaded with a greater load on the rear.
~~~~~~~~~~
CD
CAUTION
P l ease observe the safety warn i ngs¢ (!) in General notes on page 139.
- The orange orientat ion lines on the MM I display show the path of the rea r end of the vehicle if you were to reverse using the current steering angle. NB: The front end o f the vehicle swings out further than the rear. Please make sure you keep a sufficient distance between the vehicle and any obstacles to make sure that the exterior mirror or edge of the vehicle do not collide with the obstacles.
Switching on/off
Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus with revers· ing camera
Switching on
... Engage reverse gear, or
... Press the P.A switch in the centre console
Q page 141 , Fig . 148 . You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone and the LED in the switch will light up.
Switching between the reversing camera and graphic display
... Press the con t rol button for Graphic ®
~ page 144, Fig. 154 to show the graphic display on the screen.
... Press the control button for Rear view to d i sp l ay the picture from the reversing camera .
Switching off
... Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h, or
... Press the P-I A switch, or
... Switch off the ignition. i Note
The graphic on the left of the displ.ay h elps identify the critical area of the vehicle.
1 4 4 Parkin g a id s
Parking perpendicular to the roadside
Applies to vehicles: with parking system p l us with reversing camera
This view con be used when parking your vehicle in a garage or parking boy .
Parking parallel to the roadside
Applies to vehicles: with parking sys t em pl u s with r eversing camera
This view con be used when parking your vehicle at the roadside.
Fig. 154 MMI : Approaching a park i ng space Fig. 156 MM!: Blue area mark i ng aligned in pa r k i ng space
Fig. 155 MMI: AUgn i ng the vehicle
... Switch on the MMI* and select reverse gear
... The orange orientation lines @ represent the path of the vehicle. Turn the steering wheel until the orange orientation lines are pointing towards the parking space
¢ Fig. 154. You cain estimate the distance to an obstacle by referring to the markings @ .
Each marking is equivalent to app r ox. 1 metre. T he blue marking is an extension of the vehicle outline and reaches about five me tres to the rear of the vehicle.
... Reverse into the space and adapt the steer ing angle to the parking space, using the orange Lines to assist you
Q
&
in General notes on page 142, ¢ (Din General notes on page 143 .
@ indicates the rear bumper.
Stop moving, at the latest, when the red orientation Line @ is bordering on an obstacle .
Fig. 1 57 MMI : Blue marking touches edge of p<1ve· men t
The sect i on be l ow describes how to park on the righ t side of the road . The procedure for parking on the left is similar.
If an obstacle (such as a wall) is Located next to the parking space, please follow the instructions for "Parking next to obstacles"
¢ page 145.
... Operate the right turn signal.
... Position your car beside a parked ve h icle in front of the space where you want to park .
The distance from the veh i cle should be about 1 metre.
... Switch on the MMI* and select reverse gear.
The parking aid will be switched on a nd the perp e ndicul a r pa r k i ng view will be di i splayed .
... Press the appropr i ate control button on the
MMI* control console to select @ ..,.
c;)
Fig. 156. The
parallel parking
display will appear.
• Reverse and align your vehicle in such a way that the blue area marking @ borders onto the vehicle behind or onto the parking space line marking c;) & in General notes on page 142, c;) CD in General notes on page 143 . The blue marking is an extension of the vehicle outline and reaches about five metres to the rear of the vehicle. The long side of the blue marking should border onto the kerb. The complete blue area marking must fit into the parking space.
• When the vehicle is stationary turn the steering wheel to the right as far as it will go.
• Reverse I nto the park i ng space until the b l ue curve c;) Fig . 157 touches the kerb c;) & in
General notes on page 142, c;) Q) in General notes on page 143. Stop the vehicle .
• When the vehicle is stationary turn the steering wheel to the left as far as it will go.
• Continue to reverse into the parking space until the vehicle is standing parallel to the kerb c;) & in General notes on page 142, c;) CD in General notes on page 143.
@ indicates the rear bumper . Stop moving, at the latest, when the red orientation line @ is bordering on an obstacle . Keep a close watch on the front of your vehicle .
Parking next to obstacles
If an obstacle (such as a wall) is located next to the parking space, the clearance at the side of the vehicle must be larger. Posit i on the long side of the blue area in such a way that there is suff i c i ent distance to the obstacle .
The area marking must NOT touch the obsta cle. You must also start turning the steering wheel much earlier. The blue curve c;) Fig. 157 must not touch the obstacle - make sure there is sufficient clearance. l Note
The orientation lines and markings appear on the left or right side, depending on which turn signals are on.
Parking aids 145
Towing mode
Applies to vehicles : with parking system plus w i th revers· ing camera and low i ng bracket
This view helps you to position the vehicle in front of a trailer .
Fi g . 158 Infota i nment display: Rear view
• Press the front r i ght control button on the
MMI* control conso l e repeatedly unti l @ c;)
Fig . 158 is selected . The Towing mode display will appear.
• You can now position your vehicle in front of the trailer c;)
A in General notes on page 142, c;) CD in General notes on page 143. The orange orientation line @ indicates the anticipated path of the tow-bar.
You can use the blue lines @ to estimate the distance to the trailer hitch .
146 Parking ai d s
Park assist
Description
Applies to vehicles: with park assist
The park assist helps the driver to manoeuvre the vehicle into and out of parking spaces.
Fig. 159 Diagram : Parking parallel to the roads id e
Fig. 1 60 Diagram : Parking perpendicular to the roadside
The park assist helps you to find suitable parking spaces, to manoeuvre the vehicle into spaces parallel or perpendicular to the roadside and to drive out of spaces parallel to the kerb . The parking space can be located be tween two vehicles or behind one vehicle. The park assist takes over the steering whi l e the driver is parking the vehicle in the usua l way.
The parking system plus is an integral component of the park assist c:> page 140 and helps you during the parking manoeuvre.
The park assist sensors are located on the sides of the front a n d rear bumpers. Please ensure that the sensors are kept free of stickers, deposits and any other substances which could impair the function of the system .
Notes on cleaning c:> page 204.
In short parking spaces, the parking aid warn ing tone will sound continuously when the vehicle is less than approx. 0.20 m away from the obstacle. Stop moving immediately!
_A
WARNING
Please observe the safety warnings c:> &. in General notes on page 139.
Please note that the park assist only handles the steering. As the driver you are always responsible for braking and accelerating.
It is the driver's responsibility to decide whether a parking space shown in the display is suitable for the vehicle.
The front of the vehicle swings out during the parking manoeuvre. Please take all necessary measures to ensure that other road users are not endangered.
The steering wheel turns rapidly on its own when parking the vehicle and leaving the space. Injury may result if a person reaches between the spokes on the steering wheel when it is turning.
CD
CAUTION
- Please observe the safety warnings
c:> ©
in General notes on page 139.
- In certain situations, the park assist will guide the vehicle onto or across the kerb, for instance if other vehicles are parked on the kerb. You should always be ready to take over the steering wheel in order to prevent damage to the tyres and/or wheel rims.
Certain road conditions, such as loo se gravel, snow or ice can cause unexpected results when parking.
CD
CAUTION
T he sensors may not always be able to detect objects such as trailer draw bars, thin rails, fences, posts, waste bins and trees, etc. This could result in damage to your car.
Please note that the system may not always be able to detect the surface of certain objects or substances, such as wire fences or powder snow, etc. You should
therefore check that the parking space is really large enough before parking the vehicle.
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give any further warning. Failure to respond to a parking system warning can result in damage to your vehicle and other property . Please bear this in mind, for example, when using the park assist to park behind a truck. Always keep a close watch on the area in front of and behind the vehicle while parking, and intervene promptly if necessary.
To prevent damage to the sensors when washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner or a steam cleaner, do not hold the cleaner less than 10 cm away from the sensors and do not keep the cleaner pointed directly at the senso r s. i Note
The electronic sta bilisation control (ES() must not be switched off during the parking manoeuvre ¢ page 183.
The park assist cannot be used to park the vehicle on tight bends.
If you achieve different results with the park assist after a tyre change, have the system adjusted by a qualified workshop.
The park assist cannot be used to park the vehicle if a tra 1 the electrical connector for the trailer socket is plugged in.
Switch
i
ng on and off
Applies to vehicles: with park assist
P a rking aid s 14 7
Fig. 1 61 Centre console: Switch for park assist
Fig. 162 Instrument cluster: Looking for a parking spac e .
@ parallel to the roadside, @ perpendicular to the roadside
... To park parallel to the roadside, press the
I@ button once ¢ Fig . 161 . Display @
¢ Fig . 162 will appear in the instrument cluster. Or:
.. To park perpendicular to the roadside, press the I@ button twice . Display @ will appear.
.. The LED in the I@ button is lit if the park assist is switched on .
.. To swi tch off the park ass i st, press the
I@ button. The LED in th e I@ button will go out.
148 Parking aids
Looking for a parking space
Applies to vehicles: with park ass i st
Fig. 163 Instrument cluster : Prompt to keep driving forwards (a parking spac-e has been detected)
The section below describes how to park parallel to the roadside · . The procedure for parking perpendicular to the roadside is similar.
Important: For the best parking result, you should maintain a distance of approx . 1 metre to the row of parked cars .
.. Activate the turn signal for the side on which you want to park .
.. To park parallel to the roadside, drive forwards at not more than 30 km/h. Or:
.. To park perpendicular to the roadside, drive forwards at not more than 20 km/h .
.. The system will display a park in g space when it finds one ~ Please check that the parking space is su i table for your vehicle.
If you exceed a speed of about 50 km/h, the park assist will be switched off.
The park assist will display a parking space only if it is long and wide enough for the vehicle.
If you operate th e left turn signal, the display will show the left side of the road (and viceve r sa).
@ Note
The arrows ... or~ in the instrument cluster display indicate the side of the road on which the park assist intends to park the vehicle.
You can activate the park assist after you have already driven past a parking space
(as long as you were driving s l owly enough). To do so, press the I@ button and operate the turn signal.
- The best parking results will be achieved if you position the vehicle as parallel as possible to the line of parked cars or the kerb before you start the actual pa r king manoeuvre .
- If there are suitable parking spaces on both sides of the road (for in stance on a one-way street), you can change the direction of the turn signals to park on the other side, even if you have already activated the park ass i st .
Parking parallel to the roadside
Applies to vehicles: wi th park assis t
The driver is responsible for parking the vehi cle. gear
Fig. 165 Instrument cluster : Manoeuvr in g several times in a parking space
.. Drive forwards until the arrow is disp l ayed be hi nd the vehicle
~ Fig.
164
~
&
in Description on page 146,
~ CD on page 146.
.. After stopping for a moment, select reverse gea~ ~
.. Wait until the following text appears in the display: Steering assistant active. Monitor area around vehicle!
.. Take your hands off the steer i ng wheel.
.. Watch the road. When the road is clear, press the accelerator gently
Q
.&. in Descrip tion on page 146, c::> Q) in Description on poge 146 .
.. Follow the instructions on the display and the acoustic warning tones until the parking manoeuvre is complete.
The arrows show the required direction of travel.
The park assist automatically steers the vehicle into the parking space while the driver op erates the peda l s (accelerator, brake, clutch*).
The maximum parking speed is 7 km/h. The park assist will be deactivated if you drive too fast or move the steering wheel by hand. To continue the parking manoeuvre, press the
I@ button again . The park assist display will reappear in the instrument cluster .
Driving out of a parking space parallel to the roadside
Applies to vehicles: with park ass i st
The driver is responsible for manoeuvring the vehicle out of the parking space .
If the vehicle is parked parallel to the roadside, the park assist can help you to manoeuvre the vehicle so that you can drive straight out of the parking space.
.. Start the eng in e .
.. Press the I@ but t on ~page 147, Fig. 161 .
.. Wait until the following text appears in the instrument cluster display: To leave parking space select reverse gear and operate turn signal.
.. Operate the approp r iate turn signal.
.. Engage reverse gear .
.. Take your hands off the steering wheel.
.. Watch the road. When the road is clear, press the accelerator gently
Q
.&. in Description on page 146, c::> Q) in Description on page 146.
Parking aids 149
.. Follow the instructions on the display
Q page 149 and the acoustic warn i ng tones until you are clear to leave the parking space .
.. The procedure is over when no more manoeuvring is necessary in order to drive out of the space. Take over the steering .
The park assist automatically steers the vehicle out of the parking space wh il e the dr i ver operates the pedals (accelerator, brake, clutch*). The maximum manoeuvring speed is
5 km/h . The park ass i st will be deactivated if you drive too fast or move the stee r ing wheel by hand . To continue the parking manoeuvre, switch the eng i ne off/on. Then press the
I@ button again. Alternatively, drive out of the park i ng space without using the park assist .
Driver messages
Applies to vehicles : wit h park assist
Iii
Steering input activated. Monitor area around vehicle!
The park assist is ready . You can now park the vehicle. Watch the road Q A in Description on page 146 .
II assist: ended.
• Park assist: ended. Continue steering vehicle!
The park assist has finished the parking manoeuvre .
• Park assist deactivated . Continue steering vehicle!
The park assist has interrupted the parking manoeuvre.
II steer· ing vehicle!
The steering assistant has been deact i vated be ca use the driver has intervened in the steering. To continue the parking manoeuvre, press the I@ button again.
• Park assist: not available. Speed too high
• Park assist: speed too high ..,.
150 Parking aids
Reduce your speed! For the best results when passing the line of parked cars where you want to park, do not drive faster than 30 km/ h (if parking paralle l to the roadside) or
20 km/h (if parking perpendicular to the roadside) c:> page 1 4 8 .
• Park assist: ended. Speed too high
• Speed too high. Continue steering vehi· cle!
You were driving too fast into the parking space. Do not excee d 7 km/h when driving into the parking sp a ce .
(ii
To leave parking space select reverse gear and operate turn signal
The park assist is r eady. You can leave the parking space. Watch the road c:> .&. in Description on page 146.
Im
Stabilisation control ( ESC ) input . Continue s teering vehicle!
Take over the steering. Fin i sh parking without the park assist or d r ive o u t of the parking space.
• Please take over steering and continue driving .
The park assist has finished manoeuvring the vehicle out of the parking space .
• Stabilisation control ( ESC) off. Continue steering vehicle!
The park assist has interrupted the parking manoeuvre, b ec au se t h e ESC h as been switc hed off. Ta k e over th e steering or sw i tch on the
ESC c:> page 183 a nd start the parking manoeuvre again c:> page 148.
• Assi s t function unavailable for leav i ng
parking space. Space too small
The assist function is unable to automatically steer the vehicle ou t o f the parking space because the space is too small. Manoeuvre the ve h icle out of t h e p arking space w ithout us i ng the park assist.
Im
Park as s ist : not available in tow i ng mode
Im
Trailer in use. Continue steering vehicle!
The park assist cannot be used to park the vehicle when towing a trailer.
Im
Park assist : time limit exceeded
• Time lim i t exceeded. Continue steering vehicle!
The parking ma n oeuv r e was not completed within about six minutes after the park assis t was activated. To continue the parking manoeuvre, press the I@ button again.
• Park assist : not available
• Sy s tem unavailable. Continue steering vehicle!
T he park assist ca nn ot b e used to park the v ehicle. Try repeat i ng th e par k i n g manoeuvre or sw i tching the ignition off and on agai n .
Not stopped long enough
After you select reverse gear, the vehicle has to r emain stationary for a moment so that the park assist can activate the steering. Follow the directions given i n the display .
• Park assist: system fault!
• System fault . Continue steering vehicle!
P l ease contact a qualifie d workshop. The park assist cannot be used to park t he vehicle if a system fault occurs.
Adjusting graphic display and warning beeps
Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus/reversing camera/park assist
The settings for the graphic display and acoustic signals are controlled via the MMI* .
~ Select:
I MENU I button> control button Systems I Car systems > Driver assi s t > Parking aid .
Display
on" The graph i c display (parking system plus) or the reve r sing camera image (parking system plus with reversing camera") will be displayed when the parking a i d is activated . ..,.
off The parking a id gives only acoustic warning signals when it is activated.
Warning beeps
Front volume Volume for the front and side* zones
Rear
volume
Volume for the rear zone
Front frequency Pitch of the beeps for the front and side* zones
Rear frequency Pitch of the beeps for the rear zone
In-car entertainment fader The volume of the current audio or video source is reduced when the parking aid is switched on.
You will hear a short test tone each time you make a new setting .
(D
Note
You can also change the warning beep settings directly from the graphic display or r eversing came ra * picture. Simply press the contro l button for Settings.
- The settings will be automatically stored and assigned to the remote control key in use.
Fault warnings
App l ies to vehicles ; with par kin g system p l us/pa r k assist/ reversing camera
If you hear a continuous warning tone for a few seconds and the LED in the P• 1 A button starts flashing when you switch on the parking a id , or while the parking aid Is activated, a system fault has occurred . If the fau lt is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be indicated by the flashing LED in the pg ~ button the next time you switch on the parking aid by engag i ng reverse gear.
Parking system plus*/parking system plus and park assist*
If a sensor malfunctions, the~ will be shown on the MM! display in front of or behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor malfunc tions, obstacles w i ll only be displayed in zones
@ and @ ~ page
140, Fig. 147. If a front
Parking aids 151 sensor malfunctions, obstacles w ill only be displayed in zones © and @ .
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have the fault rectified.
Towing bracket
A pp li es to vehic l es : wi th parkin g sys t e m pl u s/ p a rk ass i st/ reve r s in g camera an d towing br ac k et
When the tra iler socket is connected, the rear park i ng sensors are NOT activated when you select reverse gear or press the P'#A button.
This may not apply if the power socket was
NOT factory-fitted . Thi s resu lt s in the following restrictions:
Parking system plus*/parking system plus and park assist*
There is no rear distance warning. However, the system will still give a warning when obstacles are detected while driving forwards.
The proximity graphic will switch over to towing mode.
Parking system plus and reversing camera*
T here is no distance warning at the rear and at the sides in area @ . However, the system will still give a warning when obstacles are detected while driving forwards. The proximity graph i c w ill switch over to towing mode. The image of the reversing camera will then be shown without orientation lines and blue area markings.
152 Safety first
Safety first
General notes
Safety is the first priority
Your safety is our first priority.
This chapter conta i ns important information, tips, suggest i ons and warnings that you shou l d read and observe for your own safety and the safety of your passengers .
&..
WARNING
The information in this chapter is impor tant for the driver of the veh i cle and all passenge r s. The o th er chapters in t h is manual (and, wh ere applicable, i n the other literature supplied with the vehicle) contain further important notes which you should read and observe for your own safety and that of your passengers.
Ensure that the complete vehicle wallet is a l ways in the vehicle. This is especially importan t wh e n you l e n d or sell the vehi cle to oth e rs.
Safety features
The safety features listed here are part of the vehicle's occupant restra i nt system . They work together to help reduce the risk of injury in a wide variety of accident situations .
Your safety and t h e safety of your passengers should not be left to chance. In the event of an accident, the safety features incorporated in your vehicle are capab l e of reducing the risk of injury. These are just a few of the safety features in your Au d i:
- Optimised three-point seat belts for all seats
Belt tensioners for the front seats
Belt height adjustment for the front seats
Front a i rbags (driver ' s airbag, front passenger's airbag, d r iver's knee airbag)
Side airbags in the front and rear * backrests
Head-protection airbags
"ISOFIX" anchorages for "ISO FIX " child seats on the front seat " and rear seats
H ead restraints for all seats
Adjustable steering column
Pre sense basic* (preventive occupant protect i on)
- Pedestr i an protection system *
These individual safety features are ha rmonised to provide you and your passenge r s with the best possible protection in accident situatio n s . However, they can only be effective if you and your passengers sit in the correct position and adjust and use the safety equipment properly.
For these reasons, t h is chapter explai n s w h y these safety features are so i mportant, how they can p r otect you, what you need to re member when using them, and how you and your passengers can gain the most benefit from them. There are also a number of important safety warnings which you and your passengers should always observe in order to minimise the risk of injury.
Safety is eve r yo ne' s responsibility!
Before every trip
The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers and the safe operation of the ve hicle at all times.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:
" Make sure t h at all li gh t s and turn signa l s are working properly.
" Check the tyre pressures.
" Make sure that all windows are clean and give good visibility to the outside.
" Secure all luggage and other items carefully
Q page 162 .
" Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
" Adjust the front seat, head restraint and mirrors correctly .
" Make sure that the front passenger's head restraint is adjusted to the correct position. tio-
.. Make sure that the head restra i nts for the rear passengers are in the ful l y raised posi · tion .
.. Make s ure that childr e n a re protected with su i table safety seats and properly worn seat belts ¢ page 157 .
.. S i t in the correct position in your seat . Make sure that your passengers are sitting in the correct positions ¢ page 66 .
.. Fasten your seat belt correctly. Make sure that your passengers do the same r::?vpage 165.
What affects driving safety?
Safety on the rood is directly related to how you drive , and can also be affected by the passengers in the v e hicle .
.. The driver is responsibl e for the saf e ty of the vehicle and all its occupants. If your ability to drive is impaired in any way, you endanger yourself and other road users
¢ ,&.
.Therefore:
.. Do not let yourself be distracted by passen· gers or by us i ng a mobile phone, etc.
.. Never drive when your driving ability is im · paired (by medication, alcohol, drugs, etc .
) .
.. Obey all traffic regulations and speed limits and always maintain a safe distance to the vehicle in front .
.. Alway s adjust your speed to suit the road, traffic and weather c ondition s .
.. Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not drive for more than two hours without a stop .
.. If possible, avoid d r iving when you are tired or stressed.
A
WARNING
- Distractions while driving or any kind of impairment to your driving ab ili ty in· crease the risk of acc i dent and injury.
Do not place loose objects on the dash panel. These objects could fly around the interior when the vehicle Is moving (un · der acceleration or whilst cornering) and distract the driver· this could lead to an acc i dent.
Safety first 153
154 Safety fir s t
Correct sitting positions
Correct driving position
The correct driving position is important for safe driving.
Fig. 166 Adjust seat and s it In correct position
For your own safety, and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following driving position.
• Adjust the driver's seat and steering wheel so there is a distance of at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the centre of the steering wheel
Q
Fig. 166
.
• Adjust the height and fore/aft position of the driver's seat so that you are able to press the pedals to the floor without fully straightening your legs
Q
,&.
.
• Adjust the backrest to an upright position so that your back remains in contact with the upholstery.
• Adjust the longitudinal position of the steering wheel so that your arms are slightly bent and you can read the dials and Instruments easily.
• Make sure that you can comfortably reach the top of the steering wheel.
• Applies to vehicles with adjustable head restraints: Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is level with the top of your head. If this is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint as near as possible to this position.
• Fasten your seat belt correctly
page 165.
• Keep both feet in the footwell so that you are in full control of the vehicle at all times .
For detailed information on how to ad j ust the driver's seat, see Q
page 66
,
Front seats.
_& WARNING
A driver who is not sitting in the correct position or who is not wearing a seat belt can be fatally injured if the airbag is t riggered.
Adjust the driver's seat and steering wheel so there is a distance of at least
25 cm between your breastbone and the centre of the steering wheel
Q
Fig. 166.
While driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the rim at about the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Th i s reduces the risk of injury if the driver's airbag inflates.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or with your hands inside the rim or on the steering wheel hub. This could result in serious injuries to the arms, hands and head if the driver's airbag inflates.
- To reduce any risk of injury to the driver during a sudden brake applicat i on or in an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted too far back. The airbag system and seat belts can only provide proper protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing the seat belt in the correct position . The further the backrest is tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt webbing or an Incorrect sitting position.
-Ad ju st the head restraint properly so that it can give maximum protection.
Correct position for the front passenger
The front seat passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the dash panel so that the airbag hos enough room to inflate and give maximum protection in on accident.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recom mend adjusting the front passenger's seat as fo ll ows: ll>-
• Adjust the backrest to an upright posi t ion so that your back remains in contact with the upholstery.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is level with the top of your head . If this is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint as near as possible to this position .
• Keep both feet in the footwell in front of the seat.
• Fasten your seat be l t correctly
page 167.
In exceptio n al cases you can disable the fron t passenger's airbag via the key-operated sw i tch * ¢
page 180.
For detailed information on how to adjust the front passenger's seat, see
¢ page
66,
Front seats .
&.
WARNING
A passenger who is not sitting in the correct position or who is not wearing a seat belt can be fatally injured if the airbag is triggered.
-Adjust the front passenger's seat so there is a distance of at least 25 cm be tween your breastbone and the dash panel.
Always keep your feet on the floor when the vehicle is mov i ng; never rest them on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the seat. If you sit in an incorrect position, you in crease your risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could susta in potentially fatal injuries by sitting out of position.
- To r educe the risk of injury to the front passenger in the case of sudden braking or an accident, the passenger should never travel in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. The airbag system and seat belt can only provide proper protection when the bac k rest is in an upright position and the passenger is wearing the seat belt in the correct posit i on. The further the backrest is tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect
Safety fi r st 15 5 positioning of the belt webbing or an incorrect sitting position .
Always adjust the head restraints properly for maximum protection .
Correct position for rear passengers
Rear seat passengers should sit upr
i
ght with both feet on the floor and wear their seat belts properly whenever the vehicle is moving.
To reduce any risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident, passengers in the rear seats must observe the following:
• Before carrying passengers on the rear sea t s, pull the head restra in ts on the occ u pied seats a ll the way up ¢
page 68.
• Keep both feet in the footwe ll In front of the rear seat.
• Fasten your seat belt correctly ~ page
168.
• Use appropriate child restraint systems for children travelling in the vehicle
~page
157
.
&.
WARNING
Rear passengers sitting out of position can suffer severe injuries.
Always adjust the head restraints to the fully raised pos i tion for maximum protection.
- Seat belts only offer maximum protec tion when the backrest is in an upright position and the passengers are wearing the sea t be lt s properly. By not s itt ing upright, rear passengers Increase t h e risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the seat belt webbing.
156 Safety first
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im portant part of the vehicle's occupant protection system . They can help to reduce the risk of injuries in most occident situations.
F ig. 167 Head restraint (seen from the front)
The head restraints must be adjusted properly to provide maximum protection.
... Adjust the front head restraints so that the top of the head restraint is level with the top of your head. If this is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint as near as possible to this position .
... Before carrying passengers on the rear seats, pull the head restraints on the occupied seats all the way up c> page 68 .
For more information on how to adjust the head restraints, see c> page 68.
&.
WARNINCi
- Travelling with the head restraints removed or incorrectly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.
Incorrect l y adjusted head restraints can also increase the risk of i njury during sudden or unexpected braking or other manoeuvres.
Examples of incorrect seating positions
Occupants con suffer severe or fatal injuries if they sit in on incorrect position while the vehicle is moving .
Seat belts can only provide maximum protection if the belt webbing is positioned correct ly. Sitting out of position greatly reduces the effectiveness of the seat belts and increases the risk of injury since the belt webbing is not worn in the position for which it is des i gned.
The driver is responsible for the safety of all vehicle occupants, especially for children.
... N ever allow anyone to sit out of position
while the vehicle is moving
Q
&
.
The following list shows just some examples of incorrect sitting positions which can be dangerous to all occupants. The list is not complete, but will help to make you aware of possible dangers which can be avoide d .
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is moving:
N ever stand up in the vehicle.
N ever stand on the seats.
N ever kneel on the seats.
N ever travel with the backrest reclined too far.
N ever lean against the dash panel.
N ever lie down on the rear seat.
N ever sit on the front edge of a seat .
N ever sit sideways.
N ever lean out of the window.
N ever put your feet out of the window.
- Never put your feet on the dash panel.
Never put your feet on the seat cush i on .
N ever ride in the footwell.
N ever travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt.
N ever climb into the luggage compartment.
.&.
WARNINCi
Sitting out of position increases the risk of severe i njuries.
Sitting out of position exposes the occupants to potentially fatal injuries: if the airbags inflate they can strike any occupant who is not in one of the designed seat positions.
Before starting a trip, sit in the cor r ect position and stay in this position as long as the vehicle is moving. Before every trip, make sure all passengers are sitting in the correct positions and remain
IJJ>
correctly seated at all times
Q
page
66,
Front seats.
Child seats
Safety notes for using child seats
To reduce the r
i
sk of
i
njury in the event of an accident
,
children must always use child restraint systems when travelling in the car
.
Please note the information in this Owner's
Manual when installing and using child seats .
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements.
For safety reasons, we recommend that child seats be i nstalled on t he rear seats. You should only use a child seat on the front passenger seat in exceptional circumstances. f1:l.
WARNING
To avoid serious or fatal injury, children travelling in the vehicle must always be protected with child restraint systems ap propriate to their height, weight and age.
- Children under 1.50 m tall or younger than 12 must not travel in the vehicle if there are no suitable child seats. Please observe any other applicable regulations in the country in which you are travelling .
Babies and children must never travel on another occupant's lap .
Never allow more than one child to occupy one child seat.
Never leave a chi l d w i thout supervision in a chi l d seat.
Never allow a child to travel unrestrained or to stand up or knee l on a seat whi l e the car is moving. In an accident, the child could be catapulted through the car, causing possibly fatal injuries to itself and other occupants .
To ensure proper protection by the child restraint, it is important to wear the seat belts in the correct position
Q
page 167.
Always check that the belt is properly positioned according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
Safety first 157 child seat. Incorrectly worn seat belts can give rise to injuries even in a minor collision.
- I f children are out of position when the car is moving, they are at greater risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly the case if the child is travelling on t h e front passenger's seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident. This incorrect sitting position can result in serious or even fatal injury.
- I f you are using a child seat on the front passenger seat in which the child faces t he direction of travel, you should move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
- Ch i ld seats in which the child faces the rear of the car are located directly In the path of the front passenger's airbag if it inflates. In this case, the child could sustain serious or fatal injuries if the airbag were to be deployed.
- Applies to vehicles on which the front passenger's airbag cannot be deactivated: Do NOT use a rearward-facing child seat on the front passenger's seat.
- Applies to vehicles with key-operated switch for deactivating the front passenger's airbag: Do NOT use a rearward-facing child seat on the front passenger's seat while the front passenger's airbag is active. If you have no alternative but to use a rearward-facing ch i ld seat on the front passenger's seat, the front passenger's airbag must be deactivated beforehand via the k eyoperated switch*
Q
page
180. Make
sure that the front passenger's airbag
is reactivated by means of the key-operated switch* as soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger's seat .
Always replace the child seat with a new one after an accident as damage not externally visible may have occurred .
158 Safet y fir s t
Child safety and side airbags
Applies to vehicles. with side airbags
:'.'=:=:::::::::=--./ ~
0 x
Cl;
Fi g . 1 6 8 Illustration of a dangerous sitting position near the opening for the side airbag
M ake sure that children do not lean out of t h e ch i ld seat towards the door trim. I f t h e si d e a ir bag * were to Inf l ate in an acc i den t , it cou l d strike the chi l d on the head and cause serious injury.
A
WARNING
- To avoid injury, the child's head must always be well away from the opening for the side airbag
Q
page 177, Side airbags
.
- Do not leave or place any objects in the area of inflation for the side airbag.
Child seat categories
Only use child restraint systems that are offi
-
cially approved and suitable for the child
.
010+
F i g . 1 69 Child seat categories
Child restraint systems are covered by the European standard ECE-R 44 . An orange label is usually attached to child seats which have been tested in accordance with this standard.
Information on weight categories, ISOFIX size class and the approval category of the child se a t can be found on this label.
Child seats are divided into five weight categories :
Child s eat s: c at e g o ri es 0 a nd O+
Rearward-facing carry cots are most appropri ate for these categories (up to 13 kg). Our rec ommendation : Audi carry cot with opt i onal
ISOFIX base .
Ch i l d s eat s : c a te g o ry 1
In t his category (9 to 18 kg), rearward or fo r ward-fac i ng c h i l d seats with an i ntegrated se a t be l t system are most appropria t e. R ear wa r d-fac i ng ch i l d seats sho ul d be used for as l ong as safely possible. Our recomme n da ti o n :
A u di chi l d seat with ISO FIX base.
Child seats: cat e gorie s 2 and 3
Child seats with backrests used in conj unction wi t h seat belts are most appropriate for these categories (15 to 36 kg). Our recommenda tio n : Audi child seat "youngster plus" .
A
WARNING
Categories 0, O+ and 1 (rearward-facing):
N ever install a rearward-facing child seat on t he front passenger's seat unless the front passenger's airbag has been deactivated t his can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child. I f you have no a l ternative but to let a child trave l on t h e fr o nt p assenge r 's seat, t h e fro n t passe n ger ' s ai r bag must be deact i vated* b e fo re hand ~page
180.
Categories 1 (forwa r d-fac i ng), 2 a n d 3 :
Th e bac k of the child seat shou l d be fl ush w it h t he backrest of the vehicle se a t. If t he r ear head restraint obstruc t s you when i nstalling the child seat, adjust " or remove it completely
page 68.
After removing the child seat, install the passenger's head restraint again immediately and adjust it to the correct position .
Travelling with the head restraints removed o r inco r rectly adjusted increases t h e risk of severe injuries . Ill>
Categories 2 and 3: The shou l der section of the belt must be fitted across the cent re of the child's collar bone close to the torso. It must never run against or across the neck. The lap belt must be worn t i ghtly across the hips, and not over the stomach or abdomen. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Wait for as long as possible before cha nging up to the next child seat group.
@ Note
We recommend child seats from the range of Audi Genuine Accessories: www.audi.com/childseats.
Fitting child seats
Securing child seats with ISOFIX
Fig. 170 Rear seat: Secu r ing child seat with ISO FIX
(example)
Child seats of the categories 0, O+ and 1 with
ISOFIX can be secured without a seat belt using the ISO FIX anchorages on the outer rear seats and also, on some vehicles, on the front passenger's seat.
.,. Push the mountings on the ch il d seat into the ISOFIX anchorages until they engage audibly ~Fig.
170.
.,. Pull on the child seat to check whether both sides have engaged properly .
.,. Rear seats: If possible secure the child seat additionally to the top tetherll anchorage
~ page
160.
Safety first 159
If you wish to attach an ISOFIX child seat to the ISOFIX anchorages i n your vehicle, please ensure that it is approved for the seats in your vehicle . The following table ~ table
on page 159
shows the installation options. The necessary information can be found on the or ange label on the child seat.
An ISOFIX child seat categorised as "vehiclespecific" , "restricted" or "semi-universa l " ( IL ) is suitable for a seat if:
your vehicle is listed in the model list provided by the child seat manufacturer and
your child seat is marked with IL in the following table .
An ISOFIX child seat categorised as "universal", ( IUF ) is suitable for a seat if:
your child seat is marked with IUF in the following table and
- the child seat can be secured with top tether
~ page
160.
Weight class
Category 0 : up t o 10 kg
ISOFIX Outer size caterear
Front passenggory
E seats er'sseat*
~
IL I L
E
Category O+: up to 13 kg
IL
I L
Category 1 :
9 to 18 kg
D c
D c
B
Bl
I L
IU F
IL
A
A
WARNING f="
Note
the important safety notes
i::>
&
in
Safety notes for using child seats on page 157,
~ fr:.
in Child seat categories on page 158
and the instructions provided by the child seat manufacturer . ~ ll T h is function Is not available for all ex port vers ions.
160 Sa f ety fi rst
N ever i n stall a r earwa r d-facing child sea t on the front passenger's seat unless t he front passenger's airbag has been deactivated this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child .
The anchorages i n the vehicle are designed only for child seats with I SOFIX.
Do not attempt to secure other types of child seat, seat belts or other objec t s to these anchorages this could resul t in serious or possibly fatal i njury.
'--~ ~~~~~~~~
Securing child seats with ISOFIX and top tether
App l ies to vehicles : with top tet h er
... Applies to A3/A3 Sportback : Hook the strap into the top tether anchorage
¢ Fig
.
171
.
... Applies to A3 Saloon: Fold the cover open and hook the strap into the top tether anc h orage
¢ Fig .
172 .
... Pull the tether strap tight so that the top of the child seat rests securely against t he backrest.
&
WARNING
N ote t he important safety no t es ¢ .&
in
Safety notes for using child seats on page
1 57,
¢.& in Child seat categories on page
158 and the instruc t ions provide d by th e c h ild seat man u fact ur er.
Th e a n c h orages in t h e ve hicl e are designe d o nl y for one c h ild seat w it h 15 0 -
FIX and top tether. Do not attempt to secure other types of child seat, seat belts or o t her objects to these anchorages this cou l d result in serious or possi b ly fatal injury .
F i g . 1 7 1 Rear seat bench (A3/A3 Sportback) : Top teth· er anchorages
Fig . 172 Rear seat benc h (A3 Saloon): Top tether an chorages
... Push up the head restra i nt behind the child sea t .
... Push the mountings on the child seat into t he ISOFIX anchorages until they engage audibly
¢ page
159.
... Pull on the child seat to check whether both sides have engaged properly.
... Guide the top tether strap of the child seat u n d erne ath or pas t bot h s i des of the head restraint (depending on the type of child seat) towards the rear.
Securing child seats with seat belt
If you wish to use a child seat in the approval category "universal" ( u ), please ensure that it is a pproved for the seats in your vehicle. The fo ll owing table shows the installation opt io n s. The necessary information can be found on t he orange label on the child seat.
Weight Front class pa s seng -
Ca t e gor y 0 u p to 10 kg
C ate go · ryO+ up to 13 kg
Ca t ego ry 1
9 t o 18 kg er's seat u u u
Rear
Outer Centre seats seat u u u u u u
Weight Front Rear class passeng-
Outer Centre er's seat seats seat u u u C a tego ry 2
15 to 25 kg u u u Cate gory 3
22 to 36 kg
To adjust the front passenger ' s seat to the child seat and to achieve the best possible seat belt positioning, move
the front pas se nger's backrest as far forward as possible and
the front passenger's seat as far upwards as possible.
.&.
WARNING
Note the important safety
& in
Safety notes for using child seats on page 157,
Q
.&
in Child seat categories on page 158
and the instructions provided by the child seat manufacturer.
Never install a rearward-facing child seat on the front passenger's seat unless the front passenger's airbag has been deactivated this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child.
Pedal area
Pedals
The pedals must always be free to move and must never be obstructed by floor mats or any objects in the footwell
.
• Make sure that none of the pedals is obstructed and all of the pedals can be pressed all the way down to the floor .
• Make sure that all pedal s are able to return freely to their original positions.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely fastened in the footwell.
Safety first 161
If one o f the brake circuits should fail, increased brake pedal travel will be required to bring the vehicle safely to a s top.
A
WARNING
Any obstructions that restrict pedal travel can cause loss of vehicle control and critical situations in traffic .
N ever place objects in the driver's footwell. Such objects could move under the pedals and interfere with their proper function . In the event of sudden braking or a change o f direction, you would not be able to use the pedals. This could result in a l oss of contro l and possibly cause an accident .
Floor mats on the driver's side
Use only floor mots which can be securely fastened in the footwell and do not obstruct the pedals.
• Make sure that floor mats are securely fastened and cannot interfere with the pedals
Q .&.
.
Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and are firmly secured to prevent them from slipping . You can obtain suitable floor mats from your dealer or a specialist reta i ler.
A
WARNING
A ny obstructions that restrict pedal trave l can cause l oss of v eh i cle contro l and increase the r i sk of serious persona l i njury.
-A l ways make sure that floor mats are properly secured.
N ever lay or install additiona l floor mats or other floor coverings over the existing floor mats; this would restrict the pedal area and possibly obstruct the pedals, which could cause an accident.
162 Safety first
Stowing luggage safely
Loading the
l
uggage compartment
Fig. 173 Heavy items should be p l aced as far forwards as possible (example) .
All luggage and other objects must be safely secured in the Luggag e compartment. To maintain safe handling on the road, please observe th e following points:
• Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment .
• Place heavy items as far forward as possible in the luggage compartment and secure them properly c> Fig. 173.
• Secure the load with the stretch net* or with non-elastic straps secured to the fastening rings c> page 74.
.&_
WARNING
distribution.
In an accident or a sudden manoeuvre, loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward risk of injury! Always stow objects safely in the luggage compartment and secure them on the fastening rings*. Use suitable se curing straps, particularly when transporting heavy objects.
Transporting heavy objects may affect the vehicle's handling by shifting the centre of gravity this could cause an accident . Take extra care when driving and adjust your speed accordingly.
Never exceed the maximum axle loads or the maximum gross weight for the vehicle c> page 272. Exceed ing the permitted axle loads or gross weight limit can affect the vehicle's handling characte r istics and increase the risk of accidents,
' personal injuries or damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle unattended when the boot lid is open. Children could climb into the boot and close the boot lid from the inside. In this case the child would be unable to get out of the veh i cle without help. This could have fatal consequences.
Never a ll ow children to p l ay in or around the vehicle. Alway s close and lock the boot lid and all the doors when you leave the vehicle.
Never let passengers ride In the luggage compartment. All occupants must be properly restrained by the seat belts at all t imes <:> page 165.
CD
CAUTION
Make sure that no hard objects chafe against the wires of the heating element in the rear window and damage them .
(D
Note
Adjust the tyre pressure to match the vehicle loading - the correct pressures are specified on the sticke r on the end face of the driver's door.
- Air circu l ation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used air escapes through ventilation slots in the rear of the vehicle. Make sure that these ventilation slots are not obstructed.
Suitable belts for securing loads to the fastening rings* are commercially available.
Fastening ring s
Unsecured loads are a hazard to all vehicle occupants .
There are fastening rings in the luggage compartment which can be used to secure luggage and other objects c> page 74 .
.. Use the fastening rings to secure items safely in the luggage compartment c> .&_ .
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can possess so much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of this "kinetic energy" depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object . The most signif i cant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle .
For example: an object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle . During a frontal collision at a speed of SO km/h, this object generates a force corresponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the object increases to about 90 kg.
You can imagine the severity of the injuries which m i ght be sustained if this " projectile" strikes an occupant as it flies through the passenger compartment .
.&_ WARNING
If luggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappropriate or damaged tensioning straps, injuries couW result i n the event of sudden braking or a co l lision.
- To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward, always use appropriate tensioning straps which are properly secured to the fastening rings.
- Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.
S a fety first 163
Pedestrian protection system
Description
Applies to vehicles: with pedestrian protection system
The pedestrian protection system will auto-
matically be activated when the front of the
vehicle collides with a pedestrian. The bonnet is raised several centimetres to create an additional crush zone above the engine .
The sensors of the pedestrian protection system are located in the front bumper . In rare cases, the system can be triggered because the possibility that a pedestrian has been hit cannot be ruled out by the sensors, for exam ple:
in a collision with a street post,
in a collision with an animal, or
- if you drive into a pile of snow, or
- in the event of ground contact, e .
g. when driving on extremely poor road surfaces.
If has been activated, press the bonnet back into its original position c>
A in
Servicing the pedestrian protection system on page 164 and have the system serviced by a qualified workshop .
.&_ WARNING
N ever change or replace the bumper or bonnet as a part of tuning measures.
This can impair the effectiveness of the pedestrian protection system and invalidate the operat i ng permit for your vehicle. T he manufacturer cannot be held liable for damage which occurs as a result of failure to comply with these stipu l ations, and such damage is not covered under warranty.
- False activation of the pedestrian protection system is possible.
164 Safety first
Servicing the pedestrian protection system
Applies to vehicles: with pedestrian protection system
Fig.
174 gered
Fig . 175 Press i ng back/c h ecking the bonnet
When the pedestrian pro t ection system has b een triggered, the bonnet is raised by seve r al centimetres Fig. 174 . In addition, the fo ll owing message wi ll appear:
E,I
Safety system : system fault! See owner ' s manual.
• To eng a ge the bonnet again, pres s it down with both hand s on the left side of the vehi cle in area @ ~ Fig. 175
.
&
..
• To check whether the bonnet is properly engaged, pull the rear edge of the bonnet @ upwards. If the bonnet can be lifted, press it down again .
• When the bonnet has engaged properly, repeat the procedure on the right side of the vehicle .
• Drive to the nearest qualified workshop without delay and have the pedestrian protection system serviced
~
&
..
In the event of a fault in the s ystem, the following me s sage wil l appear: Safety system: system fault! See owner's manual..
Drive to a qualified workshop without de l ay and have the fault rectified.
_&.
WAA.NING
Do not press back the bonnet unle s s both of your hands are flat on top of the
bonnet. If you do this, you cannot catch your fingers between the bonnet and body. Take care when pressing back the bonnet: careless or uncontrolled movements can cause injury to yourself or others - risk of injury!
- The system can only be activa t ed once. I f the pedestrian protection system has been triggered, have it replaced wi t hout de l ay by a qualified workshop.
All repairs to the bumper and the pedes trian protection system must only be car ried out by a qualified workshop working to the specifications of the Audi factory.
Improper repairs can impair the effectiveness of the system and invalidate the operating permit for your vehicle.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when individual components of the system or the entire vehicle are scrapped . Your authorised dealer is familiar with these regulations and will be p l eased to pass on the information to you.
Seat belts
Why is it so important to use seat belts?
Seat belts provide effective protection
The common belief that passengers can brace their weight with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Fig. 176 Driver with properly positioned seat belt good protection if the brakes are applied suddenly
It is an established fact that seat belts provide good protection in accidents. Therefore wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in the best position for maximum protection q
Fig. 176
. The seat belts are capable of absorbing much of the kinetic energy arising in a collision. Also they help to prevent uncontrolled movements which could lead to severe injuries c>
page 165, Important safety notes when using seat belts.
If they wear the seat be l ts correctly, the passe n gers benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to reduce the kinetic energy gradually.
The front crumple zones and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to absorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the forces acting on the occupants and consequently the risk of injury.
Although these examples are based on a frontal collision, the physical principles involved are the same in other types of accidents. This is why it is so important to put on the seat belts before every trip - even when "just driv-
Seat b e l ts 165 ing around the corner". Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well
Q
&
.
Properly worn seat belts have been shown to be an effective means of reducing the potential for injury and improving the chances of survival in a serious accident
Q
page 166,
Forces acting in a collision.
For information on how children can travel safely in the car refer to
Q
page 157, Child seats .
.&..
WARNING
Seat belts must be put on before every t r ip - even when driving in town. This also applies to the rear passengers (injury risk) .
During pregnancy, women should always ensure they wear a seat belt. The best way to protect the unborn child is to protect the mother
Q
page 168, Wearing and adjusting the seat belts during pregnoncy.
-
Important safety notes when using seat belts
There ore a number of safety points concerning the seat belts which you should remember. This will help to reduce the risk of injury in on occident.
.&..
WARNING
-
The seat belts can ohly p r ovide maxim u m protection if the seats are adjusted prope r ly
Q
page 66, Front seats.
- T o ensure proper protection, it is i mportant to wear the seat belts in the correct position
Q
page 167, How to wear seat belts properly.
Ensure that the seat belts are worn exactly as recommended in this c h apter. Belts which are not worn properly can increase the risk of injury in accidents considerably.
Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
166 Seat b e lt s
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt. It is especially dangerous to place a seat belt over a child sit ting on your lap .
- Do not wear the belt over hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts.
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly c::> tab. Cleaning the interior on page206.
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging properly.
The latch plate of the belt must a l ways be engaged in the correct buckle for that seat, otherwise the belt will not be fully effective .
Check the condition of the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice thatthe belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts ls dam aged, the belt must be replaced by a qualified workshop.
The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way. Do not attempt to repair a damaged belt yourself.
Seat belts which have been worn i n an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop . The belt anchorages should also be checked.
Forces acting in a collision
The physical principles involved in a frontal impact
Very large forces are generated during a collision; these forces have to be absorbed.
Fig. 177 Passengers of a vehicle wh i c h is headed for a brick wall. They are not using seat belts .
Fig. 178 The vehicle crashes ag;ilnst the wall
The physical principles involved in a frontal collision are relatively simple:
Both the moving vehicle and the passengers possess energy, which is known as "kinetic energy" c::> Fig. 177. The amount of "kinetic energy" depends on the speed of the vehi de and the weight of the vehicle and passengers . The higher the speed and the greater the weight, the more energy there is to be absorbed in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h to 50 km/h , for example, the kin e tic energy increa ses by a factor of four.
Because these passengers are not restrained by seat belts, the e ntire amount of kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of i mpact""
~ Fig.
178.
T h i s would result in ser iou s or potentially fatal inju ry.
Even at urban speeds of 30 km/h to SO km/h , the forces acting on t h e occupants in a collision can reach the equ iv alent of 1 ton
(1000 kg) or more. At greater speed these forces are even higher. Again: if the speed doubles, the forces increase by a factor of four.
Passengers who do not wear seat belts are not
"attached" to the vehicle. In a frontal collision they will continue to move forward at the speed their car was travelling just before the impact.
What happens to passengers not wearing seat belts?
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk fatal injuries in the event of an accident.
Seat b elts 16 7 car. This co ul d resu lt in potentially fatal injuries.
The common beliefthat occupants can brace their weight with their hands in a minor collision Is false. Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it i s not possible to hold yourself in the seat.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts, as they co ul d otherwise be thrown forwards violently in an accident. Rear passengers who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but a lso the other occupants qf ig .
180.
How to wear seat belts properly
Putting on the three
-
point seat belts
Always fasten your seat belts before driving off
Fig. 179 A driver not wearing a seat belt can be thrown forwards
Fig.181
Fig. 180 A r ear passenger not wearing a seat belt can be t hrown forwards
In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers will be thrown forwards and make violent contact with the steering wheel, dashboard, windscree n, etc
Fig
.
179
. Passengers not wearing their belts ris k being thrown out of the
.. Ad j ust the front seat and head restraint correctly before putting on the seat belt
~page
66, Front seats. ...
168 Seat b e l ts
• To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly across your chest and lap
Q
.&, .
• Insert the latch plate into the bu c kle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
Q
Fig . 182.
• Pull the belt to check that it is now securely fastened.
The three point inertia reel belts are ten sioned automatically . The retractor system gives complete freedom of movement, as long as the pull on the belt is slow . Hard braking locks the belt. The belt will also lock when you accelerate, drive up or down a steep hill or in a sharp curve.
A
WARNING
Always make certain that the belt is positioned properly
Fig . 181
risk of injury
Q
page
168
, Adjusting the seat belts.
The latch plate of the belt must always be engaged in the correct buckle for that seat. Otherwise the belt will not be fully effective and the danger of injury increases.
..&
WARNING
The shoulder section of the belt should be fitted across the centre of the collar bone close to the body. To fasten the belt, take hold of the belt above the latch plate and pull it slowly down across your chest. Wear the lap portion of the seat belt as l ow as possible over the hips so that there is no pressure on the l ower abdomen. The belt should always be worn tightly
Q Fig. 183.
Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Always make sure that belt ls posit a oned properly . Incorrectly worn seat belts can give rise to injuries even in a minor collision .
Seat belts worn too loose can result in injuries because they allow excessive forward movement in a crash; the occupant will be brought to a sudden stop by the belt webbing .
Wearing and adjusting the seat belts during pregnancy
To
afford the best protection for the unborn child it is important for the mother to wear the seat belt properly at all times
.
Adjusting the seat belts
Always position seat belt s properly for maxi mum safety.
Fig. 183 Adju sti ng s ho ul d e r/l<Jp belt
The following features allow you to match the position of the seat belt to your height :
Belt height adjustment
Seat height adjustment (front seats)
Fig . 1 84 Posit i oning seat belts du rin g pregna n cy
Women should always ensure they adjust the seat belt correctly during pregnancy.
• Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor rectly before putting on the seat belt o
page 66, Front seats.
• To fa s ten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly down acro s s your chest . Wear the lap portion of the seat belt
IJJ>
as low as possible over the hips so that there is no pressure on the stomach
Q
Fig. 184,
o ..&, .
• Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click o
page 167
,
Fig
.
182.
• Pull the belt to check that it is now securely fastened.
A
WARNING
During pregnancy, women should especially make sure to wear the lap portion of the seat belt as low as possible across the hips so that there is no pressure on the stom· ach.
Seat belt height adjustment
Seat belt height adjusters can be used to ad· just the height of the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
Seat b elts 169
(D
Note
It is also possible to adjust the height of the front seats to obtain the best posi· tion for the front seat belts.
- The shoulder section of the belt should be fitted across the centre of the collar bone close to the body. The lap belt must be worn tightly over the hips. It must not be positioned over the stomach. Pull t h e belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Taking off the seat belts
The red button releases the belt from the buckle.
Fi g . 1 85 8elt height adjustment for the front seats: guide fitting
The shou l der section of the belt shou l d be fit· ted across the centre of the collar bone close to the body o
..&.
in Adjusting the seat belts on page 168.
• Take hold of the guide fitting and
slide
it up· wards @ , or
• Compress
the adjuster @ and
slide
the guide fitting downwards @ .
• After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the catch on the guide fitting is engaged securely .
F ig. 186 The latch plate of the belt springs out of the buckle
• Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
The latch plate will spring out of the buckle .
• Guide the belt back by hand so that it i s tak· en up by the retractor.
Belt tensioners
How the belt tensioner s work
The seat belts for the driver and front passenger are equipped with belt tensioners.
The seat belts on the front seats are tensioned automatically in frontal, side and rearend impacts above a certain degree of severity. This helps to reduce the forward motion of the occupants.
In a l ess severe accident, or in the event of a rollover, the belt tensioners are not activated. ~
170 Seat belts
.&_ WARNING
Any work on the tensioner system or re moval and installation of system compo nents for other repairs must be performed by a qua li fied workshop.
- The be l t tensioners can only be activated
once.
If
they have been activated at
any t i me, the system must be replaced.
('!)
Note
Some smoke may be released when the belt tensioners are activated . Th i s does not mean there i · s a fire in the vehicle.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped . Your authorised dealer is familiar with these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you .
Airbag system
Description of airbag system
General notes on airbag system
The airbag is an integral part of the car's passive safety system
.
In conjunction with the three-point seat belts, the airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest and for the area around the driver's knees in the event of a severe frontal collision.
In a severe side collision the side* airbags and the head-protection airbags reduce the risk of injury to the occupants in the areas of the body facing the Impact ~ .&.
.
In addition to their normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also hold them fn a position where the airbags can inflate properly and provide maximum protection.
The airbag system will only work with the ignition on. The airbag system is monitored electronically; the airbag warning lamp indicates whether the system is functioning properly.
The main parts of th e airbag syst e m ar e:
The electronic monitoring system (control unit and sensors)
The two front airbags and the driver's knee airbag
T he front side airbags and the side airbags* in the outer rear seats
T he head-protection airbags
T he warning lamp
El in the instrument cluster
There i s a fault in the airbag sy s tem if the warning lamp
- does not come on when the ignition is switched on .
does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on .
Airbag system 171
goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on.
- comes on or flickers while the car Is moving.
&
WARNING
- The airbags are not a substitute for the seat belts; they are an integral part of the car's overall passive safety system.
The airbags can only offer effective pro· tection if the occupants are wearing their seat belts. For this reason it is very important to wear the seat belts at all times ~page
165, Why is it so important to use seat belts?.
The seat belts and a i rbags can on l y provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correct l
page 66,
Front seats.
I f you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury should the airbag system be triggered in an accident.
- Components of the airbag system are located in various parts of the vehicle. If repairs to other vehicle components make it necessary to perform work on the airbag system or to remove or install parts of the airbag system, this may cause damage to the airbag system . As a result, the airbags may not inflate correctly or may not be triggered at all in an accident s i tuation. For this reason, you should always have the work carried out by a qualified workshop.
If u lt shou l d occur in the airbag system, have the system checked Immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise the system may fail to trigger in an acci dent.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
N ever make any alterations to the front bumper or the body.
Do not remove the front seats.
The airbag system can only be activated once; if the airbag has been triggered, the system must be replaced. Should the ~
1 7 2 Airb ag system airbag system or airbag modules have to be replaced, the qualified workshop carrying out the replacement will document all details in the appropriate section of the Service Schedule .
If you sell the vehicle, remember to pass on the complete Service Wallet to the new owner. If the front passenger's airbag has been deactivated, it is important that the new owner is also given the relevant documents.
- The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the airbag or belt tensioner systems are scrapped.
When are the airbags triggered?
One or more airbag systems are triggered in severe collisions, depending on the circumstances.
The airbag system is not triggered in minor collisions, or in rear collisions, or if the car overturns. In these situat i ons, the occupants are protected by wearing the seat belts.
F acto r s d e t erm in i n g th e t r i gge ring res p o n se
It is not possible to define the exact triggering response of the airbag system in all possible situations, since the circumstances in different types of accialent will vary considerably.
Important factors include, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of the object which the car hit s, the ang l e of impact, vehicle speed and so on.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision. By processing the signals from the sensors located in the vehicle, the electronic control unit is immediately able to evaluate the severity of the collision and activate the restraint systems accordingly. If the deceleration rate is below the predefined refe r ence value In the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the car .
(D
Note
The airbag releases a fine dust when it inflates. This is quite normal and does not mean there is a fire in the vehicle .
Front airbags
Important notes on front passenger's airbag
A
AIRBAG
Fig . 187 Front passe n ger' s s un viso r: Airbag st i cker
A sticker
1
> with important informatio n about the front passenger's airbag is provided on the front passenger's sun visor . Please refer to t he safety notes in the following chapters:
Child seats and front passenger's airbag c:::>
page 15
7,
Safety notes for using child seats
Safe distance from front passenger's airbag c:::>
page 17 4, Important safety notes on the front airbag system
- Obj ects between front passenger and front passenger's a ir bag
page 174, Important safety notes on the front airbag system
ll St i ll un d er d e v elo pm e n t a t t h e t im e of pri nt i ng . Not ava i lable in a ll e xpo rt ve h icles.
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the s eat belt s.
Airbag system 173
How the front airbags work
When fully inflated , the airbags reduce the risk of head or c hest injury.
The front a ir bag for the dr i ver is l ocated i n the padded hub of the steer i ng whee l Fig. 188.
The front airbag for the front passenger is in the dashboard above the glove box c:::>
Fig. 189. The locations of the airbags are marked with the word "AIRBAG".
In conjunction with the three point seat belts, the front airbags give addit i onal head and chest protection for the driver and front pas senger and for the area around the driver's knees in the event of a severe frontal collision c:::>
&. in Important safety notes on the front airbag system on page 174.
F ig.
1 90 Front airbags i n inflated condition
The driver's and front passenger's airbag are triggered in certain frontal collis i ons c:::>
Fig. 190. Further airbag systems may also be triggered, depending on the circums ta nces.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and open out in front of the driver and front passenger Fig. 190 . In order to provide the desired extra protection i n an accident, the airbags have to inflate extremely rapidly (within fractions of a seco n d).
The fully deployed airbags cushion the for wards movement of the front occupants and help to reduce the risk of injury to the head and t he upper part of the body .
Spec i al open i ng s in the airbag allow the gas to escape at a controlled rate to restrai n the forward movement of the occupant's head and torso. Once the impact has been absorbed, the airbag deflates sufficiently for the front occ u pants to see forward .
174 Airbag syste m
Important safety notes on the front airbag system
There ore a number of points concerning the airbag system which you should remember . Thi s will help to reduce the risk of injury in on occident.
Fig. 191 M inimum di s t ance fr om steering wh ee l
A
WARNING
- It is important for the driver and front passen9er to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dashboard ~Fig. 191. The airbag system will not be able to give the required protection if you sit too close to the steering
1 wheel or dashboard. There is also a risk of injury ifthe airbags are inflated . The front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury . Should the airbag system be triggered in an accident there is an even gre .
ater risk of injury.
Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system.
If the airbag is triggered in an accident, the child could sustain serious or fatal injuries c::i page 15 7 , Child seats.
Child seats in which the child faces the rear of the car are located directly in the path of the front pa sse nger's airbag if it inflates . In thi s case, the child could sustain serious or fatal injuries if the airbag were to be deployed .
Applies to vehicles on which the front passenger's airbag cannot be deactivated: Do NOT use a rearward-facing child seat on the front passenger"s seat.
Applies to vehicles with key-operated switch for deactivating the front pa ssenger's airbag: Do NOT use a rearward-facing child seat on the front passenger's seat while the front passenger's airbag is active. If you have no alternative but to use a rearward-facing child seat on the front passenger's seat, the front passenger's airbag must be deactivated beforehand via the keyoperated switch* c::> page 180. Make sure that the front passenger' s airbag is reactivated by means of the key-operated switch" as soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger's seat.
- Occupants sitting in the front of the car must never carry any objects or pets in the space between them and the airbags, or aUow children or other passengers to travel in this position.
- Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the soft plastic surface of the airbag unit on the pas senger's side of the dashboard, and do not obstruct or modify them in any way.
These parts should only be cleaned with a dry cloth (or with a cloth moistened with plain water). It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as repairs to the ste · ering wheel or removal of seats) must be performed by a qualified workshop.
Knee airbag
Description of the knee airbag
Applies to vehicles with knee airbag
The knee airbag system can give additional protection to a driver wearing a seat belt.
F i g . 19 2 A i rbag (driver's side)
The knee a i rbag on the driver's side is l ocated i n the dash panel underneath the steering
wheel
c;)
Fig.192.
The knee airbag provides extra protection for the driver's knees an d thighs in addition to the protection already given by the seat belt.
In addition to its normal function of restraining an occupant, the seat belt also holds the driver in a position where the airbag can provide extra protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is just one component of the vehicle's restraint system and cannot replace the function of the seat belts . Please always remember that t he airbags can only protect you i f you are wearing your seat belt properly. That is why it i s so i mportant to wear your sea t belt at a ll times (not j u st because i t' s the l aw) c:)
page 165, Why is it so important to use seat belts?
.
P l ease also bear in mind thatthe a i rbags are on l y inflated in certain types of accident and that they can only be triggered once. The seat belts are also intended to protect you in situations where the airbags are not triggered or have already been triggered (e .
g . if your vehicle collides with a second vehicle following an initial impact) .
That is just one reason why an airbag cannot replace a seat belt. The airbag system is most
Airbag system 175 effective when used In conjunction with the seat belts. Always fasten your seat be l t properly for this reason.
Please note that, although the knee airbag system is designed to reduce the risk of serious injury, the airbags can cause other injuries
when inflated (such as inflammation, bruis-
ing, abrasion and friction burns) .
The basic parts of the knee airbag system
(driver's side) are :
The e l ectronic control unit
- An inflatable airbag (airbag and gas generato r ) fo r the driver
- Th e ai r bag warning l amp In the instrument cl u ster
The knee airbag system is NOT triggered in the following situations :
If the ignition is off
In a frontal collision if the retarda t ion rate measured by the control unit is too l ow
In side-on collisions
If your vehicle is hit from behind
If the vehicle overturns
If a system malfunction occurs (warning/indicator lamp on) ¢
page 21
&
WARNING
The seat belt and knee airbag system can only protect the driver if he/she is sitting in the correct position c:)
page 154.
H a v e the system chec k ed immediate l y by y ou r A u d i dea l er if t h e airbag w arni n g l a mp lig h ts up whil e you a r e dr ivi n g
Qpa
g
e 21.
176 Airb ag system
How the knee airbag works
Applies to vehicles. with knee airbag
When fully inflated, the knee airbag can reduce the risk of injury to the driver's legs.
Fi g . 1 93 Inflated airbags provide protect i on in a fron· ta l co l lision
The driver's and front passenger's airbag are triggered in certain frontal collisions c:> page 173, Fig. 190 . Further airbag systems may also be triggered, depending on the cir cumstances .
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas and inflated between the lower part of the dash panel and the driver c:> Fig. 193.
Although the airbag is not a soft cushion, it can absorb the energy of an impact and thus help to reduce the r i sk of injury to the lower limbs.
All this happens in a fraction of a second and many people are not even aware that the airbags have been triggered. Airbags are re l eased with considerable force. For the prote ction of occ u pants, it i s impo r tant t h at no o b jects a r e i n the path of the airbags when they are inflated.
When the seat belts are worn correctly, fully inflated airbags will retard and res t rain the forward movement of the occupants, t hus helping to reduce the risk of injury.
Important safety notes on knee airbag system
Applies to vehicles: with knee airbag
Airbags ore intended as an additional restraint measure. Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit in the correct position in your seat.
There are many things that you and your passengers need to know and do to ensure that t he seat belts and airbags can provide additio n al protec t ion.
_8.
WARNING
A n a ir bag can ca u se serious injury w h ile it is inf l ating. I f you wear yo u r seat be l t incorrectly or sit in the wrong position in your seat wh il e the vehicle is moving, this s i g ni ficantly increases the risk of inj u ry and can have fatal consequences.
The knee airbag system cannot protect you properly if you are sitting too close to one of the airbags. When adjust i ng the driver's seat, it is important to ensure that the following distances for the driver's torso and knees are maintained:
At least 25 cm (10 inches) between chest and steering wheel/dash panel
- At least 10 cm (4 inches) between knees and lower part of dash panel
The risk of injury is increased if you lean fo r ward or to the side, if the seat is incorrectly adjusted, or if you are not wearing your seat belt. The risk is even higher if the air b ag i s tr i gge r ed.
Please always ensure that the knee airbag can inf l ate free l y. Any objec t s between your body and the airbag will increase the risk of injury in the even t of an accident, as they will impede the inflation of the airbag and can be ca t apulted towards your body.
Never transport items in the footwell in front of the driver's seat. Bulky objects (such as shopping bags) could impede the airbag or prevent it from inflating. Small items could be thrown through the vehicle and cause inj u ry to ...
you or your passengers when the airbags are triggered .
Ensure that there are no cracks, deep scratches or other damage to the dash panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag .
Side airbag
.
s
Description of side airbags
Applies to vehicles: with side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts
.
Airb a g s ystem 177
How the side airbags work
Applies to vehicles: with side airbags
When fully inflated
,
the side airbags reduce the risk of injuries to the upper part of the body
.
Fig. 1 9 4 S i d e a i rbag s : Location i n driver ' s seat (example)
The side airbags are integrated in the backrests of the front seats and outer rear seats* .
The locations of the airbags are marked with the word " AIRBAG ".
In conjunction with the three-point seat belts, the side airbags give the occupants additional protection for the whole upper part of the body (i.e. the chest, stomach and pelvis) in the event of a severe side collision
Q
.&.
in Important safety notes on the side airbag system on page 178.
In a side collision the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to the areas of the body facing the impact.
F ig. 1 95 Inflated front and rear· side airbags (example)
In certain types of side collision the side airbags (front and rear*) are triggered on the impact side of the vehicle <::>
Fig
.
195
. Further airbag systems may also be triggered, depending on the circumstances.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas .
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags have to inflate extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). The airbag releases a fine dust when it inflates. This is quite normal and does not mean there is a fire in the vehicle .
When fully deployed, the airbags cush i on the impact for the occupants and help to reduce the risk of injury to the whole upper part of the body (i.e. the chest, stomach and pelvis) on the side facing the door.
1 78 Airb ag system
Important safety notes on the side airbag system
Applies to vehicles. with side airbags
There are a number of safety points concerning the airbag system which you should remember. This
will
help to reduce the risk of injury in on occident.
A
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury should the s i de airbags be triggered i n an accident. This applies particularly to children if they are not properly protected by a child restraint system.
If children are not seated correctly, they are at greater risk of injury should the airbag system be triggered in an accident. This is particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger's seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident. This could result in serious or potentially fatal injury
¢page 15
7,
Child seats.
It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags (front and rear*).
The sensors for the airbags are l oca t ed in the front doors. You must therefore not make any modifications to the doors or door trim (e.g. retrofitting loudspeakers), as this could Impair the function of the side a ir bags. Any damage to the front doors could lead to faults in the system. Repairs or any other work on the front doors mus t therefore always be carried out by a qualified workshop.
The built-in coat hooks should only be used for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
- Do not apply excessive force to the sides of the backrests (such as hard knocks or kicks), as this could damage parts of the system. The side airbags could then fail to operate when required.
If you intend to fit protective covers over the seats, these must be of the specific type approved for use on Audi seats with side airbags. Conventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag when it inflates out of the backrest, and seriously reduce the airbag's effectiveness.
Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the s i de airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
Any work involving the side airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs
(such as repairs to the seats) must always be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise the airbag system may fail to work properly.
(D
Note
All the other airbags in the car will remain functional if the front passenger's ai r bag has been deactivated.
Head-protection a
i
rbags
Description of head-protection airbags
Applies to vehicles with head-protection airbags
F i g. 196 Location of head protection airbags above the doors (example)
The head-protection airbags are located above the doors on the left and right sides of the vehicle. The locations of the airbags are marked with the word "AIRBAG" . liJ>
In conj u nction with the three point seat belts and side airbags, the head protection airbags give the occupants additiona l protection against head and neck injuries in a severe s ide collis i on c::>
.& in Important safety notes on the head protection airbags on page 179.
Together with other de s ign features (including cross-braces in the seats and the overall strength of the body structure), the head-protection and side ai r bag system offers an effective further improveme n t to occupant protection in side impacts .
How the head · protection airbags work
Applies to vehicles: with head-protection airbags
When fully inflated, the airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in a side collision.
Fi g . 1 9 7 Head-protectio n airbags i n in flated co n d i tio n
(ex am p l e)
In certain types of side collision, the headprotection airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle <:!) Fig. 197. Further airbag sy s tems may also be t riggered, depending on the circumstances .
When the system is triggered, the airbag fills with a prope ll ant gas and covers the entire area in fro n t of t h e side windows, includ i ng the door pillars. In th is way the system is ab l e to protect both the front and the rear occupants on the side of t h e vehicle where the impact occurs . The head protection airbag in flates to s often the i mpact if an occupant strikes parts of the interior or objects outside the vehicle with their head. By reducing the head impact and restraining uncontrolled movement of the head, the airbag also re duces the forces acting on the neck.
Airbag system 1 79
In order to provide t he desired ex t ra protection in an acc i dent , the airbags have to i nflate extremely rapidly (within fraction s of a second). The airbag releases a fine dust when it inflates. This is quite normal and does not mea n there is a fire i n the veh i cle.
Important safety notes on the head protection airbags
Applies to vehicles: wit h head protection airbags
There are a numb e r of safety points concerning the airbag system which you should remember. This will help to reduce the risk of injury in an accident.
&.
WARNING
It is important to ensure that the area a round the openings for the head-protection airbags remains unobstructed at
1 all times, so that the a i rbags can inflate properly if n eeded.
The built-in coat hooks s h ou l d only be used for lightweight clothing. Do no t leave any heavy o r s h arpe dged objects in the pockets. Wh e n using the coat hooks, do not hang the clothes on coat h ange r s.
The space between the passenge r s and the head-protection a ir bags must never be occupied by children , other passe n gers or pets . Passengers should never lean out or put a hand or arm out of the window while the vehicle is in motion .
- Do not move the sun visors out to cover the side wi n dows if there is an y thing attached to them (s u ch
C!S pens o r a r emote control for the garage door) . These objects could cause in ju ry if the hea dprotection airbag is triggered.
Th e sensors for the airbags are Located in the front doors . You must therefore not make any modifications to the doors or door trim (e.g. retrofitting loudspeakers), as this cou l d impair the function of the side airbags. Any damage to the front doors could lead to faults in the system. Repairs or any other work on the ..,,.
180 Airb ag syste m front doors mus t therefore a l ways be carried out by a qualified workshop.
Where sun blinds are fitted on the rear doors, these must not obstruct or impair the airbags in any way.
If unsuitable accessories are installed near the head-protection airbag, the protection afforded by the airbag can be seriously impaired if the system is triggered. When the head-protection airbag opens, parts of these accessories could be thrown into the vehicle and injure passengers Qpage 233.
- Any work involving the head-protectio n airbags. or removal and installatio n of t h e airbag compone n ts for ot h er repa i r s
(such as repairs to the r oof li ner), must always be performed by a qualified wo r kshop. Otherwise the airbag system may fail t o work properly.
Deactivating the front passenger's airbag
Applies to vehicles· with key-operated switch for front passenger's airbag
If an airbag has been deactivated, it should be reactivated as soon as possible so that it can continue to give the required protection.
F i g . 198 Glove box: Key-operated switch for deactivat lng front passenger's airbag
F i g . 199 Centre console : Warning lamp lights up when passenger's airbag is deactivated
The key-operated switch for deactiva t ing the front passenger's airbag is located in the glove box~ 198.
... T o deact i vate the front passenger's airbag, use t h e key to turn the key-operated switch to @ .
... The front passenger's airbag can be reactivated by turning the key to position (!) .
De ac ti va t i n g front pa sse ng e r' s a irb a g when a c h ild sea t is in u se
If have no alternative but to install a rear ward-facing child seat on the front passeng er's seat you must deactivate the front passenger's airbag beforehand.
We recommend that child seats should be fitte d on the rear seat so that the front passenger's airbag can remain functional and provide protection in an accident Q poge 157 .
Monit o ring of ai r bag sys t e m
The ind i cator lamp
II page 21 will li ght up for a few seconds every time the ignition is sw i tched o n .
If the front passenger's airbag has been deac t i vated, the indicator lamp "PASSE N GER AIR-
BAG OFF" or
"
IJI
"
AIRBAG OFF or "Airbag deactivated" will light up constantly as a re minder
Q
Fig . 199 . I n addition, the following message will appear briefly:
Pa ssenge r ai r bag off
Once you have reactivated the passenger airbag, the following message will appear briefly:
P asse n ger a i r b a g on
.&.
WARNING
If you have no alternative but to install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger's seat, the front passenger's airbag must be deactivated beforehand.
Potentially fatal injuries to the child can result if the front passenger's airbag is not deactivated
Q page 1571
If you have deactivated the front pas senger ' s airbag, reactivate it as soon as the child seat is no longer needed so that the airbag can continue to give the required protection.
It is th e driver's responsibility to ensure that the key-operated switch is set to the correct position.
All the other airbags in the car will remain functional if the front passenger's airbag has been deactivated with the key-operated switch.
Airbag system 181
182 Intelligent technology
Intelligent technology
Electronic stabilisation control (ESC)
Description
ESC increases the car's stability. It reduces the tendency to skid and improves the stability and road holding of t he vehicle. The ESC detects cr i tical handling situations, such as unde r steer, oversteer a n d wheelspin on the driven wheels. It stabilises the vehicle by braking individua l wheels or by reducing the engine torque. The indicator lamp
DJ in the instr u ment cluster starts flashing as soon as the
ESC i ntervenes.
The ESC incorporates the funct i ons of the anti lock brake system (ABS), the brake ass i st system, the tractio n control system (ASR), the e l ectronic differential l ock (EDL), the elect r onic limited slip differential* (front whee l drive), the select i ve wheel tor qu e contro l * (fo u rwheel drive) and the trailer stabilisation system * ¢ page 195. The ESC a l so helps t o sta bi li se the vehicle by changing the steering wheel torque.
Anti-lock brake system ( ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up unde r braking until the veh i cle has r eached a virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the vehicle even when tine brakes are on full. Keep your foo t on the brake pe d al and do not pump the brakes. You w ill feel the b r a k e peda l pulsate wh il e the antiL ock b r ake sys t em is working.
Brake assist system
The brake assist sys t em can shorte n the braking distance. The braking force is automatically boosted if you press the brake pedal quick l y i n an emergency. You must keep pressing the brake peda l until the danger has passed . On vehicles with adaptive cruise control*, the response of the brake assist system will be more sensitive if you are too close to the veh i cle in front.
Traction control system (ASR )
In the event of wheelspin, the traction control system reduces the eng i ne torque to match the amount of gr i p ava il able . This helps the car to start moving, acce l erate or climb a gradient .
Electronic differential lock ( EDL )
When the E DL de t ects wheels p in, it brakes t h e spinning wheel a nd d i r ects the p ower to t h e other d r iven w h eel (or wheels on q u attro * versions) . This func t ion is ac t ive u p to abo u t
100 km/h.
To p r even t the d isc brake of t he br aked whee l from overheat i ng, the EDL cu t s out automatica l l y if subjected to excess i ve l oads. The vehicle can still be driven. The EDL wi ll switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
Trailer stabilisation system*
If you are u sing your vehicle to tow a t r ailer, please bear in mind that trailers have a tendency to sway. If the ESC detects that the trailer is swaying and this is affecting the towing vehicle, i t will automatica ll y brake the vehicle where possible i n order to stabilise the trailer. The trai l er stabilisation system i s not ava i lable for a ll e x port versions .
Electronic limited slip differential * I sel.ective wheel torque control*
An electron i c limited slip differential (front whee l drive) or selective wheel torque cont r o l funct i on (four w h eel d r ive) intervenes when cornering b y b raking the unladen whee l (s) on the inside of the bend individually as requi r ed .
This mi ni mises u nderstee r and neutralises t h e car's handling u nder power to enable p r ec i s i on cornering . The relevant system may not intervene in the wet or snow.
Multicollision brake assist system
The "mult i collision brake assist system" can ass i st the driver and reduce the risk of skidding and further collisions during an accident by automat i cally applying the brakes. ll>-
The "multicollision brake assist system" acts in frontal, side and rear collisions when the airbag control unit detects a threshold trigger condition during an accident and the accident occurs at a road speed in excess of 10 km/h.
The ESC will automat i cally brake the vehicle
(unless the ESC, hydraulic brake system or vehicle's electrical system have been damaged during the accident).
The following conditions override the automatic brake application in an accident:
- There is no automatic braking if the driver presses the accelerator.
- The vehicle is braked manually if the brake pressure applied by pressing the brake pedal is higher than the b r ake pressure Initiated by the system.
The "multicollision brake assist system" is not available if an ESC malfunction occurs.
.&.
WARNING
- The grip provided by the ESC, ABS, ASR,
EDL, electronic limited-slip differential and selective wheel torque control systems is still subject to the physical limits of adhesion. Always bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery roads. If notice the systems cutting in, you should reduce your speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety provided tempt you
Intelligent tec hnology 183 into taking any risks when driving this can cause accidents.
Remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive fast, especially in corners or on a wet or slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front of you. Please bear in mind that even ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDL, electronic limited slip differential, selective wheel torque control and ASR cannot compensate for the increased accident r i sk.
- When accelerating on a uniformly slippe r y surface (for instance all four wheels on Ice or snow), press the accelerator gradually and carefully. The driven wheels may otherwise start to spin (in spite of the integrated control systems), which would impair the car's stability and could lead to an accident .
('D
Note
- To ensure that the ABS and ASR systems work properly, all four wheels must be fitted with identical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
The systems can make noises when they intervene.
If the indicator lamp
BJ or rlJ appears, there may be a malfunction page 22.
Switching the ESC on/off
The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started.
F ig. 200 Centre console (top): ESC button
The ESC operates in several levels. Depending on which level is selected, the stabilising function <Qf the ESC is restricted or switched off, and the vehicle is stabilised to a greater or lesser degree.
In the following special situations, it may be advisable to switch on the ESC sport mode to allow a certain amount of wheel spin:
Rocking the car backwards and forwards to free it
184 Intelligent technology
Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
Sport mode on ESC / ASRoff Sportmodus off or
ESC / ASR on
CharacterisThe ESC intervene s le ss for The ESC intervene s a lot The stabilising function of tics stabi l isation purposes and the traction control sysless po s e for s st abili s ation purand the traction the ESC and tractio n control system (ASR) is fully
Controls
Indicator lamp s tern (ASR) is switched off control system (ASR) is c::> .&.
. switched off c::> &.
. available again.
Press the
I ~
OFF I button Press the
1 .$
O F FI button Press the
I ~
OF F I button briefly. fl lights up. for longer than 3 seconds . again . and
Ill * light up .
II goes out, or
II
Ill * go out .
Driver mesStabilisation control sages ( ESC ): sport. Warning!
Stabilisation
(ESC) : off . control
Warning! Re -
Stabilisation
(ESC): on control
Restricted stability stricted stability (on vehicles with driver in-
(on vehicles with driver in (on vehicles with driver information system*) form a tion s ystem*) formation s y s tem*)
&.
WARNING
You should switch off the ESC only if your driving ability and the traffic cond iti ons allow you to do so safely danger of skidding!
The stabilising functionality is restricted in ES C sport mode. The driven wheels may start to spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip, in particu l ar on slippery or wet roads.
When the ESC/traction control system
(ASR) is switched off, the vehicle will not be stabilised.
Brakes
New brake pads
New brake pads do not give full braking effect for the first 400 km, they must first be "bedded in". However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking effect by applying more pressure on the brake pedal. Avo i d placing a heavy load on the brakes during the running-in period .
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and the condi tions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts and stops .
@ Note
- If a malfunction occurs in the Audi magnetic ride system, the ESC sport mode cannot be switched on and the ESC cannot be switched off. If the ESC sport mode is activate .
d or the ESC is off, the
ESC will automatically be reactivated .
The ESC sport mode cannot be switched on (i.e. the ESC/ASR cannot be switched off) while the crui s e control system* or adaptive cruise control* is actively regulating the speed.
Noises
Brake noise may develop in certain situations, depending on the speed, bra k ing force and ambient conditions (such as temperature and relative humidity) .
Effect of moisture and salt
In certain condition s , such a s in heavy rain, early morning dew, or after washing the car or driving through water, the fu ll braking effect .,..
can be delayed by moisture (or in winter by ice) on the discs and brake pads. The brakes should be "dried" by pressing the pedal to restore full braking effect.
When you are driving at higher speeds with the windscreen wipers on, the brake pads are very briefly brought into contact with the brake discs. This automatic process which goes unnoticed by the driver is carried out at regular intervals and i s intended to improve braking response in wet conditions .
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporari l y reduced if the car is driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a l ot of salt on the road in w i nter. The layer of salt that accu mu l at es on the discs and pads can be removed with a few cautious brake applications.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for dirt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion to form on the discs if the car is used infrequently, or if you only drive low mileages without using the brakes very much .
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if corrosion has formed on the discs, it is advisable to clean off the pads and discs by braking firmly a few times from a moderately high speed ~ .&.
.
Faults in the brake s y s tem
If the brake pedal travel shou l d ever increase suddenly, this may mean that one of the two brake circuits has fa i led. Drive immediately to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be prepared to use more pressure on the brake pedal and allow for longer stopping distances.
Low brake flu i d le v el
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low . The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.
Intelligent te c hnology 185
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It only works when the engine is running.
.&.
WARNING
When applying the brakes to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, select a clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other road users; do not risk an accident.
N ever let the car coast with the engine switched off (this can cause accidents).
CD
CAUTION
Never let the brakes "drag" by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do not really i ntend to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stopping distances and greater wear .
Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed and select a lower gear. In this way you will make use of the engine braking effect and relieve the load on the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply t h e brakes continuously.
1 Note
If the brake servo is out of action, you must apply considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
- If you wish to equ i p the car with accessor i es such as a front spoi l er or wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Electro-mechanical power steering
Electro-mechanical power steering assists the driver when steering.
The degree of power assistance is adapted electronically, depending on the speed.
186 Intelligent technology
If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off (for instance when being towed). the car can still be steered. However, substantially more effort than normal will be required to turn the steering wheel.
Warning
/
indicator lamps
and
driver
messages
• Do not drive vehicle : steering defective
If the warning lamp lights up permanently and the message appears, there may be a power steering failure .
Do NOT drive on. You should obta i n p r ofessi o n a l assistance.
• Do not drive vehicle: s teering defective
There is a malfunct i on in the electronic steering lock. The ignition can no longer be sw i tch ed on .
Do not have the vehicle towed away, because you won't be able to steer it. You should obt ain professional assistance. ftl
Steering : system fault . You can continue driving
If the indicator lamp lights up, the steering response may be heavier or lighter than usual.
In addition, it is possible that the steering wheel will be off centre when driving in a straight line .
Drive s l ow l y to a qualified workshop and have the fau l t rectified.
Ill
Steering lock : malfunction. Please contact workshop
There is a malfunction in the electronic stee r ing lock.
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have t he fault rectified.
.&.
WARNING
Have the system malfunction repaired by a qualified workshop as soon as possible risk of accident.
@ Note
You can drive on If the warning/indicator
Lamp . or
IJI lights up only briefly.
Four-wheel drive
(quattro)
Applies to vehicles: with four-wheel drive
On quattro models the engine power is distributed to all four wheels.
General notes
On four-whee l drive vehicles, the engine power is distributed to all four wheels. The distr i but i on of power is contro ll ed automatically accord i ng to yo u r driv i ng style and the road conditions . Also refer to ¢ page 182, Electronic stabilisation control (ESC).
The four-wheel dr i ve is specially designed to complement the superior engine power of your Audi. This combination gives the car ex ceptional handling and performance capabilities - both on normal roads and in more diffi cult conditions, such as snow and ice. Even so
(or perhaps especially for this reason), it is important to observe certain safety points ¢ & .
Winter tyres
T hanks to its four-wheel drive, your ca r w i ll have plenty of traction In winter conditions, even with the standard tyres. N evertheless, we sti ll recommend that winter tyres or a l lseason tyres should be fitted on oil four w h eels w h en winter road conditions are e x p ected, mainly because th i s w ill give a bette r braking response .
Snow chains
On r oads where snow chains are mandatory, this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive
¢ page 228, Snow chains .
Replacing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four tyres must have the same rolling circumference. Also avoid using tyres with varying tread depths ¢ page 225 , Replacing wheels and tyres. ..,_
Offroad er?
Your Audi does not have enough ground clearance to be used as an off-road vehicle . It is therefore best to avoid rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as possible . Also refer to q
page273
.
A
WARNING
Even with four-wheel drive, you should always adjust your speed to suit the conditions. Do not let the extra safety afforded by four-wheel drive tempt you into taking any risks when driving this can cause accidents .
Th e braking ab ility of your car is limited by the g rip of the tyr es. In this respect, your ca r is no different from a car w ithout four-whee l drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast on icy or slippery roads just because the car still has good acce l eration in these conditions (accident risk).
1
- On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to "aquaplane" and lose contact with the road if the car is driven too fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed to warn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive car. So do not d r ive too fast in the wet: adjust your speed to suit the conditions (accident risk).
Power management
This system helps to ensure reliable starting
The
power management controls the distribution of electrical energy and thus helps to ensure that there is always enough power available to start the engine.
If a vehicle with a conventional electrical system is left parked for a long time, the battery will gradually lose its charge because certain electrical equipment (such as the immobiliser) continues to draw current even when the ignition is off . In some cases there may not be enough power available to start the engine.
Intellig ent technology 187
Your vehicle is equipped with an inte l ligent power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy. This significantly improves reliability when starting the engine, and also prolongs the life of the battery.
The main functions incorporated in the power management system are battery d iag nos is , res i dua l current management and dynamic power management .
Battery diagnosis
T he battery diagnosis funct i on constant l y registe r : s the condition of the battery. Sensors detect th e battery voltage, battery current and battery temperature. This enables the system to ca l cula t e the current power level a nd charge condi ti on of the battery.
Residual curren t management
The residua l current management reduces power consumption whi l e the vehicle is parked. It controls the supply of power to the various electrical components while the ignition is switched off. The system takes the battery diagnosis data into consideration.
Depending on the power level of the battery, the individual electrical components are switched off one after the other to prevent the battery from losing too much charge and to ensure that the eng i ne can be started reliably.
Dynamic power man ageme nt
While the vehicle is moving, this funct i on distribute s the avai l ab l e power to the vario , us electrical components and systems accord in g to their requirements. The power manage ment ensures that on-board systems do no t consume more electrical power than the alter nator can supply, and thus maintains the maximum possible battery power level.
1 Note
- The power management system is not able to overcome the given physical li mits. Please remember that the power and life of the battery are limited. ~
188 Int e lligent technology
- If the indicator lamp
Iii c> page 21 appears, the starting ability may be impaired.
Points to remember
Starting ability hos first priority.
Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures all place a heavy load on the battery. In these conditions a large amount of power is consumed, but only a small amount is supplied.
The situation is also critical if electrical equip ment is in use when the engine is not running.
In this case power is consumed when none is be i ng generated.
In these situations you wi l l be aware that the power management system is intervening to control the distribution of electrical power .
When the vehicle is parked for long periods
If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of several days or weeks, the power management will gradually shut off the on-board systems one by one, or reduce the amount of cur rent they are using. This limits the amount of power consumed and he l ps to ensure reliable starting even after a Long period. Certain convenience features, such as remote control unlocking, may not be available. These functions will be restored when you switch on the ignition and start the engine .
With the engine switched off
If you listen to the radio or use other electrical equipment whelil the engine is not running, this will discharge the battery.
On vehicles with driver information system*, a message will appea r before the battery power drops to a level where the starting ability is impaired.
This message advises you to start the engine in order to recharge t he battery.
When the engine is running
Although the alternator generates electrical power, the battery can still become discharged while the vehicle is being driven . This can occur when a lot of power is being consumed but only a small amount supplied, especially if the battery is not fully charged initially .
To restore the necessary energy balance, the system will then temporarily shut off the electrical components that are using a lot of power, or reduce the current they are consuming.
Heating systems in particular use a large amount of electrical power. If you notice, for instance, that the seat heating" or the rear window heater is not working, t hey may have been temporarily switched off or regulated to a lower heat output. T hese systems wi l l be available again as soon as sufficient electrical power is available.
You may also notice that the engine runs at a slightly faster idling speed. This is quite nor mal, and no cause for concern. The increased id Ling speed allows the alternator to meet the greater power requirement and charge the battery at the same time.
Information saved in the control units
The vehicle is fitted in the factory with electronic control units that, among other things, control the engine and the gearbox . The control units also monitor the exhaust system and the airbags.
The control units continually analyse data relevant to the ve hi cle w h ile you are dr i v i ng. In the event of faults or anomalies in the vehicle data, only these data are saved. As a rule, faults are shown by the warning lamps in the instrument cluster.
Da t a saved in the control units can only be read and analysed with special equipment .
A qualified workshop is only able to recognise and deal with faults by using the relevant saved data. Among other things, the saved data may contain the following information:
Data relating to the engine and the gearbox
-Speed ...
-
Direction
of travel
- Braking
force
-
Seat belt warning
system
data
The
control units installed
will
not under any circumstances record conversations in
the
vehicle.
Event data recorder
Your vehicle is not equipped with an event da-
ta recorder .
In an event data recorder, information
about the vehicle
i s temporarily saved.
In the even
t of an accident,
you
can
therefore obtain de-
tailed
information
about
the
course
of
events.
On vehicles with
an airbag
s ystem,
accident-
re
l ated
data
such as
impact
speed, seat
belt
status, seat
positions
and
trigger times
can
be
saved. The exact
information
saved
depends
on
the
manufacturer.
The
installation of an event data
recorder
i s subject
to the
agreement of the vehicle's
owner.
This process
is
governed by legislation in
some
countries.
Reprogramming control units
All data for controlling components are saved in
the
control units . Some
convenience
fea-
tures,
such as one-touch signalling, single door unlocking and display messages can be reprogrammed using
special workshop
equip-
ment. If
any convenie
· nce
features are
reprogrammed,
the information
In
this
Owner's
M anual
will no longer be acc
u
rate for the features tha
t
have been
changed. W
e recommend having the reprogramming
confirmed
by an Aud
i
workshop
i
n
the
"Workshop re
-
mar
k
s" section of your
Service
Schedu
l
e.
Your
Audi
dealer
will
be able
to provide you
with
information
about possible reprogramming options.
Event memory
There
is
a diagnostic
connection
for reading out
the
event memory located
in
the footwell on the driver's
side
of
the
vehicle. I nformation regarding
the
operation and status of
the ve-
hicle's
electronic
control units is stored in the
Intelligent technology 189
event memory. The
event memory should
only be
read out and erased by a qualified
work-
shop.
A_
WARNING
The
diagnostic
connection must not
be
used
for
other purposes.
Incorrect
use can
cause malfunctions
- risk of
accident!
190 Your vehicle and the environment
Your vehicle and the environment
Running in
A new vehicle should be run in over a distance of 1,500 km. For the first 1 , 000 km the engine speed should not exceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine speed - do not use full throttle and do not tow a trailer or caravan. From 1,000 to 1,500 km you can gradually increase the engine rpm and road speed.
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the eng i ne is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded down.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500 km also influences the engine quality. After this period you should continue driving at moderate engine speeds, in particular when the engine is cold. This helps to reduce wear and tear on the eng i ne and increases the potential mileage which can be covered by the engine .
You should also avoid driving w i th the engine speed too low. Change down to a lower gear when the engine no longer runs "smoothly".
Excessively high engine speeds are prevented by an automatic rev limiter .
Driving through water on roads
Please note the following in order to prevent damage to the vehicle when driving through water (e.g
. on flooded roads):
- The water level must not be higher than the vehicle's underbody .
Do not drive faste r than walking pace.
_& WARNING
After driving through water, mud, sludge, etc .
, the braking effect can be delayed slightly due to moisture on the discs and brake pads . Applying the brakes carefully several times will remove the moisture and restore the full braking effect .
CD
CAUTION
- Parts of the vehicle (e.g. engine, gearbox, running gear or electrical components) can be badly damaged when driving through water.
- Always switch off the start/stop system*
~ page 98 before driving through water.
(D
Note
It is advisable to check the depth at the deepest point before approaching the water.
Do NO T stop the vehicle, drive in reverse or switch off the engine before you are out of the water .
- Bear in mind that waves created by oncoming traffic could exceed the permissible wading depth of your vehicle .
- Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion).
Emission control systems
Catalytic converter
Applies to vehicles with petrol e ngine : The vehicle must only be used with unleaded petrol; otherwise the catalytic converter will be irreparably damaged .
Never allow the fuel tank to run completely dry, as the ir regular supply of fuel can cause misfiring. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which can cause overheating and damage to the catalytic converter .
Diesel particulate filter
Applies t o vehicles with d iesel engine : The diesel particulate filter can filter out almost all soot particle s contained in the exhaust gas. In normal driving conditions the filter is self-cleaning. In addition, the diesel particulate filter is also automatically regenerated at certain intervals. In this case, the indicator ""'
lamp
II idling speed and a certain odour may be noticed while this is happening.
Should the self-cleaning or automatic regeneration function of the filter not be able to operate, e.g. when the vehicle is continuously used only for short trips, the filter becomes obstructed with soot and the indicator lamp
II
~ page23 .
A
WARNING
The exhaust system is very hot when the vehicle is be i ng driven and after the engine
has been switched off.
Never touch the ta i lpipes when they are hot you could burn yourse l f!
Because of the high temperatures which can occur in the emission control system
(catalytic converter or diesel particulate filter), do not park the vehicle where the exhaust can come into contact with flammable materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at the forest edge). - Fire hazard!
- Do not apply any underseal agents in the area around the exhaust system - fire hazard!
Taking the vehicle out of service
If you wish to take your vehicle out of service for a long period of time, contact a qualified workshop. Here you w il l receive advice on necessary measures, for example regarding corrosion protection, maintenance and storage. In addition, please observe the general notes on the battery ~ page 218.
How to improve economy and minimise pollution
Fuel economy, environmental impact and wear on the engine, brakes and tyres depend largely on the way you drive the vehicle. By
Your veh i cle and the environment 191 adop t ing an economical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. The following section gives you some tips on lessening the impact on the environment and r educing your operating costs at the same time .
Anticipate well in advance
A car uses most fuel when accelerating. If you anticipate hazards and speed changes well in advance, you will need to brake less and thus acce l erate less. Wherever possible, let the car s l ow down gradually with a gear engaged , for i nstance when you can see that the next traffic lights are red. This takes advantage of the engi n e bra ki ng effect, reducing wear on the brakes and tyres . Emiss i ons and fue l consumption will drop to zero due to the overrun fuel cut-off.
Change gear early to save fuel
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears . Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessa r y amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox : Shift up to second gear as soon as possible. If possible, we recommend shifting up to the next gear at approx . 2,000 rpm. You can minimise your fuel consumption by always selecting the highest possible gear that will allow the engine to run smoothly in a given driv i ng situation .
Automatic gearbox : Press the accelerator slowly and avoid using the "kick-down" feature .
Avoid driving at high speed
Avoid travelling at top speed . Fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Do not let the engine i dle for longer than necessary
Engine idling periods are automatically r educed on vehicles with start/stop system. On vehicles without a start/stop system, it is worthwhile switching off the engine at level Ill>
192 Your vehicle and the environment crossings, for instance, or at traffic lights wi t h a long red phase. The fuel saved after about
S seconds can be greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart a warm engine (the exact fuel saving depends on the engine version).
The engine takes a very long time to warm up when it is running at idling speed. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase.
It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Regular servicing
Regular servicing can establish a bas i s for good fuel economy before you start dr i ving. A well-serviced engine gives you the benef i t of
Imp r ov e d fu e l e ffi ci ency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value. A poorly maintained engine can consume up to ten percent more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short tr i p s
The engine and emission control system need to reach their prop er w o rk i ng temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions.
A cold engine uses disproportionately more fuel. The engine only reaches its working temperature after about four kilometres, when fuel consumption will return to a normal level.
Check tyre pressures
A l ways make sure the tyres are inflated to the correct pressures page 224 to save fue l. If the tyre pressures a r e just 0.S bar too l ow, this can increase the fuel consumption by as much as 5 %. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
Do not use winter tyr es all through the year; they will increase fuel consumption by up to
10%.
Avoid carrying unnece s sary loads
Every kilo of e x tra weight will increase the fuel consumption, so it is worth checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnecessary loads are being transported .
The roof carrier increases the a ir re si stance of the vehicle and should be removed when not in use. This will save about 12 % of fuel at speeds of between 60 and 7S mph.
Save electrical energy
The eng i ne drives the alternator to generate electricity. This means that fuel consumption rises when more power is required for e l ectrica l equipment. Switch off electr i ca l equipment when it is not needed. Electrical equipment wh i ch uses a lot of electricity includes the blower (at a high setting), the rear window heating and the seat heating• .
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top prio r ity in the design, choice of materials and productio n of your new Audi.
Design measure s for ec o nomical recycling
- Joints and connections designed for ease of dismantling
Modular construction to facilitate dismantl i ng
Increased use of sing l e-grade mater i als
Plastic parts and elastomers are labelled i n accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629
Choice of materi a ls
N early all materials used can be recycled
Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling
- Recycled materials used in manufacture
- Reduced vapour emissions from plastics
- CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioner ~
Compliance with the laws prohibiting the use of : Cadm i um, asbestos, l ead, me r cury and chrome VI.
Manufacturing me t hods
Using recycling material for manufacturing plast i c parts
Solvent free cavity sealing
Solvent-free wax for protecting t he vehicles in transit
Solvent-free adhesives
No CFCs used i n production
Surplus mater i a l s used extensive l y for energy conversion and building materials
Overall water consumption reduced
Heat recovery sys t ems
Water-so l ub l e paint
Your vehicle and the environment 193
' '
194 Towing a traile r
Towing a trailer
Driving the vehicle with a trailer or caravan
Technical requirements
The towing bracket must comply with certain technical requirements.
Your car is intended mainly for transporting passengers and luggage. H owever, if suitably equipped, it can also be used t o tow a trai l er or caravan.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it wi l ll already have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements.
A 13-p i n socket Is provided to make the e lectrical connection between the car and the trailer. If the trailer you wish to tow has a 7pin plug , the necessary adapter cable can be obtained from a specia li st retailer.
If a tow in g bracket is to be fitted after the car is purchased, this must be done according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacture r c:> page 202.
.&_ WARNING
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the in· stallation should be carried out by a qualified workshop.
I
In particular In high outside temperatures it is not possible to drive up long steep gradients without a suitable cooling system. The engine would then overheat.
Incorrect installation can result in a safety risk.
Points to check before towing
There are a number of points which need to be checked before towing a trailer or caravan.
• Observe the maximum permitted trailer weights r:t.> page 272.
Trailer weights
Never exceed the maximum permitted trailer we i ghts.
If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper gradients.
The maximum trailer weights listed are on l y applicable for altitude s up to 1000 m above sea l evel. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the car's climbing ability are impai r ed because of the reduced air density, so the maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the car and trailer must be reduced by about 10% for every further 1000 m (or part thereof). This figure refers to the combined weight of the
(loaded) vehicle and (loaded) trailer.
The figures for the draw b a r weight that appear on the identification plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only.
The correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for the towing bracket, are given in the registration documents and in c:>page 272. Also refer to r:!.>page 273.
Exterior lighting
Before starting a journey, make sure that all the lights for the trailer are working properly.
Distributing the load
Distribute load s in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible.
Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them slipping. A badly distributed load can also affect handling. This can acti· vate the trailer stabilisation featu r e a n d cause the vehicle to reduce speed.
Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.
Tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressures on your car and ad· just for "full load" conditions (refer to the .,..
sticker listing the tyre pressures on the end face of the driver's door c> page 224,
Fig. 227). It may also be necessary to adjust the tyre pressures on the trailer according to the recommendations of the trailer manufacturer.
Exterior m irr ors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the standard mirrors.
If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.
Headlights
Before starting a journey, check the headlight beam settings with the trailer hitched up. Adjust the headlight settings if necessary.
If the car is equipped with manual headlight range control, you only need to turn the adjuster control as required, see c> page 54 .
The headlight beam settings will be adjusted automatically if your vehicle is equipped with dynamic headlight range control*.
Power supply
To ensure that the engine can be started again after the ignition is switched off, the power management s y stem c> page 187 contro l s the distribution of electrical power and gradually switches off unnecessary e l ectrical equipment. The trailer is s uppli ed with power during this per i od. The power supply to the trailer is interrupted while the engine is being started.
Removable ball joint coupling
Vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket are equipped with a removable ball joint coupling. This is stored in the spare wheel well or in a separate bag on the floor of the luggage compartment, together with the necessary fitting instructions.
Towing a trailer 195
@
Note
We recommend having the car serviced between the normal inspection intervals if it used frequently for towing a trailer .
Trailer stabilisation system
Applies to vehicles: with towing bracket
Trailer stabilisation helps to reduce the risk of the vehicle skidding when towing a trailer.
When is the trailer stabilisation system
l>
activated?
Trailer stab ili sation is active when the following requirements are met :
The ESC must be switched on c> page 183 and fully functional (no ESC malfunction).
Th e trailer connector must be properly secured in the vehicle socket .
T he vehicle speed must be higher tha n approx . 60 km/h .
How trailer stabilisation works
In many cases, the driver can stabilise a swaying trailer by manually braking the vehicle.
However, if the ESC detects that the trailer is swaying and this is affecting the towing vehicle, it will automatically brake the vehicle in order to stabilise the trailer. The indicator lamp m in the i nstrument cluster.
If possible, do not turn the steering wheel at this s tag e.
In order to warn traffic behind you, t h e brake light s w ill come o n during this automatnc braking operation .
A trailer may sway quite considerab l y w ith out the trailer stabilisation system intervening.
This can happen when the swaying movements of the light-weight trailer are not or hardly passed on to the towing vehicle and are therefore not detected by the ESC. .,.
1l Not available on vehicles for so me markets.
196 Towing a tr a ile r
If the system for activating the trailer brake lights is defective, this will be indicated in the instrument cluster display c:) page 25.
Requir e ments for corr ect functioning of the tr a iler s tabilisat i on sys tem
If these conditions are not met in full, the trailer stabilisation system will only intervene to a limited extent or not at all c:)
&.
.
The electrical connection between the towing vehicle and the trailer must be functioning correctly.
The load on the trailer must be properly se cured.
- The tyr e pressures on both the vehicle and t h e trai l er must be adapted to the load that is being carr i ed.
Wh ere possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight.
The trailer overrun brake must be set correctly. This is important to ensure that the trailer can be braked correctly, to avoid the vehicle and trailer "jack-knifing" and to prevent excess braking of the trailer .
At low outside temperatures, both the towing vehicle a nd the trailer should be fitted with winter tyres .
_& WARNING
It is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the weather, road and traffic conditions. Do not let the trailer stabilisat i on system tempt you into taking any risks when dr ivin g this can cause accidents.
Th e ESC and tra il er stab ili sation syste m cannot defy the l aws of physics. This shou ld be kept in mind, particularly on s lip pery and wet roads and when tow ing a trailer with a light load.
- The trailer stabilisation system is functional, regardless of whether the trailer has a mechanical overrun brake or not.
The trailer stabilisation system is not always able to detect swaying of trailers
with a light load and will therefore not intervene.
A trailer can still "jack-knife" on slippery roads with little grip, even if the towing vehicle is equipped with the trailer stabilisation system.
- Trailers with a high centre of gravity may even tip over before they start to sway sideways.
If you are not towing a trailer, but the trailer socket is being used (e.g. for an illuminated bicycle rack), the trailer stabilisation system may be activated in extreme driving conditions.
Please note the additional information and warn i ng s ~ page 196, Driving tips.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
We i ght distribution
Try to avoid tow ing a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle. If this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
No rmally, you must not exceed 80 km/h when tow ing a trailer or caravan. However, if the trailer/caravan meets certain technical requirementsl>, you can drive at max. 100 km/ h. P l ease observe any other r egulatio n s applicable in the country in which you are travel lin g.
The stability of the car and trailer is re du ced with increasing speed. For thi s reason it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible top speed in unfavourable road, weather or wind condit i ons. This applies especially on a downhill gradient . "' ll Incl udin g tr a il e r s tabil is ation s y s t e m• o r yaw damper
You should always reduce speed immediate l y if the trailer shows the slightest sign of sway· i ng . Never try to stop the swaying by accelerating further.
Always brake in good time. If the trailer has an overrun brake , apply the brakes gently at first and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be caused by the trailer wheels locking . Change down in good time be· fore going down a steep hill so that you can use the engine braking effect to slow down the vehicle .
Swaying and pitching can be reduced by stabiliser aids. We recommend having stabiliser aids installed when towing trai l ers with a high trai l er weight. They can be purchased and installed at a qualified workshop.
Electronic stabilisation control
The ESC - in particular in conjunction with the trailer stabilisation system
Q
page 195 makes it easier to sta b ilise a trailer if it starts to skid or sway. You should therefore keep the
ESC switched on at a ll times .
Overheating
In hot weather, keep an eye on the coolant temperature gauge r.:> poge 11. When climbing long hills w i th the engine running fast in low gear, the coolant temperature can increase . Reduce speed immediately ifthe nee· dle moves to the right end of the scale . For in· formation on the warning lamp . refer to
~ poge20.
Towing a trailer 197
Accessories
Applies to vehicles: with steel towing bracket
Before mounting equipment and accessories
(e.g. bicycle rock) please observe the following notes .
~
® ®
~
!
I
< t 3oomm
1 - - - i _
1 . . . . .
I
: ~ 600mm
Fig. 201 L oad distr i bution of equipment and accessor i es (illustrat i on shows an example vehicle)
The following description does not apply to towing brackets made of aluminium .
The equipment/accessories mounted must not protrude more than 700 mm from the ball j oint @ .
The total weight (mounted equipment plus the load) must not exceed 75 kg.
The maximum load depends on where the cent r e of gravity lies.
The maximum weight decreases as the distance between the centre of gravity and the ball j oint @ increases.
The following limits apply:
If the distance i s 300 mm, the total weight
(incl. the equipment mounted) @ m u st not ex c e e d 7 5 kg.
If the distance i s 600 mm, the tota l we i ght
(incl. the equipment mounted) ® must not exce e d 3 5 kg.
Only bicycle racks for a maximum of three bicycles may be used .
Equipment mounted on the towing bracket
Please make sure that the equipment mounted has been approved by the manufacturer for use on the ball joint. If you mount unsuitab l e equipment, this can cause damage to the Ill-
198 Towing a traile r towing bracket . In an extreme case, damage to the towing bracket could cause it to break c::>
&
.
.&._
WARNING
Make su re that t h e equipment and accessories have been approved for use on
Audi vehicles .
Use of unsuitable equipment can result in severe damage to the towing bracket .
The towing bracket could then break while using the equipment or while pulling a tra i ler (accident risk).
Never use tools of any kind when fitting and removing the ball joint. This cou ld damage the mechanism which lo cks the ball joint in place and im pair its safety
(accident risk).
When using equipment mounted to an aluminium towing bracket rather a steel bracket, the loadl carried must be reduced (e.g. two bicycles instead of three). If Loads are too heavy this can
Lead to damage and, in extreme cases, cause the towing bracket to break.
Removable towing bracket
Introduction
App l ies to vehicles : with removable towing brac k et
Special care is required when fitting and removing the towing bracket
.
Fig. 202 Luggage compartme nt : Ball jo i nt for towing bracke t (stowage example)
The removable ba lL joint attachment for the towing bracket is stored under the floor panel or n n a sepa rat e bag on the floor of the luggage compartment.
The ball joint can be fitted and removed by hand .
Equipment mounted on the towing bracket
Please note that the ball joint attachment can be damaged by using unsuitable equipment that is mounted onto the towing bracket (e.g. bicycle carrier) . Due to the material construction, such damage to the towing bracket dramatically increases safety risks and in extreme cases could Lead to b r eakage of the towing bracket while towing c::>
&
.
Therefore, ensure before buying such equipment that it is suitable for mounting onto the vehicle's towing bracket and that i t is approved for this purpose . In order to avoid damage to the ball joint from un s uitable equipment we r ecommend that equipment for the towing bracket be acq ui red through an
A u di dealer. Also refer to c::>
page 233
.
.&.
WARNING
Only mount equipment on the towing bracket of your Vehicle if yo u are certa i n
it will not damage the bracket. Use of unsuitable equipment can resu l t in severe damage to the towing bracket. The towing bracket could then break while pu l ling a trailer and cause an accident.
Never use tools of a ny kind when fitt i ng and removing the ball joint. This co uld damage the mechanism which Locks the ba ll joint in place and impair its safety
(accident risk) .
(D
Note
Do not attempt to modify or repair the ball joint or other towing bracket components.
Should you have any difficulties when using the towing bracket, or suspect that it is not fitted properly, contact a qualified workshop . ..,.
- Before setting off, always check that the ball joint is secured properly
Qpage 200.
Never disengage the ball joint with the caravan I trailer still hitched or with a bicycle rack or similar accessory still attached.
It is advisable to remove the ball joint when you are not t owing a trailer . Check whether the plug i s properly inserted in the mounting fixture and that the bumper cover is fitted .
The ball jo i nt must be removed if you i ntend to clean the car w i th a steam cleaning attachment. Chec k whether t h e pl u g
Is prope r ly I n serted in the moun t i n g fi xture and that the bumper cover is fitt ed.
For i nsta ll ation a n d remova l of the ball joint we recommend that the gloves provided be used .
F
i
tting the ball jo
i
nt
(
step 1
)
Applies to vehicles: with removable towing bracket
Towing a trailer 199
.. Remove the cover from the rear bumper. To do so, turn the two fasteners 90 ° anti-clockw is e q Fig . 203 .
.. Remove the plug q F ig. 204 from the mounting fixture.
.. Check that the mounting fixture is free of dirt; clean if necessary
Q
.£'.D.
.
Continued q page 199, Fitting the ball joint
(step 2) .
.A
WARNING
It is impo r tant to keep the mounting fixture clean . Otherwise the ball joint m a y fail to engage securely (accident risk).
~ 1
Fitting the ball joint (step 2)
App li es to vehicles: with removab l e tow in g bracket
F ig . 2 0 3 Area below rear bumper : R emo ving bumper cover (examp l e)
F i g . 2 04 Area below rear bumper : Pulling ou t plug
The two fasteners for the cover are located on the underside of the bumper Q Fig. 203.
F i g . 2 0 5 Removable towing bracket: Ball joint
The
spring
mechanism
inside
the ball
joint
must be in the "ready" position
.
... Check that the red marking @ ¢ Fig. 205 on t he knob i s inside the green zone on the ba ll joint .
.. C h eck t h at t he locking ba ll (!) is inside the h ol e in the shaft section of the ball joi n t .
.. Ch e ck t h at t he k nob protrudes v i s i bly f r om the ball joint, so that there is a clear gap @ between the knob and the ball joint.
The ball joint can only be installed if the internal spring mechanism is in the ready position.
Continued q page 200, Fitting the ball joint
(st ep 3).
200 Towing a trailer
Fitting the balljoint (step 3)
Applies to vehicles: with removable towing bracket
Fi g. 206 Removable towing bracket: Sett ing the spring mechanism to t h e " r eady" position
..&
WARNING
-
If it is not possible to set the spring mechanism to the " ready" position as de scribed above, p l ease contact a qualified wo r kshop and, fo r safety reasons, do not use the ball joint.
1
T o avoid injufy, keep your hands away from the knob when inserting t he ball joint in the mo u nti n g fixture.
@
Note
M ake sure that the knob can turn freely when the ball joint is inserted.
Fitting the ball joint (step 4)
Applies to vehicles: with removable towing bracket joint
Setting the spring mechanism to the
"ready" po
s
ition
(
if required
)
... Insert the key © ¢ Fig . 206 for t ock i ng the ball joint into the L ock on the knob and turn it clockwise .
... Pull out the knob i n d i rection
0 , ho l d and turn in direction @ until the locking ball ® engages c>
,&.
.
Inserting the ball joint
... With the spring mechanism in the "ready" position, insert the ba l l joint into the mounting fixture and push it upwa r ds c> Fig . 207 in the cifirectio n indicated (arrow)
¢
Li)..
.
The spri n g mechanism should then
engage a
u
tomatically wi
t
h an a
u
dible click.
.,. Lock the ball jo i nt by tu rn in g the key a n t i clockwise.
... Take out the key and press the cover cap onto the l ock.
Continued c> page 2 00, Fitting the ball joint
(step 4) .
Fi g . 2 0 9 A r ea be l ow rear b u mper: Co n nect i ng socket
@ , safety cable attachment ®
Safety check
... Check that the green ma r king @ c> Fig. 208 on the knob is i nside the green zone on the ball jo i nt .
... Check that the knob is directly against the ball jo i nt, so that there i s no gap (J) between the knob and the ball joint. ..,.
Towing a trailer 201
• Check that the ball joint is locked and the key is removed (so that the knob cannot be pulled out) .
• Check that the ball joint fits t i ghtly in the mounting fixture (try mov i ng i t about to check) .
Electr
i
cal so
c
ket for trailer
• To plug in the electrical connection for the trailer, swivel the connecting socket down from underneath the bumper @ q Fig. 209.
Safety cable attachment•
When you hitch a trai l ler up to your vehicle, hook the safety cable Into the attachment providedll @ <::> Fig. 209. If your vehicle does not have a safety cable attachment, loop the safety cable around the ball joint.
If the safety check is not satisfactory, the ball joint must be fitted again properly .
A
WARNING
To avoid accidents, the ball joint must meet all the safety requirements listed in the safety check. The towing bracket must not be used if any one of these requirements is not met. P l ease contact a qualified workshop.
Remov
i
ng the ball jo
i
nt
Applies to vehicles: with re movab l e towing bracket
F i g . 21 0 Removable tow in g bracket : Remov i ng the ball join t
F ig. 2 11 Area below rear bump e r : Fitt i ng the p l ug
• Take off the cover cap and insert the key @ q Fig . 210 in the lock on the knob.
• Unlock the ball joint by turning the key clockwise.
• Take ho l d of the ball joint and pull out the knob in direction G) .
• Keep ho l d of the knob and turn it as far as it w i ll go in direction @ .
• Release the knob. The spring mechanism will remain in the "ready" position <::> _& .
• Pu ll the ball joint down out of the mounting fix t ure .
• Insert the plug into the mounting fixture
~ Fig . 211 .
• Swivel the electrical socket upwards as far as the stop.
• Stow the ball joint underneath the floor panel or in the bag on the floor of the luggage compartment, depending on your vehicle configuration .
• Insert the bumper cover with the retaining tabs first and turn both fasteners 90° until they are secure .
A
WARNING
Make sure that the plug is properly fitted in the mounting fixture for the towing bracket. Otherwise the ball joint may fail t o engage securely the next time it is attached if dirt has accumulated in the mounting fixture.
On vehicles in which the ball joint is stowed in a bag on the floor of the luggage compartment, the bag must always be secured to the front right fastening ..,.
1l Th is e quipment is no t availab l e for a ll e xport vers i ons .
202 T o wing a trail er ring. Otherwise the bag could be catapulted through the interior of the vehicle in the event of sudden braking or an accident - risk of injury and accident!
A3: Towing brac k et ( r e trofitting )
The vehicle can be retrofitted with a towing bracket.
For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the towing bracket.
If the connector socket is not fitted cor-
rectly, this could cause damage to the ve-
hicle's electrical system.
A3 Sportback : Towing bracket
( retrofitting )
The vehicle can be retrofitted with a towing bracket.
Fig . 212 A3: Pos i t i o n s of secu r ing po i nts (viewed from above a n d from s ide)
If a towing bracket is to be f i tted after the car is purchased, this must be done according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer. The towing bracket is bolted to the vehicle body on the inside of the spare wheel well. The securing points are marked with an
@Q
Fig. 212.
Qualified workshops are familiar with the method of installat i on and any modifications
which may be required for the cooling system
.
A_
WARNING
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the installation should be carried out by a qualified workshop.
1
- If the towing bracket is incorrectly fitted, this could cause a safety risk .
Fig. 213 A3 Sportback : Po s ition s of sec uring points
(v i ewed from above a n d from s ide)
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the car is pu r chased, this must be done according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer. The towing bracket is bolted to the vehicle body on the inside of the spare wheel we ll . The securing points are marked with an
@Q
Fig
.
213
.
Qualified workshops are familiar with the method of installation and any modifications which may be required for the cooling system. Ill>
&
WARNING
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the installation should be carried out by a qualified workshop.
-
If the towing bracket is incorrectly fitted, this could cause a safety risk .
- For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the towing bracket .
CD
CAUTION
If the connector socket is not fitted correctly, this could cause damage to the vehicle's electrical system.
A3 Saloon: Towing bracket (retrofitting)
The vehicle can be retrofitted with a towing bracket.
N
0
~
"'
Towing a trailer 203
Qualified workshops are familiar with the method of installation and any modifications which may be required for the cooling s ystem.
&
WARNING
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the installation should be carried out by a qualified workshop.
I f the towing bracket is incorrectly fitted, this could cause a safety risk.
- For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the towing bracket.
If the connector socket Is not fitted correctly, this could cause damage to the vehicle's electrical system .
.
.. 76,0
+
F ig. 2 14 A3 Saloon : Po s itions of secu ri ng points
(viewed from above a nd from side)
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the car is purchased , th is must b e done according to the instruct i ons of the tow i ng bracket manufacturer. The tow i ng bracket is bolted to the veh i cle body on the i n si de of the spare wheel well. The securing po i nts are marked with an
@ Q fig . 214 .
204 Care of ve hicl e and cl e aning
Care of vehicle and cleaning
General notes
Regular and careful care helps to ma i ntain the value of the vehicle. This may also be one of the requirements for upholding any warranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint defects.
Qualified workshops carry stocks of suitable car care products . Please follow the instructions for use on the packaging .
A
WARNING
Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can damage health if misused.
- Car care products can contain toxic substances and must always be kept in a safe place out of reach of children.
1
@
For the sake of the environment
Please choose care products that are not harmful to the environment .
Surplus cleaning materials should not be disposed of together with ordinary household waste.
Washing the vehicle
The longer residues like insects, bird droppings, resinous tree sap or road salt are allowed to remain on the vehicle, the more damage they can do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in direct sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect.
Before washing, soa k heavy dirt with p l enty of water .
After the period when salt is put on the roads, have the underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
H i gh p r e ss u r e cle a n ers
When cleaning the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner, always follow the operating instructions for the equ i pment. This applies particularly to the operating pressure and the spraying distance. Do not point the spray jet directly at the seals on the windows , doors, boot lid, bonnet or sun roof*, or at the tyres, rubber hoses, insulating material, sensors* or camera lenses*. Maintain a distance of at least40 cm .
Do not use a high-pressure cleaner to remove snow and ice.
Never use high-pressure cleaners with a round-jet nozzle or "dirt blasters".
The water mus t not be hotter than 60
°(.
Automat i c c a r w a shes
Spray the vehicle with water before washing.
Ensure that the windows and sun roof* are closed and that the windscreen wipers are switched off. Follow the car wash operator's rules and recommendations, especially if any accessories are attached to your vehicle .
If possible use a brush less car wash.
Washing by hand
Clean the car with a soft sponge or brush, starting on the roof and working down. Use solvent-free cleaning agents.
Wa s hin g matt paint e d v eh i cles b y hand
To avoid damaging the paintwork when washing the car, fir s t remove any dust, sand and grit. Insects, grease stains and fingerprints are best removed using a special cleaning agent for matt-painted surfaces.
Apply the prod u ct with a micro-fibre cloth . Do not apply too much pressure to avoid damaging the paintwork.
Rinse the car thoroughly with water. Then clean the car with a neutral shampoo and a soft micro-f i bre cloth .
Rinse the car with lots of water again and then let it dry in the a i r . Remove any water stain s with a chamois.
Care of vehicle and cleaning 205
Stubborn dirt, such as bird droppings or resi n ous tree sap, i s best removed w i th p l enty of water and a micro-fibre cloth.
.&.
WARNING
Follow the ru l es and recommendations of the car wash operator and do not wash the vehicle with the ignition switched on risk of accident .
To avoid cutting yourself on sharp metal parts, always wear suitable protection when cleaning the underside of the car or inside the wheel arches .
After the car has been washed, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or i n winter by ice) on the discs and brake pads risk of accident. The brakes should be dried by pressing the pedal to restore full braking effect.
CD
CAUTION
- Before washing t he vehicle i n a n automatic car wash, please make sure to retract the exterior mirrors to prevent damage. Always use t he electrical power cont r ol to fold the mirrors in/out on vehicles with electrica ll y retractable exterior mirrors" .
Do not wash the vehicle in d i rect sunlight
otherwise the paint can be damaged.
Do not use insect sponges or abrasiv · e household sponges, etc. - they can d amage the surfaces .
Matt-painted vehicle parts:
Do not use polish or wax otherwise the paintwork can be damaged .
Never u se car-wash programmes that include wax coatings. This could spoil the matt finish .
Do not attach any stickers or magnet labels to matt-painted parts as these could damage the paintwork when they are removed.
@
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special wash bays. This prevents o il y wate r from getti n g into the p ub lic dra i ns.
Notes on cleaning and care
For cleaning and care of ind i v i dual components on the vehicle, please refer to the tables below. T hese are recommendat i ons only. If
Cl ea n i ng the e x ter i or
Component
Wiper blades
Headlight s/ r e ar light s
Sensors / camera lenses
Situation
Di rt/deposits
Dirt/depos i ts
Di rt/deposits you have special quest i ons or certa i n components are not li sted, please ask your qua li fied workshop. Please also refer to the notes ~ .& .
Remedy
Q page 64
Soft sponge wi t h mild detergenta>
Wheels
T a ilp i pe s
Orn a m e ntal trim / mould i ngs
Snow/
Road i sa ce l t
Brake dust
Road sa l t
Dirt/deposits
Sensors: soft cloth w i th solvent-free cleaning agent
Camera l enses: soft cloth with alcohol-free cleaning agent
Small brush/so l vent-free de-icer spray
Water
Acid free cleaning agent
Water; suitable sta i nless steel cleaning product if neee ss ary
Mild detergent a> ; suitable stainless steel cleaning product if necessary
206 Care of vehicle and cleaning
Component
Paintwork
Carbon parts
Decals
Situation
Paint damage
Fue l overflow
Remedy
Refer to the vehicle data sticker for the paint no. and touch up using a pa i nt pen ~ page 272
Rinse with water without de l ay
Surface rust Surface rust remover , apply wax afterwards ; contact your qualifie d workshop wi t h any questions
Have it removed by yo ur qualified workshop Corrosion
Water no longer pea r ls off cle an paintwork
Dirt/deposit s
Apply wax (at Least tw i ce a year)
Paint has lo st its Treat with a suitab l e polish; finish w i th wax coating if shine, g l oss cannot polish does not contain wax compounds be restored by waxing
Dirt/deposits Same tr e a t m e nt as pa i nted parts ~ 204
Soft sponge with mild detergent a> a) Mil d d eter g ent: n ot mo r e t han tw o t ablespo o ns o f p H -neu t ral d eter g e n t to o n e litre o f w ate r
Cleaning the interior
Component Situation Remedy
Windows
Ornamental trim/ mouldings
Dirt/deposits
Dirt/deposits
Glass cleaning agent, then
Mild detergenta ) wipe dry
Plastic parts
Displays
Seat belts
Dirt/deposits Damp cloth
Heavier dirt/deposMild deterge n ta > ; solvent-free p l astic clean i ng agent if its necessary
Dirt/depo s it s
Controls and disDirt/deposit s plays
Dirt/deposits
Soft clot h with LCD cleaner
Soft brush , then soft sponge with m il d deterg e nt al
Mild detergent a> (allow to dry before retracting)
Fabrics, leatherette,
Alcantara
Surface dirt Vacuum cleaner
Water-based stains , Absorbent cloth and mild dete r genta> e .
g . coffee, tea, b l ood, etc.
Fat-based stains, e.g. oil, make -u p, etc.
App l y mild with water detergent a >, dab off disso lv ed g r ease or col o u r part i cles with absorbent cloth; if necessary treat
-
Special dirt/stains , Special stain remover (dab off with absorbent fabric); if e.g. ballpoint pen, nece s sary treat with m il d detergen t 3
> na il varnish, disper s ion paint, shoe cream, etc .
Car e of vehicle and cleaning 207
Component Situation
Natur a l L a th e r Fresh d i rt/stains
C a r b o n p a rt s
C otton cl
Remedy oth with mild detergent a>
W ater based stains, Fresh stains : absorbent cloth e .
g . coffee, tea, Dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather blood , etc .
F a t-based stains, Fresh s t ains: absorbent cloth and s u i table stain r emov e r e .
g . oil. make up, for leather etc . Dried stains : grease removal spray
Special dirt/stains, Stain remover suitable for leather e .
g . ballpoint pen, nail varnish, dispersion paint, shoe cream, etc.
Care of vehicle Reg ul a rl y a p p l y l eat h er-care cream with u l tra-violet protectio n and im p regnating compound; if necessary use special colo u r leather cream
Di rt/deposits Same treatment as p l astic parts a ) Mil d d eter g en t : n o t mo r e t ha n two tab l e s poons of pH neutra l de t e r gen t t o on e li t re o f w a t e r
&
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. I n bad visibility conditions such as light rain, l o w sun or when driving at night these coatings can cause increased dazzle, which is a serious safety hazard. Such coatings can also cause the wiper blades to judder.
CD
CAUTION
Headli g hts /rear li ght s
N eve r clean the headligh t s/ r ear lights wi th a dry clot h o r spo n ge.
Do n ot u se clea ni ng age nt s co ntaining alco h o l. This cou l d cause t h e g l as s to crac k !
Wh ee l s
Do not use paint polish or other abra sive agents.
I f the protective paint coating on the wheel rim is scratched or damaged by stone chips etc .
, the damaged area should be touched up without delay.
Sen so r s/c am e ra l ense s
- Never remove snow and ice from t he camera lens using warm or hot water danger of cracks appearing on the lens.
N ever clean the camera l ens with cleaning agents which are abrasive or contain alcohol - danger of sc r atches and cracks appearing.
Wind o w s and w i n d scree n
- Remove snow and ice from windows and exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To avoid scratches, the sc r aper should only be pushed in one direction and not moved to a n d fro .
N ever use warm or hot water to re move snow and ice from w i ndows and mirrors. This could cause the g l ass to crack !
T o a v o id da m ag i n g t h e heat i n g el ement , d o no t p u t stickers on t h e i n n er si d e of t h e rear w i ndo w .
- Ornament a l trim / m o uldings
- Do not use chrome cleaning agents.
Paintwork
- The vehicle must be free of dirt and dust before applying polish/wax otherwise the paintwork may be dam a ged .
Do not polish/wax the vehicle in di r ect sunlight this can damage the paint!
- Do not attempt to polish out surface rust deposits this can damage the pa i nt! llJJ>
208 Care of vehicle and cleaning
- Displays
Displays must not be cleaned with a dry cloth - this can scratch the display!
Control consoles
Do not let any liquid get inside the control consoles - risk of damage!
Seat belts
Do not remove the seat be l ts to clean them .
Do not use chemical cleaning agents, corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp instruments to clean the seat belts or their components this can damage the belt webbing!
- If you find any damage to the belt webbing, the belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle. have the belt in question replaced by a qualified workshop.
Fabrics/leatherette/ Alcantara
- Do not use leather care products, solvents, wax pol i sh, shoe cream, stain removers, or any similar products on leatherette/ A l cantara fabrics .
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified workshop .
- Never use steam cleaners. brushes, hard sponges or sim il ar utensils.
- Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as zip fasteners, rivets or belts, can also damage the surface of the fabric.
- Please make sure you close any velcro fasteners, e.g. on your clothing, as these could otherwise damage the upholstery .
Natural leather
Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers, or any similar products on leather fabrics.
Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as zip fasteners, rivets or belts, can also damage the surface of the fabric.
Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges or similar utensils.
Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best to cover the l eather.
©
Note
- It is much easier to remove dead insects if the car has been waxed recently.
Regular waxing can help protect against surface rust .
Checking and topping up fluids
Fuel
Petrol grade
Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the fuel tonk flop.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter and must only be run on unleaded petrol. T he petrol must comply w i th the EN 228 or DI N 51626-1 standard and must be sulphur-free . You can fue l your vehicle with fuels containing a maximum of 10% ethanol (El O ) .
The petro l grades h ave different octane ratings (RON).
The following headings re l ate to the sticker on the inside of your vehicle's tank flap:
Unleaded fuel only RON / ROZ 95 Super,
Prem i um or min . RON / ROZ 91 Normal
The use of premium petrol (95 RON) is recommended. If that type of fuel is not available, regular petrol (RON 91) can be used with a slight loss of power .
Unleaded fuel only , min . RON / ROZ 95
Super, Premium
Premium petrol (at least 95 RON) must be used.
If prem i um petro l is not available, the engine can be run on regular petrol with 91 RO N as a n
emergency measu
r
e.
In this case on l y use moderate engine speeds and a light t h rottle.
F i ll up with premium or Super Plus petrol as soon as possible .
Unleaded fuel only RON / ROZ 98 Super
Plus or min . RON / ROZ 95 Super, Premium
The use of Super Plus petrol (98 RON) is rec ommended . If that type of fuel is not availa ble , premium petrol (RON 95) can be used with a slight loss of power .
If premium petrol is not available, the engine can be run on regular petrol with 91 RON as an
emergency measure
. In this case only use
Checking and topping up fluids 209 moderate engine speeds and a light throttle.
Fill up with premium or Super Plus petrol as soon as possible.
CD
CAUTION
Do NOT fuel your vehicle with high-ethanol fuel blends (e.g. E50 or E85). This will damage the fuel system.
Just one tank of leaded fuel or fuel with metallic additives will permanently impair the efficiency of the catalytic cornverter.
You should use only petrol additives which have been approved by Audi. Addit i ves with so-called octane boosters or antiknock add i tives can contain me t a ll ic add i tives that cause significant damage to the engine and the catalytic converter.
Do not use such additives.
- Metal-based fuels, which can be identified from the marking on the fuel dispenser, must not be used. LRP fuel ( l ead replacement petrol) also contains high concentrations of metallic additive. Risk of engine damage!
- H igh engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
(D
Note
You can use higher octane fuel than your engine requires.
I n countries where s ul phur-free fuel is not avai l ab l e, you may use low-sulphur fuel instead.
Diesel fuel
Applies to vehicles. wit h diese l engine
Please note the information on the inside of the fuel tonk flop.
The use of s ulphur-free d ie sel to EN 590 (in
Germany : EN 590 or DIN 51628) is recommended. If that type of fuel is unavailable, d i esel to EN 590 can be used. It must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane ""'
210 Checking and topping up fluids number indicates the ignition quality of the d i esel fuel.
Winter grade diesel
Diese l fuel can thicken in winter. For this reason petrol stations in some countries also offer winter diesel.
CD
CAUTION
The vehicle is not designed for the use of biodiesel (FAME fuel) . The fue l system would be damaged if you used biodiesel.
Do not mix fuel additives ("thinners", petro l or similar additives) with the diese l fuel.
- If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be necessary to have the water separator 1> on the fuel filter drained more fre quently than is specified in the Service
Schedule. This helps to prevent potential engine faults c.=> poge 24.
@
For the sake of the environment
Never pour fuel down drains or i nto the ground.
Filling the tank
Procedure for filling the tank
Fig. 215 Veh icl e as seen fro m the rear right : Openlng the fuel tan k flap
Fig . 216 Fuel tank flap with t a nk cap attached
When refuelling with natural gas, please note the addit i onal information and warnings r:::> page 104.
The flap that covers the tank cap is un l ocked and tocked automat i cally by the centra l tocking .
Unscrewing the tank cap
"" Press the left side of the flap to open it
-arrowr:::>F ig . 215.
"" Unscrew the tank cap anti clockwise .
""H ook the cap onto the open flap ¢ Fig. 216 .
Closing the tank cap
"" Screw on the tank cap clockwise until it clicks audibly.
"" Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it click into place.
When the automat ic fi l ler nozzle is operated correctly it will sw i tch itself off as soon as the tank is "fu ll ". Do not try to put in more fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fi ll the expansion chamber in the fuel tank .
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the in s ide of the tank fLap. Further notes on fuel ¢ page 209 .
The tank capacity of your vehicle is given in the Technical data section ¢page 2 73.
_&.
WARNING
Fuel is highly inflammable and can cause serious burns and other injur i es. l )
Th i s e quipment i s not availab l e o n all export versions .
- For safety reasons always switch off the auxiliary heating" before refuelling the vehicle .
When filling your tank or a spare fuel canister with fuel, do not smoke and keep away from naked flames. Risk of explosion!
Observe all relevant statutory regulations on using, storing and transporting spare fuel canisters.
- For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. The canister could become damaged in an accident and L
- If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel can i ster, please observe the following warnings:
N ever fi ll fuel In t o the spare fuel canister with the canister placed in or on top of the vehicle. A n electrostatic charge could build up d u ring filling, causing the fuel vapour to ignite. Danger of explosion. Always p lace the canister on the ground to fill it .
- Insert the filler nozzle as far as possible into the spare fuel canister .
If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filler nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling .
This helps preve n t an electrostatic charge building up.
- Make sure you never spill fuel in the vehicle or In the luggage compartment.
Fue l vapour is exp l osive . Risk of fatal accident!
CD
CAUTION
- If any fuel i s spilt onto the vehicle, it should be removed immediately as it could otherwise damage the paintwork.
- Never run the tank completely dry. If there is an irregular fuel supply, misfiring can occur. As a result unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and cause damage to the catalytic converter(s).
Checking and topping up fluids 211
When filling the fuel tank after having r u n it completely dry on a vehicle with a d ie s el engine the Ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds without starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may take longer t h an normal (up to one minute) for the engine to start firing . This is because air needs to be bled from the fuel system while starting.
@
For the sake of the environment
Do not overfill the fuel tank this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
@
Note
Diese l vehicles are equipped with an i n correct fuelling protection system ll . This system ensures that the tank can only be fuelled from a diesel filler nozzle.
If the filler nozzle is old, damaged or too small, it may not be able to open the protection mechanism on the fuel tank.
I n this case, try turning the filler nozzle before inserting it in the fuel filler neck, use a different filling pump or seek professional assistance .
- The protection mechanism will not open if you try to add fuel from a reserve canister . You can get round this simply by adding the diesel fuel slowly .
1l May va r y In diff ere n t coun t ries
212 Checking and topping up fluids
Releasing the tank flap manually
The tonk flop con be rel eas ed ma nu ally if the c entral locking system s hould foil to o perate .
Fig. 2 17 L uggage compartment ( r ea r ri g h t ) : Manual r el e a se (example )
The manual re l ease mechanism is l ocated i n the s ide trim on the right of the luggage comp a rtment.
" R e move the cover in the si de tr i m .
" Relea s e the r i ng from i ts ho l d e r and carefu l ly pull the ring arrowq (D. T he tank flap is then released .
" Press the left side of the tank flap to open it
Q page 210, F ig. 215.
CD
CAUTION
Pull the ring on l y until you feel resistance; otherwise you may damage the manual release mechanism (you cannot hear it releasing the tank flap) .
Bonnet
Working on components in the engine compartment
Extra caution is necessary when working on c omponents in the engine compartment.
Alw a ys be aware of the danger of injury and scalding as well as the ri s k of accident or fire when working in the engine c ompartment
(e .
g . when checking and refilling fluid s}. Always observe the warnings listed below and follow all normal safety pre c aution s . The engine compartment of any motor vehicle i s a potenti a lly hazardous area q
&
.
A
WARNING
Switch off the engine.
- Remove the ignition key .
Apply the parking brake.
On vehicles w i th manua l gearbox place the gear l ever in n eutra l , o n ve h icles with automatic gearbox move the selector lever to position P.
Wa i t for the engine to cool down .
- Keep children away from engine compartment.
- Never spill fluids on a hot engine . These fluids can cause a fire (e.g. rad i ator anti freeze).
Ta k e care not to cause short circu i ts In the electrical system, especially when working on the battery.
When working in the engine compart ment be aware that the radiator fa n may start running suddenly, even if the igni tion i s switched off - risk of injury.
Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is unde r pressu r e.
Protect face, hands a nd arms by covering the cap with a large, thick r ag to protect against escaping coo l ant and steam.
Never remove the engine cover pa n el ri s k of burn s !
If any te s ts have to be performed with the engine running, there is an extra safety ri s k from the rotating parts, such as the drive be lt s, alternator and radiator fan, etc., a n d fro m t he h i gh-voltage ign i tion system.
Observe the following additional warnings if work on the fuel system or the electrical system is necessary:
Always disconnect the battery
Do not smoke
- Never work near open flame s
Always keep an approved fire extinguisher immediate ly a v ailab l e.
CD
CAUTION
When topping up f l uids make sure the correct flu i d i s put i nto the correct filler opening. This can otherwise cause serious malfunctions or engine damage.
@
For the sake of the environment
Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle regularly so that any leaks are detected at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in the workshop.
@
Note
On right-hand drive vehicles* some of the containers I reservoirs mentioned below are located on the other side of the engine compartment.
Opening the bonnet
The
bonnet is released from inside the vehi-
cle.
Fig. 218 Detail offootwell on driver's side : Release lever
Checking and topping up flu ids 213
Th e wiper arms shou l d be res t ing on the w i ndscreen: make sure they are not in a raised positio n. Otherwise the paint may get damaged.
The bonnet can be released only when the driver's door is open.
• Pull the lever under the dashboard in the direction indicated (arrow) r::!;>
Fig. 218.
• Lift the bonnet slightly r::!;>
.&, .
• Press the release catch under the bonnet upwards ¢fig . 219. This will release the arrester hook.
• Open the bonnet.
_& WARNING
To avoid the risk of being scalded, never open the bonnet if you see steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before opening the bonnet.
I
Closing the bonnet
• To close the bonnet, pull it down to overcome the spring pressure .
• Then let it drop into the catches;
do not press down
¢
.&, .
_& WARNING
For safety reasons t he bonnet must al ways be co mpletely closed when the vehicle is moving. After closing it always c he ck that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be fl u sh with the adjacent body panels .
Should you notice that the bonnet is not safely secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet proper l y, otherwise it
could cause an accident.
Fig. 219 Release catch under the bonnet
214 Checking and topping up fluids
Engine compartment layout
Main components for checking and refilling
T ypical loca t ions of fluid c o n ta i ners, engine o i l d i psti'ck an .
d eng in e oi l filler cap
@ Coolant expansion tank ( L) .
. .
@ Engine oil dipstick* .......
.
. .
@ Eng i ne oil filler cap (<t::r.) .
.
.. .
©
Brake fluid reservoir (0)) ..
.
. .
®
Battery(+) beneath a cover .
. .
@ Earth point on body( )
0
Windscreen washer container
(<$) .
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..........
. .
@ Fuse box ...
.
...
.
....
.
.
.
.
.
. .
221
250
The positions of the engine oil filler cap and the oil dipstick (items @ and @ ~ Fig . 220) may be different on some engine versions.
217
215
216
218
219
If you have to top up the oil between oil changes, use the grades of oil specified in the table in accordance with VW standards . You will need to know whether
- the vehicle is be i ng serv i ced based on the flexible or fixed oil change service (see last service record in Service Schedule) .
the vehicle has a petrol or diesel engine (see sticker on inside of fuel tank flap).
- a diesel particulate filter is fitted on the vehicle (see Delivery Inspection section of
Service Schedule) . .,...
Engine oil
Choos
i
ng the correct engine oil grade
The s ervice interval di s play in the instrument cluster of your vehicle will inform you when it is time for an oil change. We recommend having the oil changed by a qualified workshop .
Checking and topping up fluids 215
Checking the oil l evel
Petrol engine
Oil Change
Service ( flexlble )
VWS0400
Oil change service (fixed)
Diesel engine
VW507 00
VWS0200
Alternatively: vw
504
ooa>
With diesel particulate filter:
VW507 00
Without diesel particulate filter: vw 505 01
A l ternatively:
vw
507
oob>
a > Wh e n u s ing fuel complying wi t h E N 22 8 or b )
DIN 5 1 6 26 · 1
Wh e n usi ng fu e l co mplying wi t h E N 590 or
DIN 5 1 6 28
(0
Note
If the oil grades specified in the table are not available, you can use one of the fol· lowing grades as a substitute. To prevent damage to the engi n e, this should not be done more than once between oil changes and no more than 0 .5 litres should be used.
Petrol engines: ACEA A3 or API SN
(API SM) standard
Diesel engines: ACEA C3 or API CJ· 4 standard
(D
Note
For China : Only oi l comp l ying with VW standard 502 00 w ith viscosity
SAE SW-40 may be used on vehicles with a petrol eng i ne.
The flexible oil change service is not available in all countries.
Fig . 221 Guide for oi l dipsti c k
Checking oil level
.... Park your vehicle on a level surface.
.... Allow the warm engine to run briefly at id lin g speed and then switch off the ignition.
.... W ait approx . two minutes .
.... Pull out the d i pstick . Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go .
.... Then pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level ~ Fig. 221. If the oil level is too low, add more engine oil ~ 216.
Oil level in area
G)
.... Do not top up oil.
Oil level in area @
.... Oil can be topped up. After topping up the oil level should be in area (!) .
Oil level in area
0
.... Oil must be topped up. After topping up the oil l evel should be in area <!) .
Dep end ing on how you drive and the condi· tions in which the car is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 ltr./1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5000 km. For this reason the engine oil level mus t be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a jo u rney .
216 Che c king and topping up fluids
Topping up th e engine oil ~
Fi g. 222 Engine compartment : Engine oil filler cap
... Switch off the engine.
...
Unscrew
cap
"t!:;r1 from oil filler opening
<:> Fig. 222, <:> page 214, Fig . 220.
... Carefu l ly add 0.5 litres of
suitable
oil
~ page214 .
... After two minutes
chec k
the o i
l
level once again ~ page 215, Checking the oil level.
... Top up with oil
if ne cessary.
... Replace the oil filler
cap carefu lly
and push the
dipstick all
the way
in.
A
WARNING
- Ensure that no oil comes
into
contact with hot engine components when topping up: this
could cause
a fire.
-
Wash your
skin
thoroughly if it comes in to contact with engine oil.
-
CD
CAUTION
-
The oil level must never be above area
(!) ,as this may result in damage to the catalytic converter or to the engine. Contact a qualified
workshop
to extract the engine oil
if
necessary.
-
No
add i tives should be used with engine oil. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty.
@
For the sake of the environment
Never
pour oil down drains or
into
the ground .
-
Always
observe statutory
requirements when disposing of empty oil canisters.
Cooling system
Coolant
The
engine
cooling system is
filled
at
the
fac-
tory with
a mixture of conditioned water and
coolant
additive
.
This coolant must
not be changed.
The coolant level
is monitored
by a warning lamp in the
instrument
cluster ~
However, we recommend that
it
should be checked occasionally
.
If
you do need to top up the
coo lant,
use a
mixture
of water and
coolant
additive.
We
recommend mixing coolant additive with distill ed water.
Coolant additive
Th e
coolant
add itive
contains
ant i-free ze
and corrosion protection
agent.
Only use one of the following
coolant addi tives .
It
is
possible to mix these
additives.
Coolant additive Specification
G12++
G13
TL
774 G
TL
774)
Only if the above grades are not availa -
TL 774 F
ble:
G12+
The amount of
coolant additive
which needs to be mixed with the water depends on the temperatures
to
be
expected
in the winter season.
If
the anti-freeze concentration is too low, the coolant can freeze and cause eng i
ne
damage.
Coolant addi- Frost protectlve tlon
Countries min . 40
%,
min.
-25 °C
with warm max. 45
% climate
Countries
min
.
SO%,
with
cold climax. 60 % max
.
-40 °C mate
CD
CAUTION
- Have your qualified workshop check the cooling system before the winter season to make sure that the anti-free z e concentrat i on is adequate for the conditions to be expected. This applies particularly if you drive into a colder climate zone .
To prevent damage to the engine, do not use a different type of anti-freeze additive if the approved type of additive is not available. In t his case use only water and br i ng the coo l ant concentration back up to the correct L ble by putting in tlhe specified additive.
- Always top up with fresh, unused coolant.
Radiator sealants must not be added to the coolant.
Topping up coolant
Fig . 223 E ngin e compart men t: M arkings on coolant expansio n ta nk
Checking c o o lant l ev el
,.. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
,.. Switch off the ignit i on .
,.. Read off the coolant level on the coolant expansion tank c::> Fig. 223. When the engine is co l d, the coolant level should be between the marks. When the engine is warm, it may be slight ly above the top mark.
Topping up coolant
Important: The coolant expansion tank must not be empty c::> (D .
,.. Wait for the engine to coo l down.
Checking and topping up flu ids 21 7
,.. Cover the cap on t he expans i on tank with a cloth, and carefu ll y unscrew the cap anticlockwise c::>
.&.
.
... Add coo l ant in the correct concentration c::> page 216 up to the top mark .
... You should make s ure that the fluid l evel re mains stable. If necessary, add more coo lant.
.,. Screw the cap on again tightly .
Any ~oss of coolant normally indicates a leak in the coo li ng system. Drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the cooling system checked . If there are no leaks in the system, a loss of coolant can only occur if the coolant bo il s and is forced out of the system as a result of overheating.
A
WARNING
The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot: you could be scalded by escaping steam .
The coolant and coolant additive can be a health hazard. Store the coolant additive in the original container in a safe place out of reach of ch i ldren risk of poisoning.
When working in the engine compartment be aware that the radiator fan may start running suddenly, even if the igni tion i s sw i tched off risk of injury .
Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is empty . Air could have got into the coo li ng system - risk of engine damage! In this case, do NOT drive on. You should obtain professional assistance.
218 Checking and topping up fluids
Brake fluid
Fig. 22 4 Engine compartment : Markings on brake fluid reservoir
Checking brake fluid Level
The brake fluid L eve~ must be between the
MI N and MAX ma r ks r:::> page 214, Fig. 220.
If the level goes down noticeably in a s hort time, or drops below the MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake system . You should obtain professional assistance. The brake fluid level is also monitored by a warning lamp in the instrument cluster r:::> page 19 .
In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid reservoir Is on the other side of the engine compartment .
Changing brake fluid
Your vehicle's Service Schedule will tell you the regular int ervals at which the brake fluid is due for renewal. W e recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a qualified workshop during a service.
.&.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous; it must be stored in the sealed original container in a safe place out of the reach of children.
Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour Lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too Long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the car risk of accident .
CD
CAUTION
Brake fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the vehicle's body, otherwise it will attack t he paintwork.
Battery
General notes
All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge .
The battery is located in the engine compartment and is almost maintenance-free . It is checked as part of the Inspection Service .
Disconne c ting the battery
The battery should always be left connected.
If the battery is disconnected, some of the vehicle's functions will become inoperative (e .
g. electric windows) . These functions will require resett i ng after the battery is reconnected . For this reason, the battery should only be disconnected from the vehicle's electrical system when absolutely necessary.
Function Resetting
One-touch function c> page 52, What to do of the electric winafter a malfunction dows
Remote control key If the vehicle does not or r espond to the key, the convenience key key will have to be synchroni sed r:::> page44
Digital clock r:::> page 9
ESC indicator lamp The indicator lamp will go out after driving a few yards
If the vehicl e is not used for long periods
If you do not drive yo u r vehicle for a period of several days or weeks, the power management will gradually shut off t he on-board systems one by one, or reduce the amount of current they are using. This limits the amount of power consumed and helps to ensure reliable starting even after a long period
Q page 187.
Certain convenience features, such as remote control unlocking, may not be ava i lable. These funct i ons w ill be resto r ed when you s witch on the ignition and start the engine. Even though some systems are deactivated automatically, certain electrical equipment continues to
1JJo>
draw current even when the ignition is off. If the vehicle is left standing for long periods, this can result in tota l battery discharge. If the battery is allowed to discharge completely, an internal chemical reaction destroys the battery . To avoid this, the battery should be recharged at least once a month
IQ page 220 .
Do not disconnect the battery; otherwise the anti-theft alarm system• will be out of operation.
Winter cond i ti o n s
Cold weather is very hard on the battery . The starting capacity may be reduced as a result.
For this reason, have the battery checked and charged if necessary before the start of winter.
&.
WARNING
All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. For queries regarding the vehicle battery please seek the assistance of a qualified workshop - risk of chemical burns I risk of explosion!
- The battery must not be opened. Do not attempt to make any changes to the electrolyte level o f the battery. Otherwise, there is a ris k that a mixture of oxygen and hydrogen gas can accumulate and cause an explosion.
Important safety warnings for handling a car battery
All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge.
®
Wear safety glasses!
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. ~ glasses .
Keep open flames, sparks, uncovered
@ lights and lit cigarettes away from the battery!
Checking and topping up fluids 219
A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the battery is under charge!
'V!!Y and battery acid.
A
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical system.
Wear safety glasses. Do not allow acid or lead particles to come into contact with eyes, skin or clothing.
- '
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. W ear protective gloves and safety glasses. Do not tilt the battery - ac i d can leak out of the vapour vent . If splash into the eyes rinse at once for several minutes using clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin or clothing with soap solution, and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately.
- Keep open flames, sparks, uncovered lights and lit cigarettes away from battery. Avoid sparks (including those from static charges) when handling cables and electrical equipment. Never cross the battery poles. The resulting high-energy sparks can cause injury.
A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the battery is under c h arge. Only charge battery in a well ventilated area.
Keep ch i ldren away from the battery and battery acid.
Switch off all electrical equipment before starting any work on the vehicle electrical system. Remove the ignition key. The minus cable of the battery must be disconnected . When changing a light bulb, it is sufficient to only turn off the light . ....
220 Checking and topping up fluids
Before disconnecting the battery, turn off the anti-theft alarm system*! Otherwise the alarm will be triggered .
When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle's electrical system, first disconnect the minus cable and then the plus cable.
Before reconnecting the battery, turn off all electrical equipment. First connect the plus cable, then the minus cable . The battery cables must NOT be connected to the wrong battery poles - this can cause an electrical f ir e.
Never charge a frozen or thawed out battery - risk of exp l osion and chemical burns! A battery must be replaced once it has frozen. When it is discharged the battery can freeze at temperatures around 0°C.
Make sure that tlhe vapour hose is always attached to the battery.
Never use a damaged battery- risk of explosion! Replace a damaged battery im mediately .
CD
CAUTION
Never disconnect the car's battery with the engine running or with the ignition turned on, otherwise the electrical system or e l ectrical. components will be damaged .
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period oftime, as the intense ultraviolet radiation can affect the battery housing .
If the car is left standing for long periods, protect the battery from frost. The battery will be destroyed if it is allowed to freeze c::>
page 220
.
Charging the battery
Terminals for charging the battery are fitted in the engine comportment.
Fi g. 225 Eng i ne compartment: Termina l s for jump leads and battery c harger
... Note the warnings c::>
&.
in Important safety warnings for handling a car battery on page 219
and c::>
&,
.
... Switch off all electrical equipment . Remove the ignition key.
... Open the bonnet c::>
page 213.
"" Open the battery cover.
... Connect the charger cables to the positive battery terminal(+) and the earth point on the body ( -) (not the negative terminal on the battery) as specified .
... Now connect the battery charger to the mains and switch on.
... After charging the battery: switch off the battery charger and disconnect the mains cable .
... Now disconnect the charger cables .
... Fold the cover back onto the battery in its correct position.
... Close the bonnet c::>
page 213.
When it is discharged the battery can freeze at temperatures around 0°C. You must not use a battery which has frozen, even after it has thawed, because the ice may have cracked the battery casing and allowed the battery acid to escape c::>
&
.
Charging the battery
Only u s e battery chargers with a maximum charge voltage of 14 .8 V (the battery cables do not have to be disconnected). The battery must not be opened while you are charging it . ""
Important: Before you charge the battery make sure you read the manufacturer's in struction s for u si ng the battery charger.
&.
WARNING
Always replace a frozen battery. Never recharge it - risk of explosion! i Note
Use only the terminals in the engine compartment to charge the battery.
Replacing the battery
A
replacement battery must have the same specifications as the original equipment battery
.
Your vehicle is equipped w i th an intelligent power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy
Q
page 187
. The power management function ensures that the battery is charged much more efficiently than on vehicles without a power management system . For this addit i onal power to be available after replacing the battery, we recommend that the replacement battery used is of the same make and type as the original-equipment battery . After changing the battery, the power management system must be initialised by a qualified workshop to ensure that the replacement battery is charged to an optimum level.
A rep l acement battery must have the same capacity, vo l tage (12 V ) and current rating. It must also have the same dimensions as the original, factory-fitted battery and have sealed caps. The battery must comply with the standards TL 825 06 (dated April 2008 or later) and VW 7 50 73 (April 2010 or later) .
CD
CAUTION
Vehicles with e.g
. start/stop system• or auxiliary heating/ventilation• are equipped with a special deep cycle battery
(e .
g. AGM type) . T h e on-board electronic systems may develop problems if you fit a different type of battery. For this rea-
Checking and topping up fluids 221 son, if you need to replace the vehicle battery, make sure that the specifications of the new battery match the original exactly.
Make sure that the vent hose is always attached to the original opening on the side of the battery . Gases or battery acid can otherwise escape and possibly cause damage .
- The battery holder and clamps must always be correctly secured.
Before starting any work on the batt.ery, always observe the warn i ngs listed under
G
page 219, Important safety warn;ngs for handling a car battery.
@
For the sake of the environment
~Batteries contain toxic substances including sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of appropriately and must not be put together with ordinary household waste. Make sure the battery removed from the vehicle cannot tip over. Otherwise, sulphuric acid could escape.
Windscreen washer
Fig. 226 Engine compartment : Cap of windscreen washer container
The container for the windscreen washe r {!) contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen, the rear window and the headlight washer system"
Q
page 214
,
F
i
g
.
220.
Container capacity Q
page 273
.
Clean water should be used when topp i ng up.
If possible, use soft water to prevent scaling on the washer jets. Always add washer fluid to the water (with ant ifreeze additive in winter) . ..,.
222 Checking and topping up fluid s
CD
CAUTION
Never put in rad i ator ant i -freeze or other additives.
Never use washer fluid which contains paint thinners or solvents as i t can damage the paintwo r k.
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
... When driving with new tyres , be especially careful during the first 500 km.
... If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.
... Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove any foreign bodies embedded in the treads .
... Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately .
.,. Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
... Replace any m i ss i ng va l ve caps as soon as possible.
... Mark the wheels before taking them off so that they rotate in the same direction when put back .
.,. When removed, the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
New tyres
New tyres do not give maximum grip straight away and should therefore be "run in" by driving carefully and at moderate speeds for about the first 500 km. This will also help to make the tyres last longer .
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and r ims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one s i de , this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged . Reduce speed immediately if there is any reason to suspect that damage may have occurred . Inspect the tyres for damage . If no external damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the car inspected .
Wheel s and tyres 223
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An a rr ow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres w i th directional tread. Always note the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear .
Wheels with bolted rim flange•
Ligh t -alloy wheels with a bolted rim flange consist of several components. A specia l technique is applied to bolt these compone n ts together. Apart from safety and t rue running th i s also ensures that the wheel functiorns cor rect l y and that there is no l eakage. Damaged rims m u st therefore be rep l aced; you must never attempt to repa i r or dismantle them c:)
.&. .
Wheels with bolted trim parts•
Light-alloy wheels can be fitted with interchangeable trim parts which are attached to the rim using self-locking bolts . Should you wish to replace damaged trim parts please contact
a
qualified workshop .
Retrofitting accessories
Qualified workshops have full information on the technical requirements when installing or changing tyres, rims or wheel trims.
_A
WARNING
N ever remove the bo l ts on a whee l with bolted r im f l ange* (accident r i sk).
CD
CAUTION
Please note that summe r and winter tyres are optimised for the prevailing road conditions at different times of yeaf. We fecommend that you use w i n t er tyres during the winter months. At low temperatures, summer tyres lose their elasticity and grip, and braking performance also suffers as a result. Cracks can form in the tread block on summer tyres if they are used at very cold temperat u res, and this can cause permanent damage to the tyres . An increase in
-
224 Wheels and tyres rolling noise and tyre Imbalance may result from this damage. Audi cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage .
Machined, polished or chrome-plated rims must not be used during the winter months. The process used to manufacture these types of wheel rim does not provide adequate surface protection against corrosion, and the rims can be permanently damaged by road salt or similar. There is no guarantee or warranty entitlement In such cases.
Tyre service l ife
Correct inflation pre s sures and sensible driving habits will increase the service life of your tyres.
Fig. 227 Open dr i ver 's do or ( LHD v e h i cle ): Sticker listi ng tyre pre ss ure s
• Check the tyre pre ss ure s at least once a month and, i n addition, before starting a long journey.
• The tyre pressures should only be chec k ed when the tyres are cold. The slig h t l y raised pressures of warm tyres m u st not be reduced .
• The pressures must be altered accord i ngly if you are transporti n g a heavy load or driving at high speeds.
• On vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system , store the new tyre pressures
Q page 231 .
• Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
• Inspect the tyres for i rregular wear from time to time .
T he service life of your tyres depends on the fol l owing factors :
Tyre pressure
The tyre inflation pressures are li s ted on a sticker on the end face of the driver's door
Q Fig. 227 .
Under inflation or over-inflation will reduce the life of the tyres considerably and also impair the car's handling . Correct inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds .
If you prefer an extra smooth ride and the vehicle is not fu ll y l oaded, you can se l ect the tyre pressure for a norma l load (no more than three people trave llin g in the vehicle). Shou ld you wish to drive with a full l oad, you must increase the tyre pressure to the specified maximum.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according to the load the vehicle is carrying. We r ecommend adhering to the tyre pressure specifications for a maximum load .
Remember to check the pressure of the compact temporary spare wheel*.
On vehicles with wheel covers, valve extensions are fitted instead of dust caps. It is not necessary to remove the valve extensions when checking and adjusting tyre pressures.
Driving habits
Fast cornering, heavy acce l erat i on and hard braking (sq u ealing tyres) all increase tyre wear.
Wheel balancing
T he wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However, various factors encountered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results in steering vibration .
Un b alanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause exce s sive wear on steering, suspension and tyres . A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle.
If you notice excessive tyre wear, you should have the wheel alignment checked by a qualified workshop .
_A
WARNING
-Always adjust the tyre pressures to match your driving style .
Under-inflated tyres flex more and can overheat when carrying heavy loads or driv i ng at high speeds. This can cause t r ead separation and tyre b l ow-out, wh i ch could result in an accident.
@
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase the fue l consumption.
Tread wear indicators
The tread wear indicators show the condition of the tyre treads.
Wheel s and tyres 225
_A
WARNING
To avoid putting safety at risk, the tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators.
- Especially in difficult driving conditions such as wet or icy roads, it is important that the tyres have sufficient tread depth. The tread depth should be the same on the tyres of both the front a nd the rear axles.
The decrease in driving safety due to insufficient tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle handling, when there is a
ris k of aquaplan i ng in deep puddles of water and when driving through corners.
Braking is also adversely affected.
The speed has to be adapted accordi n gly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control over the vehicle .
Changing wheels round
Fi g. 228 Tyre tread : Tread wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have
1.6 mm high "tread wear indicators" running across the tread. Depending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of them spaced at equal distances around the tyre. Markings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters "TWI" or a triangle) indicate the positions of the tread wear indicators .
The minimum tread depth required by law in
Germany is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators).
Different figures may apply in other countries.
Fig. 2 29 Chang i ng wheels round
To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres the wheels should be changed round from time to t i me accord i ng to the system q
Fig. 229. All the tyres will then last for abo u t the same time.
Replacing wheels and tyres
It is important to use the correct wheels and tyres when replacement is necessary
.
~ All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and preferably the same tread pattern . ~
226 Wheels and tyres
... If possible, tyres should be r eplaced at leas t in pairs and not i ndividually (i.e. both fro n t tyres or both rear tyres together) .
... Never use tyres whose actual size exceeds t h e d i mensions of the factory-approved makes of t yre .
... If you wish to fit t h e veh i cle w i th non-standard ri m s or tyr e s, i t is advisable to consul t a qu a lifie d w or ksho p before purc ha s in g.
The ty re s a nd wheel rims are a n essential part o f t he vehicle ' s design . The ty r es a n d rims ap proved by A u di a r e specia ll y matched to t he cha r acteristi c s of the ve h icle and ma k e a major contrib u tion to g ood r oad hold i ng and safe h a n dling
&
.
The s i zes of the rim s and tyres approved for your ve h icle are listed in the vehicle's document s (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or
COC document ll). The vehicle docume n ts vary depending on t h e country in which the ve h icle is registered .
Unde r s t andi ng t he tyre d es i gn at ions m a kes i t eas i e r t o c hoose t he corre ct t yres . T he follow in g des i gnations ar e ma r ked on the tyre s i dewall, for exam p le:
20S I SS R 16 91 W
This contains the fo ll ow i ng i nformat i on:
20S Ty r e width in mm
SS Height/width rat i o in %
R Letter R for radia l
1 6 Rim d i ameter i n inches
91 Load rati n g code w
S p eed r at ing cod e letter
The manufacturing date i s al s o i ndicated on th e ty r e s i dewa ll (poss i bly only o n the inn e r
side
of
t
h
e whee
l
):
DOT ..
. 4113 .
.
. means, for examp l e, that the tyre was prod u ced in the 41st week of 2013.
Please note that with s ome types of tyre , the actual tyre size can differ from the nominal size marked on the tyre (for instan c e 205/SS
R 16 91 W), and there may be significant differences in the contours of the tyres, even though the tyres are marked with the same nominal size designation. When replacing the tyres, it is therefore important to make sure that the actual size of the new tyres does not exceed the dimensions of th , e factory-approved makes of tyre.
Failure to observe this requirement can affect the clearance needed for the tyres. This could re s ult in contact between the tyres and suspension component s or bodywork. The brake lines could also be damaged and the vehicle ' s safety could be severely impaired
.&.
.
If you use tyres that are approved by Audi you can be sure that the actual tyre dimensions will be correct for your vehicle . If decide to fit a different type of tyre, you must obtain the appropriate manufacturer's certificate from the tyre retailer to confirm that the tyres are suitable for your ve lh icle.
Keep this certificate in a safe place.
A qualified workshop will be able to advise you on which tyres may be fitted to your vehicle .
On vehicles with four-wheel drive , a ll four ty re s must always be fitted with tyres of t h e same type, make and tread pattern, as otherwise t he driveli n e can be damaged by co n tinuo u s var i at i ons in t he whee l speeds . In the event o f a punc tu re, you m ay use th e fa cto rys up plied co m pact t e mp o r ary sp ar e whee l for a s ho r t t i me. R efit t he no rm al roa d whee l a s soo n a s p ossi bl e .
It i s best to have al l servicing of whee l s and tyr e s performed by a qualified works h op. They have the necessary special tools and replacement parts, tra i ned personnel and fa d li ties for disposing of the old ty r es . "" l )
COC =c e r t i ficat e of confo rmi ty
A
WARNING
It is very important to ensure that the tyres you have chosen have adequate clearance. When selecting replacement tyres, do not rely entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on the tyre; with some makes of tyre the effective tyre size can differ significantly from the nominal dimensions, even though the tyres have the same size designation. Inadequate tyre clearance can result in damage t o the tyres or the vehicle, causing a serious safety risk. It may also invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
Avoid running the car on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all times.
Run-flat tyres may only be used on vehicles which were originally equipped with run-flat tyres. The vehicle must have a suitable suspension system and a factory-fitted tyre pressure loss indicator which indicates a loss of tyre pressure.
The unauthorised use of run-flat tyres can cause an accident or damage your vehicle. Please ask a qualified workshop whether run-flat tyres can be used on your vehicle. When using run·flat tyres, it is important that all four wheels have run-flat characteristics. Do not fit normal tyres in comb i nation with run-flat tyres!
If wheel trims are fitted after the car is purchased, ensure that there is an adequate flow of air for cooling the b r akes.
@
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be d i sposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
(D
Note
- Tyres with the marking "AO" or "RO" are specially matched to your Audi. We recommend that you use these tyres only.
When used as intended, they meet the highest standards in safety and vehicle
Wheel s and tyres 227 handling. Your specialist retailer will be glad to provide more information.
Never mount used tyres if you are not sure of their previous history.
- For technical reasons it is not normally possible to use wheel rims from other vehicles. In some cases this also applies to rims from other vehicles of the same model.
Wheel bolts
The wheel bolts are designed to suit the rims on your car.
T he wheel bolt s are matched to the rims.
When install i ng different wheels (for instance alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is important to use the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt hea d s . This is essential for the secure fit of the wheels and for the proper function of the brake system.
A qualified workshop will have full information on the technical requirements when installing or changing tyres, rims or wheel trims.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily.
A special adapter Is required to turn the antitheft wheel bolts*
page 239.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres
will
significantly improve the car's handling in winter road conditions.
... Winter tyres must be fitted on all fou r wheels.
... Only use winter tyres of the correct type approved for your vehicle .
... Please note that the maximum permissible speed for winter tyres may be lower than for summer tyres.
... Also note that winter tyres are no longer effective when the tr ea d is worn down .
... After fitting the wheels you must always check the tyre pressures. The correct tyre .,.
228 Wheels and tyres pressures are listed on a sticker wh i ch can be seen when you open the driver's door c:) page 224.
In winter road conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the car's handling. Due to their type of construction (width, rubber compound, tread pattern), summer tyres give less grip on ice and snow . This applies particularly to vehicles equipped with wide section tyres or high speed tyres (code letters H , V or
Yon the sidewall) .
Only use winter tyres of the correct type approved for your vehicle. The sizes of the winter tyres approved for your vehicle are listed i n the veh i cle's documents (e.g
. EC Cert i ficate of
Conformity or COC document
1 l) . T h e ve h icle documents vary depending on the country in which the vehicle is registered. Also refer to
<:) page 225.
Winter tyres are no longer fully effect i ve when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.
The performance of winter tyres is also severely impaired by ageing , even ifthe tread is still much deeper than 4 mm .
Winter tyres are subject to the following maximum speed limit s according to speed rating code letter : c:)
.&
Speed rating Maximum speed limit code letter
160 km/h Q s
T
180 km/h
190 km/ h
H v
210 km/h
240 km/h
(please note r elevan t restrictions)
In Germany vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds must have an appropriate sticker attached so it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickers are available from qualified workshops. Please observe any other regulations applying in other countries .
"A l l-weather" tyres can also be used i nstead of winter tyres.
Using winter tyre s with V-rating
Please note that the generally applicable
240 km/h speed rating for winter tyres with the letter "V" is subject to technical restric tions ; the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle may be signifi c antly lower. The maximum speed limit for tyres wi t h a V-rating depends directly on the maximum axle weights for your car and on the listed weight rating of the tyres being used.
It i s best to contact a qualif i ed workshop t o c h ec k t h e max i mum speed which is perm i ssible for the V r ated tyres fitted on your car on t h e bas i s of th i s information.
A
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed perm i tted for the win t er tyres fitted on your car can cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle risk of accident.
@
For the sake of the environment
Summer tyres should be fitted again as soon as possible; they give better handling on roads which are free of snow and ice.
Summer tyres produce less rolling noise, do not wear down as quickly and, most importantly, reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
S n ow chains wi ll improve the vehicle's h andling on snow-covered roads.
... Snow chains can be used on the front wheels on l y.
... Check t ha t the snow chains are correctly seated after driving for a few yards. Note the fitting instructions provided by t h e manufacturer.
... Keep your speed below 50 km/h.
... I f there is a risk that you may get stuck in the snow even though the snow chains are .,.
1 )
CO C = ce rt i fi ca t e o f c onfo rmi ty
fitted, it is a good Idea to deactivate the traction control (AS R) in the ESC system
¢ page 183 , Switching the ESC on/off.
Snow chains w i ll improve braking ability as well as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons snow chains may only be used on tyres with certain wheel rim/tyre combinations.
Only use snow chains with fine-pit c h link s.
The links must not protrude more than 13.5 mm from the tyres (including tensioner).
Remove wheel cover s (if fitted) and trim rings before attaching snow chains.
Remove the chains when roads are free of snow. Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres an d wear out very quickly.
Four-wh e el drive : Where snow chains are compulsory on certain roads, this normally also applies to cars with four-wheel drive. Snow chains may only be fitted to the front wheels
(also on vehicles with four-wheel drive).
For technical reasons snow chains may only be used on tyres with certain wheel rim/tyre combinations .
A3 / A3Sportback
Rim size
6Jx16 (steel)
6Jxl 7 (alumi nlum)
Rim offset
48mm
48mm
Tyre size
205/55
205/50
A3 Saloon
Rim size
6.5Jx16
(steel)
6.SJxl 7 (aluminium)
Rim offset
43mm
4 3mm
Tyre size
205/55
205/50
Wheels and tyres 229
Run-flat tyres
Introduction
Applies to vehicles: with run-flat tyres
Run-flat tyres allow you to continue your journey in the event of a loss of tyre pressure.
Run-flat tyres have reinforced sidewalls which support the tyre in the event of a loss of pressure.
Run flat tyres must only be used on veh i cles which have a tyre pressure loss indicator*.
Genuine Audi run flat tyres can be identified by the marking "AOE" on the sidewall .
What are the benefit s of run flat tyres?
Run-flat tyres ensure that you remain mob il e, even in the event of a loss of tyre pressure. In this case, you should be able to keep driving for at least 30 km if conditions are favourable, h owever you mu s t not drive fa s ter than
80 km / h ¢ .&.
in Driving with run-flat tyres on page 230.
The tyre pressures are constantly checked by the tyre pressure loss indicator. When the run-flat system becomes active (instrument cluster display), it is still the driver's responsibility to check the tyre(s) affected and to decide whether it is possible to continue d r iving.
Please also observe the notes ¢ page 230,
Driving with run-flat tyres.
When is it no longer po ss ible to continue driving with th e help of the run-flat tyres?
If the electronic stabilisation control ( E SC) is out of operat i on or is triggered continuously when the run-flat system is active.
If the tyre pressure loss indicator is not work i ng.
If one of the tyres has been severely damaged in an accident, etc . If a tyre has been badly damaged there is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown off and cause damage to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
- If damage to the tyres (e .
g. tears in the sidewalls) becomes apparent. JI>
230 Wheel s and tyre s
- You must
stop
driving If
severe
vibrations occur, or if the wheel
starts
overheating and gives off
smoke.
A
WARNING
Ask your qualified workshop whether, and
if
so which, run-flat tyres can be used on your vehicle. Unauthorised use of these ty r es can invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads. Furthermore, this could cause damage to you r vehicle and possibly a l so result in an accident.
@ Note
-
If yo u ca n not cont inu e drivi n g, eve n w i t h run-flat tyres, please obtain profess i ona l assistance.
- You
should
obta i n professiona l assistance if you are in any doubt regard i ng the rims and tyres for your vehicle.
Driv i ng with run flat tyre s
Applies to vehicles with run-flat tyres
Please remember that the vehicle's handling will be impaired.
Driving a vehicle with
a
deflated tyre, or with insufficient tyre pressure,
is an
abnormal situation. However,
since
the handling of a veh i
-
cle equipped with run-flat tyres is only slightly impaired, it is important to remember that you are dr i v i ng with a deflated tyre . If you h ave to ma k e use of the run-flat
system,
note the following points:
... The elect r onic
stabilisation
control (ESC) mus t be switched on.
... Do not exceed 80 k m/h .&_ .
... Anticipate the traffic situation well in advance.
... Be careful when
accelerating.
... Avoid
unnecessary
braking
and steering
ma-
noeuvres
.
.,. Reduce
speed in
good time before
corners
and potential hazards .
P l ease refer t o ~
ger possible to continue driving with the help of
t
he run-flat tyres?
Effects on handling when driv i ng with defect i ve t yres
If one of the front tyres is defective ,
your ve-
hicle will tend to pull
slightly
towards that side and braking performance will be
im-
paired.
A defective rear ty re will also make the vehicle pull slight l y to one side, and the braking response will again be
s
li ghtly impaired.
T hese effects will be most noticeab l e when dr i ving in a corner.
A
WARNING
-
W hen using the run-flat system the changes in veh i cle hand li ng will be no-
1 t iceable whe n braking, in corners and during fas t acceleration.
- T he maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and weather con ditions. Always observe the releva n t rules and regulations. Run-flat tyres allow you to continue your journey in the even t of a loss of tyre pressure. However, the driver remains responsible for the safety of the vehicle and for restoring the correct tyre pressure and having defective pa r ts replaced Q
page 230.
For these reasons you should always adjust your driving t o suit the circumstances.
CD
CAUTION
W e r ecommend t h at you d r i v e w ith great care when using the r un-flat syste m . A void a brupt manoeuvres .
Renewing defective component s on run flat tyres
Applies to vehicles: with run-flat tyres
The run-flat tyres have been specially developed for your vehicle and matched to its requirements.
If you have to drive with low tyre pressure or w i th a completely deflated tyre, you
should
.,.
always take the vehicle to an authorised qualified workshop and have the defective parts inspected and the condition corrected.
&_ WARNING
We recommend that you have the runflat tyre renewed and also have the rim checked by a qualified workshop to identify any damage.
- Using tyres or rims which have not been approved can cause damage to the vehicle. Vehicle handling can be impaired and driving safety can no longer be guaranteed . This can also void the vehicle's cert i ficat i on for use on public roads.
It is not permitted to combine run-flat tyres with standard tyres on your vehicle.
('!)
Note
The tyre repair kit can be used for run-flat tyres
Q page 237.
Tyre pressure loss indicator
' Tyre pressure loss indicator in instrument cluster
Applies to vehicles: with tyre pressure monitoring
The tyre pressure loss indicator in the instrument cluster informs the driver if the tyre pressure is too low or a system malfunction has occurred .
Fig. 2 30 I ns trument clu s te r: Indi c ator l amp with message
The tyre pressure loss indicator makes use of the ABS sensors to compare the rolling cir-
Wheel s and tyres 231 cumference and the vibration of the tyres. If changes in the inflation pressure are detected on one or more tyres, the driver is alerted by an indicator lamp
RE and a message in the instrument cluster display
Q
Fig . 230. If only one tyre is affected, the display will indicate its position .
Monitoring of the tyre pressures is based on the tyre pressures you have stored . Each time you change a tyre, change the wheels round or change the tyre pressures on your vehicle (e .
g. when switching from partial load to full load and vice-versa), you must store the new tyre pressures in the menu display
Q page 232.
Monitoring of the tyre pressures is based on the tyre pressures you have stored. The tyre pressures recommended for your vehicle are given on the sticker attached to the driver's door pillar
Q page 224.
The rolling circumference and vibration can change and cause a tyre pressure warning if:
The inflation pressure in one or more tyres is too low.
The tyre has suffered structural damage.
The wheels were changed or the tyre pressures were changed and the new tyre pressures were not stored
Q page 232 .
- The vehicle load is not balanced (more load on one side) .
- There is more load on the wheels of one of the axles (e.g. when towing a trailer or driving up or down a grad i ent).
- You are driving with snow chains.
- Y ou are driving w i th the temporary spare wheel.
- Only one wheel of an axle has been changed.
Ind i cator lamp s
II]
·
Loss of pressure on one or more tyres
Q
&.
.
Check and change or repair the tyre(s).
Check and adjust the tyre pressures again on all four wheels . Then store the tyre pressures in the menu display
Q page 232 . m:D
(Tyre pressure loss indicator) Tyr e pr es · s ure! System fau l t . If m:! appears and the indicator lamp
RE in the instrument cluster ""
232 Wheels and tyres display flashes for approx. one minute and then remain s lit after you have switched on the ignition or while you are driving, there is a fault in the system . Try to store the correct tyre pres s ures
¢ page 232
. If the indicator lamp does not go out or if it comes on again after a short time , drive to a qualified workshop without delay and have the fault rectified.
A
WARNING
- If the tyre pressure loss indicator appears in the Instrument cluster display, s l ow down immediately and avoid any severe braking or steering manoeuvres.
As soon as you can do so safely, s top and check the tyres and the tyre pressures.
It is the driver's r esponsibility to ensure that the tyre pressures are correct. For this reason you must check the tyre pressures regularly.
- Under certain conditions (e.g
. driving at high speeds, on ice and snow or on poor road surfaces) the tyre pressure loss indicator may not appear immediately .
Ask a qualified workshop whether runflat tyres can be used on your vehicle .
Unauthorised use of these tyres can invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads. Furthermore, this could cause damage to your vehicle and possibly also result In an accident.
~~~~~~~-
(!) Note
If a malfunction occurs in th e ESC/ABS system, the tyre pressure loss indicato r will also be out of action.
- When driving with snow chains, a system malfunction can occur .
- The tyre pressure loss indicator on your
Audi is specially matched to tyres with the marking "AO" or "RO" ¢
page 225
.
We recommend that you use these tyres.
Storing tyre pressure settings
Applies to vehicles. with tyre pressure loss Indicator
When
you change a tyre or the tyre pressure on your vehicle
,
you must
c
onfirm the change on the system
.
Vehicles with so und syste m
• Before storing the new tyre pressures, check that the current pressures on all four wheels correspond to the specified values and adapt the pressures to the current load
~ page224 .
• Select:
I
SETUP
I button >control button ~
Store tyre pressures > Store .
Vehicles with MMI*
• Before storing the new tyre pressures, check that the current pressures on all four wheels correspond to the specified values and adapt the pressures to the current load
~ page224 .
... Select: control button Systems or > Car sys tems > Servicing & c heck s> Tyre pressure monitoring > Store tyre pressures .
(D
Note
Do not store the tyre pressures if yo u are driving with snow chains.
Accessories and modific atio n s to t h e vehicle 233
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle
Accessories, replacement parts and repairs
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer for advice before purchasing accessories and replacement ports .
Your car is designed to offer a high standard of act iv e and passive safety. For this reason, we recommend that you ask your Audi dealer for advice before fitting accessories or replacement parts. Audi dealers hav e the latest
Info r mation from the manufacturer and can recommend accessories and replacement parts which are suitab l e for your requirements . They can a l so answer any questions you might have regarding official regulations .
We recommend you to use only Audi accessories and Audi Genuine Parts . Audi has tested these products for su i tability, reliability and safety. Audi dealers have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that the parts are installed properly .
Although the market is constantly scrutinised,
Audi cannot judge or assume responsibility for the reliabi li ty, safety and suitability of nongenuine products· even though i n some insta n ces, these parts may have been ap prov ed by an offic i a lly recog ni sed technical testing author i ty or accompanied by a n official approva l certificate.
Any retro -fi tted equipment which has a direct effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or elec tr onically-controlled suspension) must be approved for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark
(the European Union's approval symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan, etc.), these must bear the CE mark (manufacturer conformity decla ration in th e European Union).
A
WARNING
Never attach accessories (such as cup holders or telephone brackets) to the su r faces covering the airbag units or the areas around the airbags: this could cause i nj ury i f the airbag is triggered.
Modifications
Modifications must always be carried out accord in g to our specifications .
Un autho r ised mod i fications to the electron i c components, software, wiring or data transfe r in the veh i cle may cause malfunctioning. Due to the way the elect r onic components are linked together in networks, other systems may be affected by the faults . This can seriously i mpair safe t y, lead to excessive wear o f components, and also invalidate the type approval for your vehicle.
You will appreciate that your Audi dealer can not be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work performed incorrectly.
We recommend that all work should be performed by an Audi workshop using Audi Gen· uine Parts .
A
WARNING
Incorrectly p e rform e d modifications or other work on your vehicle can l ea d to mal -
funct io n s and cause accide nt s.
Radio transmitters and business equipment
Tran s m itte rs
An external aerial is required in order to operate radio equipment inside the vehicle . T he maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.
Retrofit installations of radio transmitters in t he vehicle are subject to official approval and ..,..
234 A c ce ss or ies a nd modifi c a t ion s to the veh i cl e can affect the type approval for your vehicle.
In extreme cases th i s could mean that you lose the type approval for your vehicle.
Qualified work s hop s will be able to inform you about option s for installing and operating ra dio transmitters.
Busine ss e qu i pm e n t
Retrofit installation of business or other equipment in the vehicle is permi t ted, provided the equipment cannot inter f ere with t he driver's i mmediate control of t he vehicle. Any such equipment mu st carry th e CE mark. Any retrofit equipment that cou ld influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type app r o v a l for road vehicles and must car ry the e mark .
A_
WARNING
Loose or incorrectly secured r adio eq uipment could be catapulted through the vehicle during sudden d r iving/braking manoeuvres or i n the event of an accident. This poses a risk of injury to occupants.
-Always ensure that radio equipment is properly secured outside the deployment area of the airbags or stowed safely while the vehicle is moving.
Mobile te l ephones or radio equipment which are operated inside the vehicle without a correc tl y installed external aerial can create excess ive magnetic fie l ds t h at could cause a health h azard.
CD
CAUTION
If you use radio equipment in the car without an externa l aerial, th e e l ec tro magnetic r adiation in the vehicle could exceed the recommended limits . This also applies to ex te rnal aerials which have not been correctly installed .
Do not operate radio equipment in the vehicle unless an external aerial is properly connected.
(D
Note
Please observe the relevant regulations and follow the instructions in the operating manual for the radio equipment.
Component protection
Some electronic control units and components, such as the sound system or navigation system, are equipped with component protectio n at the facto r y.
The purpose of the component protec t ion is as follows :
- To prevent factory fitted equipment from being r ein sta ll ed and used freely in ot h er vehicles (e.g. if they have been sto l en)
- To prevent components from being used outside the vehicle
- To enable the legitimate instal l ation and/or replacement of components and control units by a qualified service workshop
Possible text messages and remedy :
Device
Instrument SAFE CP cluster display
Text message Possib l e remedy
Contact a qualified workshop.
Sound system Some funcSwitch on the or navigation tions of the ignition . If system display infotainment the composystem are nent proteccurren tly un tlon is sti ll ava il ab l e. not deactiva-
P l ease switch ted, contact a on ign it ion. qualified workshop.
Self-help
General notes
... If your vehicle experiences technical problems, stop the car well away from moving traffic. If you have a flat tyre, you should park the car on a level surface . Be particularly careful if you are on a slope .
... Apply the parking brake .
... Switch t he hazard warning lights on .
... Pu t on you r high-visibility vest c:> page 2 35 .
... Pl ace t he warning triangle in a visible lo c ati on c:> poge235 .
... I nstruct a ll passeng 1 t he car wh e n it i s safe to do so. T h ey s h ou l d w a it i n a safe pl ace (fo r i n s t ance be h i nd t h e r o a d s i de cras h barrie r ).
.&.
WARNING
Y ou s h ou l d note the procedure described above for your own safety and t ha t of ot her road users.
Equipment
High-visibility vest
Applies to vehicles: with high visibility vest
Self-help 2 3 5 i n g t ra ff ic, e.g. in brea k do w ns or w hen loading or unloading the vehicle.
- Always observe the re l evant rules and regulations in the country you are travelling in.
Warning triangle
Applies to vehicles: with warning triangle
Fig . 232 A3/A3 Sportback with boot lid open : warning triangle
Fig . 231 Rear seat s : Compartment for high·v i s i b i lity vest
... T
o open the
lid ,
turn the catch an
t
i-cloc
kwise.
Other road users can see you sooner when you are wear i ng the high v i s i b i lity vest.
(j)
Note
W ear the high-visibility vest whenever you have to leave t he vehicle near mov-
F i g. 233 A3 Saloon with boot li d open : warni n g trian· gle
The factory-supplied warn i ng t r iang l e is att ached to the inside ofthe boot li d.
A3 / A3 Sportback :
... T o open t h e cover, turn t h e catc h
<D c:> F ig . 2 3 2 a nd swivel t h e cover dow n war d s
@ .
... P u ll th e warn i ng triang l e out of the re t ainer.
A3 Saloon :
... To remove the warning triangle, push the tab in the direction indicated by the arrow c:> Fig . 233 and pull the retainer down .
The retainer on the boot lid is specifically designed to hold the warn i ng triangle supplied as an Audi Genuine Accessory .
236 Self-help
First-aid kit
Applies to vehicles: with first-aid kit
Tool kit
/
tyre repair kit/compressor
Applies to vehicles: with too l k i t/tyre repair kit/compressor
Fig. 23 4 Right front seat: Stowlng the first aid kit (example)
• Pull the handle to open the compartment.
The storage compartment will hold a maxi mum weight of 1.0 kg.
On vehicles with factory-fitted fire ext i nguisher•, the first-aid kit is stowed in the compartment in the door trim .
Fire extinguisher
App l ies to vehicles: with f ir e exting ui sher
The factory-fitted fi r e extinguisher is l ocated in the front area of the front passenger's seat
(secured in a ho l der) .
• Remove the fire extinguisher by pressing on the tab marked "PRESS" .
• To secure the fire extingu i sher, put it in the holder and fasten the securing belt.
Check how the fire extingu i sher works before you need to use it. The instructions for use are shown on the fire extinguisher .
A
WARNING
If the fire extinguisher is no t secured properly it could be catapulted through the vehicle during driving and braking manoeuvres or in the event of an accident. This poses a risk of i njury to occupants.
(!)
Note
The fire extinguisher must comply with le gal requirements. Observe the e xpiry date of the fire extingu i sher.
Fig. 235 L uggage compartment (example) : Stowing the tools, tyre repair kit and jack~
Fig. 236 Luggage compartment: Floor panel folded up
(A3 and A3 Sportback top, A3 Saloon bottom )
The tools, tyre repair kit* and compressor" are stowed i n the luggage compartment. Some equipment is stowed behind the side trim @ * or ® and some under the floor panel ©
<=> F ig. 235.
Floor panel
• A3/A3 Sportback: Lift the floor panel up by the plast i c handle © until it i s fixed i n position behind the retaining tabs on the two side sections <=> Fig . 236 (top illustration) .
• A3 Sa loon : Engage the plastic hooks on the luggage compartment seal ~ 236 (bottom illustration) . ..,.
S i de panel
... Turn the catch to open and remove the cover
@ *I @ c:> Fig. 235.
Tyre repair kit
Preparations
Applies to vehicles. with tyre repair kit
... Please refer to the important safety notes on
Q page 235 .
.. Apply the parking brake .
.. Manual gearbox: Engage first gear.
... Vehicles with automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to position P.
.. Check whether a repa i r is possible using the tyre repair kit
Q page 23 7.
Using the tyre repair kit
Applies to vehicles: with tyre repair kit
Fig. 237 Tyres : Irreparable tyre damage
Repaired tyres are only suitable for temporary use. Replace the damaged tyre as quickly as possible
Q
.&
.
If the tyre was damaged by an object, such as a nai l , do not remove it from the tyre.
The tyre repair kit can be used at outside temperatures down to 20 °C.
The tyre repair kit must NOT be used :
On cuts and punctures larger than 4 mm ©
Q Fig . 237
If the wheel rim has been damaged @ .
if you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre @ .
In these cases, you should seek professional assistance.
Self-help 2 3 7
A_
WARNING
Please note that the tyre repair kit is not suitable for use in every situation and should only be used as a temporary measure.
- Do not allow the sealant to come into contact with your eyes, skin or clothing.
I f you do come into contact with the sealant immediately rinse the eyes or skin affected with clean water.
- Make sure you do not breathe in the fumes .
I f you accidentally swallow tyre sealant, immed i ately rinse your mouth thoro u ghly and dr i nk a large amount of water_ Do not induce vomiting . Immediate l y contact a doctor.
Change clothing immediate l y if it bec o mes soiled with the tyre sealant.
- I f any allergic reactions should occur get medical help immediately.
Keep the sealant away from children. i
Note
If sealant should leak out, leave it to dry.
When it has dried, you can pull it off like a piece of foil.
Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the sea ling compound exchanged by a qualified workshop.
- Please observe the relevant regulations.
Tyre repairs
App li es to vehicles: w1lh tyre repair kit
F ig. 2 38 Tyres : Filling the tyre
238 Self-h e lp
Important: The tyre repair kit must be at hand and ready for use ¢ page 236.
Fill i ng th e ty r e
... Shake the tyre sealant can well.
... Screw the enclosed filling hose onto the sealant can as far as it will go. This will automatically pierce the foil sealing the can.
... Take the valve cap off the tyre valve and use the enclosed valve insert tool to unscrew the valve insert ¢ Fig. 238.
... Place the valve insert onto a clean surface.
... Remove the sealinig plug from the filling hose and insert the hose into the tyre valve .
... Hold the tyre sealant can ups i de down and fill the complete contents into the tyre.
... Then disconnect the hose and screw the valve insert firmly back into the tyre valve.
Inflating t h e t yre
... Screw the compressor filling hose (from the tyre repair kit) onto the tyre valve and plug the connector into an e l ectrical socket in the vehicle.
... Pump the tyre up t o 2.0 to 2.5 bar and mon itor the pressure shown on the pressure gauge.
... If the tyre pressure remains lower than the value specified above, drive the vehicle approx. 10 metres forwards or backwards, so that the sealant can spread evenly in the tyre.
&
WARNING
Please observe the manufacturers' safety notes on the compressor and the instructions supplied with the tyre sealant can.
If it was not possible to build up a tyre pressure of 2.0 bar w i th i n six minutes this means that ithe tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on.
- Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible w i th the sealing compound.
(j)
Note
Do not use the compressor for longer than
6 minutes at a time, as it cou l d overheat.
When the compressor has cooled down, you can use i t again.
After repairing a tyre
Applies to vehi,les: wit h ty r e repair ki t
... Affix the sticker "max. 80 km/h", which is enclosed with the tyre repa i r kit, to the dashboard where the driver will see it .
... After about 10 m i nutes, stop to check the tyre pressure.
... If tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on .
.&.
WARNING
After repairing a tyre please note the following points:
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.
- Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering .
- Vehicle handling could be impaired.
- If the tyre is too badly damaged, you should seek professional assistance.
I
@
For the sake of the env ir onment
A used can of sealing compound can be returned to your qualified workshop for disposal.
© Note
After repairing a tyre, remember to buy a new tyre sealant can at a qualified workshop .
Changing a wheel
Preparations
Certain preparations must be mode before you change the wheel.
... Please refer to the i mportant safety ITlOtes on <::> page 235 .
... Apply the parking brake.
... Manual gearbox: Engage first gear
... Vehicles with automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to posit i on P .
... If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
Self-help 239
Anti-theft wheel bolts • Take out the tools ¢ page 236 and spare wheel ~ page 242.
/n.
WARNING
If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent the vehicle from rolling away .
· 1
Removing the hub cap / wheel bolt caps
Fig. 239 Wheel : Hub cap
®
DO
Fig . 241 Ant i ·theft wheel bolt with wheel bolt cap and adapter
To release the anti-theft whee l bolts, you need a specia l adapter (provided in the vehicle's tool kit) .
.. Pull off the hub cap* or wheel bolt cap* @
"1) Fig . 241 .
.. Slide the adapter @ all the way onto the anti-theft wheel bolt @ .
.. Fit the box spanner (provided in the vehicle's tool kit) as far as it will go over the adapter
@ .
.. Loosen the wheel bolt ~ page 239. i Note
Note the code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place - not in your vehicle. If you need a replacement adapter, give the code number to your
Audi dealer. loosening the wheel bolts
F ig. 240 Wheel : Wheel bolts with caps
Hub caps*
• Insert the hook (provided In the vehicle's tool kit) In the hole in the hub cap r::!> Fig. 239 .
.. Pull off the hub cap.
Wheels with wheel bolt caps*
.. Slide the plastic clip (provided in the vehicle's tool kit) onto the wheel bolt cap until i t engages Fig. 240 .
.. Pull off the cap using the plastic clip .
F ig. 242 Wheel : Loosening the wheel bolt s
240 Self-help
.- Fit the box spanner (provided In the vehicle's tool kit) as far as it will go over the wheel boltll.
.. Turn the wheel bo~t approx. one turn anticlockwise ·arrow-. To apply the necessary torque, hold the box spanner near the end.
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by push i ng down the end of the spanner carefu ll y with your foot. Hold on to the car for support a n d take care not to slip.
.&.
WARNING
To avoid accidents, the wheel bolts should only be l oosened slightly (one turn) before raising the vehicle with the jack*.
Rais i ng the vehicle
Fig . 2 4 3 Sills: markings (example)
Fi g . 2 44 Door si l l: Applying the jac k under t he door sill
.Always provide a firm base for the jack* on the ground. (The jack can be found in the vehicle's tool kit). If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. On a hard, sl i ppery surface (such as ti l es) use a rubber mat or simila r to prevent t h e jack from slipping ~ &.
.
.Locate the marking on the door si ll closest to the wheel being changed ~ . 243. The jacking point is located behind the marking under the door sill.
.Wind up the jack* under the jacking point until the claw @ ~ of the jack is di rectly below the jacking point .
.Alig n t he j ack* so tha t the claw @ grips the jacking point u nder the doo r sill and the movable base plate of the jack @ is fl at on the ground. The base plate @ m u st be positioned vert i cally underneath the jacking point @ .
.Raise the vehicle unti l the defective wheel is clear of the ground .
.&.
WARNING
- 1
- Make sure the jack* is stable. If the ground underneath the jack* is slippery or soft, the jack ca n slip or sink in - risk of i n j u ry!
Use on l y t he jac k * supplied with yo u r veh i cle to raise t he vehicle. If you use a j a ck from a different vehicle, your vehicle may slip off the jack - risk of injury!
- App l y t he jack * only at the jacking points located behind t he markings on the door sill and align i t properly. Othe r wise there is a risk of injury since the jack* can slip off suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
The height of the parked vehicle can change as a result of variations in l oad· ing.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack - risk of accident.
I f work has to be done u nder the vehicle, ensure that it is safely supported on stands designed for the purpose, otherwise there is a risk of injury.
1) A n adapter Is requ i red to unscrew or tighten the anti t h eft whee l bolts ~ 239.
CD
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be lifted up on its sills. Only apply the jack• at the jacking points located behind the markings on the door sill . Otherwise your vehicle could be damaged.
Taking off I putting on the wheel
Fig. 2 4 5 Wheel . Hexagonal socket for turning wheel bolts
F ig. 246 Wheel : Mounting pin in wheel bolt hole near· est to the top
Taking o ff the whe e l
... Using the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle (p r ovided in the vehicle's too l kit), unscrew the top wheel bolt and place it on a clean surface ~ Fig. 245 .
... Sc r ew in the mount i ng pin (provided in the vehicle's tool kit) by hand in place of the wheel bolt
Q
Fig . 2 4 6.
... Then unscrew the o t her wheel bolts.
... Take off the wheel
~ Q) .
The mounting pin stays where it is.
Putting o n t h e w he e l
When putting on a ty r e with directional tread pattern, refer to
Q page 241 .
Self-help 241
... Pu t on the wheel, using the mounting p i n to gu i de it into place Q Q) .
... Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lig h tly using the hexagonal socket.
... Then unscrew the mounting pin and tighten
... Carefully lower the car with the jack* .
... Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal sequence with the box spanner.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before putting on the wheel, inspect the cond it ion o f the wheel and hub mounti n g surfaces. Th ese surfaces must be clean before mounting the wheel.
_A
WARNING
-
Do not use the h exagona l socket In the screwdr iv er handle to tighten the wheel bo lt s. It is not possible to tighten the bol ts to th e required torque using the hexa g ona l socket - risk of accident!
CD
CAUTION
When removing/fitting the wheel the rim may hit and damage the brake disc. For this reason, please take care and get a second person to assist you.
(D
Note
The wheel bolts are easier to remove from the wheel rim if you use the hexagona l socket in the screwdriver handle. The rev e r sible screwdriver b l ade should be removed as a precautionary measure when the too l is u sed for this purpose.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning .
If you ever have a puncture and need to fit the spare wheel* in the wrong direction, please Iii>
242 Self-help drive w i th extra care because the tyre will not give optim u m performance in this situation.
Bear thi s in mind particularly when driving on wet roads .
To benefit from the advantage s of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the defective tyre
should be replaced and refitted a
s
soon a
s possible so that all tyres again rotate in the correct direction.
After changing a wheel
"' Fit the hub cap or wheel bolt caps back on, as required.
"' Put the tools and j ack back in the luggage compartment .
"' If the replaced wheel will not f i t into the s pare wheel well, stow it safely in the lug gage compartment Q page 162 .
"' Check the tyre pressure of the fitted wheel as soon as possible.
"' On vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system, adjust the tyre pressu r e and store it via the sound system o r MMI* Q page 232 .
"'T he wheel bolts should be t ig htened to 120
Nm. Have this checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . Until then, drive w i th caution.
"' Have the flat tyre r eplaced as quickly as pos sible.
Spare wheel
General notes
Applies to vehicles: wit h compact temporary spa re wheel
Fi g . 247 Luggage compar t ment: F l oor pane l fo l ded up
(A3 a n d A3 Sportbac l< top , A3 Saloon botto m )
Fig. 248 Compac t temporary s pare whee l (examp l e)
The compact temporary spare wheel
Q
Fig. 248 is only intended for temporary use over short distances. Have the damaged wheel checked as soon as possible by a qualified workshop and , if necessary, replaced .
Please note the fo ll owing restrictions when us i ng the compact temporary spare wheel.
The compact temporary spare wheel is de s i gned specifically for th i s model. For this reas on, do not use a spare wheel from a different type of vehicle . ..,.
Self help 243
R
e
moving the compact temporary spare wheel
(
A3 and A3 Sportback
)
• Lift the floor pane l up by the plastic handle until it ls fixed in position behind the retaining tabs on the two side sect i ons @ q
Fig. 247 .
• Remove the bass box* if necessary
~ page243.
•T urn the plastic knob anticl ockwise.
• Take ou t the spare wheel.
Removing the compact tempo
r
ary spare wheel (A3 Saloon
)
• Lift the floor pane l by the plastic handle.
• Engage the plast i c hooks on the luggage compartment seal @ Fig . 247 .
• Remove the bass box* if necessary
~ page243.
• Turn the plastic knob anti-clockwise.
• Take out the spare wheel.
Snow chains
F or technica l reasons , snow chains must not be used on the compact tempora r y spare wheel.
Should you have a punc t ure o n one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the compact temporary s p are wheel i n place of one of the rear whee l s. You can then attach the snow chains to the whee l taken from the rear and use th i s wheel to replace the punctured front wheel.
.&.
WARNING
1
The tyre pressure must be chec k ed as soon as poss i ble after fitting the spare whee l an incorre c tly inflated tyre can in cr ease the risk of a c cident. Yo u can find t h e tyre pressures here q
page 224,
Fig.
227.
- Do not drive faste r than 80 km/h when the compact tempora r y spare wheel i s fitted h i gher speeds can cause an accident.
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering when the compact temporary spare wheel is fitted risk of accident!
N ever use two or more compact spare tyres at the same time risk of accident.
N o other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyres) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel.
Removing the bass box
App li es to vehides : wit h b a ss box
You must remove the bass bo
x
before you can take out the spare wheel*.
Fi g. 249 Spare Wheel well: Bass box
Removing the bass box
• Lift the f l oor panel q
page 242, Fig. 247
.
• Comp r ess the retaining tabs
CD q
Fig.
249
on the connector.
,.. Unplug the connector @ and move the d i sconnected cable clear to one side.
• Unscrew bolt @ .
• Carefully take out the bass box.
Installing the bass box
,.. Carefully place the bass box in the well of the r i m . M a k e sure t h at the i ns c ription
" F RONT" on the bass box poin t s t o th e front of the ve h i cl e .
• Plug t h e connector back i n again.
• Sec u re the bass box wi t h t h e screw.
• Fold the floor pa n el back down.
244 Self help
Jump-starting
General information on jump-starting
Jump leads: Observe information provided by the manufacturer .
If the battery is discharged the battery of a second vehicle can be used to jump-start the vehicle. Suitable jump leads are required.
Both batteries must have the same voltage
(V) and a simi lar capacity (Ah).
Jump leads
Only use jump leads with insulated battery clamps. On vehicles with a petrol engine we recommend that the leads should have a cab l e core of at least 25 mm2, on vehicles with a diesel engine the cable core should be at least
35 mm 2. In most cases the positive cab le is red and the n egative cable i s black.
A
WARNING
_ J
- When it is discharged the battery can freeze at temperatures around 0°C. Never try to jump-start a car if the battery has frozen - risk of explosion and acid burns. A battery must be replaced once it has frozen.
The engine compartment is a dangerous area and working here can lead to serious injuries. Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment please read and observe the warnings~
- Incorrect handling of the jump l eads may result in the battery explod in g (risk of serious injury). Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury:
- The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch.
The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle: this can cause short circuiting.
Position the jump leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compa rtment.
- Do not bend over the batteries risk of acid burns.
- The screw plugs on the battery cells must be screwed in firmly.
Keep sparks, flame and lighted cigarettes away from batteries: the gases given off can cause an explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable to parts of the fuel system or to the brake pipes.
CD
CAUTION
- The vehicles must not touch each other
' otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected and the boosting battery could be discharged.
If the jump leads are not connected correctly this can result In serious damage to the electrical system of the vehicle.
The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicle's electrical system.
- Please note that the method described below for connecting the leads is intended for jump-starting your vehicle. If jump-starting another vehicle, you should not connect the negative lead (-) to the negative terminal of the discharged battery, but directly to the engine block or a solid metal part bolted to the engine block. If the battery of the other vehicle does not have a gas vent, there is a risk that a mixture of oxygen and hydrogen gas can accumulate and cause an explosion.
© Note
Switch off the car telephone if necessary.
Details will be given in the manufacturer's instructions for the car telephone.
Starting the engine
The two jump lead s must be connected in the correct sequence .
Fi g . 250 Jump · start i ng with the battery of another ve · h i de : @ - D i scharged battery, @ Boosting battery
The battery is l ocated at the front l eft of the engine compartment . Open the cover to access the positive terminal of the battery. Nev · er jumps tart a batt e ry whi c h has frozen , even after it has th a wed c>
.&. in General in formation on jump-starting on page 244 ! If a battery ha s frozen it must be r epla c ed .
Please note that the described method of connecting the leads is meant for jump-starting your vehicle.
Preparations
1. Please read c> page 244, General information on jump starting carefully before proceeding.
2. Apply the parking brake and move the gear lever to neutral (manual gearbox) or move the selector lever to P (automa t ic gearbox).
3 . Sw i tch off all electrica l equ i pme n t and the ign i tion on both vehicles.
Connecting and disconnecting the jump leads
4 . Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive term i nal <!) c> Fig . 250 of the discharged battery @ c> (D in General information on jump-starting on page 244 .
S . Connect the othe r end of the red jump lead to the po s itive terminal @ of the boosting battery @ .
6. Connect one end of the black lead pref e r ably t o the earth point or alternat i vely
Self-help 245 to the negative battery terminal @ on the vehicle providing assistance @ .
7. Connect the other end of the black jump
8 . lead only to the earth point © of the jump-start connection on you r veh i cle @
~ 0 .
Position the jump leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting the engine
9. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.
10. Start the engine of the car with the discharged battery and wait two or three m i nutes until the engine is running s m oothly.
11. If the engine fails to start: do not operate the starter for Longer than 10 seconds.
Wait for about 30 seconds and try again.
12. Switch on the blower and the rear window heating on the vehicle which has been jump-started in order to offset excessive voltage which may occur when disconnecting the leads . The headlights must be switched off !
13 . Disconnect the leads in exactly the opposite sequence to that descr i bed in c> page 245, Connecting and disconnecting the jump leads with the engines running . Make sure that the l eads cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
14 . Switch off t h e b l ower and the rear w i ndow heating again.
Please refer to c>
.&. in General information on jump-starting on page 244.
CD
CAUTION
Do not use the negative battery terminal when jump-starting (this could cause a malfunction in the on-board electrical sys· tern).
246 Self-help i .
Note
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metalt o-metal contact with the battery terminals.
The battery is vented to the outside to prevent gases entering the vehicle's interior.
Tow-starting
I
towing away
General notes
Some experience is r equired to tow or towstart a vehicle, espec i ally when using a towrope. Both drivers should be fam ili ar with the technique required for towing. Inexperienced drivers should not attempt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the tow-rope .
When towing off road, there is always a risk that the anchora g e poin ts may be overloaded.
Tow-bar I tow-rope
It is easier a nd safer to tow the veh icl e with a tow-bar. You should only use a tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar . It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of e l astic synthetic fibre or similarly elastic material.
Notes on towing vehicles
The vehicle can be to wed with a tow-bar or tow rope. When the eng in e is not running, the gearbox will not be adequately lubricated if the following speed/distance restrictions are not observed:
- The vehicle must not be towed faster than
SO km/h .
The vehicle must not be towed further than
SO km .
Additional notes on towing by breakdown truck
If one of the axles has to be raised in order to tow the vehicle, please refer to the following table to determine the appropriate axle for your gearbox/drive combination :
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Front-wheel Four wheel drive drive
Front or ax le
Front ax rear le
Front or rear axle
Front axle
Four-wheel drive : If the vehicle is to be towed with one of the axles raised, the ignition must be switched off; otherwise the drive train can be damaged.
Notes on tow-starting
Automatic gearbox: F or technical reasons, your vehicle must not be tow-started.
Manual gearbox: As a general rule, tows tarting i s not recommended. If the engine will not start, it is best to try starting it using the battery of another vehicle c> page 244 before attempting to tow start. If this is not possible, you can try to push-s tart or tow-start the vehicle page 247, Tow-starting .
&_ WARNING
There is a high risk of accidents when towing/tow-starting, as the towed vehicle can easily be driven into the towing vehicle .
CD
CAUTION
- If it is not possib l e to tow the vehicle as described above (e.g
. due to a gearbox fa ilur e or if the vehicle h as to be tow ed fur th er than 50 km), it must be transported on a special ca r transporter or trailer.
Towing a vehicle with the wrong axle raised can cause serious damage to the gearbox . i
Note
Automatic gearbox: It is not possible to move the selector lever out of position P if the elect ri ca l power supply fails. Before the vehicle can be recovered/manoeuvered you must manually release the selector lever; left-hand drive vehicles ~
¢ page 114, right-hand drive vehicles
¢ page 115.
Please observe the relevant regulations when towing or tow-starting.
Towing away
Please observe the important safety warnings on ¢ page 246 .
Preparation s
"" Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the tow i ng anchorages provided for this pur pose ¢ page 248, c::> page 248.
... Please ensure that the tow-rope is not twisted as it could otherwise become u nsc r ewed from the tow li ne anchorage whi l e the vehi cle is being towed .
... The hazard warning lights of both vehicles must normally be switched on ¢ page 59.
However, observe any regulations to the contrary.
Towing v ehicle ( front )
"" Ensure that the tow rope is taut before you drive off.
"" Engage the clutch very gently when starting to move (manual gearbox) and press the accelerator slowly.
"" Avoid unnecessary braking and manoeuvres.
V ehicl e b ei ng t o w e d ( r e ar )
... Ensure that the i gnition i s switched on, the steering wheel i s not l ocked, and that you ca n operate the turn signa l s, h orn or wi n dscreen wipers i f n ecessary c::>
.&, .
"" T he brake servo only works when the engi n e is r u nning. The power steering only wo r ks when the ignition is on and the vehicle is movingll. Otherwise you will need to press the brake pedal significantly harder and apply more force to move the steering wheel.
... Please ensure that the steering wheel is unlocked and that it moves freely .
... Release the parking brake c::> page 92.
Se lf-help 24 7
"" M anual gearbox: Put the gear lever i n neutral.
... Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to position N .
"" Ensure that the tow-rope remains taut at all times when towing .
A
WARNING
If t he vehicle has no electrical power, do
NOT use a tow-bar or tow-rope to tow the vehicle
(D
Note
Y ou can use the turn signals to indicate a change of d ir ection (or lane) e v en when the hazard li ghts are on . T h e h azard lights will be interrupted temporarily.
Tow-starting
P l ease observe the important safety warnings on c::> page 246.
I mportant: Your vehicle must be fitted with a manual gearbox. If your vehicle has a petrol engi n e, it must not be towed further than
50 metres c::> Q).
"" Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the towing anchorages provided for th is purpose C> page 248, c::> page 248.
... Engage second or third gear before moving off.
... Press the clutch and ho l d the peda l down.
"" Switch on the ignition.
... Once both vehicles are mov i ng. release the cl u tch.
... As soon as the eng i ne starts, press the clutch peda l and put the gear lever in neut r al.
CD
CAUTION
When tow-starting the vehicle, do not tow it further than SO metres; otherwise the catalytic converter could be damaged.
1l Important : Th e b a tt er y mu s t be a d e quat el y charged.
248 Self-help
Front towline anchorage Rear towline anchorage
Fig. 251 Front bumper (right side): Removing cove r Fi 9. 253 R i ght side of the rear b umper: Cover cap
Fig. 252 Front bumper (right side): Towline anchorage sc r ewed In
The screw connection for the towline anchorage i s located beh in d a cover cap on the right side of the front bumper.
~ Take the towline anchorage out of the vehicle's tool kit
C) page 236 .
.. To detach the cover cap from the bumper press the top left part of the cap inwards
~ Fig. 251.
.. Screw the towline anchorage Into the screw connection as far as It will go q
Fig. 252 and tighten it with the box spanner.
.. Put the towline anchorage back in the tool kit after use.
A
WARNING
If towline anchorage is not screwed in
as far as the stop, there is a risk
of
the
screw connection shearing off during towing risk of accident!
Fig. 254 R i ght side of the rear bumper: Towline anc ho rage screwed in
Vehicles with towline anchorage
On vehicles which do not have a factory-fitted towing bracket*, a screw connection is located behind a cover cap on the right side of the rear bumper.
.. Take the towline anchorage out of the vehicle tool kit
C) page 236.
.. To r emove the cover cap from the bumper, press it in at the top -arrowand pull it out atthe bottom ~ Fig. 253.
.. Screw the towline anchorage into the screw connection as far as it will go~ and
.. Put the towline anchorage back in the tool kit after use .
Vehicles with towing bracket*
Th e removable ball joint must be attached before you can use the towing bracket
!:) page 198 .
.. Insert the balljoint ~ page 198 .
.. Attach the tow-bar or the tow-rope to the ball joint. ..,..
On some models, the shape of t he cap can va r y.
Vehicles which have a factory-f i tted towing bracket" do not have a screw connection at the rear for the towline anchorage .
.&.
WARNING
If the towline anchorage is not screwed in as far as the stop, there is a risk of the screw connection shearing off during towing - risk of accident !
CD
CAUTION
To avo i d damag i ng the towing bracket*, only u se tow-bars with suitab l e attachments . If a tow-bar is not available, a towrope may be used .
Self-help 249
250 Fuses and bulbs
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Fuses in vehicle interior
Fig. 255 Area near steering column on LH D vehicle:
Cover
Fig. 256 Ope n glove box on RHO vehicle: Cove r
Access to the fuses is different on left-hand and right-hand drive vehicles.
LHD vehicles: The fuses are located behind a cover near the steering column c)
Fig . 255.
RHO vehicles : The fuses are located behind a cover in the glove box c:> Fig. 256.
Changing fuses
To see whether a fuse has blown, check whether the metal strip has melted.
Fuses in vehicle interior
.,,. Switch off the ignition and the failed com-
.,,. Refer to the following tables to identify the fuse for the failed component c) page 2 51 .
.. Remove the cover: LH 0 vehicles c) page 2 50,
Fjg . 255 or RHO vehicles !:) page 250 ,
Fig . 256 .
.,,. Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover in the engine compartment c:;:>Fig. 257 .
.,,. Use the plastic clip to pull out the b l own fuse and replace it with a fuse of the same rating.
.. Replace the cover.
Fuses in engine compartment
... Switch off the i gnition and the fa il ed component .
... Refer to the following tables to iden t ify the fuse for the failed component c) page 2 52 .
.. Release the fuse cover¢ Fig. 257
.. Take the p l astic clip from inside the fuse cover !:) Fig. 257 .
... Use the plastic clip to pull out the blown fuse and replace it with a fuse of the same rating.
The various electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are lo cated behind a cover below the steering wheel and on the left side of the engine compartment .
.&.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair a fuse or replace a blown fuse by fitting a fuse with a higher ampere rating. This could damage the e l lectrical system risk of fire!
Fig. 257 E ngin e compart m e nt , left·hand side: Fuse cover
If more than one fuse rating is listed in a row in the following tables e .
g. 5/10/20, this i s due to differences in the equipment of your vehicle. Blown fuses should always be replaced with a fuse of the same rating.
If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a sho rt time, the electrical system
must be checked by a qualified wo
r
kshop as soon as possible.
@ Note
Unassigned fuse locations are not shown in the tables below.
Some of the items of equipment listed in the tables below are only fitted oncertain models or are optional extras.
Fuses in vehicle interior
F ig. 258 Interior : Fuse layou t
No . Electrical equipment
F2 Seat adjuster
F
3
Hydraulic pump for soft top
(Cabriolet)
F4
MM
I control co
n
sole, M
M
I components
FS Gateway
F6 Anti-theft alarm system
Air conditioner/heater console, selector lever (auto-
F7 matic gearbox), auxiliary heating, relay coil for rear window heating
amps
10
40
7.5
5
s
10
Fu se s a nd bulb s 251
No . Electrical equipment
FS
F9
Diagnostics, switch for electronic parking brake, light switch, rain/light sensor, interior lighting
Steering column
swi
tch module
FlO Display
Fll
Reversible belt tensioners
(driver's side)
F
12
MMI system
F13
Control unit for suspens
i
on control
F14 Air conditioner blower
FlS
E
l
ectric steer
i
ng colum
n
Lock
F16 MMI system
F17 Instrument cluster
F18 Reversing camera
Fl9
Control unit for convenience key system
F23 Exterior lighting (right side)
F24
Panorama roof/control unit for soft top, soft top lock
(Cabriolet)
F25
Door/s, driver's side (e.g
.
electric windows)
F26 Seat heating
F27 Sound amplifier
F28
Control unit for soft top, electro
n i
cs (Cabriolet)
F
29
In
terior lights
F3
1
Exter
i
or lighting (
l
eft side)
F3
2
Driver assistance systems
F33 Airbag
LEDs for buttons/switches, coil for neck heating relay
F34
(Cabriolet) and electrical socket relay, interior sound, reversing light switch, tern
-
perature sensor, oil Level sensor
amps
10
1
5
25
15/20
20
30
10
7.5
5
7.5
7.5
40
20/30
30
30
30
7.5
5
7.5
4
0
7.5
5
252 Fu se s and bul bs
N o . Electr i cal e qu i pm e nt
F35
Diagnostics, headlight range control, air quality sensor, automatic anti-dazzle mirrors
F36
Cornering light (right side) I
LED headlight (right side)
F37
Cornering light (left side) I
L ED headlight (left side)
F39
Door/s, passenger's side
(e.g. electric windows)
F40
Cigarette lighter, e l ectrica l sockets
F41
Reversible belt tensioners
(front passenger's side)
F42 Central locking system
F43 Windscreen washer system
F44 Four-wheel drive
F45
Electrically a d justable seat
(driver's side)
F47 Rear window wiper
F49 Starter,
F53 Rear clutch sensor window heating amp s
10
15
15
30
20
25
40
30
15
15
15
5
30
The seats with electric adjustment* are protected by circui t b rea ke rs. These reset automatically after a few seconds when the overload has been corrected .
(!)
Note
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject to alterations.
Fuses on left side of engine compartment
Fig. 259 Eng i ne compartment: Fuse layout
No . Electrical equipment
Fl ESC control unit
F2 ESC control unit
F3
Engine control unit (petrol/ diesel)
F4
Engine cooling, engine components, supplementary heater relay coils (1+2), secondary air pump relay amp s
40
40
15/30
5/10
FS
Engine components, tank system
F6 Brake light sensor
F8 Lambda probe
Engine components, ex-
F9 haust flap, control unit for automatic glow period
7 .
5/10
F7
Engine components, coolant pumps
5
7.5/10/
15
10/15
5/10/20
FlO
Fuel injectors, fuel control unit
Fll
Supplementary heater, heating rod 2
F12
Supplementary heater, heating rod 3
15/20
40
40
No . Electrical equipment
Fl3
Automatic gearbox control unit
FlS Horn
Ignition c o i l/CNG shut-off
Fl6 valve (natural gas engine)
Fl7
ESC control unit, engine control unit
Fl8
Terminal 30 (reference voltage)
Fl9 Windscreen wipers
F20 Horn
F22 Terminal SO, diagnostics
F23 Starter
F24
Supplementary heater, heating rod 1
F31 Vacuum pump
F32 LED headlights
F37 Auxiliary heating amps
15/30
15
20/7.S
7 .
5 s
30
10 s
30
40
15 s
20
(D
Note
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject to alterations.
Bulbs
General notes
Changing bulbs requires o certain degree of practical skill .
LED* and xenon* lights are maintenance-free and cannot be changed. For repairs, please contact a qualified workshop .
If you decide to change bulbs in the engine compartment yourself, be aware of the safety risks involved q
&
in Working on components in the engine comportment on page 212 .
You must only replace a bulb with a bulb of the same type . Information regarding e.g. the wattage can be found on the base of the bulb.
Different type s of headlight/rear light system are available:
Halogen system
Fu s e s and bulbs 253
- Xenon system
LED system
A
WARNING
- Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm - risk of burns!
- Bulbs are sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.
Do not change xenon* gas-discharge bulbs yourself. Incorrect handling of the high-voltage element of xenon gas-discharge bulbs can have potentially fatal consequences.
When changing bulbs, please take care not to Injure yourself on sharp edges, In particular on the headlight housing.
CD
CAUTION
- Always switch off the ignition before carrying out any work on the electrical system danger of short circuiting!
- Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb .
- Take good care to avoid damaging any components.
@
For the sake of the environment
A q ualified workshop can advise you how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
(D
Note
Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly.
This is not only in the interest of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users .
- Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb .
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands; use a cloth or p aper towel instead . Otherwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, ~
254 Fuses and bulb s be deposited on the reflec t or and impa i r its surface.
Bulbs at front of vehicle
N
0
.,
~
"'
F i g . 260 Halogen headlights : Overview of left side of ve hi cle
Xenon headlights*
On vehicles with xenon headlights
Q f;g. 261, you can change the following bulbs yoursel f :
Bulb (12 V)
© Turn signal
0
Turning lighr
@ Front fog lighta >
Version
PWY2 4 W
3S W (HS)
3S W(HS) a) The front fog light s o n some models will differ in ap pearance from tho s e s hown .
LEO headlight s*
The bulbs cannot be changed on veh i cles with
L ED h eadlig h ts.
A3: Bulbs at rear of vehicle
F i g . 261 Xenon headlights: Overview of left side of ve hicle
You must only replace a bulb with a bulb of the same type . Info r mation regarding e.g. the wattage can be found on the base of the bulb.
The description for changing the bulb refers to the left headlight; the procedure for the right headlight is similar.
Halogen headlights
T h e fo ll ow i ng bulbs ca n be changed on ve h icles with ha l ogen headlights¢ Fig. 26 0 :
Bulb ( 12 V)
CD
Turn signal
@ Side light
Version
PWY24W
WS W
@ Main beam hea d light/ SS/IS W daytime running light (HIS LL)
© Dipped-beam headlight (Long life)
SSW (H7 LL)
© Front fog lighta> 3S W (HS) al The front fog lights on some models will differ in appearance from those shown .
F i g. 262 Halogen system, rear light : Bulbs in side panel and boot lid
Fig . 263 Xenon/LED system, rear lig h t: Bulbs i n s id e pa n el and boot lid
Yo u m u s t only replac e a bul b with a bulb of the same type. Information rega r ding e.g. the wattage can be found on the base of the bulb .
The description for changing the bulb refers to t he left rear light unit; the procedure for the right rear light unit is similar. Iii>
Fuse s and bulbs 255
Halogen system , rear lights
The following bulbs can be changed on vehicles with halogen rear lights ¢ Fig . 262:
Bulb (12 V) Version
CD
Brake light/tail light W21W
(side panel)
@ Turn signal (rear)
(side panel)
PY21 W
® Reversing light
(boot lid)
@ Tai l light
(boot lid)
H6W
Wl6W
® Ta i l light/rear fog light W 21W
(boot lid)
Xenon/LED s ystem, rear lights*
The following bulbs can be changed on vehicles with xenon a n d LED rear lights
¢ fig. 263:
Bulb (12 V)
@ Reversing light
(side panel)
0
Rear fog light
(side panel)
Version
H6W
H 21 W
The remaining bulbs are LEDs and are therefore maintenance-free.
A3 Sportback : Bulbs at rear of vehicle
Fi g . 2 64 Halogen system, rear light : Bulbs in side panel and boot lid
F i g . 265 Xenon/LED system, rear light : Bulbs in side panel and boot lid
You must only replace a bulb with a bu l b o f the same type. Information regarding e.g. the wattage can be found on the base of the bulb.
T he descr i pt i on for changing the bu l b refers to the l e ft rear light unit; the procedure for the right rear light unit is simi l ar.
Halogen system, rear lights
The following bulbs can be changed on vehicles with halogen rear lights ¢ Fig. 264:
Bulb (12 V) Version
CD
Brake light/tail light W21W
(side panel)
@ Turn signal (rear)
(side panel)
@ Tail light
(boot lid)
©
Reversing light
(boot lid)
RYlOW
Wl6W
H6W
® Tail lig h t/rear fog light W21W
(boot lid)
Xenon/LED system, rear lights*
T he following bulbs can be changed on vehicles with xenon and LED rear lights
C>Fig. 265:
Bulb (12 V)
@ Reversing light
(side panel)
0
Rear fog light
(side panel)
Version
H6W
H 21 W
The remaining bulbs are LEDs and are therefore maintenance-free .
256 Fuses and bulbs
A3 Saloon: Bulbs at rear of vehicle
Fig. 266 Halogen system, rear light : Bulbs in side panel and boot L
Xenon/LED rear lights*
The following bulbs can be changed on vehicles with xenon and LED rear lights
¢ fig. 267:
Bulb (12 V)
® Reversing light
(side panel)
(J) Rear fog light
(side panel)
Version
H6W
H 21 W
The remaining bulbs are LEDs and are there fore maintenance-free.
Changing bulbs in headlight unit
Removing bulbs for dipped headlights
Applies to vehicles: with halogen headlights
F ig. 267 Xenon/LED system, rear light : Bulbs in side pane l and hoot l id
You must only repla · ce a bu l b with a bulb of the same type. Information regarding e .
g. the wattage can be found on the base of the bulb.
The description for changing the bu l b refers to the left rear light unit; the procedure for the right rear light unit is similar.
Halogen rear lights
The following bulbs can be changed on vehicles with halogen rear light s ¢ Fig. 266:
Bulb (12 V )
@ Turn signal (rear)
(side panel)
Version
@ Brake light /tail light W21W
(side panel)
RYlOW
@ Tail light
(boot lid)
Wl6W
@ Reversing light
(boot lid)
H6W
® Tail light/rear fog light W 21W
(boot lid)
Fig. 268 Engine compartment: Removing cover (dip pei:I head l i ghts)
For illustration purposes, ¢ Fig. 268 shows the ins ide of the unit with the headlight removed.
.. Switch off the li ghts and the ignition .
.. Please refer to
¢ .& in General notes on page253 .
.. Open the bonnet.
.. Pull off the cover In the direction of the a r row Fig. 268.
.. Turn the connector anti-cloc kwi se
~ Fig . 269 .
.. Disconnect the connector from the base of the bulb.
.. Replace the bulb c!> page 25 7 , Changing halogen bulbs.
Changing halogen bulbs
Applies t o vehicles: with halogen he adl ight s
Fuse s and bulbs 257
.. Ins ert the bulb with the lug on the connector betw ee n 4 and 5 o'clock ~
. 2 71
.&. in General notes on page 253 .
.. Look through the headlight glass to check that the bu l b is in the correc t position .
.. Turn the connector as far as the stop .
.. Replace the cover.
.. Check whether the new bulb i s working .
.. Have the headlight sett i ngs chec k ed as soon as possible.
CD
CAUTION
Make sure that the cover is correctly seated to ensure that water cannot enter the headlight housing and to prevent the headlight from malfunctioning.
Changing bulb for main beam headlights
/
daytime running lights
Applies to vehicles : with halogen headlights
Fig. 270 Inserti ng the bulb correctly
The new bulb can only be fitted correctly in one position. Please note that the lug on t he bulb should be facing the opposite direction to the lug on the bulb conn ector .
Installing bu
l
b for dipped beam headlight
App l i es to vehicles: with hal ogen headlights
Wh en changing the bulb, you con check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.
Fig. 272 Engine compartment : Remov in g cover (main beam h eadlights/daytime runn i ng lig h ts)
Fig. 271 Bulb housing: F i tting the bulb
.. If necessary, use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb .
Fig. 273 Bu l b ho l der for main beam headli ghts/dayt i me running lights
For i ll ustration purposes,
Q
Fig . 273 shows the i n s id e of the unit with the headlight removed .
.. Switch off the li ghts and the ignition .
258 Fu ses a nd bul bs
.,. Please refer to c:)
.&. in General notes on page 253.
... Open the bonnet .
... Pull off the cover c:)
Fig. 2 72 .
... Turn the connector as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow o Fig . 273 and re move the light unit from the headlight housing .
.,. Replace the bulb (together with the holder).
Installing bulb for main beam headlights/daytime running lights
App l ies to vehicles: with halogen headlights
When changing the bulb, you can check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.
Removing bulb for side lights
Applies to vehicles: with halogen headlights
Fig . 275 Engine compartment : Removing cover (side lights)
Fig. 274 Bulb hous in g : Fitting the bulb
... If necessary, use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.
... Insert the bulb c')
Fig . 2 74 o
&. in General notes on page 253 .
... Look through the headlight g l ass to check that the bulb is in the correct position.
... Carefu lly turn the bulb holder clockwise until th e contacts engage.
... Replace the cover.
... Check whether the new bu l b is working .
... Have the headlight settings checked as soon as possible.
CD
CAUTION
Make sure that the cover is correctly seat ed to ensure that water cannot enter the headlight housing and to prevent the headlight from malfunctioning .
Fig . 276 Bulb holder for s i de li ghts
For illustration purposes, c:)
Fig . 2 76 shows the inside of the unit with the headlight re moved .
... Switch off the lights and the ignition .
... Please refer to c:)
&
in General notes on page 253 .
... Open the bonnet.
... Pull off the cover In the direction of the arrow c) Fig. 275.
... Pull the bu l b connector out in the direction of t h e arrow c) Fig . 276.
... Pull the defective bulb out of the connector and rep l ace the bulb .
Fuse s and bulbs 259
Installing bulb for side lights
Applies to vehicles: with halogen headlights
Fig. 277 Bulb housing: Inserting the bulb holder
.. If necessary, use a doth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.
.. Refit the bulb i n the headlight housing c:)
Fig. 2 77 c:)
&. in General notes on page 253.
.. Press the connector carefully into the bulb housing until the bulb is securely seated
<:) Fig. 277.
.. Replace the cover.
.. Check whether the new bulb is working.
CD
CAUTION
Make sure that the cover is correctly seated to ensure that water cannot enter the headlight housing and to prevent the headlight from malfunctioning.
Removing bulbs for turn signals
App l ies to vehicles: with halogen headl i ghts
Fig . 279 Bulb holder for turn signal
For i ll ustration purposes, c:)
Fig. 2 79 shows the i nside of the unit with the headlight removed .
.. Switch off the light s and the ignition.
... Please refer to
Q
&. in General notes on page 253 .
.. Open the bonnet.
... Pu ll off the cover c:)
Fig . 2 78 .
.. Pu ll the bulb connector out in the direction of the arrow Q Fig. 279.
.. Pu ll the defective bulb out of the connector and replace the bulb .
Installing bulb for turn signal
Applies to vehicles. with halogen headlights
F i g . 278 Engine compartment : Remov i ng cover
Fig. 280 Bu l b housi n g: In serting the bu l b holder
... If n ecessary, use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb .
.. Refit the bulb in the headlight housing
Fig. 280
Q A in Ceneral notes on page 253. Turn the bulb connector slightly to the left and right until it engages in the ho l der .
.. Press the connector carefully into the b ulb housing until the bulb is securely seated .
.. Replace the cover .
.. Check whether the new bulb is working . ~
260 Fuses and bulbs
CD
CAUTION
Make sure that the cover is correctly seated to ensure that water cannot enter the headlight housing and to prevent the headlight from malfunctioning.
Removing bulbs for turn signals
App l ies to vehicles: with xenon headlight bu l bs
Installing bulb for turn signal
Applies to vehicles: with xenon h ead light bulbs
Fig. 281 Eng in e compartment : Removing cover
Fig. 282 Bulb holder for turn signa l
For illustration purposes, ~ shows the inside of the unit with the headlight removed.
• Switch off the lights and the ignition .
• Please refer to
~ .&.
in
General notes on page253 .
... Open the bonnet.
• Pull off the cover~ Fig. 281 .
... Pull the bulb connector out in the direction of the arrow q Fig. 282 .
... Pull the defective bulb out of the connector and replace the bulb.
Fig. 283 Bulb hous in g: T ightening the bulb holder
... If necessary, use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb .
... Refit the bulb in the headlight housing
¢ Fig. 283 q
.&. in General notes on page 253. Turn the bulb co nnector slight ly to the left and right until it engages in the holder .
... Press the connector carefully into the bulb housing until the bulb is securely seated .
... Replace the cover.
• Check whether the new bulb is working.
CD
CAUTION
Make sure that the cover is correctly seat ed to ensure that water cannot enter the headlight housing and to prevent the headlight from malfunctioning.
Removing bulb for turning light
Applies to vehicles : with xenon headlight bu l bs
Fuse s and bulbs 261
Installing bulb for turning light
Applies to vehicles: with xenon headlight bulbs
F ig. 2 84 Eng i ne compartment : Remov i ng cover o n b u lb hous i ng
Fi g . 28 5 Bulb h olde r for tu rn i n g l ight
For i l lus t ration pu r poses, r::;, Fig . 285 shows the insi d e of the un i t w i th the headlig h t removed .
• Switch off the lights and the i gnition .
• Please refer to r::;,
A in General notes on page253.
• Open the bonnet.
• Turn the cover anti-clockwise and remove i t r::;, fig. 284.
• Turn the bulb connector as far as the stop in the d i rect i on of the arrow r::!) fig . 285 and remove the connector and bulb from t he headlight housing.
• Re l ease the bulb from the connector .
Fig . 286 Bu l b h ousi n g : T ighte nin g the bulb holde r
• If necessa r y, use a cloth to r emove any finge ir pri nts from the glass part of the bulb.
• Refit the bu l b in the headlight housing r::;, Fig . 2 86
~ A s on page 253. Turn the bulb connector slightly to th e left and right until it engage s i n the holder.
• From this position, turn the bulb connector fur t her in the direction of t he arrow unti l it is seated secure l y .
• Fit the cover back on and turn it as far as the stop to tig h ten.
• Check whether the n ew bulb is working.
CD
CAUTION
Make sure that the cover is correctly seated to. ensure that water cannot enter the headlight housing and to prevent the headlight from ma l functioning .
262 Fuses and bulbs
Changing
bulb
for front fog light
Removing fog light
App l ies to vehicles: with f r ont fog lig h ts
To change the bulb, you must remove the fog
Light. Removing the Light requires o certain degree of practical skill.
Changing bulb for front fog light
Fig. 287 Detail from front of vehicle, left s ide: Removing tr i m
Fig . 288 Detail from front of vehicle, left side: Fo~ light
.. Switch off the ignition and the lights .
.. Take the hook for r emoving hub caps and the screwdr iv er out of the tool kit
Q page 236 .
.. Insert the hook in the hole @ Q Fig . 287 .
.. Insert the screwdriver through the ring on the hook in order to pull it .
.. Use the screwdriver to pull off the trim
¢Fig. 287 and remove it from the bumper .
.. Use the cross-head blade of the reversible screwdriver insert
Q page 236 to r emove the screws (!) r::;, Fig. 288 .
.. Carefully take out the fog light housing.
Fi9. 289 Fo g light housing removed
.. Press down the tab (!) and unplug the electrical connector @ ¢ Fig. 289 .
.. Turn the bulb holder anti clockwise and take it out .
.. F i t the new bulb .
.. If necessary, use a cloth to remove any fin gerpr in ts from the glass part of the bulb.
.. Fit the bulb holder into the bulb housing and turn it clockwise to tighten. Plug in the electrical connector again .
.. Check whether the new bulb is working .
.. Re-install the fog light unit. The studs @
¢page 262, Fig. 288 help to loc ate the unit in the correct position .
.. Tighten the screws (!) ¢ page 262, Fig. 288 and refit the trim panel.
.. Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
(D
Note
To install the fog light, follow the instructions for removal in reverse order.
A3/A3 Sportback:
Changing bulbs for rear lights
Removing outer rear light
Applies to vehicles: with h a logen system (A3/A3
Sportback)
To change the bulbs, you must remove the rear light. Removing the light requires a certain degree of practical skill.
Fu s e s a nd bulb s 263
... Follow the remaining directions on
Qpage263.
CD
CAUTION
When removing or installing the rear light, take care not to cause any damage.
Removing the rear light in particular can lead to the paintwork or rear light becoming damaged. This is another reason why we recommend having the bulbs changed by a qualified workshop.
(!)
Note
F o ll ow the same procedure for installi n g/ removing the rear light when replacing an
LED rear light unit.
Removing outer rear light (continued)
Applies to vehicles· with halogen system CA3/A3
Sportback) F i g . 290 Luggage compartment: Location of the re· talnlng screw for the rear trght (example on left side)
Fig. 291 Releasing rear light from luggage compart· ment (example on left side)
... Check which of the bulbs is defective.
... Open the boot lid.
... Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool k i t
Q page 236. Use the flat-blade side of the reversible insert.
... Remove the cover from the side trim
Q
Fig. 290. On vehicles with side com part· ment, a coin is required in order to release the cover.
... Insert the screwdriver Into one of the hori· zontal holes on the head of the retaining screw in order to turn it
Q
Fig. 291.
... Slacken the screw by turning it anti-clockwise (you may have to reapply the screwdriver several times) .
F ig. 292 Removing rear light
... Take the p l astic spatula out of the vehicle too l kit .
... Carefully slide the plastic spatula into the gap between t h e rear light and the body
-arrow~Fig. 292.
... Gradua l ly ease out the rear light by pu l ling alternately with one hand towards arrow
CD and with the other towards arrow @
~Fig. 292 and take out the rear light unit.
... Remove the bulb carrier: A3
Q page 264,
A3 Sportback
Q page 264 i Note
Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light, to avoid any scratches.
264 Fuses and bulbs
Removing bulb carrier
Applies to vehicles: with halogen system (A3)
When changing o bulb, you must first remove the bulb carrier.
Fig . 296 Securing tab~ between bulb ca rrier and rear light
• First release the connector © and then pull it out immediately @ c:)
Fig. 295 .
• Pull or push the securing tabs @ and @ away from the bulb carrier and lift it off ® i=:>Fig. 296.
• Renew the defective bulb c:) page 264.
Changing a bulb
Applies to veh1des: with halogen system (A3/A3
Sportback)
Fig. 2 94 Sec uring tabs between bu l b carrier and rear light
• First release the connector © and then pull it out immediately @
9
Fig. 293.
•Pu sh the securing tabs @ away from the bulb carr i er and lift it off @ c) Fig. 294.
• Renew the defective bulb c:) page 264.
Removing bulb carrier
App l ies to vehicles: with halogen system (A3 Sportback)
When changing o bulb, you must first remove the bulb carrier.
Fig . 297 Position of the bulbs on the bulb carrier (ex · amp l e: left rear light)
The table below gives an overview of the bulb positions.
Bufo @ has a plug-in connectio n and can be c h anged simply by pulling out the old bulb and inserting a new one.
Bu [b @ is secured by a bayonet fastener:
"" Lightly press the defective bulb @ into the bulb carrier, then turn it anti-clockwi'se and remove i t.
• Fit the new bulb @ , pressing it into the bulb holder and turn i t c l ockwise as far as it will go.
Fig. 295 Rear light : Unplugg i ng connector
• If necessary, use a doth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb @ /
® ·
• Check whether the new bulb is working .
• Re-install the bulb carrier c:> page 265 .
Position of bulbs
Pos .
<>Fig. 297
A
B
Bulb function
Tail Light/brake light
Turn signal
Installing bulb carrier
Ap pl ies t o vehicles: with h alogen sys t e m (A3/A3
Sportback)
• Check that the seal is seated correctly on the bulb carrier.
• Position the bulb carrier on the rear light and align it with the securing tabs .
.. Lightly press the bulb carrier into the rear light until it engages. Make sure that all three securing tabs click into place .
• Re-install the rear light c:> page 265 .
Installing outer rear light
Ap pl ies to vehicles: with h a l ogen system (A3/A3
Sportback)
Fuse s and bulbs 265
• Make sure that all bulbs for the rear lights are working.
.. Refit the cover in the side trim in the luggage compartment.
"' Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment .
Removing bulb carrier from boot lid
Applies to vehicles: with halogen system (A3)
The boot lid
must
be open to change the bulbs.
Fig. 299 Open boot lid : Remov i ng cover from boot lid interior trim
Fig. 298 F itting the rear light
• Insert the rear light in the direction of the arrow.
.. Gent l y press in the rear light at various points on the body.
• Apply light pressure on the rear light and fit the screw from the l uggage compartment side to secure the rear light. Tighten the screw with the screwdriver (do not over tig hten).
Fig. 300 R e moving b u lb c arrier
• Check which of the bulbs is defective .
• Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool kit c:> page 236. Use the flat-blade side of the reversible insert.
• Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the cover <> Fig. 299 and detach the cover .
.. Re l ease the bulb carrier at position @
<> Fig . 300 and carefully pull i t off in the direction of the arrow @ .
• Changing the bulb <> page 266.
266 Fu se s and bul bs
Removing bulb carrier from boot lid
Applies to vehicles: with halogen, xenon or LED system
(A3 Sportbackl
The boot lid must be open to change the bulbs.
Changing bulbs for inner rear lights
Applies to vehicles: with halogen system (A3/A3
Sportback)
Fig. 301 Open boot l id: Removing cover from boot lid inte rior tr i m
Fig . 302 Removing bunb carrier
• Check which of the bulbs is defective.
•Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool kit c::> page 236. Use the flat-blade side of the reversible insert.
• Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the cover c::> Fig. 301 and detach the cover .
• Release the bulb carrier at position @ c::> Fig. 302 and carefully pull it off in the direction of the arrow @ .
• Change the bulbs (halogen system) c::> page 266.
•Change the bulbs (xenon/LED system)
~page 267.
F ig. 303 Posit ion of the bulbs on the bu l b carrier (example: inner left rear ltght)
The table below gives an overview of the bulb pos i tions .
Bu[bs @ and © have a plug-in connection and can be changed simply by pulling out the old bulb and i nserting a new one.
Bulb ® is secured by a bayonet fastener:
• Lightly press the defective bulb ® into the bulb carrier, then turn it anti-clockw ~ se and remove it.
• Fit the new bulb @ , pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.
• If necessary, use a cloth to remove any fingerpr i nts from the glass part of the bulb @ /
@ !
@ .
• Check whether the new bulb is working .
• Re-install the bulb carrier <::> page 266.
Position of bulbs
P os . c::> Fig. 303
Bulb f un c t io n
A Tail light/rear fog light
B Reversing light c
Tai l light
Installing bulb carrier for inner rear light
Applies to vehicles . with halogen system (A3/A3
Sportback)
,. Position the bulb carrier on the rear light and align it so that it is securely seated. Ill>
.. Press the bulb carrier into the rear light until it engages.
.. Replace the c over in the interior trim .
.. M a k e s ure that all bulb s for the rear light s are working.
.. Put the tool s and jack back in the luggage compartment.
Removing bulb carrier from boot lid
Applies to vehicles: with xenon or LE D system (A3)
The boot lid must be open to change the bulbs.
Fuse s and bulbs 267
Changing bulbs for inner rear lights
Applies to vehicles: with xenon or LED system (A3/
A3 Sportback)
All bulb s can be changed easily on the bulb
Fig. 304 Open boot lid : Removing cover fro m boot lid i nter i o r t rim
Fig. 305 Remov i ng b ulb c arr i e r
.. Check which of the bulbs is defective.
.. Take the screwdrive r out of the vehicle tool kit¢ page 236. Use the flat-blade side of the reversible insert .
.. Insert the screwdriver i nto the opening in the cover ~ . 304 .
.. Re l ease the bulb carrier at position (!)
~ Fig. 305 and carefu ll y pull it off in the d i rection of the arrow @ .
.. Changing the bulb ~ 266.
Fig. 306 Pos i t i on of the bu l b s on t h e bulb c arri e r (ex a mpl e: inn e r l eft r e ar l i gh t )
The bulbs are s ecured with a bayonet fastener .
The 1!: able below gives an overview of the bulb positions .
... Lightly press the defective bulb into the bu l b carrier, then turn i t anti-clockwise and remove it .
.. Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise as far as it wi ll go .
... If necessary, use a cloth to remove any fin gerprints from the glass part of the bulb .
... Check whether the new bulb is working .
... Rei nstall the bulb carrier ~ page 267.
Position of bulbs
Bulb function Pos.
Q fig . 306
A
B
Reversing light
Rear fog light
Installing bulb carrier for inner rear light
App li es to vehicles: with xenon or LED system (A3/
A3 Sportback)
... Position the bulb carr i er on the rear light and align it so that it is securely s eated .
... Pre s s the bulb carrier into th e rear light until i t engages .
... Replace the cover in the interior trim .
11>-
268 Fuses and bulbs
• Make sure that a ll bulbs for t h e r ear lights are wor k ing .
• Put the tool s and j a c k ba c k in th e luggage comp a r t m e n t.
A3 Saloon: Changing
bulbs for rear lights
Removing outer rear light
A p plies to v ehicles: w ith h a l ogen sys t e m (A3 Saloon)
To change the bulbs, you must remove the rear light. R emoving the light requires a certain degree of pract i cal skill .
Fi g . 30 7
• Carefully slide th e p l astic spat u la into the gap between the r e ar light a n d the body
-arrow c::> Fig. 308.
• Gradu a lly e a s e out th e r ea r ligh t by pulling alt e rnate l y with one hand towards arrow
CD and with the other towards arrow @ c::> Fig . 308 and take out the rear light un i t.
• Unp l ug the e l ectrica l connector c::> page 268 .
CD
CAUTION
When remov i ng or i nsta l ling the rear lig h t, take care not to cause any damage.
Removing the rear lig h t in part i cular can lead to the paintwork or rear light becoming damaged. This i s another reason w h y we r ecommend having the bu l bs changed by a qualified work s hop.
(D
Note
F o ll ow t he same procedure for installing/ r emoving the rear ligh t when r epl a c in g an
LE D r ear tigh t u nit .
Unplugging the connector and removing the bulb carrier
Applies to veh i cles : wit h halogen system (A3 Sa l oo n )
Fig. 30 8 R emov i n g r e ar Ligh t
Rele a sing rear light
• Check which of the bulbs is defect i ve.
• Open the boot lid.
• Take the sc r ewd r iver and the Torx bit out of the vehicle too l kit c:;, page 236.
• Remove the cover
CD
G Fig . 307 .
• Use the screwdriver with the app r opriate
Torx b i t to loosen b oth screws @ c::> Fig . 307 .
Removing rear light
• Tak e t h e plasti c s pa t ul a ou t o f t h e vehicl e tool kit ~ pag e 236.
Fi g. 3 0 9 Rear l i ght : U n p l u ggi n g co nn ect o r
F ig. 310 Securing ta b s b et w ee n bu ll;> ca rri e r an d rear lig h t ....
Unplugging the connector
... First release the connector (!) and then pull it out immedlately @ Q Fig. 309.
Remo v ing bulb carrier
When changing a bulb, you must first remove the bulb carrier . There are three securing tabs on the inside of the rear light.
... Push the securing tabs -a rrows away from the bulb carrier and lift it off ~ . 310 .
... Renew the defective bulb c) page 269.
Q)
Note
Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light, to avoid any scratches .
Changing a bulb
Applies to vehicles : with halogen system (A3 Saloon)
0
~
>
"'
Fuse s and bulbs 269
... Check whether the new bulb is working .
... Re-install the bulb carrier ~
Position of bulb s
Po s. c) page 264,
Fig . 297
A
B
Bulb fun c tion
Tail light/brake light
Turn signal
Installing bulb carrier
Applies to vehicles. A3 Saloon
" Check that the seal is seated correctly on t h e bu l b carrier.
" Position the bulb carr i er on the rear light and align it with the securing tabs .
... Lightly press the bulb carr i er into the rear lig h t until it engages . Make sure that all the securing tabs click into place .
... Re-install the rear light ~
Installing outer rear light
Applies to vehicles: A3 Saloon
@
Fig. 311 Position of the bulbs on the bulb carrier (example for left rear light)
The table below g i ves an overview of the bulb positions.
Bulb @ has a plug-in connection and can be changed simply by pu lllng out the old bulb and inse r ting a new one.
Bulb ® is secured by a bayonet fastener:
... Lightly press the defective bulb @ into the bulb carrier, then turn it anti-clockwise and remove it.
... Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will go .
... If necessary, use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb @ or @ .
Fi g . 3 12 F i tting the rear light
... Insert the rear light in the direction of the arrow @ .
" Gently press in the rear light at various po i nts on the body .
... Lightly press in the rear light and attach it with the both bolts @ .
... Replace the cover @ over the screws .
... Make sure that all bulbs for the rear lights are work ing .
... Pu t the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
2 70 Fuses and bulbs
Removing bulb carrier from boot lid
Applies to vehicles: with halogen system (A3 Saloon)
The boot lid must be open to change the bulbs.
Changing bulbs for inner rear lights
Applies to vehicles: with halogen system (A3 Sa l oon)
Fig . 313 Open bootlid (A3 Saloon) : Removing cover from boot lid In terior trim
Fig. 314 Boot lid (A 3 Saloon}: Re moving bulb carr i er
• Check which of the bulbs is defective.
• Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool kit<::) page 236. Use the flat-blade side of the reversible insert.
•U se the screwdriver to lever open the cover
¢ Fig. 313.
• Release the bulb carrier at position ©
¢Fig. 314 and carefu ll y pull it off in the direction of the arrow @ .
• Change the bulbs (halogen system)
¢page 270.
Fig . 315 Pos ition of the bu lbs on the b ul b car.-ier (examp l e for i nner left rear l ight)
The table below gives an ove r view of the bulb positions.
Bullbs @ and @ have a plugi n connection and can be changed s i mply by pull i ng out the old bulb and inserting a new one.
Bu llb © i s secured by a bayonet fastene r :
• Lightly press the defective bulb © i n to the bulb carrier, then turn it anti-clockw f se and remove i t .
• Fit t h e ne w bulb © , pressi n g it into the bulb holder and turn i t clockwise as far as it w i ll go.
• If necessary, use a cloth to remove any fingerpr i nts from the glass part of the bulb @ /
@
!
©
.
• Check whether the new bulb is working.
.. Rei nstall the bulb carrier "'* page 2 70.
Position of bulbs
Pos.
~ page 266,
Fig. 303
A
B c
Bulb function
Tai l light
Tai l light/rear fog lig h t
Reversing light
Installing bulb carrier for inner rear light
Applies to vehicles: with halogen system (A3 Sa l oon>
• Position the bulb carrier on the rear l ight and align it so that it is securely seated . .,.
• Press the bulb carrier into the rear light until it engages.
• Fold the cover open completely.
• Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment .
• Make sure that all bulbs for the rear lights are working .
Removing bulb carrier from boot lid
Applies to vehicles: with xenon or LED sys t em (A3 Saloon)
The boot lid must be open to change the bulbs.
Fuse s and bulbs 271
Changing bulbs for inner rear lights
Applies to vehicles: with xenon or LED system (A3 Saloon)
Fig. 3 1 6 Open boot li d : Remov i ng cover from boot lid interior t ri m
F i g. 3 17 Removing bulb carrier
• Check which of the bulbs is defective .
• Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool kit
Q page 236 . Use the flat-blade side of the reversible insert.
• Use the screwdriver to lever open the cover
Q fi9 . 316 .
• Release the bulb carrier at position @
~ Fig. 317 and carefully pull it off in the direction of the arrow @ .
• Changing the bulb ~ page 271.
F i g . 3 1 8 Posit i on of the bulbs on the bulb carr i er (examp l e for inner left rear light)
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener.
The table below gives an overview of the bulb pos i tions.
• Lightly press the defective bulb into the bu l b carrier, then turn it anti-clockwise and remove it .
• Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb ho l der and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.
• If necessary, use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb .
• Check whether the new bulb is working.
• Re-install the bulb carrier
C) page 271.
Position of bulbs
Po s.
~ page267,
Fig. 306
Bulb function
A
B
Reversing light
Rear fog light
Installing bulb carrier for inner rear light
Appl i es to vehicles: with xenon or LED system (A3 Saloon)
• Position the bulb carrier on the rear light and align it so that it is securely seated .
• Press the bulb carrier into the rear light until it engages .
• Fold the cover open completely .
• Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
• Make sure that all bulbs for the rear lights are working .
272 Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle identification data
Fig . 319 E ng i n e com p a rtment : Veh i cle ID n u mbe r
xxxx
x x
x x xxxx xxx
x
x
©-t
i
=
:
~r.:
·
:: xxx xxx xx
xx
x
xxxxxxxx
XXX XXX llYPI xx xxxx x x x xx x )( x x
I XXX K W
@-t :.r: : ~~
xxxx
XXX
xxx xxx
©+
l:l~a= l
xxxx
I
xxxx xxx
I
xx
II. · NIS:n / .-S
~-
EOA 70 5 4U8 6 XM 5SG 5R W
2EH JOZ lLB lAS lBA
3 FC
FOA
5 M U 7 Xl
9G3 OG7 OYH OJF
TL6 3KA 8EH Ul A X 98 OZ7 l XW 803 908 8Z4 020
7T6 C V J 7 K O 4X3 2 K 2
3L 4 4 K C 3YO 413 502 lS A 7GB Ol A 4GO
)()( x xx x xx x xxxx
F i g . 320 Veh i cle data s ticker
Chassis number on MMI
"' Se l ect : I M E NU I b u tton> co n t r o l b utto n Systems I Car systems > Servicing & checks >
Chassis number .
Chassis number
The chass is number can be found on the MMI, on the veh i cl e data s t i cker and behind the windscreen on th e driver ' s si de • . The chassis number i s al s o located on the r i ght of the engine compartment (as seen i n the d i rection o f travel). The number is stamped on the top s i de rail
Q
F i g. 319 and is partially covered.
Type plate
The type plate is lo c ated o n th e passenger ' s door p i llar . Vehicles for c ertain export coun tries have no type plate.
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker ~ Fig. 319 is under the carpet trim in the luggage compartmen t in t he spare wheel well . One section of the veh i cl e data sticker is attached to the inside cover of the Service Sched ul e before the vehicle is h a nd e d o v er .
T he stic k er lis t s the following data :
<D
Veh i cle identif i cation number (chassis number)
@ Vehicle type I engine power I gearbox type
@ Engine and gearbox code letters
©
Paint No . I Inter i or equ i pment No .
®
Optional equipment c odes
@ Fuel consumption a nd emi ss ion s *
Engine code
You can check the engine code on the instrument clu s ter .
Important: The engin e mu s t be s witched off and the i gnit i on mu s t be s w i tched on .
Press and hold the lo .
o l but t o n ® Q page 9,
Fig . 3 fo r at leas t 15 seco n ds.
Fuel consumption and emissions l)
I n for mat i on on the vehicle's fuel consumpt i on and emissions is given at the bottom of the vehicle data sticker @ :
@ Urban cycle con s umption (ltr ./ 10 0 km)
@ Extra-urban cycl e c on s umpt i on Cltr ./ 100 km ) ~
1 )
All the flgures are n ot avail a ble for all e x port versions.
I n this case, the fle l ds co n tain pl ace ho l ders, for ex · amp l e 99.9.
Technical data 273
©
Combined cycle consumption (ltr./100 km)
@ Combined C0
2 emissions {g/km)
The spec ified values were determined in accordance with the required test procedures.
The specifications do n o t refer to an individual vehicle, but serve only as a basis for compar ing the d i ffe r ent types of vehicles. In addit i o n , the consumption figures ach i eved during normal driv i ng may differ from the test values, depend i ng i n part i cular on special eq uipm ent fitted, veh i cle loading, personal driving sty le, road and traff i c conditions, environmental factors and the condition of the car.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depend i ng on the model version, equipment variant and measurement standards used in specific countries .
Length
Width
Width across mirrors
Height, unladen
Length
Width
Width across mirrors
Height, unladen mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
A3
4237
1777
1966
1421
A3 Sportback
4310-4324
178S
1966
14 1 4-1436
S3
42S4
1777
1966
1401
S3 Sportback
4324
1 78S
1 966
1 404
Length
Width
Width across mirrors
Height, unladen
Take care not to damage low-mounted parts of the car (such as the spoiler or exhaust system) on steep ramps, uneven road surfaces or roadside kerbs, etc. Please bear this in mind, espec i ally when the veh i cle is fully laden. mm mm mm mm
A3 Saloon
44S6-4472
1796
1960
1391-1416
Windscreen washer
W i ndscreen and headlight washer system*
S3 Saloon
4469-4472
1796
1960
1392 l tr. approx.
3.1 l tr. approx.
4.7
Capacities
Explanation of technical data
Fu el tank front-wheel drive
Fuel tank four-wheel drive
Fuel tank
Natural gas ltr. approx. so ltr. approx .
SS kg lS
The fig ures for some markets can vary due to different export versions and test procedures.
Please note that the details li sted in the v e hicl e ' s r eg i s trati on d oc um e nt s can be taken as correct.
274 Technical data
Performance figures
The performance figures were measured without
equipment
which may influence perform -
ance, such as
mudflaps or extremely w i de-sec -
tion tyres.
Kerb we i ght (unladen weight)
I n accordance with G B 1589 for China : the ker b weight does not in clu d e the driver .
In accordance with 92/ 2 1/ EE C for Eu rope a nd certain othe r mar k ets: the ke r b we i gh t in
-
cludes an allowance of 7 5 kg for t h e d r iver and l uggage .
M a ximum weights / loads for towing 1)
When
towing, the
gross vehicle weight
and the
m a ximum rear axle weight may be
excee-
ded by up to
50
kg .
Maximum trailer weights l)
The maximum trailer weights are ca l culated in accordance w i th the cu r rently applicable ver sion of 92/21/ EE C.
Maximum draw bar loading
1
>
The
vertical load exerted by the trai l er draw bar on
the
ball j oint of the towing bracket must not
exceed
75 kg .
I n the
inte
r
est
of
safety,
we recommend applying
the
m a ximum permitted draw bar weight. The stabilit y of the trail e r could be adver s el y affected if too little weight i s ap plied .
If the maximum permitted drawbar we i ght cannot be obta i ned, e.g. when usi n g small or light t r
ailers,
statuto r y regu l ations require that the d r awbar weight be at least 4% of the ac t ual tra i le r weight (for single-axle trailers or
tw
i
n
-
axle tra
i
lers with an axle spacing less
than 1.0 m) .
Notes fo r following tables
MG = Manual gearbox I AG = Automatic gea r box
1)
M
aximum
spee d i s ac hieved in
the second
highest g ear .
2
>
The
spec
i fied t railer weights apply only to vehicles with a factory-fitted towing b r ac k et.
T owing bracket not available fo r China.
3)
In some markets,
this
engine has different performance/torque specifications (see car doc u mentation) . The performance figures may be slight l y different .
4
> Figure s were not
avai
l
ab
l
e at time
of
publ
i
cation.
5)
Governed
1) Th e in formation a pp l ies o nl y to veh icles with a facto· ry· fi tt e d towing b racket. Tow ing bracket not available for C h i na .
Technical data 275
Petrol engines
A3 1.2, 4-cylinder
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 -
100
km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ig ht)
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear axle weight kg kg
Trailer 2l without brakes kg
Trailer2l with brakes on gradients up to
8
%
Tra il er2l with brakes on grad i ents up to
12
% kg kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2l on gradients up to
12
% kg sec. kg kg
77
kW at
5000
rpm
175
Nm at
1400
-
4000
rpm
FWD km/h
MG AG
193
1)
1931)
10.3
1225
1710
10 .3
1245
1730
910 935
905 905
610 620
1500 1500
1300 1300
3060 3080
Footnotes ¢page 274
A3 1.4, 4-cylinder (9Q3l kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from
0
-
100
km/h
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross vehicle we ig ht
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear axle weight
Trailer2> without brakes
Trail er2l with brakes on grad i en t s up t o 8 %
Trailer 2l with brakes on grad i ents up to
12
% kg kg kg
We i ght of vehicle and trailer2 l on gradients up to
12
% kg km/h sec. kg kg kg kg
MG: 903 > kW at 5000
-
6200 rpm
AG: 903> kW at 5000 rpm
2003
l Nm at
1400 - 4000
rpm
FWD
MG AG
203
1)
203
1
>
9.3 9.2
1250 1270
1735
1755
920 935
930 915
620 630
1600 1600
1400
1400
3185 3205
Footnotes c::> page 2 7 4
2 76 Technical data
A3 1.4, 4-cylinder (103 kW) with Active Cylinder Management
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ight )
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle we i ght
Maximum rear axle we ig ht
Tra i ler2) without brakes
Trailer2) with brake s on gradients up to 8 % kg kg kg
Trailer 2 ) with brake s on gradient s up to 12 % kg
Weight of veh i cle and trailer 2 ) on gradients up to 12 % kg
103 kW at 5000 rpm
250 Nm at 1500 3500 rpm km/h sec. kg
FWD
MG AG
213 213 1)
8.3 8.3
1270 128 0 kg kg
1755 1 765
935 950
925 920
630 640
1700 1700
1500 1500
3305 3315
Footnotes c::> page 2 7 4
A3 1.8, 4-cylinder
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acc e l e ration from 0 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we i ght)
Gross vehicle weight km/h
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear axle we ig ht kg k g
Trailer2) without brakes kg
Trail er2) with brakes on grad i ents up to 8 % k g
Tra i ler2) with brakes on grad i ents up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2) on gradients up to 12 % k g
FWD: 132 kW at 5100 6200 rpm quattro: 132 kW at 4500 6200 rpm
FWD: 250 Nm at 1250 - 5000 rpm quattro: 280 Nm at 1350 - 4500 rpm s e c. kg kg
FWD
MG AG
232 232 1)
7.1 7 .
2
1305 1325
1790 1810
970 1010
915 925
650 660
1800 1800
1600 1600
3440 3460 quattro
AG
228
6.7
1 425
1910
1030
975
710
1800
1600
3560
Footnotes c::> page 2 7 4
53 2.0, 4-cylinder
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ight )
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle we i ght
Maximum rear axle weight
Footnotes ~ page 2 7 4
Technical data 2 77
221 3> kW at 5500 6200 rpm
380 3 ) Nm at 1800 - 5500 rpm quatt r o
MG AG
2SQ5l 2SQ5l km/h sec. kg kg kg kg
5 .
2 4.8
1470 1490
1955 1975
1035 1050
1005 1005
2 78 Technical data
A3 Sportback 1.2, 4-cylinder
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ight )
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle we i ght
Maximum rear axle we ig ht
Tra i ler2) without brakes
Trailer2) with brakes on gradients up to 8 %
Trailer 2) with brakes on gradients up to 12 % kg
Weight of veh i cle and trailer2) on gradients up to 12 % kg kg kg kg kg kg
77 kW at 5000 rpm
175 Nm at 1400 4000 rpm km/h sec. kg
FWD
MG AG
193l) 193l)
10.5 10.5
1255 1275
1740 1 760
930 955
930 925
620 630
1500 1500
1300 1300
3090 3110
Footnotes c::> page 2 7 4
A3 Sportback g-tron 1.4, 4-cylinder (81 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb w eig ht (unladen weight)
Gross veh i cle we i ght
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear ax l e we i ght
Trailer2) without brakes
Trail er2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 8 %
81 kW at xxx-xxx
4
' rpm
200 Nm at xxx-xxx 4 ) rpm
FWD
MG
__ 4) km/h
AG
__ 4)
__ 4) sec.
__ 4)
__ 4) kg
__ 4)
_ _4) kg
_ _4)
__ 4) __ 4) kg
__ 4) kg
__ 4)
__ 4) __ 4) kg k g
_ _4) _ _4)
__ 4) __ 4 )
Trailer2) with brakes on gradients up to 12 % kg
Weight of veh i cle and trailer2) on gradients up to 12 % k g
__ 4) __ 4)
Footnotes c::> page 2 7 4
Technical data 2 79
A3 Sportback 1.4, 4-cylinder (9Q3l kW)
Power output
Max imum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear axle weight sec. kg kg kg
Trai l er2l without brakes
Trailer2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 8 % kg kg
Trailer 2l with brakes on gradients up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2l on gradients up to 12 % kg
MG : 903> kW at 5000 · 6200 rpm
AG : 903 > kW at 5000 rpm
2003 > Nm at 1400 · 4000 rpm
FWD km /h kg
MG A G
203 1 > 203 1 >
9.5 9.3
1280 1300
1765 1785
935 960
950 945
640 650
1600 1600
1400 1400
3215 3235
Footnotes
Q page 2 74
A3 Sportback 1.4, 4-cylinder ( 103 kW) with Active Cylinder Management
Power output
Maximum torque
Dr ive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front ax l e weight
Maximum rear axle we i ght
Trailer 2l without brakes
Trailer2 l with brakes on gradients up to 8 %
Trailer2l with brakes on gradients up to 12 % kg kg kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer 2l on gradients up to 12 % kg
1 03 kW at 5000 rpm
250 Nm at 1500 - 3500 rpm km/h sec . kg kg kg kg
FWD
MG AG
213 213 1
)
8 .
4 8 .
4
1300 1310
1785 1795
955 970
945 945
650 650
1700 1700
1500 1500
3335 3345
Footnotes C> page 274
280 Technical data
A3 Sportback 1.8
, 4 cylinder
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
FWD: 132 kW at 5100 6200 rpm quattro: 132 kW at 4500 6200 rpm
FWD: 250 Nm at 1250 5000 rpm quattro: 280 Nm at 1350 4500 rpm km/h sec.
FWD
MG AG
235 235 1
>
7.2 7.3 quattro
AG
228
6.8
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 100 km/h
In accordance with GB 1589 for China
Kerb weight (unladen we i ght)
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front ax le weight
Maximum rear axle weight kg kg kg kg
1415
1865
1025
945
In accordance with 92/21/EEC for Europe and certain other markets
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear axle weight
Trailer2 > without brakes
Trailer 2l with brakes on gradients up to 8 % kg kg kg
Trailer2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2l on gradients up to 12 % kg kg kg kg
1335 1355
1820 1840
990 1020
945 945
660 670
1800 1800
1600 1600
3470 3490
Footnotes page 2 74
1455
1940
1055
1000
720
1800
1600
3590
53 Sportback 2.0, 4-cylinder
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front ax le weight
Maximum rear axle weight
Footnotes ~ page 2 7
2213) kW at 5500 6200 rpm
3803) Nm at 1800 - 5500 rpm km/h sec. kg kg kg kg quattro
MG AG
250 5
>
250 5
>
5.3 4.9
1500 1520
1985 2005
1050 1070
1025 1020
Technical data 281
A3 Saloon 1.2, 4-cylinder
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ight )
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front ax l e we i ght
Maximum rear axle we ig ht
Tra il er2l without brakes
Trailer2l with brakes on gradients up to 8 %
77 kW at 5000 rpm
175 Nm at 1400 - 4000 rpm
FWD
MG
_ _4)
AG
_ _4 ) km/h sec.
__ 4) __ 4)
__ 4) kg
__ 4)
__ 4) kg
__ 4)
__ 4) __ 4 ) kg
_ _4) _ _4 ) kg
__ 4) __ 4 ) kg kg
__ 4) __ 4 )
__ 4 ) __ 4 )
Trailer 2 l with brake s on grad i ent s up to 12 % kg
Weight of veh i cle and trailer 2 l on gradients up to 12 % kg
__ 4 ) __ 4 )
Footnotes <=:> page 2 7 4
A3 Saloon 1.4, 4-cylinder (9o
3
> kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we i ght)
Gross veh i cle we i ght km/h
Maximum front ax l e weight
Maximum rear ax l e we ig ht
Trailer2l without brakes kg k g kg
Trail er2l wi t h brakes on grad i en t s up t o 8 % k g
Trailer2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and tr ailer2l on gradients u p to 1 2 % k g
MG : 903> kW at 5000 6200 rpm
AG: 903> kW at 5000 rpm
MG: 2003> Nm at 1400 - 4000 rpm
AG: 2003> Nm at 1500 - 4000 rpm sec. kg kg
FWD
MG AG
212 211 1 >
9.4 9 .
3
1 2 90 1310
1765 1785
925 950
945 945
640 650
1600 1600
1400 1400
3215 3235
Footnotes <=:> page 2 7 4
282 Technical data
A3 Saloon 1.4, 4-cylinder (103 kW) with Active Cylinder Management
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ight )
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle we i ght
Maximum rear axle we ig ht
Tra i ler2) without brakes
Trailer2) with brake s on gradients up to 8 % kg kg kg
Trailer 2 ) with brake s on gradient s up to 12 % kg
Weight of veh i cle and trailer 2 ) on gradients up to 12 % kg
103 kW at 5000 rpm
250 Nm at 1500 3500 rpm km/h sec. kg
FWD
MG AG
219 217 1)
8.4 8.4
13 1 5 1325 kg kg
1790 1800
945 960
945 945
650 660
1700 1700
1500 1500
3340 3350
Footnotes c::> page 2 7 4
Technical data 283
A3 Saloon 1.8, 4-cylinder
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
FWD : 132 kW at 5100 - 6200 rpm quattro: 132 kW at 4500 6200 rpm
FWD : 250 Nm at 1250 5000 rpm quattro : 280 Nm at 1350 4500 rpm
FWD quatt r o km/h sec.
MG
7.2
A G
242 2421 >
7 .
3
AG
235
6.8 kg 1345 1370 1470
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Ke rb weight (un l aden weight)
In accordance with GB 1589 for China
K erb weight (un l aden weight)
Gross vehicle w e i ght
M aximum front ax l e weight
M aximum rear ax l e weight kg kg kg kg
1420
1870
1025
950
In accord a nce w i th 92 / 21 / EEC for Europe and certa i n other market s
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear axle weight
Trailer 2> without brakes
Trailer2 > with brakes on gradients up to 8 %
Trailer2 > with brakes on gradients up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and traller2l on gradients up to 12 % kg kg kg kg kg kg kg
1345 1370
1820 1845
985
940 940
670 680
1800
1600
3470
1010
1800
1600
3495
Footnotes <::) page 274
1470
1945
1040
1000
730
1800
1600
3595
S3 Saloon 2 .
0, 4-cylinder
Power output
M aximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear axle weight
Footnotes ¢ page 2 7 4
2213> kW at 5500 - 6200 rpm
3803) Nm at 1800 - 5500 rpm quattro
MG AG
2505) 2505) km/h sec. kg kg kg
5 .
3 4.9
1505 1525
1980 2000
1055 1075 kg 1030 1030
284 Technical data
Diesel engines
A3 1.6 TOI, 4 cylinder (7 7 / 81 kW )
Power output
Ma x imum torque
Dr i ve
Ma xi mum speed
Accelera t ion from 0 100 km/h
K erb weight (unladen we i ght)
Gross veh i cle we i ght
Maximum front ax l e weight
M aximum rear axle weight
Trailer 2 ) without brakes
Tra i ler 2 l with brake s on grad i en t s up to 8 %
Trailer2l with brakes on gradients up to 12 % kg kg kg
We i ght of vehicle and trailer2l on g r adients up to 12 % k g kg k g kg
77 kW at 3000 4 000 rpm
81 k W at 3200 4000 r p m (e)
77 kW: 250 Nm at 1500 2750 rpm
81 kW: 250 Nm at 1500 - 3000 r pm (e) km/h sec. k g
FWD e mode l
MG AG MG
195 19 5 200
10.7 10 .
7 10.5
1305 1325 1280
1790 1810 1765
985 1010 970
900 895 890
650 660 640
1700 1700 1300
1500 1500 1000
3340 3360 2815
Footnotes ¢ page 2 74
A3 2.0 TOI, 4 cylinder ( 81 kW )
Power output 81 k W at __ 4l rpm
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we i ght)
Gross veh i cle we i g h t
Maximum front ax l e weight
Ma ximum rear a xle we i gh t k g
Tra i le r 2 l without brakes
T ra i le r
2
> with brakes on grad i ents up to 8 %
Traile r 2 l with brake s on gradients up to 12 % kg k g kg
We i gh t of vehicle and trailer 2 l on g r adie n ts up to 12 % kg
250 Nm at --4l rpm
FWD
MG
__ 4 ) km/h sec.
_ _4 )
_ _ ) kg k g
__ 4)
__ 4) kg
_ _4)
__ 4 )
_ _4 )
__ 4 )
_ _ 4 )
Footnote s ¢ page 2 74
Technical data 285
A3 2.0 TOI, 4-cylinder (110 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ight )
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front ax l e we i ght km/h sec.
Maximum rear axle we ig ht
Tra il er2) without brakes
Trailer2l with brakes on gradients up to 8 % kg kg kg
Trailer 2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2l on gradients up to 12 % kg kg kg kg
1103) kW at 3500 4000 rpm
3203) Nm at 1750 - 3000 rpm
FWD
MG quatt r o
AG MG
216 213 214
8.6 8.3 8.4
1355 1370 14 35
1840 18 55 1 920
1030 1035 1040
925 915 975
670 680 710
1800 1800 1800
1600 1600 1800
3490 3505 3770
Footnotes <=:>page 2 7 4
A3 2.0 TOI, 4-cylinder (135 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Accelerat i on from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we i ght)
Gross veh i cle we i ght
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear ax l e we i ght
Tra il er2l without brakes
T ra il er2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 8 % kg kg k g
Tra il er2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2
> on gradients up to 12 % k g
135 kW at 3500 4000 rpm
380 Nm at 1750 - 3250 rpm
FWD
MG quattro
AG km/h sec. kg kg kg
234
7.3
1365
1850
1030
925
680
1800
1600
3500
230
6.8
1470
1955
1070
985
730
1800
1800
3805
Footnotes <=:>page 2 7 4
286 Technical data
A3 Sportback 1.6 TOI, 4-cylinder (77 /81 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross veh i cle we igh t
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear axle weight kg
Trailer2) without brakes
Trailer
2' with brakes on grad i ents up to 8 % kg kg
Trailer 2) with brakes on gradients up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2 l on gradients up to 12 % kg km/h sec. kg kg kg
77 kW at 3000 - 4000 rpm
81 kW at 3200 - 4000 rpm (e)
77 kW: 250 Nm at 1500 2750 rpm
81 kW: 250 Nm at 1500 - 3000 rpm (e)
FWD
MG e model
AG MG
195 195 200
10.9 10.9 10.7
1335 1355 13 15
1820 1840 1800
1010 1030 985
930 930 920
660 670 650
1700 1700 1300
1500 1500 1000
3370 3390 2850
Footnotes ¢page 2 7 4
A3 Sportback 2.0 TDI, 4-cylinder (81 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
81 kW at __ 4 J rpm
250 Nm at -4 l rpm
FWD
MG
__ 4)
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross vehicle weight km/h
Maximum front ax le weight
Maximum rear axle we ig ht kg kg
Trailer2l without brakes kg
Trail er2l with brakes on gradients up to 8 %
Tra iler
2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 12 % k g kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2l on gradients up to 12 % k g sec. kg kg
__ 4)
__ 4)
__ 4)
__ 4)
_ _4)
__ 4)
__ 4)
__ 4)
__ 4)
Footnotes c::> page 2 7 4
Technical data 287
A3 Sportback 2.0 TOI, 4-cylinder (110 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ight )
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle we i ght
Maximum rear axle weight
Tra il er2) without brakes
Trailer2l with brakes on gradients up to 8 % kg kg kg
Trailer 2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer 2l on gradients up to 12 % kg
1103) kW at 3500 4000 rpm
3203) Nm at 1750 - 3000 rpm
FWD
MG quatt r o
AG MG km/h sec. kg kg kg
216 213 214
8.7 8.4 8.5
1385 1395 14 65
1870 1880 1 950
1040 1045 1060
945 935 1005
690 690 730
1800 1800 1800
1600 1600 1800
3520 3530 3800
Footnotes <=:>page 2 7 4
A3 Sportback 2.0 TOI, 4-cylinder (135 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen weight)
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear ax l e weight
Tra iler 2l without brakes
Trail er2l with brakes on gradients up to 8 % kg kg k g
Tra il er2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2
> on gradients up to 12 % kg
135 kW at 3500 4000 rpm
380 Nm at 1750 - 3250 rpm
FWD
MG quattro
AG km/h sec. kg kg kg
234
7.4
1395
1880
1055
950
690
1800
1600
3530
230
6.9
1500
1985
1090
1010
750
1800
1800
3835
Footnotes <=:> page 2 7 4
288 Technical data
A3 Saloon 1.6 TDI, 4-cylinder (77 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ight )
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear ax l e we ig ht
Tra i ler2) without brakes
Trailer2) with brakes on gradients up to 8 % kg kg kg
Trailer 2) with brakes on gradients up to 12 % kg
Weight of veh i cle and trailer2) on gradients up to 12 % kg
77 kW at 3000 - 4000 rpm
250 Nm at 1500 - 2750 rpm
FWD
MG AG km/h sec. kg kg kg
198 198
10.9 10.9
1350 1365
1825 1840
1000 1015
930 930
670 680
1700 1700
1500 1500
3375 3390
Footnotes c::> page 2 7 4
A3 Saloon 2.0 TDI, 4-cylinder (81 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb w eig ht (unladen weight)
Gross veh i cle we i ght
Maximum front axle weight
Maximum rear ax l e we i ght
Trailer2) without brakes
Trail er2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 8 %
81 kW at --
4
' rpm
250 Nm at --
4
' rpm
FWD
MG
__ 4) km/h
__ 4) sec.
__ 4) kg
_ _4) kg
__ 4) kg
__ 4) kg
__ 4) kg
_ _4) k g
__ 4)
Trailer2) with brakes on gradients up to 12 % kg
Weight of veh i cle and trailer2) on gradients up to 12 % k g
__ 4)
Footnotes c::> page 2 7 4
Technical data 289
A3 Saloon 2.0 TDI, 4-cylinder (110 kW)
Power output
Maximum torque
Drive
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0 - 100 km/h
Kerb weight (unladen we ight )
Gross vehicle weight
Maximum front ax l e we i ght
Maximum rear axle we ig ht
Tra il er2) without brakes
Trailer2l with brakes on gradients up to 8 % kg kg kg
Trailer 2l with brakes on grad i ents up to 12 % kg
Weight of vehicle and trailer2l on gradients up to 12 % kg
1103) kW at 3500 4000 rpm
3203) Nm at 1750 - 3000 rpm km/h sec. kg kg kg
FWD quatt r o
MG AG MG
2203) 219 220
8.7 8.4 8.5
1390 1415 1475
1865 1890 1950
1025 1050 1045
950 940 1010
690 700 730
1800 1800 1800
1600 1600 1800
3515 3540 3800
Footnotes <=:>page 2 7 4
290 Index
Numbers and
Symbols
360° display 140
A
A/C (automatic air conditioner) . . . . . . . . . 79
A/C (manual air conditioner) ...
.
....... 78
ABS
see
Anti-lock brake system 182
Acceleration figures ................. 275
see also
Technical data ....
• ...
.
.... 27 5
Accelerator pedal ....
.
.
.
.
.
.•.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 16 1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Active Cylinder M anagement . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Active lane assist ..
.
.
.
.
.
............ 128
Cleaning area aro u nd camera .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 205
Driver messages ...
..
.............. 129
Indicator lamp ....
.
..........
.
..
.
. 129
Setting steering vibration .
.......... 130
Setting time of warning .
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 130
Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adaptive cruise control ............... 116
Automatic gearbox ................ 120
Cleaning sensors ...
.
.............. 205
Congested traffic ....
.
.
.
.
.......... 120
Driver intervention prompt .....
.
.... 123
Driver messages .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.... 123
General notes ....
.
........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 116
Vehicles with manual gearbox .
.
.
.
.
.
.. 120
Adaptive light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 57
Ind i cator lamp ......
..
.
.
.......
.
... 25
Advanced gear-change ind i cator (efficiency p r og r amme) .................
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 31
Advanced key
see
Convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Airbag ..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.......
.
.. 171
Deactivating front passenger's airbag . 180
Front airbags .
...
.
...
.
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 172
Head-protection airbag .
......
.
.
.
.
.
. 178
Important safety notes on knee airbag system .
.
.
.
...
.
.......
.
......
.
.
.
. 176
Kneeairbag ............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 175
Side airbags .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
........
. 177
Warning lamp .....
...
...
.
......... 21
Air conditioner (automatic)
Adjust i ng air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 81
Air distribution, air outlets ........... 80
Air recirculation mode .
...
.
.
.
.
.
...
... 80
AUTO (automatic mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Auxiliary heating/ventilation . . . . . . . . . . 82
Blower .
...
.
...............
..
...
.. 80
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Defrosting windows .
..
.
.....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 80
Drive select ..
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
... 136
Key-coded settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Rear window heating ................ 81
Selecting temperature ............... 79
Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Air conditioner (manua l )
Adjusting air out l ets . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 81
Air distribution, air outlets ........... 78
Air recirculation mode .............
.
. 78
Blower ...
.
.
.
.
.
.....
.
...
.
........
. 78
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Defrosting windows ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
...
.
. 78
Key-coded settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Rear window heating .
.
.
.
...
.
..
.
..
... 81
Temperature selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Air distribution, setting (automatic air condit i oner) .....
.
.
.
..
.........
.......
. 80
Air distribution, setting (heating/venti lation system or manual air conditioner) ... 78
Air outlets, adjusting ..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.....
.
. 81
Air outlets, adjusting (heating/ventilation system) ..
..
...
.
.
.
.
.
..
.........
.
.
.
.
. 78
Air outlets, adjusting (manual air condi tio n er) ...............
.
............. 78
Air recircu l ation mode
A u tomat i c air cond i tioner ...
.
.
.
.
.
...
. 80
Heating/ventilat i on system ....
.
..
.
.
.
. 7 8
Manua l air conditioner ............... 78
Alarm system see Anti-theft alarm system .........
. 41
All-weather lights (LED headlights) .....
. 54
Alterations to the vehicle ............. 233
Alternator (warning lamp) .........
.
... 21
An t i-dazzle exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
An t i-dazzle interior mirror .
.
.......
.
... 62
An t i-freeze
Coolant ....
.
.
.
..............
.
.
.
.
. 216
Windscreen washer system ...
.
.
.
.
• .
. 221
Anti-lock brake system ............... 182
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Anti-theft alarm system ............... 41
Interior monitor .................... 48
Tow-away protection ................ 48
Anti-theft wheel bolts ............... 239
Armrest, front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Armrest, rear ..................
..... 68
Ashtray ............................ 69
ASR see Traction control system .......... 182
Audi active lane assist see Active lane assist ............... 128
Audi adaptive cruise control see Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 116
Aud i adaptive light see Adaptive light .................. 54
Audi magnetic ride see Suspension control 136
Audi pre sense see Pre sense ..................... 125
Audi side assist see Side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
AUTO
Automatic air condi t ioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Automatic headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Auto lock (central locking system) ...... 41
Automatic air conditioner see Air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . 79
Automatic gearbox .................. 106
Back-up programme ............... 113
Downhill speed control ............. 110
Driving tips ..............
...
.....
. 108
Kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 launch control programme .......... 1 1 2
Malfunct i on ..
..............
...
... 10 7
Manual gear selection .............. 111
Manual release of selector lever (Lefthand drive) ......
.
..............
.
. 1 1 4
Manual release of selector lever (righthand drive) .
.
.
...
...
........
...... 115
Safety interlock for ignition key ....... 86
Selector lever lock .
................ 107
Selector lever positions ............. 106
Steering wheel with paddle levers . . . . 111
S tronic .......................... 106 tiptronic ......................... 111
Inde x 291
Automat i c headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 58
Auxi l iaries (efficiency programme) ...... 32
Auxi li ary heating/ventilation ........... 82
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85
Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . 28, 30
Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30
Axle loads .....
.
.
.
................. 275
Axle weights see Technical data 275
B
Background lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Bandages see F i rst-aid kit ...
.
................ 236
B ass box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4 3
Battery ........................... 218
Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 187
Charging ......................... 220
Connecting/disconnecting ........... 218
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Jump-starting ..................... 244
Power management ................ 187
Replacing .............
........... 221
Winter conditions ................. 218
Belts see Seat belts ..................... 165
Belt tensioners ..................... 169
Bicycle rack
On towing bracket ................. 197
Biod i esel .......................... 209
B i oe t hano l see Ethanol (fuel) .
.
................ 209
B l ower
A ut omat i c air conditioner ............ 80
H eating/ventilat i on system . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Manua l air conditioner ............... 78
Boost ..............
............
.... 31
Boot see luggage compartment 162
Boot lid
Central locking system .............. 49
Ma nu al release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Brakes ............................ 184
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Br a ke fluid ....................... 218
Br a ke pads worn .................... 23
292 Index
Brake pedal 161
Brake servo .
...........
.
.
.
...
.
..
.
. 184
Driving away on a s lope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9S
Emergency braking function .......... 94
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 2S
New brake pads ..........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 184
Park i ng brake ...
.
.......
.•.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 92
Warn i ng lamp ...
......
..
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
. 19
Bulb failure
Changing bulbs ........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2S3
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2S
Bulbs
Dipped headlights ......
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2S6
Bulbs, changing ..
..
..........
.
.
.
... 2S3
Bulb size (front) ..........
.
........ 2S4
Daytime running lights ....
.
...
.
.
.
.
. 2S7
Front bulbs ..............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2S4
Front fog lights .......
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
... 262
Inner rear lights . 26S, 266, 267, 270, 271
Main beam headlights .............. 2S7
Oute r rear lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 268
Rear bulb size (A3 Saloon) .
.......
.
.. 2S6
Rear bu l b size (A3 Sportback) ...
.
.... 2SS
Rear bulb size (A3) ..
.....
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2S4
Rear bu lb s (A3 Saloon) ..
.
.
•.
.
.
.
.
... 2S6
Rear bu l bs (A3 Sportbac k ) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2SS
Rear bulbs (A3) ..........
• .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2S4
Side lights .
.
..........
.
.......... 2S8
Turning light (xenon headlights) ...... 261
Turn signa l s (halogen headlights) .
.
.
.
. 2S9
Turn signals (xenon headlights) .
.
.
.
.
. 260 c
Camera-based traffic s ign recognition .
.
. 33
Capacities
Fuel t ank .
.
.
.
.
.
...
......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 273
Washer f l uid reservoir ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 273
Capacity .
.
.
.
.
.
...........
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 27S
Caps for wheel bolts, removing .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 239
Car care .
........
..
......
..
....
.
.
.
. 204
Care see Clean i ng ............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 204
Car k eys .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 42
Catalytic converter ..
..........
.
.
.
.
.
. 190
CD-ROM player (navigation system) .
.
.
.. 71
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Central l ock i ng system ................ 41
Boot l id ..
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
......
..
.....
.
.
. 49
Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7
Convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4S
E l ectric windows .
...
..
.....
..
....
.
. Sl
Folding in exter ior mirrors ......
.
.
.
.
. 46
Locking doors manually ....
.
......
.
.
. 48
Panorama sun roof ...
......
.
...
.
...
. Sl
Remote contro l key ..............
.
.
. 44
Security centra l locking .........
.
.
.
.
. 46
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Central warn i ng/ i ndicator lamp .
...
.
.
.
.
. 14
Centre console lighting, adjusting brightness ............................... 60
Cetane number (diesel) .............. 209
Charge pressure d i splay .....
..
.....
.
.
. 31
Child-proof catches
Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Child safety switch
Windows .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.................. Sl
Child safety switches
Rear doors, electric window switches . . . SO
Child seats .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
............
.
.
.
. 1S7
Categories .
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
........
.
.
.
. 1S8
F i tt i ng .
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.....
.
.
...
..
...
. 1S9
ISOFIX .......................... 1S9
ISO FIX and top tether .............. 160
S i de airbags .
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.....
.
.
..
...
. 1S8
Cigarette light er .
.
.
.
.......
..
...
.
.
.
.
. 69
Cleaning ..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
............... 204
Cleaning/de-icing windows .......
...
. 206
Cleaning/treating natural leather ...... 207
Cleaning Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Cleaning carbon parts . . . . . . . . . . 206, 207
Cleaning contro l s and displays .....
.
.
. 206
Cleaning fabrics .................... 206
Cleaning leatherette .
............
.
.
.
. 206
Cleaning plastic parts ................ 206
Cleaning seat upholstery ..
...
..
.
..... 206
Cleaning vehicle .
.
.
...
............
.
. 204
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CPS reception .
..........
.........
... 9
Closing
Bonnet .....
.
.
.
.
.
...
..........
.
.
. 213
Panorama sun roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S2
Windows .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.....
.
......
.
.
.
.
. Sl
Coasting mode .
..
.................. 111
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Colour code .......
.
..........
.
.
.
.
.
. 272
Com i ng home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Compartment s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Consumpt i on (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30, 272
Controls and d i splay s ( overview ) . . . . . . . . . 6
Control un i ts .
.....
.
....
.
.....
.
.
.
... 188
Convenience key
Indicator lamp ..
.
.................. 91
Locking and unlocking the vehicle ..... 45
Manual operation .
.
....
.
.
.....
.
..... 91
Starting engine (START ENGINE STOP button) .
.
.
.
.....
.
....
...
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
. 88
Switching off engine (START ENGI N E
STOP button) ....
• ......
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
. 90
Switching on ignition .
........
.
.
.
.
.
.. 88
Convenience open/clo s e .
..
.....
.
.
.
.
.
.. 51
Cooling mode (automatic air conditioner) 79
Cooling mode (manual air conditioner) .
.. 78
Cooling system
Anti~reeze .
.....
.
.....
.
..
.....
.
.. 216
Check i ng coolant level ........
.
.
.
.
.
. 217
Coolant temperature gauge .......... 11
Topping up coolant ..............
.
. 217
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 57, 136
Courtesy light .........
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..... 60
Cross bars (roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Cruise control system
Adjusting stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Pre-selecting a speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Sw i tching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Sw i tching on ..
.
.....
.
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 97
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Current fuel consumption .....
. 27, 28, 30
Cylinder management system see Active Cylinder Management . . . . . . 33
Cylinders .
.
.
.
.
.
..
.................. 275
D
Date d i splay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Date , setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Daytime running light s ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
. 54
Changing bulbs .
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
. 257
Daytime running lights, switching on/off . 59
Deactivating front pas s enger' s airbag ... 180
Defrost i ng (window s )
Au t omatic air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Heating / ventilation s y s tem . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Manual air conditioner ............... 78
DEF (instrument cluster ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Deluxe automatic air conditioner see Air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . 79
Diagnostic connection .
.
......
.
...
.
.. 188
Diesel
Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Draining fuel filter .......
.
....
.
.
.
.
.. 24
Engine oil .
.
.
.
...
...
.
...
.
....
.
.
.
.
. 214
Fuel ....
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.......
.
..
.
.. 209
Ind i cator lamp ...
................
.
. 23
Preheating glow plugs (button) ...
.
.
.. 88
Preheating glow plugs (key) . . . . . . . . . . 86
Dimensions
Vehicle dimensions ......
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 273
Dipped headlights
Changing bulbs ..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
..
.
... 256
Directional tread (tyres) ....
.
...
.
..
.
.. 241
Distance covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 , 30
Door catches , bonnet and boot lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29
Doors
Chi ld·proof catches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Child safety switche s ...
.
.
.
.......... 50
Doors, locking manually ...........
.
.
.
. 48
Downhill speed control .
.
......
.
..
.
.. 110
Draining fuel filter (diesel) ..
.
....
.
.
.
.
.
. 24
Driver information system ......
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 27
Boost .....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.....
........
.
.. 31
CD/rad i o display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29
Controls on multi-function steering wheel ......
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
......... 29
Controls on windscreen wiper lever ...
. 28
Door catches, bonnet and boot lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29
Driver message s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Efficiency programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Engine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . 36
Gear-change i ndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Lap timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30
Outside temperature display . . . . . . 28, 29
294 Index
Service interval display .............. 13
Warning and indicator lamps .
.
.
.
...
.
. 14
Drive select ......
..
..
..
............ 136
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Driving
Run -f lat tyres ....
..
.......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 230
Driving away from a standsti ll
Hill hold assist ..................... 95
Hold assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Park i ng brake auto r elease ...
.
.....
.
. 94
When towing a trailer ..
............. 94
Driving on l eft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Driving on r ight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Driving safety ................
.
.
.
.
.
. 153
Driving through water .......
.
....... 190
Driving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30
Dust filter see Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
E
ElO see Ethanol (fuel) .......
.
.......... 209
ECO mode (automatic air conditioner) . . . 79
Economical driving .................. 191
Economy tips (efficiency programme) .
.
.. 32
EDL see Electronic differential lock ....... 182
Efficiency programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Auxiliar i es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Economy tips ............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 32
Gear-change indicator ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 31
Electrical accessories see Electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
E lectric seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child safety switch ........
.
...
.
.
.
... 51
Child safety switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Convenience open/close ...
.
......... 51
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Electro -mechanical [ parking brake see Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Electro-mechanical [ power steer i ng .
.
.
.
. 185
Ind i cator lamp .........
.
.......... 185
Electronic differential lock ............ 182
Indicator lamp ...........
........
.
. 22
Electronic immobiliser see Immobiliser .
.
....
.
....
...
..
.
.
.
. 42
Electronic limited s lip differential ...... 182
E l ectronic stab ili sation control (ESC) ... 182
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Emission control systems
Catalyt i c converter .
..............
.
. 190
Diesel particulate fi l ter ...........
.
. 190
Emission control system (ind i cator lamp) . 23
Emissions .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
..
...
.
.
.
. 272
En gine
Coolant .......................... 216
E rngine data .
.
.................... 27S
Jump-starting ...
.
.......
...
...
.
... 244
Preheating glow plugs ..............
. 88
Preheating g l ow plugs (key) ......
.
.
.
. 86
Start/stop system .................. 98
Starting (button) .
...
..
............. 88
Starting (driver messages for convenience key) ......................... 91
Starting ( k ey) .
.
.
.
.......
......
...
.. 86
Switching off (button) ..........
.
.
.
.
. 90
Switching off (driver messages for mec lhanical ignition lock) .............
.
. 91
Switching off (key) .
............
.
.
.
.
. 88
Engine code .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
......
.
..
...
. 272
Engine compartment
Closing bonnet .
.
.
..
...........
.
.
.
. 213
Layout .
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
......
...
.
.
.
. 214
Open in g bonnet .
.
.
............
...
. 213
Safety notes .
.
.
.
.
.
..............
.
. 212
Engine data see Technical data ................. 275
Engine management (ind i cator lamp) •.
.
. 23
Engine oil .
.
....................... 214
Chang in g ...
.
........
.....
...
.
... 214
Checking oil level ..............
.
... 215
Consumption ...
.
...
.
......
.
...... 215
Dipstick...
.
.....
.
...
.
....... 214, 215
Indicator lamp .
.
................
.
.
. 24
Oil change serv ice ..
.
.
..
...
.
....... 214
Service intervals .
.
..
....
....
...
...
. 214
Temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Topping up .
.
.
.
.
.
..........
..
....
. 216
Warning lamp .
.
.
.
...
.
........
.
.
.
.
. 21
Engine speed governiing (indicator lamp ) . 24
Eng in e start/stop mode see Start/stop system ............
.. 101
Eng in e start system (warning lamp) ..... 2S
Environmental tips
Environmental compatibility ...
.
...
.
. 192
Filling the tank............... 210, 211
Leaks .....
...
.......
.
...........
. 213
Min imis ing pollution ..
.
...
.
.......
. 191
Rear window heating ................ 81
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
EPC (e ngin e management) .....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 23
ESC
Electronic stabilisation control .....
.
. 182
Multicollision brake assist system .... 182
Sport mode ..
..
.................
. 183
ESP see ESC .
.....
..............
.....
. 182
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Event memory ...................... 188
Exterior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Changing bu l bs ................... 253
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting .
...
................
.
.... 61
Anti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Folding in ...
.....
......
.
...
.
.....
. 61
Heating .........
.
................. 61
F
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 163
Filling the tank .........
...
.......
.
. 210
Fue l gauge (petrol/diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Gas tank capacity .
.
..........
.
...
.
. 273
Opening fue l tank flap .....
.
........ 210
Petrol/diesel tank capacity ...
.
.
.
.... 273
Releasing fuel tank flap manually ..... 212
Fire extinguisher ...
................
. 236
Fir st-aid kit ........................ 236
Fixed oil change service ........
.
..... 214
Flexible oil change se r vice .......
.
.
.
.. 214
Floor mats ......................... 161
Floor panel, lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4
Changing bu l b ......
.............. 262
Folding in exterior mirrors
Central locking system ..........
..
.
. 46
Index 295
Footwell light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Four-wheel drive .
.
.
.
................ 186
Front seats see Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 73
Front window see Windscreen .
................... 62
Fuel .............................. 209
Consumption .
.
.
.
.
.
..............
. 272
C u rrent fuel consumption . . . . . . . . 28, 30
Et hano l .
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
..........
.
. 209
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
F uel gauge (petro l /d i esel) ...........
. 11
Gas fue l gauge .
.
.
.
.
..............
. 104
Natura l gas .
.
.
...
.
.
............... 102
Saving f u el .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
............... 136
Tank capac i ty .
.
.
.
.
................ 273
Warning light ...................... 24
Fuel economy
Coasting mode .
.
.................. 111
Driving style .
.
.
.
.................. 191
Eff i ciency programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fuel range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30
Fuses
Changing ........................ 250
Fu se li st ......................... 25 1
In veh icl e in t er i or .
.
.
.
.
.
........
.
.
.
. 250
G
Gas odour ......................... 102
Gear-change indi cator ................ 12
Gear-change i ndicator (efficiency programme) ........................... 31
Gearbox ma l function (indicator lamp) 113
Generator see Alternator (warning l amp) ........ 21
G l ove box .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..........
.
.
. 71
CD changer .
.
.
.
.
.
.
................
. 71
GP5 clock ............................ 9
Gross vehicle weight ................. 275
H
Handbrake see Park i ng brake ................... 92
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S9
Ind i cator lamp .
.
................... 26
Head l amp converter ................
.
. 59
296 Index
Headlight range con t rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Indicator lamp .........
.
.
.
...
.
....
. 25
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 257
Driving on left, driving on right .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 59
Headlamp converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Washing .
.
.
.
.
.
..........
.
...
.
.
.
.. 205
H ead restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 156
Removing/installing .......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 68
Heater (supplementary heater for d i esel engine) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
..
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 82
Heating
Exterior mirrors ....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 61
Rear window ..
.
........
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
. 81
Seats ..
.
.
.
.
.
............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 81
Washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Heating/ventilation system
Adjusting a i r outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 81
Air distribution, air outlets .....
.
.
.
... 78
Air re c irculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Blower .
.
.
.
.
.
.
....
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 78
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Key-coded settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Rear window heating ......
.
......... 81
Temperature selection .....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 78
High-visibility vest .
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
....... 235
Hill hold assist .
.
......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 95
Hill starting see H i ll hold assist ........
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.. 95
Hook ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..........
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
. 75
Horn ...
.
.
.
.
.
............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 6
Hub caps, removing ........
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
. 239
I
I dentification data
Chassis number ..........
.
....
.
.
.
. 272
Ignition
Sw i tching on/off (with button) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 88
Warn i ng lamp ...............
.
.
.
... 25
Ignition lock
Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Imbalance (wheels) ........
.
........ 224
Immobiliser ....
.
.
.................. 42
Ind i cator lamps see Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Inflation pressures (tyres) . . . . . . . 224, 231
In s pection intervals
On vehicles with driver informat i on system .............................. 13
Instrument cluster .
.
...
.
........
.
...
.
. 9
Natural gas engine .
..............
.
. 103
Petro l or diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Instruments .
.
........
.
.
..
.......
.
... 9
Adjusting brightness ....
..
...
.
....
.
. 60
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Interio r mirrors see Mirrors .
.
....................
.
. 62
Interior monitor .
.
.
.
......
...
...
.
.
.
.
. 48
Intermittent wipe (windscreen wipers) . . . 62
ISOFIX (securing child seats) .
..
...
.
.
.
. 159
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 240
Jacking points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 240
Jump-starting ...
.
...............
.
.
.
. 244
K
Kerb weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 275
Key-coded settings
Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Heating/ventilation system ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 78
Manual air conditioner ............
.
.
. 78
Key-operated switch for front passeng .
er ' s airbag .....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..............
.
. 180
Keys .
.
......
.
...
.
.
.
....
..
....
.
.
.
... 42
Checking number of keys .........
.
.
.
. 42
Driver messages (for convenience key) .
. 91
Drive r messages (for mechanical ig n i tion lock) .
.
.............
.
........
.
.
.... 91
Key not recognised .
....
.
..
.
....
.
.
.
.
. 91
Locking and unlock i ng the vehicle . 44, 45
Replacement keys ...............
.
.. 42
Replacing the battery ..
.
..
.
....
.
.
.
.
. 43
Kick-down
Automatic gearbox .
......
.
...
..
.
.
. 111
Manual gearbox ..
.
................. 92
Knee airbag ...........
• ............ 17S
Description ..........
• ............ 17S
How it works ..................... 176
Important safety notes ............. 176
L
Lane assist
see
Active lane assist .............
.
. 128
Lane change assist feature
see
Side assist ...
................. 132
Lane departure warning feature
see
Active lane assist ............... 128
Lap timer ....................
.....
.
. 36
Evaluating lap t i mes . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 40
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39
L aunch control programme (automatic gearbox) .
.
.
.....
.
........
.
........ 112
Leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
LED headlights
All -weather lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4
Lights
Adaptive light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4, S7
Adjusting sensitivity of automatic head lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S8
Background lighting ................ 60
Changing bulbs ................... 2S3
Coming/leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S9
Daytime running lights, switching on/off S9
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Exterior light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Front/rear fog lights .............
.
.. 54
Headlamp converter ................ 59
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4
H eadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4
Inter i or/reading lights ............... 60
M ain beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S6
Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SS
Motorway light . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SS
Parking lights ...................... SS
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4
Light sensor/rain sensor
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4
Indicator lamp ..................
... 26
Intermittent wipe (windscreen wipers) . 62
Load-through hatch with bag ........... 7S
Index 297
Locking
Locking passenger's door manually 48
Locking/unlocking
By remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
With the central locking switch ....... 47
With the convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . 4S
With the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4S
Lon g -term memory .................. 27
Luggage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Cover ............................. 73
Elec t rical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Extending ......................... 73
Fasten i ng rings .................... 74
Load-through hatch with bag ......... 75
L oad i ng .......................... 162
L owering f l oor pane l .
............... 74
Retaining hook ................
.
.
.
.. 7S
Reversible floor covering ............. 7S
Stowing luggage safely ............. 162
Stretch net ........................ 74
Lum b ar support .
............
.
.
.
...
.. 66
M
Mai n beam headlights ................ SS
Main beam assist ................... S6
Maintenance intervals
On vehicles with driver information system .............................. 13
Make-up mirrors ..................... 62
Manual gearbox
Kick down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Manual operation
Convenience key ..................
.. 91
Emergency brak i ng funct i on .......... 94
Pano r ama sun roof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S3
Manua l release
Boot lid ........................... 49
Fuel tank flap ..................... 212
Selector lever (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . 114
Selector lever (right-hand drive) . . . . . . l lS
Matt paintwork, washing ............. 204
Maximum speed .................... 27S see also Technical data ............. 27S
Mileage recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
29 8 Ind ex
Mirrors
Adjusting exterior m i rrors .
....
..
.
..
.. 61
Anti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Make up mirror s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Mobile phone s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Modification s ...................... 233
Motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SS
Mounting p i n (for changing wheels) .
.
.
. 236
Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . 30
On-board computer ...
.
........
.
.
.
.
. 30
Multicollision brake assist system ...... 182
N
Natur al gas engine .................. 102
CNG .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..................... 102
Fuel gauge .
.
..................... 104
Fuel sy s tem leak .
.
.
.......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 102
Instrument cluster ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 103
LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, lOS
Odour .
.
.
.
.
................
.
.
.
.
.
. 102
Operating mode .............
.
.
.
..
. 103
Refuelling ..................
.
.
.
.
.
. 104
Tank cap .
.
.
............
.
...
.
.
.
..
. 104
Tank capacity .......
.
.....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 273
Navigation system
CD-ROM player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Noises
When refuelling with natural gas .
.
.
.
. lOS
Number of keys .
.
...
..
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 42
0
Octane rating (petrol) 2 09
Odour
Gas ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
....
.
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
. 102
Oil
see
Engine oil ............
.
........ 21S
Oil change intervals
On vehicles with d r iver information system .
.
.
.
.....
.
....
.
.
.
...
.
....
..
..
. 13
Oil change service ...........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 214
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 28
Controls (mult i -fu n ct i on steering wheel) 30
Controls (wind s creen wiper lever ) .
.
.
... 28
Opening .
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.....
.
..........
.
. 41
Bonnet .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
......
.
.
.
.. 213
Boot lid .
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.............. 49
Fu el tank flap ....
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
....
.
.
.
. 210
Pa norama sun roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S2
Windows ............
.
.
...
.....
.
.
. Sl
Outside temperature d i splay . . . . . . . 11, 28
Overrun fuel cut-off ................
. 191
Overview ( control s and d i splays) . . . . . . . . . 6 p
Paddle levers (automatic gearbox) 111
Paint damage .
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
..........
. 206
Paint No .
.....
.
.
.
....
..
...
.
.....
.
.. 272
Panorama sun roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S2
Convenience open/close .
.
.
.
....
...
.
. Sl
Manual operation .
.
................. S3
Park assist .
.
.......
.
.....
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 146
Description .
.
.
.
............
.• ..
.
.
. 146
Driver messages .
.
...
.....
.
....
.
.
.
. 149
Driving out of a parking space .
...
.
.
.
. 149
F i nding a parking space ..
.
...
...
.
.
.
. 148
Parking .
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
....
.
...
.
...
.
.
.
. 148
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Cleaning sensors/camera ......
.
...
. 20S
Parking aids
3 60° display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Adjusting graphic display/warning beeps .........
.
.......
.
........
. lSO
Cleaning reversing camera .
.
.
....
.
.
. 142
Malfunction .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.....
..
.
.
.. lSl
Park assist .
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
........
.
.
. 146
Parking sy s tem plus ...
.
...
.
......
.
. 140
Rear parking aid .
.
.
................ 140
Reversing camera .................. 142
Towing bracket .
.
.
.
..............
.
. lSl
Parking brake .
.
.
.
.
.
..
.......
...
.
.... 92
Driving away from a standstill .....
.
.
.
. 94
Driving away when towing a trailer .
.
.
.
. 94
Emergency brak in g funct i on ........
.
. 94
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Parking the car .
...
.
........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 93
Power supply failure ........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 92
Releasing/applying ...............
.
. 92
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 92
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SS
Parking system
see
Park i ng aid s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 142
Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . 108, 109
Particulate filter (die s el) .
.
...
...
....
. 190
Pedals .
.
.
.
.
...
..
.................. 161
Pedestrian protection s ystem .
.
.
.
...
.
. 163
Servicing .
.
.
.....
.
............
.
.
.
. 164
Performance figure s .
..........
.
.
.
.
.
. 275 see al s o Te c hn ic al data .....
.....
.
.
. 275
Performance ( eng i n e) ...
..
.....
.
.
.
.
.. 275
Petrol ...........................
.
. 209
Polishing .
.
.
.
.....
.
..........
.
.
.
.
.
. 206
Pollen filter see Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Pollution filter ...
..
....
.
.
.
.....
.
.
.
.. 77
Power management .
....
.
.
.......... 187
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Power steering see Electro mechanical power steer ing 185
Preheating glow plug s
With button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
With key .
.
.
.
.
...
.
..........
.
.
.
.
.
.. 86
Pre sense
Driver message s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 127
Generalnotes ....
.
..........
.
.
.
.
.
. 116
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Pressure ( tyres) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Protective mat see Revers i ble floor covering ..
.
....... 75
Q quattro see Four wheel driv e ....
.
...
.
.
.
.... 186
R
Radio-controlled cloc k
see
Cloc k ..................
.
........ 9
Radio-operated remote control see Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Radio equipment ...
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 233
Radio transmitters .
.
.
............
.
.
. 233
Rain sensor/light sensor
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Indicator lamp ..
.
.
........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 26
Intermittent w i pe ( windscreen wipers) . 62
Switch i ng on / off ............
.
...
.
.. 62
Rear lights
Changing bulbs ....
.
.
.
............ 253
Changing inner bulbs ......
.
.
.
. 265 , 266,267,270 , 271
Changing outer bulbs . . . . . . . . . 263, 268
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Rear seats, fold i ng down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rear view mirrors
see
Mirrors ................
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 62
Rear window
Washing .......
.
.
.
................ 62
Rear window heating ...
.
............. 81
Recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 31
Remote control
Auxiliary heating/ventilation . . . 82, 84, 85
Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
LED ....
.
.
.
.....
.
.
.
........... 42, 43
Locking and unlocking the vehicle .
.
.
.
. 44
Replacing the battery .
.
.
.
.
.
....
.
.
.
.
. 43
Synchronisation .
.
..........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. 44
Repairs ........
.
.
.
.....
.
.
....
..... 233
Replacement parts .
.
.
.....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.... 233
Reset button (trip recorder) ............ 10
Rest recommendation ..
.
.
.
.
.
......... 35
Rev counter ......
.
................ 9, 10
Reverse gear (automat i c gearbox) .
.
.
... 106
Reversible floor covering ......
.
...
.
.
.
. 75
Reversing camera see Parking aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 142
RME (fuel) ..........
.
........
.
..... 209
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Run-flat tyres .......
.
.............. 229
Driving .......................... 230
Renewing defective components 230
Running in
New brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
New engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
New tyres .......
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
........ 223 s
Safe l ock mechan is m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 45 see also Central locking s y s tem ...
...
. 41
Safety ............................ 153
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Child seats .
.
................
.
...
. 157
300 Inde x
Correct sitting po s ition 1S4
Gas odour ..
.
.
.
....
.
......
.
.
..
.
.
.. 102
Head re s traint s ..
.....
.
.
.......
.
.. 1S6
Luggage .
.
.
................
.
.
.
..
. 162
Pedal area ................
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 161
Seat belt s ....................
.
... 16S
Safety interlock (ign i t i on key) .......... 86
Safety system s ( warn i ng lamp) .
.....
.
.
. 21
Screwdriver .
.
.
.
...
.
...
.
.
..
..
....
.
.
. 236
Seat belts 16S
Adjusting seat belts ...........
.
.... 168
Belt tensioner s .................... 169
Cleaning .
......
..
.
..........
.
.
.
.
. 206
During pregnancy ........
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 168
Height adjustment .......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 169
Indicator lamp (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Putting on .....
.
.......
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 167
Securing child sea t s ..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.... 160
Taking off .
.
.
.
......
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
.. 169
Warn i ng lamp .
.
......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
... 21
Seat heating .
................
.
.
.
...
. 81
Seats
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Correct sitting posit i on ...
.
.
...
.
..
.
. 1S4
Easy entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Folding down ...........
.
.
.
...
.
.... 73
Secur i ty central lock i ng .
.
..
.
.
......... 46
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
Manual release (left hand drive) ..
.
.
.
. 114
Manual relea s e (right-hand drive) .
.
.
.
. l lS
Position s .
.
.
.
.
.
............
.
.
.
.
.
.. 106
Self-help ...
.
..............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 23S
Service interval disp l ay
On vehicles with d r iver information system ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
................
.
... 13
Service intervals .........
.
.
.
...
.
.... 214
Service position
see
Wiper blades, changing .
.
.
.
.
.
.
... 64
SETUP (basic settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Short-term memory ..
..
..
.
.
.
......... 27
Side assist .....................
.
.
.
. 132
Adjusting brightne ss ...
.
....
.
..
.
..
. 134
Area covered by s ensor s .
.....
.
..
..
. 133
Cleaning sen s or s ............
.
...
.. 20S
Switching on and off .
.
.
.
........
.
.
. 134
Side light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4
Changing bulb .......
.
......
.
.
.
.
.
. 2S8
Ski bag
see
Load-through hatch with bag .....
. 7S
Snow chains ...
.
........
.
...
...
.
.
.. 228
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Spanner ..
.
..
..
.
..................
. 236
Spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Speed limits
see
Camera-based traffic sign recognition .
.
..
.
.
.
.
...
.
..........
.
......
. 33
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 28, 29
Speed warning .
..................... 96
Sport mode ...
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 183
Star button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
St a rt/stop system ...............
.
...
. 98
Driver messages .
.................. 101
E111gine cuts In automatically ...
.
....
. 100
E111gine does not switch off ....
.
..
.
.
. 100
Indicator lamps .
.
.
.
.......
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
. 99
Switching off/on .
.
.
.
....
...
...
.
.
.
. 101
Switching off/starting the engine ..
.
.
.
. 99
START ENGINE STOP button (convenience key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 90
Starting with jump leads ......
.
...
.
.
. 244
Starting (engine)
Automatic start function (button) ..... 88
Automatic start function ( key) ........ 86
Malfunction (button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Malfunction (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
With button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
With key ....
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
......... 86
Steering
E l ectro mechanical power steering .
.
. 185
Locking the steering (ignition key) ..
.
.
. 88
Locking the steering (START E N GINE
STOP button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Locking (ignition key) ..............
.
. 86
Warning lamp ...................
.
. 21
Steering wheel
Adjusting .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
...
.
.
.
...
.
. 86
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . . . . . 29
Paddle levers (automatic gearbox) .
.
.
. 111
Storage compartment s . . . . . . . . . . . 70 , 71
Storage net ..
.
...................... 74
Stret c h net ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
... 74
S tronic gearbox
see
Automatic gearbox .....
......
.
. 106
Sun roof see Panorama sun roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S2
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Supplementary heater (veh i cles with diesel engine) ............................ 82
Suspension control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Switching off (engine)
W i th button .....
....
.......
....... 90
W i th key .....
..
...
.........
.
.
..... 88
Switching the ignition on/off (with key) 86
Symbols
see
Warning lamp s ......
........... 14
T
Tailgate see Boot lid .................
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 49
Tank
Gas fuel gauge ..............
...... 104
Natural gas .....
.
........
.
........ 104
Tank cap
Gas tank ......................... 104
Techn ical data ...................... 272
Temperat ure display
Coolant ......................
....
.
. 9
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 28
Temperature se l ection
Automatic air condi t ioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Heating/v entilation sys tem . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tightening torque (wheel bolts) .
...... 242
Time, setting ..............
.
.
.
.
.
.
..... 9 tiptronic (automatic gearbox) .
.
.
.
.
...
. 111
Tools ......
.
...................... 236
Top tether and ISOFIX (securing child seats) .
.
.
.
.......
.
.
.
..........
.
.... 160
Torque
Eng i ne capacity ..
................. 27S
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Tow-aw ay protection ................. 48
Tow-starting ....................... 246
Towing ............................ 194
A utomatic braking ........
...
.
..... 19S
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Retrofitting towing bracket . . . . . 202, 203
Towing bracket .................... 198
Trailer stabilisation ...........
..... 19S
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 27S
Turn signa l s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Towing away ....................... 246
Towing bracket
Park ing aids ...................... lSl
Towline anchorage .................. 248
TPMS (tyr e pressure monitoring sys tem) 231
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Indicator lamp ..................... 22
T raffic sign recognition
see
Camera-based traffi c sign recogni· tion ......
.
.......
..........
.....
. 33
Trailer
Accessorie s .
.
.
.....
..........
..... 197
Trailer stabi li sat ion .................. 19S
Trai l er weight s
see
Technical data .....
............ 27S
Tread depth ...
.
...
................. 225
Trip recorder, re setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Turning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 57
Turning light ( xenon headlights)
Chang ing bulbs ................... 261
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SS
Indicator lamp ..................... 26
Turn signals (halogen headlights)
Changing bulbs ................... 259
Turn s ignal s ( x enon headlights)
Changing bulbs ................... 260
Ty pe plate
Chassis number .
.
................. 272
Tyre Mobili ty System (tyre r e pair ki t) ...
. 237
Tyre repair kit .
.
...
.
.....
.
.
........
. 236
Tyres
Accessories .............
.
....
..... 223
Changing ..
.
...
.................. 238
Directional tr ead .................. 241
Four-wheel drive .
.
.
.....
.
....
..... 186
Inflat ion pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Repair k it ..
.
.
............... 236, 237
Ru n -flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Service life ....................... 224
Tread wear indicators ............... 22S
Tyre pre ssure loss indicator .......... 231
Tyre pre ssure (towing a trailer) ....... 194
302 Index u
Unlocking/locking
By remote c ontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
With the central locking s witch ..
.
..
.
. 47
With the convenience key .........
.
.. 45
With the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 v
Vehicle
Raising .
.
.
.
.
.
.
..........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 240
Taking out of service ....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 191
Vehicle data sticker .......
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.. 272
Vehicle identification data
Vehicle ID number (VIN) 272 w
Warning lamps .
.
.
.
.
......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 14
Warning triangle ........
.
.......... 235
Washer f l uid leve l (indicator lamp) . . . . . . 25
Washing ornamental trim/mouldings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 206
Washing rear lights ........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 205
Washing tailpipes ........
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 205
Washing wheel rims ......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 205
Waxing .
.
...
.
............
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
. 206
Weights ..
.
..............
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
. 275 see also Technical data 275
Wheel bolt c a ps
Removing .
.
.
.........
.
..
• .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 239
Wheel bolt s ...
.
....
.
.....
.
.
.
.....
. 227
Anti-theft ..
.
.
.
..........
.
..
.
.
.
.
.. 239
Loo s ening ...............
.
........ 239
Torque .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
....
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 242
Wheels .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 223
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 241
Changing wheels round ....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 225
Rims .
.
.
.
.
.
.............
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 223
Tyre pressure loss indicator .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 231
Washing .
.
.
.
.
.
......
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 205
Windows
Cleaning/de-icing ..
....
.
.
.
.
........ 206
Defro s ting (automatic air c ondition e r) . . 80
Defrosting (heat i ng/ventilation system) 78
Defrosting (manual air conditioner) .
.
.. 78
Windscreen
Defrosting (automatic a i r conditione r ) .. 80
Defrosting (heating/venti l ation system) 78
Defrosting (manual air conditioner) .
..
.
. 78
Washing .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
...
..
....
.
. 62
Windscreen w as her sy s tem . . . . . . . 62, 221
Reservoir capacity ................. 273
Windscreen wipers
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 , 65
Cleaning w ip er blades ............
.
.
. 64
Indicator lamp .
.
.
..........
...
...
.
. 25
Lifting wipers off windscreen . . . . . . . . . 64
Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Winter conditions
Battery ..
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
............
.
.
. 218
Cooling system .
.
.
.......
.
.
.
...
.
..
. 216
De I c ing window s .
...
.........
..
.
.
. 206
Defro s ting windows (autom a tic air conditioner) .....
.
...
.
..........
.
....... 80
Diesel .
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
............. 209
Seat heating .
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.....
.
...
.
.
.
.
. 81
Snow chains .
.
.
.
.
...
.
............
. 228
Tyres ....
.
....................... 227
Washing the vehicle ...
.
.
....
...
.
.
.
. 204
Windscreen washer system ..
.
...
.
.
.
. 221
Winter tyres ..
.
.
.
..............
.
.
.
. 227
Wiper b l ades, changing . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65
Wrench .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......
..
.... 236 x
Xenon he a dlights . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 59, 253
©
2013 AUDI AG
AUDI AG works
continuously
to
develop
and further improve
all models.
You will
appreciate that we must therefore reserve the
right to
alter any part of the vehicle and its equipment or technical specifications at any
time.
No
legal commitment can
therefore
be implied by the information, illustrations or descriptions in this
Manual.
No
part of this publication may be reprinted, reproduced or translated
without
the w r itten
permission
of
AUDI AG. All rights
und er
the laws of
copyr i ght are expressly
reserved by
AUDI AG.
Subject to al t eration and amend-
ment
.
Printed
in Germany.
Date of publi cat ion : 08 .
08 .
2013
®
For the sake of the environment
This paper
was
bleached
without
use
of
chlorine.
Owner's Manual
Audi A3
I
S3
Audi A3 Sportback
I
A3 Sportback g-tron
I
S3 Sportback
Audi A3 Saloon
I
S3 Saloon
Englisch 10.2013
142.561.SV0.20
111 111111111
1425618V020 www.audi.com
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement